Home

Sitka Evergreen Training Manual

1. sssssssssssssssseseseesee nennen nene eene ne ese se sessi esse sa esse sese sess nas 234 TENA SISSE gt NU EL m NETTEN RT ERES 234 21 2 Advanced SEAICID TEE 235 Zl AKO IOS sees eccec gates ence acme mmm 238 21 4 Search Methodology ccccccccceccececcecceceeceececsececceseseeceececsesecceseenecceceeseecacaeseeceeceseesees 240 caselle REO DS DICT TET 241 22 INN PCC OUIAL nue rdetendinceatueendetsdvinaetiuiwsauheduiesen E Dung axbnbrbxR nM QM cac E IU taetndeardan 250 22 1 SOOO Nlo VOU PAC COUN ssaineiusconcussescinenesiacsnucnsovcaausientaaneeetununrrnianatiercaagusietiaesesvantoreunn 250 22 2 Resetting Your Password cccccccceceececeececeececeeaeceeesecuececeeceseeaeseeaeseceeeeseeaeseeenseseeseseees 251 eA CO O S COD a a E T E E nie cnaannubninatatens 252 E PA AE E e EA EE ORDRE PEE 257 23 Integrated Electronic Resources geacceszetwacnaetcnanussctucuendecsaniosmutencaseieacexsuetansercaxsdseceutenetecteaosseeetuaiesde 260 23 1 Check out e resources sssssssssssssesssssese nennen ne ne nene ne eese se ie esses ie isse re assise snas 260 29 2 Place hold On ee SO NS a gee caterer egeta tuam linc an ui iass datu qadsa i ii Raada 261 23 3 Checked out and on hold e resources in My Account eeseeseseeeeeeene 262 eA NOD ates CN EET EET E TRE 264 24 1 Searching the Mobile PAC ssssssssssessesseseneenenne nemen nennen nennen nennen serena 264 2
2. ui Total Checked 24 66 Credit Available 0 00 payment Received Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply Payment ee eel Actions for Selected Transactions Balance Owed Bill Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type Title Payment Pending A 600 120006p000 3 41 2300 1700 grocery 00 3 00 14060658 3 11 11 9 4 3 10 11 1 5 00 2 00 circulation Ski key 0 00 1 00 12060657 3 10 11 1 1 00 0 00 circulation Ski key 0 00 5 00 12060616 3 2 11 1 5 00 0 00 circulation Dora s big birthday a 0 00 3 00 12060566 2 22 11 3 4 00 1 00 grocery 0 00 6 66 12060540 2 17 111 241 circulation aisi eA Ns 0 00 List Actions 7 Check All Uncheck All Check All Refunds Receipt Options 7 Voided this session 0 00 Change Owed Billed Paid Pending 0 00 0 00 Total 24 66 62 16 37 50 Change Due Upon Payment 0 00 _ Checked 34 66 6216 37 50 Convert Change to Patron Credit Select the payment type from the drop down menu Pay Bill Payment Type Payment Received C eque Credit Card n Patron Credit d Items are still Chec Work Annotate Paymen Re id Type grocery Pay Bill Payment Type F Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply aymenti Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 81 5 Change if any is displayed at the bottom of the screen as Change Due Upon Payment It can be converted to patron credit by selecting the Convert t
3. month w m x OI1 e l times a year Increments continuously without volume number 2 0 8 1 a No u 11 v c 1 year month w m x 01 y omO08 e l times a year Increments continuously with volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 1 v c 1 year j month w m x 01 y om08 e l times a year Restart without volume number 2 0 8 1 a No u 11 v c 1 year month w m x 01 y omO08 e I times a year Restart with volume number 2 0 8 1 a vol b no u I v r 1 year month w m x O1 y om08 e 10 times a year with volume number Increments continuously and no issues in August and September 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 0 v c 1 year month w m x 01 y om08 y om09 e 10 times a year without volume number Increments continuously no issues in August and September 2 0 8 1 a no u 10 v c 1 year month w m x 01 y om08 y om09 e 10 times a year Restart year used as volume number no issues in January and August 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u I0 v r w m x 01 y om01 y omO08 e 9 times a year Restart and year used as volume number D o 228 pt T a Vol T b No u 9 y mon r QW m QX O1 y
4. Cont GPub j t t o Inde j Desc a m Fest o Dest s Datel 208 Date znR o136enam 22200361 a 4500 jo1 9780756637750 SS oos 20080908083440 0 sss jo08 04080952008 nyua j amp 0010 emg ooo a 9780756637750 SS 4 taSE802 S apaja esed oou apai eseian oOo DBE Em Ar 33 BEE ta New York b DK Publishing c c2008 020 050 082 082 092 100 245 246 260 3 Depending on your preference you can select Stack subfields to change the way subfields are displayed Stack subfields Flat Text Editor Fast Item Add 4 Now the subfields are in separate rows oof ta 99042665 020 ta 0316781010 tc 24 00 035 ta 93404 ta DLC ems 00000 Peas NN tb F 2000 SPP 0 2 21 100 1 a Shreve Anita 245 1 ta Fortune s rocks MR ro AN 250 ta1st ed 260 ta Boston fb Little Brown tc 2000 Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 215 To add or remove rows or replace tags click the Help button to find the keyboard shortcuts Move the cursor to appropriate positon then use the keyboard shortcut JavaScript Applicati JavaScript Application Add Row CTRL Enter Insert Row CTRL Shift Enter Copy Current Row Above CTRL Up Copy Current Row Below CTRL Down Add Subfield CTRL D CTRL I on Mac O X Remove Row
5. OR Retrieve the staff account first then select Other User Permission Editor Refresh Check Out Items Out Holds Bills Edit Messages pio 0 00 Display Alert and Messages Motes Check Out Statistical Categories 7 Surveys Iv Group Barcode Due Date Test Password Alert Invalid Date of Birth Barcode User Permission Editor s Exil v Toggle Summary o Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 496 3 The User Permission Editor will load this may take a few seconds Greyed out permissions cannot be edited because they are either a already granted to the account or b not available to any staff account including LSAs User Hame First Mame o sitkacirccat cirecat Powell Faver Public Library BPEDE Permission ABORT REMOTE TRANSIT Barcode bidde Hame ABORT TRANSIT ADMIN ACO FUND ADMIN CIRC MATRIX MATCHPOINT ADMIN CIRC MOD ADMIN CURRENCY TYPE ADMIN FUND ADMIN FUNDING SOURCE ADMIN GROUP PENALTY THRESHOLD ADMIN HOLD MATRIX MATCHPOINT ADMIN MARC CODE ADMIN PROVIDER ADMIN STANDING PENALTY ADMIN SURVEY ADMIN TRIGGER CLEANUP ADMIN TRIGGER EVENT DEF _ ADMIN TRIGGER HACE sitkacirccat Last Mame sitka Working Location Apphed Depth l Library d Library F Library Grantable w re IY O I O List of permission names For help correlating permissions to specific Evergreen functions please contact Sitka support If checked the permissi
6. 4 Group Org Unit Penalty Threshold Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 10 00 C Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT 10 00 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOUT COUNT 50 00 lt D gt Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 430 3 The new penalty pop up appears Complete all fields and click Save Group Puhiic Library Patrons z Org Unit BSP Penalty PATRON EXCEEDS OVI Threshold 20H Cancel um Q Group the profile group to which the rule applies Selecting Public Library Patrons includes all profiles below it in the user hierarchy PL BC OneCard PL ILL etc Org Unit multi branch libraries may create rules for individual branches or the entire library system Penalty select PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOUT COUNT PATRON EXCEEDS LOST COUNT PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT or PATRON EXCEEDS FINES other options are not used by Sitka 4 After clicking Save the new threshold appears with the Sitka defaults Evergreen always gives precedence to local settings in this example BSP Penalty Threshold Mew Penalty Threshold Delete Selected Context Org Unit BSP Group Org Unit Penalty Threshold Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 10 00 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE 10 00 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOU 50 00 Public Library Patrons BSF PATRON EXCEEDS OV
7. 7 SITKA templates 7 Acquisitions SITKA LJ Bibliographic Records SITKA n LJ Bills Payments SITKA LJ Bookings SITKA LJ Circulation SITKA et 7 Custom Templates SITKA LI Holds SITKA ML Inventory SITKA O LLB Reports SITKA Library Configuration SITKA LI Misc SITKA H patrons SITKA LJ Typical Week Stats SITKA O joe J P011898 _ SUSAN admin From Acquisitions to Typical Week Stats are the subfolders containing various templates Templates using the same source table are usually grouped together under one subfolder These templates are created based on the anticipation that most libraries may need such reports The Support Team tends to make these templates generic which means they contain more information Individual libraries may have slightly different requirements You can remove the Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 302 unwanted information when cloning the templates or choose appropriate values for some filters to disable them These templates are usually referred to as Sitka standard templates The following is a guideline of the templates for various kinds of reports Please note that the Support Team regularly maintains the templates The list below may not be the latest Overdue reports Find overdue reports in Circulation folder There are templates capturing checkouts with due date within a selected time frame for all patrons or those without email address phone l
8. Importing Copy Templates 1 Load Copy Editor Click on Import Copy Editor Identification Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 168 2 Navigate to where the template file is located select it and click Open Import Templates File Lokin O P m Wh 2008 01 30 Gap Analysis Workshop Agenda Wh Spine label printing in Evergreen drafE3 Ba 2008_training schedule rs templates My Recent 072306 T test Documents Wt barcode samples Wt Training checklist Wh barcodes H Training Data thoughts iM checklist For onsite training and go live TES cocopatrons WW Evergreen 1 2 training notes October 2007 Wh Fort Nelson cheat sheets Wt Fort Nelson shortcuts Far monitors Wh gap analysis workshop M gnu barcades HH Meeting with Jahn Egan Htl outline For PG A Screenshots of Evergreen 4 File name templates v Mu Network Files of type All Files Ww hy Documents hy Computer 3 Choose Yes on the prompt to import the file a Final warning Final warning Save all of these imported templates permanently to this account Options Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 169 4 If you choose No you will see the following prompt The templates are not loaded but may show up on the template dropdwn list Re load the Copy Editor They will disappear JavaScript Application I es i Note These imported templates will get saved along with any new template you try to create but if that does
9. Pickup location Squamish Public Library w Notify when hold is ready for pickup Yes by Email Email Address testing testplace org Yes by Phone Phone Number 555 555 5555 I Yes by Text Messaging Mobile carrier Telus Mobility Canada amp USA 250111111 Mobile number Chapter 21 Search the catalogue Note carrier charges may apply Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashes 249 Chapter 22 My Account You can access information about your account from any page in the Sitka catalogue by selecting the My Account link at the top right of the page Your account information includes contact information items you have checked out or on hold fines account preferences note left by the library if any and lists a place for you to keep reading lists or other lists of items Each of the sections in the My Account area is described in this chapter Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Account Summary f Fines 15 00 Items Currently Checked out 3 View All Items Currently on Hold 2 View All Items ready for pickup 0 View All Fines Payments Other Fees Transaction Start Time Last Payment Time Initial Amount Owed Total Amount Paid Balance Owed Billing Type 05 07 2015 15 00 0 00 15 00 Misc 22 1 Logging into Your Account 1 Click on the My Account link on any search page 2 Enter your username or your li
10. Database Source Browser Sources Source Name Circulation Ease Transaction Billing Totals Check In Librar Check n Staff Circ Duration Rule Circulating tem Age Hold Protection E Call Number Volume 3 Carculating Library or Source Specifier Circulation Field ame Check In Date Tiree Check In Library Check In Stai Check Qut Date Time Circ Duration Rule Circ ID Circulating Item Circulsting Library a TH Parts eT Eint 0000000000000 To filter on the location of the circulation select Circulation Circulating library Raw Data and click Data Type E Field Tramsleeri Qutput Type E timesta ERs erg unit lin temiesta link id lint png unit imb 0 0 07 Non Ag greg ate 5 Select Circulating Library and click on Change Operator and select Equals Note that this is a template so the value for Equals will be filled out when you run the report Template Configuration Name Circulations by Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Filter Field Check Out Babe Time Circulating Library Change Transform Change Operator Change value Remove value Remove Selected Fields Change Field Hint Equals Mal hing substring Contains Matching substring ignore case Greater than Greater than or equal ta Less than Less than or equal to In list are Operator
11. Hide Fields me a If you are creating place holders for on order items see What is the best way to enter on order records in the Sitka Evergreen Policy and Best Practices Manual 5 Make all necessary edits to copy record in the Copy Editor section of the screen by moving through fields and clicking Apply on every edit For information on the individual fields in the Copy Editor see Section 15 1 Copy Editor Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 155 Co op support recommends creating and using copy templates with the Copy Editor For information on using and creating copy templates see the section called Creating Copy Templates There is a field in the Copy Item Record called Floating Leave this field at its default blank unless cataloguing special items using this field If interested in using Floating to manage a rotating or block collection contact Co op support 6 Click Create Volumes Items 7 You may need to click Refresh to view new items and depending on how you retrieved the volume copy editor you may be in the OPAC view Holdings Maintenance Prince Rupert Library E Show Volumes Show Items Refesh E sh jJ Show Libraries With Items Location Barcode Vobiues rris res Call Number Circulation Library a SITKA Sitka ABNCLF North Coast Library gt BPR Prince Rupert Library 1 lt 2 gt By default a new item has a status
12. Apply Standing Penalty Message Actions for these Penalties Messages Applied On Label Library h Remove Penalty Message 2 9 13 10 4 34 PM Patron meets or exceeds max overd BHH Madify a rU Archive Penalty Message Besides the alert screen alerts can be viewed by going to the dropdown menu Other gt Display Alerts and Messages Refresh H Display Alert and Megs Notes R Triggered Events Subai Specific Due Date 25 03 Statistical Categories e Date Title Booking 5 Surveys Group Member Details Test Password User Permission Editor Toggle summary Delete Patron Account Exit Chapter 6 Patron Records 48 6 5 2 Notes If there is a note in a patron s record a See Notes message appears underneath the patron s name when the record is retrieved Notes are strictly communicative and in the Evergreen Staff Client are only visible from within the Notes field Notes can be made visible to the patron via their account on the OPAC SITKA test middle tt Juvenile Alert See Notes Has Bills Has Qverdues To insert remove a note retrieve patron account and click Other Notes Display Alert and Messages Notes LEGS Events Statistical Categories Booking j Surveys Acquisition Requests Group Member Details Test Password User Permission Editor Toggle Summary Delete Patron Account Exit 2 Click Add New Note 3 Enter note information and click Add Note In th
13. Back Next Filt Back Next Filter V Label Bs sai Grouping Holding Lib Captions and Patterns Batch Item Receive Clone Subscription Issuances View Edit Notes Refresh Grid New Distribution Delete Selected Unit Label Suffix Unit Label Prefix Receive Unit Summary i Method Met Record Entry Template Cdn O1 iing 1 MDB stream s enum Clone Subscription Issuances View Edit Notes New Distribution Receive Unit Record Entry Template enum 10 Select the target stream by checking the box 11 Click on Routing List For Selected Stream Magazine ML add to sre New Stream Routing List For Selected Stream Showing streams attached to the distribution Can Living Bren Del Win Centennial Library Back Next Filter JID i i 1 901 Routing Label Route 1 12 Choose the radio button beside barcode or deparment e Barcode enter the user barcode Department free form text field Chapter 43 Routing Magazine_ML add_to_sre Batch ltem Receive Refresh Grid Delete Selected Unit Label Suffix Create Many Streams Refresh Grid Delete Selected 3 2 13 Click on Add Manage Routing List Reader barcode 23124001043317 Department Note Save Changes 14 Repeat these steps for any additional Barcodes or Deparments 15 You can re arrange users in the list by dragging and dropping each numbered row 16 When you ve got
14. Basic Search Advanced Search Browse Sort by Relevance i Search Results Results 1 10 of about 688 pageiof69 12345678 Next gt i 1 End of Harry Potter Topic i d l Langford David Place Hold Potter Harry Fictitious 291 o Book Er Add to my list character ISBN 9780878078788 0000 Mv Wizards 270 Phys Desc p cem x Reviews amp More Magic 223 um Shelving Call Enay location number Status Hogwarts School of 181 Seche P ai Witchcraft and Wizardry K le organization 0 of 1 copy available at Sitka Schools 181 2 Ha Place Hold Sibley Sibley Brian Ef Add to my list Agd t my ISI co NM NEN ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ I I S A LLLLLI LLLLLL AALLQ LLL lll 0 CHE IRE England 179 o Book x Revi amp M Publisher New York NY Collins Design c2010 eS a English speaking countries 5 ISBN 9780061997815 MEME SS S EE MM A Angleterre 3 Phys Desc 1 v unpaged col ill 29 cm England Fiction 1 oe Shelving Call 3 B iind location number Status Pays anglophones 1 j Salt Spring Island Children s 794 4372 Checked Public Library library 3 out SIB Fantasy fiction 63 0 of 1 copy available at Sitka 3 Wel m j l Electronic books 58 ES reading Harry Potter Suman Gupta ii cid Gua suman ERES 39 C Book Ef Add to my iist Feature films 32 Publisher Basingstoke Eng Palgrove Mcmillan c2003 000 ISBN 1403912645 bd x Reviews amp More Video reco
15. Chapter 55 Staff Accounts Staff accounts are special patron accounts on Evergreen which have been granted more permissions to allow the owners to log into the Staff Client Besides extra permissions each staff account has its own working location The owner can log into the Staff Client at assigned working locations only There are three ways staff accounts can be set up and used in the system Staff and Patron Accounts Accounts are created for staff members and given the appropriate Library Staff permission group and working location Staff use the account for borrowing as well as to login into the staff client and perform their work Staff Specific Accounts Accounts are created for staff members and given the appropriate Library Staff permission group and working location These accounts often have something like LOGIN or STAFF as part of the name and may use a barcode such as SITKASTAFF rather than an actual barcode Staff use the accounts only for logging into the staff client for work Staff have a separate patron account for borrowing Generic Accounts Accounts are created for functions such as circulation rather than for specific staff members and given the appropriate Library Staff permission group and working location These accounts barcodes and names are often related to their function For example an account for circulation may use circulation as the barcode and be named Dummy Circulation These accounts are shared by the
16. Edition Horses Edwards Elwyn Hartley 1993 6361 VPL 100879689 100879689 Record Owner View Bib Edit Bib Holdings X Remove from consideration MARC View Print Page LDR 01206nam a2200385 4500 001 cn 92095011 005 20020613053500 0 008 93070351993 oncab 00100 eng c 015 ta C92 95011 6 020 1a 0773726128 ic 22 95 020 ta 1564581772 035 ia WaOLN 8762899 040 ia CaOTU ib eng ic CaOTU id CaOONL ia SF303 ib E48 1993 1 ia SF303 Lead Record Record Summary View MARC Title Author Edition Pub Date Bib Call TCN Database ID Record Owner Horses Edwards Elwyn Hartley AUTOGENERATED 89779 107600517 View Bib Edit Bib Holdings XX Remove from consideration MARC View Print Page LDR 00620cam a2200205Ka 4500 001 107600517 003 SITKA 005 20120628194201 0 008 070101s engd 100 ta Edwards Elwyn Hartley 245 ta Horses 260 tb Stoddart ic 1993 901 ia AUTOGENERATED 89779 ib ic 107600517 it biblio The brief record has been subsumed by the full record and all of the volumes copies and holds associated with the brief record are now attached to the full record Note some of the options in the record merge screen You can remove a record from consideration here view or edit the bibliographic record and view attached holdings If the non lead record has tags for local information such as 590 and 690 you need to add them to the lead record before merging Cha
17. Hold Policies Item Attribute Editor Library Settings Editor Non cataloged Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Negative Balances Reports Search Filter Groups Standing Penalties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Transit List Work Log Chapter 36 Copy Template 330 2 Click on New Copy Template Copy Templates New Copy Template Delete Selected Show templates available at or above ZSP B ack Next Filter N T OPAC Mint ame Owning Lib Circulate Holdable Visible Fine Level Location Circ Modifier Floating Deposit Reference Condition Age Protect False False False True True v 1 Magazines 702 lt Message True 2 Alert ZSP Stacks magazine False gt Chapter 36 Copy Template 331 3 Enter parameters for your new copy template Chapter 36 Copy Template 332 4 Click Save 36 2 Edit a Copy Template You can make changes to an existing copy template Changes that you make to a copy template will apply to any items that you receive after you edited the template l Select Admin Local Administration Copy Template Editor arin Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Address Alerts Local Administration Age Overdue Circs to Lost Server Administration Barcode Completion Workstation Administration Cash Reports Toggle Activity Meters Circulation Limit
18. Number of seconds of inactivity Duration LSA before the patron is logged out of the selfcheck interface Pop up alert for errors If true checkout renewal errors will True False LSA cause a pop up window in addition to the on screen message Require patron If true patrons will be required to True False LSA password enter their password in addition to their username barcode to log into the selfcheck interface mE Selfcheck override List of checkout renewal events Text LSA events list that the selfcheck interface should automatically override instead instead of alerting and stopping the transaction Workstation Required All selfcheck stations must use a True False LSA workstation Table 48 14 Other Default display Default display grouping for serials Text Sitka grouping for serials distributions presented in the OPAC distributions presented This can be enum or chron in the OPAC Previous issuance copy When a serial issuance is received location copies units of the previous issuance will be automatically moved into the configured shelving location Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 461 Setting Data type Edited by Notes Notes 0 otes Maximum redirect Admin setting Number Sitka lookups Maximum wait time in Admin setting Duration Sitka seconds for a URL to lookup Number of URLs to test Admin setting di in parallel Number of seconds to Admin setting uM
19. Replace Barcode Record Buckets Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Jafrcode Manage Authorities 2 Select New Bucket 1 Record Buckets Record Query Pending Records Bucket View Choose a bucket X Remove Selected from Bucket Chapter 20 Record Buckets 228 2 Chapter 20 Record Buckets Name the bucket and click OK The page at http training sitka bclibrary ca says IE 2 What would you like to name the bucket Horse Books Click OK on the resulting confirmation dialogue The page at http training sitka bclibrary ca says e The Bucket View has changed to display your new bucket as the active bucket Note the bucket is numbered and creating owner identified 1 Record Buckets Record Query Pending Records Bucket View HomeBooks Contains 0 bucket items Bucket 854 Horse Books Owner test bontest BPR a Remove Selected from Bucket aM Add Selected to Pending Records hs Note that all buckets created by this login are available in the drop down menu 1 Record Buckets Choose a bucket Retrieve shared bucket Cook Books Dog Books Horse Books The last option under Bucket Actions 1s Locate Z39 50 Matches This feature allows you to search for replacement records via Z39 50 for all records in a bucket If you are interested in this feature please contact Co op support 229 7 You can also create a bucket from within a record Search for retrie
20. Restart with volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 52 v r 1 year j month k day w w x 01 26 Times a year and variations e 26 times a year Increments continuously without volume 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year month k day w e x 01 e 26 times a year Increments continuously with volume 2 0 Org d s a VOL DS noc Ty 204 Cn wee x COT e 26 times a year Restart with volume 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 26 v r 1 year j month kK day w w x 01 y e 26 times a year Restart year used as volume 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 26 v r w e x 01 e 24 times a year Restart year used as volume Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 379 2 0 8 Tas Vol bno u 24 v Fw e x 0r MONTHLY and variations e Names of months without volume 2 0 8 1 1 year j month w m Increments continuously without volume number 2 0 8 1 a No 1 year j month w m x 01 Increments continuously with volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 12 v c 1 year month w m x 01 Restart without volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u I2 v r w m x 01 Restart with volume number 2 7 0 8 1 a vol b no u I2 v r 1 year
21. Standalone Check Out Step 1 Check today s date above Step 2 Enterthe patron s barcode 29090000123456 Check barcode F Step 3 Enter the item due date 2010 01 10 Step 4 Enter the item barcode or choose one of these Today 3 days Today 7 days or choose a non barcli S ERBEN ELE Today 30 days 6 Scan the items bacode in Enter the item barcode box It will appear on the right side of the screen Step 4 Enter the item barcode 7 For non catalogued items you may also click choose a non barcode option dropdown list to select a non catalogued category Step 4 Enter the item barcode or choo BECI Interlibrary loan SITKA Paperback Book Step 5 Repeat Step 6 Finish Enter the number of items you want to check out then click OK on the prompt window JavaScript Application X o Enter the number of items 3 8 Scan all the items changing the due date if necessary Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 134 9 If you want to print a receipt make sure the Print receipt checkbox is selected Step 6 Finish Print receipt Receipts will only print if you have previously set a default offline printer in the staff client See Default Offline Printer for innstructions on setting the default offline printer 10 Click Save these transactions Evergreen Offline 2008 12 27 17 43 56 C L heck In Register Patron Check today s
22. 1 Reports Li Templates Li Reports LJ output Shared Folders J Templates O Reports Output 26 1 Creating Folders Whether you are creating a report from scratch or working from a shared template you must first create at least one folder The steps for creating folders are similar for each reporting function It is easier to create folders for templates reports and output all at once at the beginning though it is possible to do it before each step This example demonstrates creating a folder for a template Chapter 26 Folders 271 1 Click on Templates in the My Folders section 1 Reports Folders D Template ry ts eparts LJ Output Shared Folders I Templates Reports Output 2 Name the folder Select Share or Do not share from the dropdown menu reate a new sub folder Folder type Template Folder Name Circulation Share this folder 3 Ifyou want to share your folder select who you want to share this folder with from the dropdown menu Folder Mame Share this folder Share with Sitka Prince Rupert Libra 4 Click Create Sub Folder and then OK on the confirmation prompt reate a new sub folder Folder Te Share this folder Share iv North Coast Library Federation v Chapter 26 Folders 272 5 Next create a folder for the report definition to be saved to Click on Reports ly Folders Templates
23. 2009 10 09 12 21 Completed oc ooco muIl Uploaded Transactions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 Date Uploaded Workstation 2009 12 02 12 06 BSE tina 5 The processing may take a while depending on how many transactions you have done Click the Refresh button to check the status The processing is complete when the Processing column shows Completed Offline Sessions Description Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing Date Completed Internet Down 2009 12 02 2009 12 02 11 54 Completed 2009 12 02 12 44 2009 12 01 10 59 Completed 2009 12 01 11 00 2009 12 01 10 59 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 2009 10 09 13 17 No 2009 10 09 12 28 Completed 2009 10 09 12 30 2009 10 09 12 21 Completed 2009 10 09 12 31 k O O O mL yooo rn Exceptions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 Export List Print Export Retrieve Item Retrieve Patron Workstation Timestamp Type Event Name Item Barcode Patron Barcode BSE tina 2009 12 02 12 05 checkout OPEN_CIRCULATION_EXISTS 34418001202104 1313 The number in the Transactions Processed column is equal to the number of items checked out or checked in For example if there are 5 transactions processed this could be 5 items checked out or 3 items checked in and 2 items checked out or 5 items checked in Exceptions Exceptions are problems that were encountered during processing For example a mis scanned patron barcode an open circulation or an item that
24. CTRL Del Remove Subfield SHIFT Del Create Replace 006 CTRL F6 Create Replace 007 CTRL F Create Replace 008 CTRL F8 Ctrl F6 and CTRL F7 may erase the content in exisiting 006 or 007 tag It is strongly recommended you add these tags on the Flat Text Editor 6 To work with the data in a tag simply click or Tab into required field ta Fortune s rocks i tc by Anita Shreve 7 To call up the diacritic palette you can use keyboard shortcut CTRL S 8 To edit indicators click or Tab into required field and right click to view correct indicators and enter appropriate data 9 Record 2 of 302 Next p Qe 7 Stack subfields Flat Text Editor Fastltem Add Validate Call Number Item Barcode To access the Flat Text Editor select the checkbox in front of it To switch back to the form editor de select it On Flat Text Editor each line stands for a tag The tags indicators and their values are at fixed positions If there is no value at a position you will see as a spacing taker For positionally defined tags such as 007 Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 216 or 008 you will see in the field content area too You need to replace it with the content you want to put in when necessary 19 2 MARC Record Leader and MARC fixed field 008 Parts of the leader and the 008 can be edited in the MARC Editor via the fixed field editor box displayed above the MARC reco
25. Call Number Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited R 270 2013 Jan Canadian Hous MPL 33 2012 12 31 2012 12 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH JAN 8841940 2013 Jan 2013 12 16 271 2013 Feb Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 01 31 2013 01 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH FEB 2 8841941 2013 Feb 2013 12 16 272 2013 Mar Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 02 28 2013 02 28 2013 12 16 MAG CHH MAR 8841942 2013 Mar 2013 12 16 273 2013 Apr Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 03 31 2013 03 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH APRI 8841943 2013 Apr 2013 12 16 274 2013 May Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 04 30 2013 04 30 2013 12 16 MAG CHH JAN 8841944 2013 May 2013 12 16 275 2013Jun Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 05 31 2013 05 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH JUNE 8841945 2013Jun 2013 12 16 276 2013 Jul Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 06 30 2013 06 30 2013 12 16 MAG CHH JULY 8841946 2013 Jul 2013 12 16 277 2013 Aug Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 07 31 2013 07 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH AUG 8841947 2013 Aug 2013 12 16 278 2013 Sep Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 08 31 2013 08 31 2013 12 16 MAG CHH SEPT 8841948 2013 Sep 2013 12 16 279 2013 Oct Canadian Hous MPL 33 2013 09 30 2013 09 30 2013 12 16 MAG CHH OCT 8841949 2013 Oct 2013 12 16 2600 0o0 5Uu0N 2 sq Showing Bound Items in Current Working Unit Receive Move Selected Current Working Unit Auto per Item Set Current Unit Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Stream ID Date Published Date Received Notes Item Dist
26. It is best practice and Sitka policy to search Evergreen Z39 50 sources or in some libraries a vendor file of MARC records before using a MARC record template for original cataloguing You can create new MARC records Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 210 in Evergreen by using MARC templates that exist in Evergreen Original cataloguing should be done in Evergreen only if there is no record available in any of these previous sources For information about working with MARC records see Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records To access MARC templates select Cataloguing Create New Marc Record Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve title by IEN Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Display Item BE FS Manage Copy Buckets Manage Record Buckets Create New MARC Record ord from mport MARC Batch Import Export MARC Batch Edit Replace Barcode Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Manage Authorities 2 The MARC Template screen opens Click into drop down menu field to see available templates Note you can select a workstation default here Templates are available for book music audio video and serial and are in both the AACR2 and RDA standards File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging 1MARC Template sitka audio Load sitka audio sitka audio rda sitka book sitka book rda sitka muzic sitka music
27. LSA default in the patron patron billing interface and focus on billing interface the Uncheck All button instead of the Payment Received field Unified Volume Item If True combines the Volume Copy True False LSA Creator Editor Creator and Item Attribute Editor in some instances Work Log maximum _ Maximum entries for Most Recent Number LSA actions logged Staff Actions section of the Work Log interface Work Log maximum Maximum entries for Most Number LSA patrons logged Recently Affected Patrons section of the Work Log interface Table 48 6 Global Setting Data type Edited by Notes Notes 0 otes Allow multiple If enabled and Lock Usernames True False Sitka Default TRUE username changes is not set patrons will be allowed to change their username when it does not look like a barcode Otherwise username changing in the OPAC will only be allowed when the patron s username looks like a barcode Global Global default locale locale o Hex Sika Default Canada Canada a Usernames EN enabled username changing via FALSE the OPAC will be disabled Password format Defines acceptable format for OPAC Regular Default requires that account passwords expression passwords be at least 7 characters in length contain at least one letter a z A Z and contain at least one number Patron barcode format Defines acceptable format for patron Regular Sitka barcodes expression C
28. Lb Fie 5 D wir Shared Folders Templates Reports J Output 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to create a Reports folder also called Circulation 7 Finally you need to create a folder for the report s output to be saved in Click on Output Folders Templates Reports Shared Folders J Templates Reports J Output 8 Repeat steps 2 5 to create an Output folder named Circulation Using a parallel naming scheme for folders in Templates Reports and Output helps keep your reports organized and easier to find The folders you have just created will now be visible by clicking the arrows in My Folders Bracketed after the folder name is the name of with whom the folder is shared For example Circulation BNCLF is shared with the North Coast Library Federation If it is not a shared folder there will be nothing after the folder name You may create as many folders and sub folders as you like Folders T L Templates LJ circulation BNCLE Reports 7L Circulation BNCLF output 7L Circulation BNCLFI Chapter 26 Folders 273 26 2 Managing Folders Once a folder has been created you can change the name delete it create a new subfolder or change the sharing settings This example demonstrates changing a folder name the other choices follow similar steps 1 Click on the folder that you wish to rename Folders Templates Circulation AN CLE Reports i O Output 2 Click Ma
29. Record with TCN plsbman 107261745 marked for overlay Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 198 2 The record opens in the MARC Editor From here you can edit fixed and bibliographic fields Note that you may also select Fast Item Add and input call number and barcode data from this screen Once your edits are complete click Overlay Record Below screen shows the MARC record in Flat Text Editor File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking 1239 50 2 Bib Record 97806700210480670021040 3MARC Editor E Options Stack subfields I Flat Text Editor I FastItem Add Validate Overlay Record Help Cal Number Item Barcode D02915cam a2z00349 a 4500 16573304 20110901154749 0 101209820114 nyub NV 333333 3 OOO 5 eng Y SY a7 bcbc corignew Sdl eecip fZ gy gencatld OV aacquire bZ shelf copies xpolicy default brg03 2010 12 09 irgO3 2010 12 09 to CIP Dewey completed arg06 2011 07 20 1 copy rec d to CIP ver frg06 2011 07 20 Z CipVer to CALM txg22 2011 09 01 copy 2 added 010 020 020 035 040 043 050 062 100 245 260 300 520 a 2010051207 a978067002 1048 a067002 1040 a lOCoLC ocn679930983 13 an us ma an us OO aPR9619 3 B7153 bC36 2011 003 a823 914 222 1 aBrooks Geraldine 10 aCaleb s crossing cGeraldine Brooks SaNew York bViking c2011 aix 306 p bmap c24 cm X i aOnce again the author takes a remarkable
30. Serial Control View The Serial Control view enables you to manage serials in a single tabbed interface Serial Control view consists of five tabs 1 Items Used to receive issues Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Canadian Living ition TCN BIN 30382305 Created By admin Author Database ID 30382305 Last Edited By admin Bib Call Record Owner Last Edited On 2008 11 16 1 45 PM Record 1 of 907 Start Previous N E Search Results Actions for this Record nits Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber PA New Springfield Branch v Mode Receive Adv Receive Bind Show All Refresh Actions for Selected Rows Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Holder Stream ID Date Published Date Expected Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub Call Number Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited m Showing Recently Received L 0 Alerts Receive Move Selected Current Working Unit Auto per Item Set Current Unit Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Holder Stream ID Date Published Date Expected Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub Call Number Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited R 2 Units Not currently used 3 Distributions Can be used to create and manage distributions or streams We recommend that you access this information under the Subscriptions tab 4 Subscriptions Used to create and manage subscriptions Serial Control Items Units Distributi scien New Spri
31. Spine Labels Spine Labels Single Label Roll Spine Labels Label Sheet Spine Labels Single Label Roll 1 Open the Item Status interface Circulation Show Item Status By Barcode 2 Scan the barcode s of all the items you would like to print spine labels for Ensure the Trim List 20 rows box is not checked or only 20 items will listed 3 Highlight all the line items File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking i C Help 1 Item Status x Upload From File Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Peter Pan Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 172 4 Click Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and choose Print Spine Label File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking Admin Help 1 Iter Status x Title Copy to Clipboard The complete Canad Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Holds on Bib 33987000238799 JFCD BAR Juvenile Fiction on CD In process Peter Pan Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Edit Items Volumes Per Bib Iransfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Add Items Edit Volumes Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library Delete Items Delete Volumes Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing Print Spine Label Repl
32. There is some view only information that is useful under Server Administration in particular the list of Copy Statuses 49 1 Organizational Units Anyone with access to the staff client may view these settings but a Local System Administrator login is required to make changes Go to Admin Server Administration Organizational Units Call Number Prefixes saccade Call Number Suffixes Operator Change New Circulation Duration Rules Download Offline Patron List Circulation Limit Groups Offline Transaction Managen Circulation Matchpoint Weights Local Administration Circulation Max Fine Rules Server Administration Circulation Modifiers Workstation Administration Circulation Recurring Fine Rules JOE AGI METRE kin RES User Permission Editor Custom Org Unit Trees Fioaling Groups For developers Global Flags Hard Due Date Changes Hold Matchpoint Weights Import Match Sets MARC Coded Value Maps MARC Import Remove Fields MARC Record Attributes MARC Search Facet Class FTS Maps MARC Search Facet Classes MARC Search Facet Field FTS Maps MARC Search Facet Fields Org Unit Proximity Adjustments Organization Types Organization Unit Setting Types Organizational Units s Chapter 49 Server Administration 473 2 Find your library from the tree on the left side of the page and click it to open settings Multi branch library systems will see an entry for each branch 3 Ec Organizational Units ES SITKA Sit
33. Y gar year with enumeration captions Natural health 108420801 2 0 8 1 a v b BneMonthle v6 TsSues ye ar m Year with enumeration captions v no O the Oprah magazine 108305645 2 0 8 1 a v b Monty 12 T8s ge sz Year year r with enumeration captions v no Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 378 Tile 0 Database ID ID Pattern Code gardening s 2 0 8 1 a v b L6dssues Y dato D JrEZWL year m M J J A S O N Canada 2 0 9 1 Eu Mv b L6dssues Y Git ND JrE M Ay ar m M J J A S O N iml Gamer mas 2 0 8 D a NO si Moetdy 7 T2 sreth Y gaw m with enumeration captions no People weekly 108142236 2 0 8 a v b Weekly SQalsSsteS Y e ui year j ni Sample Sets of Serial Patterns To use one of the following codes you must copy and paste all the text inside and including the square brackets DAILY Omitted Sunday 6x a week but not Sunday 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year month k day w d x 01 y odsu WEEKLY Increments continuously without volume number 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year j month k day w w Increments continuously with volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 52 v c 1 year j onthb k day w w x 01
34. by clicking the checkbox and click Submit view repart output Iv a Limit autputta 10 Iv Pending Items No items to display Limit autputta 10 Iv Completed Items Select All Mone report complete time email folder error text excel format html format csv format October 2009 D dd jeremybuhler 296 t t f circs i Click on the report name in blue colour you will see the template name and report description field Chapter 29 Viewing Report Output 296 4 A new tab will open for the report output Select either Tabular Output or Excel Output If Bar Charts was selected during report definition the chart will also appear October 2009 circ Prince Rupert circulation stats by shelving location for October 2009 Tabular Output Excel Output ctoaber 2008 circ 1188 950 4 712 8 475 2 257 ab 2 amp I h m Wo ki Wo onc om mou Lu w E f s MESE tet D zr A Z A Lr m n oc a Lu o n0 a a i 2a m a E da a m m Oo m i a 85 rs o n0 u Hn uU om p a D i a uU n Fe bm eal I m ax Lu a qa O cH cH a a fe ten C a eS i St fe o cn cH OQ cr cH cH PE Wu e ATE i i ocd E riri i E cA u m m o m n rd o 44 o 21 ur m o i Du L T oux D i mox M CT LL eS m E X i cm uou m ox FS a i 2 Uu L u u Wo ca cH og cd cd n0 D m u 1 di c u ou i T w oo ocd Lu u uoc IT cA mo lt m te Ee e A aod I gt 4 mr oO l gt l Hos cn cn a Ww gd a m m I TG A D
35. ccccccccccccecceeceeceeee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeaeeeesseeeeaeeges 372 5 Paten Code AE AO ETT D C EO cannes LEUTE 37 2 6 Create an Issuance couussiciene opt Rebednbrdac inte ten eben ta niubebedsaiiitertebubtbenessuindRedebutages 37 2 7 Generate Predictions TTE 38 Receiving Serials ccaceccecsnascusesanidese cus Haesedeedsdeecessatencoandndecdasaeseiaedsncaceenseceaeendedhcnedaddesaedeaesdeneseeceass i Be CONE SEE a T UU 38 2 Batch Receive Serials 2 0 0 ccc ccc ccc sec eeeeeeeceeseeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeereeseeeeeseseeneeseseeaess Oe acta geste P Pn 39 1 Searching for Serials in the OPAC ssssssssssssssssesseeneneene nennen nnne nnne nnns 39 2 OI Gio he BBIS C MERE E I NETT SUO HODOlIS iussit aadatcniexRadtudii vare stam delicia dura cube d asp DI CA Rep Led redu UEM eid beteadiaraduiudsbedaneoiataadeleias 40 1 Serials Report Templates eoe eno oan ten an Span tae ee ua rr eene aaepe inae sevo aie s oe cet duas 41 Special Issues ucauescnceotipae ier tra tetunieaea e Laco may rone dne Pen cni tutU a nRs UR AM EIU BOUM SE Ond cH M e EDes sua KudtMUA EFL iue panes Z1 1 2509 Sli SS UN B oco cede deese nisse timi ae tnt deu cnc uped enses P un rcc dra es cun DU A RA UP aM DR de E 41 2 Edit a 15S UT E ssepe radtubtbx nidi tui iedcrire ni dues E ENERE EREATARA EAEE Aris SS IAE 41 0 ete NUMINI SNO Tem 42 BINdINO PrOCOSS MIT TTE ETT Z2 1s IIl S
36. fine Text Brackets are required in of fine amount fine interval and maximum fine For the text interval and maximum example to specify a new fine rule fine of 5 00 per day with a maximum Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 462 E of 50 00 use 5 00 1 Recalls Circulation A hold placed on an item with a Duration LSA duration that triggers a circulation duration longer than this recall will trigger a recall For example 14 days or 3 weeks Recalls Truncated loan When a recall is triggered this Duration LSA 10d defines the adjusted loan period for the item For example 4 days or week Use in database circ Admin setting True False Sitka policy Use in database holds Admin setting True False Sitka policy Use legacy hardcoded True False LSA up eum slips Org lorg opt out email predt out iia y e True False ui network progress_meteSwitch off on a bar indicating E LSA network in progress Acceptable formats for each setting type are listed below Quotation marks are never required when updating settings in the staff client Data type Formatting True false Select value from drop down menu Enter a numerical value decimals allowed in price settings Duration Enter a number followed by a space and any of the following units minutes hours days months 30 minutes 2 days etc Choose from a drop down list of options e g copy status copy location 48 14 Non Cat
37. gt Booking Create or Cancel Reservations This takes you to the Reservations Screen Admin Help x ITE temsout Holds gius Edit Messages Other 1 1 3 0 00 Display Alert and Messages Hotes Triggered Events Specific Due Date 16 06 Statistical Categories Title Create or Cancel Reservations Booking Pick Up Reservations Surveys Return Reservations Group Member Details Test Password User Permission Editor Toggle Summary Delete Patron Account Exit Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 386 2 4 Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservations For non catalogued items choose a Bookable Resource Type and click Next For catalogued items enter the barcode in Enter the barcode of a catalogued bookable resource box then click Next beside the box Go Back Go Forward Choose a Bookable Resource Type Ereader Laptop Projector Room Video Connector Enter the barcode of a cataloged bookable resource To reserve an item that is not yet registered as a bookable resource find it in the catalog or under Display Item and select Make Item Bookable or Book Item Now there Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer This user has no existing reservations at this time 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservations For catalogued items the title and the item will display in the box For non catalogued resources the Bookable Resou
38. in or out during the inventory process You may use Sitka s standard Missing and Lost items report to generate these lists For accuracy we would suggest staff not edit items without the physical copy at hand during inventory period Eding an item will update Last Edited Date field Once inventory starts any items found in inapporiate location should be checked in before they are put back to the right location Chapter 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure 414 Part IX Administration Table of Contents Ao OCA AO SIRO MONU ioo cotton titanate yesitinkes E tetninn sac DIE PREVEDE 417 do Pa III UT TUM mE 417 em ANLE IB SION E EINST 419 a9 MC ACO T ONC le E 420 ac OCE alle ele IGI OE ioca ee er een ee eee MIL en meee ee DIU MD inm OR Hd eee eer en ee eee ee eee 423 On elec M IOC ANONS EO EE 425 48 6 COPY Location Order M RE T t 428 doa CO NCI late FONOL TERT TEE 428 48 8 Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting c2pcnccterecsecnaneeetensxe dienncnsecsennesseenesascdenauescdansecencerenecdesnacesedones 428 on OUD Fona TISNO S T E C mm 429 48 9 1 Penalty threshold inheritance rules cccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseeseeeseeneeaesneneeees 430 48 9 2 Creating local penalty tnreSNOlOS c 2 2ccesscesasavaacancanaazencosieaadaacaazanseiasnoanaaiseoncasaacencanaaasane 430 48 9 3 Deleting
39. item id in a type It is the id of a record in circulation record Link outputs a number that is a meaningful another table reference for the database but not of much use to a human user You will usually want to drill further down the tree in the Sources pane and select fields from the linked table However in some instances you might want to use a link field For example to count the number of patrons who borrowed items you could do a count on the user id in the circulation record Money Monetary amount Examples in Evergreen price in item record billing amount in billing record Org unit Organizational unit It is a In Evergreen libraries are organizational units In Sitka number It acts like link data context they are organized into a tree structure with type consortium library federations libraries library systems and Chapter 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators 320 branches for library systems To filter on a library make sure you choose the field having org_unit data type To display a library it is a better option to drill down to the org unit record to display the name of it Text field Usually it takes Examples call number label in call number record whatever is typed into the patron s names field Timestamp A very detailed time such as Example checkout time in circulation record last status date 2007 11 25 17 54 26 07 in item record Field Transforms
40. marked as electronic resource with a link going to the supplier s website You will see two columns for Available Formats and Status You may also see Place Hold on E book E audiobook or Check Out E book E audiobook depending on whether there is an available copy instead of the Place Hold option on the right hand side of the results list A game of thrones Place Hold on Martin George R R E audiobook T E audiobook tf Publisher Santa Ana Calif Books on Tape 2004 Z p ISBN 9780739353370 sound recording OverDrive Audio Book Electronic resource Click to access online library card required Available Formats Status OverDrive WMA Audiobook e OverDrive MP3 Audiobook 0 of 16 available 5 holds If you have already logged into your account when you do a search you may see Go to E items on Hold in a title on which you have placed a hold or Go to E items Checked Out in a title already checked out to you Clicking those links takes you to your account to view those items 23 1 Check out e resources If there is an available copy under a title you can click on Check Out E book E audiobook on the search result list or record details screen You will be prompted to log in with your library account if you have not already done so After logging in click on the E tems Checked Out tab in My Account Click the Check out button Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists
41. pre due overdue and hold notification generation You may see other triggered events in a patron or item record Some triggered events do not generate notices e g most events generated by marking long overdue items lost triggers do not generate notices Complete status means that the event has been successfully processed Usually this means the notice has been generated unless the notice generation process encunters an error which is very rare Events with status of nvalid or Error encountered problems during the process No notices were generated for such events Pending and some statuses other than complete error or invalid may last for a short period of time while the event is being processed 6 6 Merging Patron Records Patron accounts can only be merged together if both accounts have the same home library Staff may need to update the home library in one of the accounts before performing the merge Go to the patron search screen by the dropdown menu Search Search for Patrons 2 To load the two records on the same search results screen search by the terms shared by the two records such as names phone numbers etc Hit Enter or click Search Search for Patron Include inactive patrons Limit results to patrons in Ska Last Mame First Name Middle Mame Alias Email Phone ID OPAC Login Barcode Address 1 Address 2 City Postal Code Chapter 6 Patron Records 53 3 Sel
42. 06 Line Item Chapter 5 Getting Started 28 The above is the default Line Item in Checkout template The macro barcode prints the item barcodes of the books that were checked out The macro due_date prints the due date for each item that was checked out You may add a line break between them Barcode barcode lt br gt Due due_date The receipt preview will look like this l Peace comes to Castle Oak Barcode 3635300990263 Due 2006 08 25 2 The robber barons the great American capitalists 1861 1901 Barcode 33207002163014 Due 2006 09 06 3 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 4 King s Castle Barcode 31039000791757 Due 2006 09 06 5 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 The due date can only be printed in the Y Y Y Y MM DD format This is what the default Footer looks like 2 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 Footer eol hr 2 9 55HORTMAME SS TODAY TRIM lt br gt You were helped by 957 4FF_FIRS THAMES cbr BTE 2008 08 27 11 15 lt br gt You were helped by Tara Remove the You were helped by STAFF_FIRSTNAME lt br gt As many libraries use a generic circulation login on the circulation desk the You were helped by note isn t meaningful Add Renew your items online at http terrace catalogue bclibrary ca or phone the library at 250 638 8177 to inform your patrons how to renew the
43. 1 Deleting Inactive Cards cccccccccccseeceeeneeceeeeeeaeeceeeeeeseeseeseeseecseeseeseeegeeseeseeeeeneeseeeaensaes 481 91 2 JDETOUHO Paron iC COMMS sinotsanstndesaeasnopceecunauatacaninncchanensnstansdedeaatonanadanssauebehoncetanneadscenouanas 483 52 Courtesy Overdue and Hold Notices ssssseesessssssssesseseeenee nemen nennen nennen nans 486 52 1 Library Courtesy OH ES sssrinin itanna sisara karaii Iac IR UE iiaiai 486 52 2 Library Overdue Notices acniusciuncennscuietaneslotimmmsedtewunanantrenpeudaumeasadsannsaddesunasedencussadseadeasuenmuaales 486 2 Oe WIM INO e E E E A A A IIT E ET 487 52 4 Hold Slip and Holds Notifications cs isiciseescuicadusedededecnadariadededsteriniacdaselededesiudasiededeioweeindeadates 488 53 Managing Internet OPAC Stations cesistestcmcttdesnaceerimersidyiicrsnetiartdcioniasqaetidernneniinehideeddnecors 489 54 Evergreen System Requirements cccccccccecceccseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeeeeseeseeeeueseeseeeneeseeseeeseees 490 fell PC GO UNS a EE E EE EEE EEEE EE 492 55 1 Creating Staff Accounts ieiier kae rra iik ace og RE gre edv edad uorum ds ceva ka deant e etra ud 493 9o NORA AIOE AOINS S ooesuseictapri me ER MU PENNE NUN INDE T 493 55 3 Eding Stalf ACCOUNTS acces eerertonr prebere I EdR EE M Ure DAM ITI RIEF Iu DIBEUANFFIR ERN DUM EEUU IER bL UE 494 9504 Beseulhg YOUN IS ASSW ONG acrior annene sisa SETE N ETEEN rapia 494 55 5 Staff Account Permissions ou
44. 12 28 0 0 Completed 2009 10 09 12 30 09oc9CKO 2009 10 09 12 21 1 7 Completed 2009 10 09 12 31 Uploaded Transactions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 a Date Uploaded Workstation Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 140 7 Inform library staff that the session has been created and what the session name is Upload Workstation Transactions to a Session Wait until the local system administrator has created a session and told you that it s ready for your upload There may be several sessions shown on the Offline Transaction Management screen so you will need the name of the correct session from your local system administrator 1 Log into Evergreen with your regular username and password From the menu bar select Admin Offline Transaction Management 3 The Offline Transactions screen will open You should see at least one session in the Offline Sessions section You may see old sessions listed there as well 4 Inthe upper Offline Sessions section highlight the correct session then click Upload Offline Sessions TEN Description Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing Date Completed m Internet Down 2009 12 02 2009 12 02 11 54 0 0 testing 1 22 2009 12 01 10 59 1 2 Completed 2009 12 01 11 00 testing 1 2 2009 12 01 10 59 0 0 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 2nd try cko oct909 2009 10 09 13 17 0 0 No October 09 09 2009 10 09 12 28 0 0 Completed 2009 10 09 12 30 09oc9CKO 2009 10 09 12 21 1
45. 2 Hunting Editions with enumeration captions v no modify issuance label to add hunting or sports fishing Better homes and gardens 108255191 2 7 707 78 1 a v V Month yu l1 23s0eS Y Gan year j with Enumeration captions British Columbia history 108286944 2 0 8 1 a V bTSedsohal 4 Av Issues year s Journal of the British Year Spring Summer Fall Columbia Historical Winter with Enumeration Federation captions V No British Columbia 108304607 2 0 8 1 a V bTSedsobat 4 Av ISSUeR ear j s magazine Year Spring Summer Fall Winter with enumeration captions V No Canada s style at home 108304570 2 0 8 1 a year MOrtirhonth M mssSpes Year without enumeration captions Canadian gardening 108142330 2 0 8 1 a v b L ndSs eS Yeearv S J andat year se April May Summer Autumn Winter Canadian geographic 108304606 2 0 8 1 a year Sb stsahson 4 w Isds Year Spring Summer Fall Winter without enumeration Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 377 Canadian home workshop 108286953 2 0 8 1 a v b L ndss gS Wearv OcsoD year se Winter March Apr May Summer September Canadian house and home 108286955 2 0 8 1 a v b Monty 12 T s e sz Year Cyear r with enumeration captions v no Canadian living 1
46. 4 50 9 Type Details Total Billed Total Paid Balance Owed v Miscellaneous Fine 4 1 50 if Miscellaneous Fine i 0 0 Chapter 11 Self Check 127 Chapter 12 Offline Transactions Adapted with permission from original material by Georgia PINES Evergreen s Standalone Interface Offline Interface is designed to log transactions during network outage which can be uploaded and processed once network operations are restored The terms Offline Interface and Standalone Interface mean the same thing a separate program to handle simple circulation tasks while the network is down To access Offline Interface go to Staff Client login screen Click Standalone Interface button Startup and Shutdown Open New Window Locale en CA English Canada Server Workstation Hostname k atalogue libraries coop Not yet configured for the specified server Add 55L Exception Status 200 OK Version 200 OK Authentication Username Standalone Interface Password SS Export Transactions Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 128 Evergreen Standalone Interface will open 12 1 Offline Module Setup Default Offline Printer A default offline printer must be set on each workstation to be used during offline in order for the Offline Module to print receipts l Select Admin Workstation Administration Printer Settings Editor Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Managemen
47. 48 Local Administration Menu 442 Checkout fills related When filling related holds on True False LSA hold on valid copy only checkout only match on items that are valid for opportunistic capture for the hold Without this set a Title or Volume hold could match when the item is not holdable With this set only holdable items will match Checkout auto renew When an item has been checked out Duration LSA age for at least this amount of time an attempt to check out the item to the patron that it is already checked out to will simply renew the circulation If the checkout attempt is done within this time frame Evergreen will prompt for choosing Renewing or Checkin then Checkout the item Do not change fines When an item has been marked True False LSA 2 8 Set it to True if fees on zero balance lost and all fines fees have been your library does not LOST transaction completely paid on the transaction refund lost and paid do not void or reinstate any fines items fees EVEN IF Void Lost Item Billing When Returned and or Void Processing Fee on Lost Item Return and or Restore Overdues on Lost Item Return are enabled This setting has no effect on partially resolved bills Do not include In the Patron Display interface the True False LSA outstanding Claims number of total active circulations Returned circulations for a given patron is presented in the in lump sum tallies in Summary sidebar and underne
48. 7 Completed 2009 10 09 12 31 Uploaded Transactions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 The transactions from the following workstations have been uploaded but not processed When all expected workstations are present here use the Process button above Date Uploaded Workstation a 5 When the uploading is finished select the session in Offline Sessions section Now the value in the Upload Count column should have been increased by 1 Your workstation should be listed in Uploaded Transactions section now P IE rr Description Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing Date Completed Internet Down 2009 12 02 2009 12 02 11 54 1 0 No testing 1 22 2009 12 01 10 59 2 Completed 2009 12 01 11 00 testing 1 2 2009 12 01 10 59 0 0 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 2nd try cko oct909 2009 10 09 13 17 0 0 No October 09 09 2009 10 09 12 28 0 0 Completed 2009 10 09 12 30 09oc9CKO 2009 10 09 12 21 1 7 Completed 2009 10 09 12 31 Uploaded Transactions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 Date Uploaded Workstation 2009 12 02 12 06 BSE tina N Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 141 6 Inform your local system administrator that your transaction has been uploaded to the session You will need to do this for each workstation you have used for offline circulation If your library has more than one workstations that have been used for offline transactions you will see the other workstation sessions that have
49. AO NE T TTE 156 14 3 Adding holdings for non physical resources esses 157 15 Editing and Mamniaining FONGE NETTO mmm 158 15 1 205 ON a E EE 158 e End ON EE 162 152 LOD TOmpldleS eee ee EEEE E E O E TA 165 154 Batch Updating via tem Status SCre ON o c lt ccsesecesecccccesesccscecacanccasesesncaadencacesacesseacaceaicesaenaceenicaeseas 170 ESSEN RA DATOE o A EE 170 Do SING L ADEE aE mp Wad 4 PANS leh UA eB TT Tr DER 177 15 9 eNO OO a E E E Id IE PPIRPIXPIIRSIITS 180 W CO AV a EE E eee ee eee ee tree eer 184 BO BCEE a E 187 17 1 Adding Copy Records to Copy BUCKETS uoi a cesccsecenancsecdannntenedancsecdawecbavenanebecdeuseiecadouciecadaaptiveass 188 17 2 Workng Wiin Copies Ait A DUCK GE 2sc ccacseaseeaseacennssetamsansaeeansensececeanaesaccouetanacesessennestecoseaceseenceaeeneay 190 T3 Removing a Copy rom a BUCkel ax pig Emm 192 174 KRetieving Shared BUCKETS scausutenasencancarsacaselceacaviunantesaaceacgesonentaceeentasdancnueicamtatensaiomerseaescentqaen 193 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database rex gectceec oorr retine dea nennt man Exe zn eR aou eek ae dn pn Rana 194 16 1 MARC Records Via 259 50 Intelld B 12 5 20 9 9959130 UPEIDTPIRENaTRE TRI UPToEREEeDIDU ED UbIDIN IOS Eo ROS eO LbPREGA 194 18 1 1 Importing Hecords via 239 50 Internac ici oo er re e inaa a aN a 194 18 1 2 Overlaying Records via Z39 50 Interface sis5 cccacsdscevesxetaciweiscouacedeacrsounsdonenuasdsanaeaceuecnaeses 197
50. Action Triggers Admin settings Sitka support Patrons with Negative Balances Display a list of patron accounts with All staff negative bill balances to whom the library may owe refunds Reports Generate reports on any field in the Staff with reporter permission report Evergreen database output optionally visible to all staff 7 Un Un Un Co Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 41 Statistical Categories Editor Create and manage optional categories LSA for detailed patron item information Surveys Create patron surveys to be completed at LSA patron registration Transit List View items in transit to or from your All staff library during selected date range Work Log List the most recent transactions All staff processed at the selected workstation 48 2 Cash Reports Select Admin Local Administration Cash Reports 2 Select the start date and the end date that you wish to run a cash report for You can either enter the date in the YY YY MM DD format or click on the calendar icon to use the calendar widget Start Date 2014 05 13 End Date 2014 05 20 Ez rYYY MM DD View reports for Castlegar Public Library 3 Select your library from the drop down menu Click Submit 4 The output will show cash check and credit card payments It will also show amounts for credits forgiven payments work payments and goods payments e g food for fines initiatives replacement copy for lost item
51. Agaregake Default Creating User Default Last Editing User Cuwning Org Unit org uni Lower case Mon Aggregate Default Shelving Location Default Shat Cat entry maps Default Tatal Circulations Default Circulating Library Aggregate Aggregate 3 JNon Aggregate a Enable nullability selection 14 Name will appear in the bottom left pane Select the Name row and click Alter Display Header Template Configuration Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Display Mame Data Tvpe Field TransForm Circ count MM Count Distinct N ame T TM Alter Display Header Change Transform 7 Remove Selected Field Change Field Hint Chapter 27 Creating Templates 284 15 Enter a new more descriptive column header for example Shelving location Click OK The page at Mi ld a a d us E3 9 Change the column header to 2 ange rne column header ro Shelving location 16 Note that the order of rows top to bottom will correspond to the order of columns left to right on the final report The results will be sorted by the columns in this order too Select Shelving location and click on Move Up to move Shelving location before Circ count The result will be sorted by Shelving Location first Template Configuration Mame Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Display Mame Data Type Field Transform A Circ count id Shel
52. Bis NOC OE E TE DL CO NETO M acil OC ONC perra E EE D3 CA VERNO E GON elo RITE D E 56 Fe O O e a E E E E E E E E E E E E E E A E E A T 57 7 Ne Mae CK Me ui p22 snsaconernnncasdeuseseneoneaee EE 57 Te MM eA E ac A Tm PR 60 7 3 Renewal and Editing the Item s Due Date esses 65 7 4 Marking Items Lost Claimed Returned and Claimed Never Checked Out 67 VES cM WE ET 70 ra om egi mnl T E E A E A Eaa 72 TE E C OOE O ET T EE A E AL E EIS AIEO MAS a aaa tan poem dudit A A A ANE dU C cdmans A sda MM PME C PM EE 80 8 1 ET eic Ve Goca BIG NTC TT TEUER 80 SCAM NEKDO E LINN e D OS IO 80 e M c RO RR E iol RTT E TE IUE 83 ctm Feed m ET RTT 85 Bo Adding New Grocon BIS ss centsanasacsaasasonaiesacesiccassastaceicaasacsaceniaanscactiguicendsnesceaiaasaseuaseancaniagcsdauacs 85 CO E A O ET 88 O REE T MM 89 ROE a E A E een E ten E E E E A A A 91 LPA ar 91 SPECIEI IN mo ETT DO OTt 98 NA em asl M E IM T TEES 106 SCRE ae Bale e E TT mE 110 9 5 Find A omMher larget TOP HOIS sccsasscesesneacacasnanensicesaeoetsaeace anceseeosacnescedasanocewtennseanceebeceranstoesseieaniensa 112 9 6 Holds Shelf List and Clearing Shelf Expired Holds eese 113 T8 Ne ASIEN SIU seantsaaneseenvaniiae sian earaneitaniacantacsatdneaaeniateorestsahiuenceeionsadses hinouoeeorniterssaendariatinsteatdesieuiarostant 115 10 Wien NISI tom go TEE Transi serren i
53. Britain e Two excluded words are joined by AND So a search for harry potter is equivalent to harry and potter e A plus leading a term has no role and is removed So 4 golden 4 compass is equivalent to golden compass You can form more complex searches using the Advanced Search features You can also click the Advanced button under the search box to build complex searches using Boolean operator OR to connect your terms Improving a Search With No Results If no results were returned from your search you will see Keyword Search Tips for expanding or altering your search Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 239 21 4 Search Methodology Stemming A search for dogs will also return hits with the word dog and a search for parenting will return results with the words parent and parental This is because the search uses stemming to help return the most relevant results That is words are reduced to their stem or root word before the search is performed The stemming algorithm relies on common English language patterns like verbs ending in ing to find the stems This is more efficient that looking up each search term in a dictionary and usually produces desirable results However it also means the search will sometimes reduce a word to an incorrect stem and cause unexpected results To prevent a word or phrase from stemming put it in double quotes Understanding how stemming works can help you to create more relevant searches bu
54. COPYBPR Supplie lt Unset gt 1c No 1 copy BPR test Ame lt Unset gt lic 0 00 1 cop Price 21 00 1 copy OPAC Visible Yes lcop Reference No 1 copy Quality Good 1 cop 76 4 Click Alert Message in the Miscellaneous column The background colour of the box changes Type in the message then click Apply Alert Message D amaged back cover 5 Click Modify Copies then confirm the action 7 7 Barcode Completion Barcode completion is used to add prefixes suffixes and or padding to a barcode when scanned This is used when the physical barcode does not match the barcode saved in Evergreen For example all barcodes at a library may be prefixed in Evergreen with their Library and Archives Canada code MPL 12345 but the physical barcode on the item is 12345 When barcode completion is in use Evergreen will add MPL to ever barcode scanned A short video on barcode completion can be found here Barcode completion is generally used in Sitka to handle duplicate item or patron barcodes Multiple Matches Patron Barcodes Item Barcodes Multiple Matches When a barcode is entered if multiple matches are found a pop up will appear listing the possible barcodes Chapter 7 Circulation 77 Select the barcode title or barcode name combination that matches the item in your hand or the patron Barcode Choice After auto completion multiple barcodes may match your input Please choose the barcode yo
55. Call Number Owning library of Call Number and Call Call Number aka Volume is a Number label separate record Call Number cannot be updated in the Copy Editor See Section 14 1 Adding holdings to title records Copy Number The copy number of the item This is an optional field Libraries may use it to identify duplicate copies under one title Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 159 Table 15 3 Circulation Circulate Indicates whether the item can circulate or not Holdable Indicates whether the item is holdable or not Age based Hold Protection Allows libraries to restrict holds to be picked up at a range of libraries Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings Leave it as YES unless the item is with a circulating collection shelving location but should not be circulated If the shelving location s Circulate attribute is NO this field will have no effect But the NO value in this field will block circulating when the shelving location s Circulate is YES Leave it as YES unless the item is with a holdable collection shelving location but holds should not be allowed on this particular item If shelving location s Holdable is NO this field will have no effect But the NO value in this field will block holds when shelving location s Holdable is YES Sitka provides two sets of rules X_month_within_single_branch and x month among multi branch The former allo
56. Cancel unless filled by 05 06 2016 Enter date in MM DD YYYY format Active Yes this hold is active now Y If suspended activate on Enter date in MM DD Y YYY format Chapter 22 My Account 255 You can use the checkbox beside each hold to select the hold and the Action for selected holds dropdown list to suspend activate set change an activation date or cancel the selected holds You may set an activation date when you suspend your hold or leave the date blank and manually activate it later A suspended hold will not lose its hold queue position Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Items on Hold Holds History Current Items on Hold Actions for selected holds v Go Q show all holds Show only available holds Pickup Cancel if not Title Author Format pee Activate filled by Active Status Notes Waiting for The inconvenient Indian a curious account of Native People in King Thomas lt copy Non NAMES 1045 v Maple Library 05 06 2016 Active mm Edit 1 copy Little marmots Royer Anne Maple Library 05 07 2015 Suspended rdg Edit Your position in the hold queue is indicated by the first number in the status column For example 3 hold on 1 circulating copy indicates you are third in the hold queue Fines and Payments The Fines and Payments tabs at bottom of the Account Summary screen display any fines or fees that you have accrued and the payments you have ma
57. Check out E Item Title Author Availability Formats Actions Black Beauty by Anna Sewell A copy is available for checkout cC RR MPI ARdIGDODR 2 of 3 available 0 holds OverDrive Listen Choose a format type and click Check out on the prompt A successful message will be displayed which will be closed automatically Click the Download button in Format column to download it Chapter 23 Integrated Electronic Resources 260 Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Current Items Checked Out E items Checked Out Check Out History Physical Items Check out E Item Title Author Availabili Actions SS ee this time Check out OverDrive MP3 Audiobook OverDrive Listen The current E items Checked Out screen is displayed with the due date time Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Current Items Checked Out Check Out History Physical Items Current E Items Checked Out Title Author Availabili Formats Actions n p aE Download OverDrive MP3 Audiobook Download OverDrive Listen 23 2 Place hold on e resources If all copies under a title are checked out you will see a Place Hold on E book E audiobook link on the result list or record details screen Click that link to login to your account if you have not already done so After you log in you will be directed to the following screen Account Summary Messages Items Che
58. Clear New Patron Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 396 4 The screen will refresh to show that the patron has picked up the reservation s 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservation Pickup Go Back Go Forward Reservations Pickup Pringle Jennifer Patron has these reservations ready for pickup Patron has no reservations ready for pickup at this time Patron currently has these reservations out Title Barcode Pickup time Due time Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 17 14 06 2011 06 17 18 45 45 6 Returning Reservations When a reserved item is brought back staff must use the Booking Module to return the reservation To return reservations select Booking Return Reservations Create Reservations Pull List Capture Resources Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations 2 You can return the item by patron or item barcode Here we choose Resource to return by item barcode Scan or enter the barcode and click Go 1 Reservation Return Go Back Go Forward Debug Reservations Return Return by barcode of Resource 98723000112233 oo Patron Clear New Patron 3 A pop up box will tell you that the item was returned Click OK on the prompt Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 397 4 If we select Patron on the above screen after scanning the patron s barcode reservations currently out to that patron are displayed Highlight the reservations you want to return a
59. DVD CHILDREN DOR MDB DVDs Videos MDB Show Last Few Circulations 6 4Video 879 1 Video 879 MDB 7 36320000262311 Video 879 MDB Audio Visual MDB Edit Items Transfer Items to Previously Link as Conjoined Items to H Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Tra Add Items Edit Volumes To edit the copy record highlight the line with barcode and click Actions for Selected Rows Edit Items Holdings Maintenance MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library Limit This Sub branch 7 Show Volumes V Showltems Hide Empty Libs Consortial Tota 2 Available 2 Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library Due Date Location Owning Library i 1 ASITKA Sitka Copy to Clipboard 2 4SPRUCE Spruce Co op Add Items to Buckets 3 AMDB Bren Del Win C 2 lt 2 gt Show Item Details 4 4DVD CHILDREN DOR 1 DVD CHILDREN DOR MDB Make This Item Bookable 5 35144000034913 DVD CHILDREN DOR MDB DVDs Videos Eroria rr 6 4Video 879 Video 879 7 36320000262311 Video 879 Audio Visual Edit Itemdy Transfer Items to Previously Link as Conjoined Items to Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 164 You may edit multiple records of the same type displayed on the same screen at one time by highlighting all of them using Ctrl or Shift key and mouse click Holdings Maintenance MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library X Limit This Sub branch V Show Volumes V Showltems
60. Detailed Closing Start Date Start Time End Date End Time All Day All Day 2014 07 01 00 00 2014 07 02 07 00 Reason for closing Apply to all of my libraries Libraries in Non Pacific Time Zone Sitka s Evergreen server is in the Pacific time zone To ensure correct closed date behaviour Sitka libraries not in the Pacific time zone must off set their closed date entries by using Add Detailed Closing for all closures Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 424 1 Select Add Detailed Closing TN Welcome Closed Dates Editor Edit Closed Dates for Fernie Heritage Library m Mate All dates must have the form Y r Y Y MM DD Times must have the form HH MP ee Add Single Day Closing Add Multiple Date Closing 4 Add Detailed a h 2 Enter start date and select All Day under start time To compensate for the time zone difference the end date time should be lam for libaries in the Mountain Time Zone or 2am for libraries in the Central Time Zone the day after the closure The example below is for a one day closure on September 6 2010 for a library in the Mountain Time Zone Click Save when finished Start Date Start Time End Date End Time 2010 09 06 id 2010 09 07 01 00 Ao Reason for closing Apply to all af my libraries L 48 5 Copy Locations Editor Select Admin Local Administration Copy Locations Editor Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 425 gt You can create new copy location
61. Dora s backpack adventure 6 Aigner Clark Julie p2005 Buena Vista Records 102265952 Meet the orchestra T Reisner Molly 1st ed 9781416984979 c2009 Simon Spotlight Mi ocn423015067 Dora saves Crystal Kingdom Show All in Catalogue Transfer Title Holds MARC21 4 Li UNIMARC gt XML SS SS Evergreen BRE Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 227 Chapter 20 Record Buckets This part of the lesson will demonstrate how to create and manage bibliographic record buckets The steps used for copy buckets are similar It is very important when working with buckets to ensure you are working with the correct type of record for the corresponding bucket You cannot add copy records to bibliographic record buckets and vice versa 20 1 Creating Record Buckets There are two ways to create a bucket You can either create a bucket first without accessing any records or you can access a record and choose to create the bucket from that view We will demonstrate both methods here beginning with creating a bucket independent of a record Select Edit Record Buckets or Cataloguing Manage Record Buckets Cataloguing Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve record by TCM Shift F3 Retrieve record by Record ID Display Item B FS Create het tiARe Record Import Record from 39 50 Edit Search Circulation Cat MARC Batch Import Export Copy Buckets gt
62. E rA E A E E E E E E HER 461 54 1 Recommended Internet Connection Speeds ccccceccecceccecceeceeceeceeceeceseeceecaeseeseeseesaeseeeeesesseesaees 490 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual viii Part I Introduction Table of Contents TL NOME Ie Veni I eS IOI ZO oLecven get fiber ied E sen Pichticksadibedon tata neat asain tec PUE SC PUE oen ERA D UR udi tdg ES UR PREIS MIU IL NOUO M TET TTE ES Te e oar CPE M EER 3 Wicd CA E SUUS E m mt 3 DEC ISO mer mr HE B 2 Revisions to Version 2 8 and Attributions to Contributors cccccccceccecseceeceeeeeeeseeseeeeseeceeeeeeeseeaeseeseeaees 4 3 Sitk and te CPS Oli mice TT E 5 SN ME COmMMUNtY DOCUMEN ANON PERRO 5 elc VF Ce OE TED EE 6 Li WHOM ome OMA OU EE E 6 4 2 Guid ltn s Tor Support Hegel S iriran eph Mak Cie eiim T E ESQ desde cenax cecdadeptecdanncseceasecsaceaameiects 6 LM SIMI REIR NT m AL SEES NT T T mmm 12 su PM Installing the TV Ot re tU RE E DTI TTE 12 52 ROJI AI ALS NIIT TET ote 12 33 Adding the E ES SUIS UNES STET mm 13 Dis MOOGIIG MORIA TTE Pm 35 rs Rome mei E EUER 16 ONGO NETUS 17 Bits Sore AGMIMS TANO NOT 22 SEN E Sle a comm cle cl E ecl ETT 26 Part Introduction 2 Chapter 1 New in Evergreen Version 2 8 1 1 New Features on Video Watch the new features of Evergreen 2 8 now 1 2 OPAC Catalogue e New item status Lost and Paid e Vi
63. Easy Steps For Local System Administrators 1 Open the patron registration form and fill in the relevant information 2 Choose a Library Staff permission group from the Main Profile Permission Group down down menu 3 Save the account 4 Retrieve the account through a patron or barcode search 5 Assign a Working Location to the account Creating Local System Administrator Accounts in 5 Easy Steps 1 Open the patron registration form and fill in the relevant information 2 Choose any Library Staff permission group from the Main Profile Permission Group down down menu 3 Save the account 4 Submit a ticket to Sitka Support asking for the account to be granted Local System Administrator permissions Make sure you include the name and barcode for the account If your library is multi branch include the working locations to be assigned to the account 5 Sitka Support will grant the permission assign the working locations and respond to your ticket when the account is ready to be used 55 2 Working Locations Each new staff account must be assigned a Working Location which determines its access level in staff client interfaces Accounts migrated from legacy systems already have working locations assigned Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 493 1 To assign a working location open the newly created staff account using F1 retrieve patron or F4 patron search Select Other User Permission Editor Refresh Check Out Items
64. Evan in Staff Client 2 S evergreen exe profilemanager Start in C Program Files x85 Evergreen Staff Client 2 8 Shortcut key None Run Normal window Comment _Open Fie Location Change icon Advanced Chapter 5 Getting Stated ag 3 Click OK 4 Click on the Evergreen staff client shortcut The Profile Manager will appear 5 Click Create Profile Evergreen stores information about your settings preferences and other user items in your user profile amp default Delete Profile Work offline We Welcome to the Create Profile Wizard Evergreen stores information about your settings and preferences in your personal profile If you are sharing this copy of Evergreen with other users you can use profiles to keep each user s information separate To do this each user should create his or her own profile If you are the only person using this copy of Evergreen you must have at least one profile If you would like you can create multiple profiles for yourself to store different sets of settings and preferences For example you may want to have separate profiles for business and personal use To begin creating your profile click Next Chapter 5 Getting Started 14 7 Enter the new profile name and click Finish The profile manager will not let you use the same name twice TO REN Completing the Create Profile Wizard If you create several pro
65. For online access visit your library s website and follow the link to their online catalogue or go to _http catalogue libraries coop for the BC Libraries Cooperative portal to the catalogue 21 1 Basic Search The homepage for the Sitka catalogue allows you to search for books and other items at your library or libraries The homepage contains a single search box for you to enter a search term My Account Search Catalogue black beauty Type Keyword V Format All Formats V Library Sitka v ED Advanced Search Browse the Catalogue You can select to search by e Keyword finds the terms you enter anywhere in the entire record for an item including title author subject and other information e Title finds the terms you enter in the title of an item e Journal Title finds the terms you enter in the title of a serial bibliographic record e Author tfinds the terms you enter in the author of an item e Subject finds the terms you enter in the subject of an item Subjects are categories assigned to items according to a system such as the Library of Congress Subject Headings e Series finds the terms you enter in the title of a multi part series Formats You can limit your search by format Some of the more popular formats in the list are the following Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 234 For Books you can choose All Books which includes regular print books large print books audiobooks and
66. Hide Empty Libs SEES amp dexolwm x l for Selected Rows Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library Due Date Location Owning Library Copy to Clipboard 4SITKA Sitka Copy to Clipboar 4SPRUCE Spruce Co ope Add Items to Buckets AMDB Bren Del Win Ce 2 2 Show Item Details DVD CHILDREN DORI 1 DVD CHILDREN DORI Make This Item Bookable Y 35144000034913 DVD CHILDREN DORI MDB DVDs Videos Video 8791 1 Video 8791 36320000262311 Video 8791 MDB Audio Visual Edit Items Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Show Last Few Circulations Link as Conjoined Items to Previously Mark Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Add Items List Actions Print Edit Volumes 15 3 Copy Templates Creating Copy Templates Using Copy Templates Exporting Copy Templates Importing Copy Templates Copy templates allow you to set up default values for selected item attributes For example all adult fiction items use the same shelving location and circulation modifier You may set up a copy template for adult fiction with the appropriate shelving location and circulation modifier values When you apply this template the two fields will be automatically filled with the default values Use of templates enhances item creation and helps ensure consistency in records Creating Copy Templates You can create a copy template directly under Admin Local Adm
67. Internet Access Level Always keep s Group Lead Account unchecked Statistical categories are usually used to further group patrons by categories not in the profile groups Individual libraries can create their own patron statistical categories There are also consortium wide and federation Chapter 6 Patron Records 41 specific categories See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for more information about creating statistical categories Clicking the Save and Clone button will save the patron record and open a new patron record Phone numbers from the previous record will be copied into the new record Depending on your library s setting See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu addresses may be copied over from or linked to the previous record If your library chooses to link the addresses the addresses shown in the new record is greyed out and they can only be edited in the original record However the linked addresses can be replaced by new ones Using the New Address button you can create a new address and mark it as both the Mailing and Billing address Once the record is saved the linked addresses will be replaced The address owning account can not be deleted or merged when other accounts are stil using the address Records created by cloning are automatically grouped together Staff accounts can be used as patron accounts in terms of circulation Only Local System Administrators can edit staff accounts 6 3 Accoun
68. Items Ctrl F2 Register Patron Shift F1 Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F8 Capture Holds Shift F2 Pull List ti Hold Requests 2 Scan or type barcode and click Submit Auto Print Hold and Transit Slips Hold Capture Enter Barcode 45156333 Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Balance Owed Barcode Bill Call Number Checkin Date Family Name Finish Location Route To Start Title R Chapter 9 Holds 110 3 The following hold slip is automatically printed Hold Slip Hold Slip This item needs to be routed to HOLD SHELF Barcode 33987000660810 Title Dora the explorer Dora s Christmas Hold for patron SITKA test middle Barcode sitkatest Notify by phone 123 123 1234 Notify by email tt yahoo ca Request Date 2011 03 14 Slip Date 2011 03 30 Copy Message Chapter 9 Holds 111 4 If the item should be sent to another location a hold transit slip will be printed Transit Slip kabes Transit Slip Destination BSE Sechelt Public Library 5797 Cowrie Street PO Box 2104 SECHELT BC VON 3A0 Barcode 40172374 Title Dora the explorer Dance fiesta Author Giiterd Chris Hold for patron SITKA test middle Barcode sitkatest Notify by email tt yahoo ca Request Date 2011 04 04 Slip Date 2011 04 04 Options Bim yq Do Not Print Copy Message If your library chooses to keep on hold items behind the desk for some patrons Hold is behi
69. Kamloops Library Detail View Actions for Selected Holds Available On Capture Date Current Copy Last Notify Time Notices Pickup Library Request Date Selection Depth Status Copy to Clipboard gt BKCT LOG 06 14 2013 2 gf 2 05 01 2013 11 3 04 19 2013 1 59 35444000773852 0 BKCT MER 04 05 2013 2 Ready fo Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circul Retriexe Patron Set Desired Copy Qua Edit Pickup Library Edit Phone Number Edit Mobile T ext Carri Edit Mobile Text Nu Set Email Notification Edit Expiration Date Edit Shelf Expire Time List Actions 7 Print Edit Activation Date Edit Request Date 4 You can retrieve the hold requestor s account by selecting Retrieve Patron on the above dropdown menu 9 3 Holds Pull List There are five types of status a hold may have Waiting for Copy Waiting for Capture In Transit Ready for Pickup and the optional Reserved Pending If your library chooses to delay hold shelf status see Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu then a hold may have the status of Reserved Pending 1 Waiting for copy holds all holdable copies are checked out or not available 2 Waiting for capture holds an available copy is assigned to the hold The item shows up on the Holds Pull List waiting for staff to search the shelf and capture the hold 3 In Transit holds holds are captured at a non pickup branch and on the way to the pick up locati
70. No 1 2 2014 No Unit 22852 V 2 No 5 2014 May Cdn Living MDB 2014 04 30 2014 04 30 2014 06 02 0 0 0 Jan 14 Jun 14 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 22853 V 2 No 6 2014 Jun Cdn Living MDB 2014 05 31 2014 05 31 2014 06 02 0 0 0 Jan 14 Jun 14 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 Recent Other 6 Click Receive Move Selected 7 Enter a barcode and call number You can scan the item barcode into the barcode field Enter a rational call for each item We recommend enumeration and or chronology captions ex V 22 No 1 Jan 2013 January 2013 JavaScript Application o Please enter a barcode for V 2 No 8 2014 Aug from Distribution Cdn Lrving 901 Cancel JavaScript Application o Please enter adjust a call number for V 2 No 8 2014 Aug from Distribution Cdn Living 901 August 2014 Chapter 38 Receiving Serials 353 8 A message confirming receipt of the item appears Click OK The screen refreshes In the top half of the screen the item displays a received date In the bottom half of the screen the item that you have just received is now at the top of the list of the received items Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Canadian Living Record 1 of 907 Start Previous Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library Search Results v Mode 9 Receive Adv Receive TCN BIN 30382305 Database ID 303
71. Notification Click Email or No Email on the prompt screen Set Email Notification for Holds NP sal Send email notifications when appropriate The email address used is found in the hold recipient account Cancel Chapter 9 Holds 100 7 Pickup location can be changed by clicking Edit Pickup Library Click the dropdown list of all libraries and choose the new pickup location Click Done WB Choose a Pick Up Library m Please choose a new Pickup Library SITKA Sitka BBGVL Interlink BGIBSE Sechelt Gibsons BG Gibsons Public Libary BSE Sechelt Public Library BLP Lillooet Area Library Association BLP BB Lillooet Area Book Bus BLP BR Bridge River Branch BLP GB Gold Bridge Branch BLP LL Lillooet Branch BPE Pemberton and District Public Library BW Whistler Public Library BBNCLF North Central Library Federation BBUL Burns Lake Public Library BME Mackenzie Public Library BVALE Valemount Public Library BVDH Vanderhoof Public Library BWLCR Cariboo Regional Library BMH 100 Mile House Branch BQ Quesnel Branch BWLCR AC Alexis Creek Branch BWLCR AL Anahim Lake Branch BWLCR BI Big Lake Branch BWLCR BR Bridge Lake Branch Staff can change the pickup location for holds with in transit or ready for pickup status Item will be sent in transit to the new destination Sitka Evergreen allows staff to select any library on the list as a pickup location Staff should observe local policy and service agreement with other libra
72. OPAC display when patrons select other languages Text in the Label prefix and Label suffix fields will automatically be added to spine labels printed for items in the selected copy location It does not affect OPAC or staff client display Whether an item can be circulated holdable or visible on OPAC is controlled by three factors item status shelving location and item attributes the options in the Copy Editor Evergreen follows the aforementioned sequence to check the value of each factor until it encounters a NO An item can be circulated holdable or visible on OPAC when all three factors are set to YES Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 426 After creating or deleting a copy location log out of the staff client and clear the cache to ensure changes are reflected in the copy editor This is not required for edits to existing copy locations This is where you see the shelving locations in the Copy Editor Copy Editor Identification Location 1 Circulation 2 Status Location Collection Circulate Alert Message Lost 1 copy MESE MEER ei EON EE i Yes 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 co Barcode Holdable Deposit 33294001746114 1 copy Adult Non Fiction BPR Yes 1 copy Mo lee Adult Videos Educational BPR Creation Date Adult Videos BPR Age based Hold Protection Deposit Ama 2011 07 15 l copy Atlas Stand BPR 6 month within single branch 1 copy 0 00 1 cc Bei Held BPR Active Date iler Floating Pri
73. Patron gt Email Address Is NULL or Blank no end akiken Circulation gt Check In Date Time Is NULL not checked in yet Circulation gt Circulating Item gt Copy Status gt name Equals Checked out Item s status is Checked out excl ClaimedReturned and Lost items Recurring Report dictus 1 Weeks s The report runs wee kly to correspond with the cove red due date period Fl Tm to make sure no item will be missed or show up twice on this report puo EGG ENS The first report is available on Wednesday Dec 12 and the 2012 1212 Midnight subsequent reports on every Wednesday Send completion notification to this xxx amp 2shaw ca Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 312 3 Setting up a one time report by using template Circulation Statistics by One Patron Stat Cat within timespan in Circulation folder User Params Circulation gt Circulating Library checkout library With Action of In List you may choose multiple branches It s easier to use Real Date Heal Date for a one time report Use Circulation gt Check Out Date Time the calendar widget to choose the date or type in using yyyy mm dd format Heal Date 2012 12 12 Raw Data Equals Circulation gt Patron gt Statistical Category Entries gt Statistical Category Stat Cat ID highlight one patron stat cat ee e Excel Output e C8V Output e HTML Output ao Bar Charts o Line Charts E
74. Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOU 9999 C 2 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATROM EXCEEDS OVERDUE 9999 3 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 9999 Q 4 Public Library Patrons BSQ PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE 9999 00 C 5 Public Library Patrons BSQ PATROM EXCEEDS CHECKOU 9999 00 F erm E SSS e Eli conca DERE RAM MEE eo ace eS 1 8 PL Temporary BSQ PATRON_EXCEEDS_CHECKOU 1 00 E 9 PL Temporary BSQ PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 0 01 7 10 PL ILL BSQ PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 9999 00 Where there is more than one threshold for the same penalty Evergreen gives precedence to local settings In this example BSQ patrons are blocked when owing 5 00 in fines instead of the Sitka default of 9999 00 Thresholds amp and Q are both for BSQ but apply to different user profile groups Threshold limits all patrons to a maximum of 9999 items out but provides an exception for the PL BC OneCard profile Multi branch libraries may create rules for the entire library system or for individual branches Evergreen will use the most specific applicable rule 48 9 2 Creating local penalty thresholds Local System Administrators can override the Sitka defaults by creating local penalty thresholds for selected patron groups l Select Admin Local Administration gt Group Penalty Thresholds 2 Click New Penalty Threshold Penalty Threshold Mew Penalty AN Delete Selected Context Org Unit BSP
75. Record with TCN xxxxxxxx Marked for Overlay displayed at the bottom of the screen UTI ih Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit Holdings Maintenance View Holds View Place Orders Add to Bucket Undelete Record Overlaying Using Z39 50 l Goto Import Record from Z39 50 to find a target record as described in Section 18 1 1 Importing Records via 739 50 Interface This record should be a fuller and better catalogued record than the one you are overlaying You may select potential records on the list based on the summary Click on MARC View to see the full MARC record Go back to Result View to highlight your selected target then click Overlay You are then given the opportunity to edit the record before overlaying Results Showing 10 of 71 Record with TCN plsbman 107261745 marked for overlay Mark Local Result as Overlay Target Show in Cataloque MARC Editor Gerawidizze Fraaks ee UFa ay m rama ar Author Edition ISEN Fublication Date Fublisher Service C Title Brooks Ger Unabridged 97801431 p200 Penguin Audio halifaxpl People o 4 Brooks Ger Unabridged 97814332 p Blackstone A halifaxpl People o Brooks Ger 907806700 Viking halifaxpl ERE Brooks Ger 97811015 c Viking halifaxpl Caleb s c Brooks Ger 97806700 Penguin Publi halifaxpl WH2015 Secret C Brooks Ger 97800073 Fourth Estate native ever 107762545 Caleb sc
76. SEARCH All Formats FOR title dora explorer pref ou B Keyword IN Thompson Nicola R T OR SEARCH ISBN FOR Identifier IN Thompson Nicola Reg Search Manage Parts View Holds Recent searches Search Results Showing Item 6 of 105 Preferred library Kamloops Library Previc ViewMae odo x ld to Bucke gar Dora the explorer Dora s backpack adventure wW Place unn vnm videorecording Nickelodeon produced by Eric Mark for Overlay EI is z z i E 1 Weiner Valerie Walsh written by Eric Weiner Leslie Cf aga teer t abo ES Valdes director Gary Conrad T i suarum r L print Available copies Add Volumes Mark as Title Hold Tr 3 All holds on this title to be picked up at your library are displayed Use Filter checkbox and Pickup Library to view holds to be picked up at other branches of your libary system Holds Filter Pickup Library v BLP LL Lillooet Branch Detail View Actions for Selected Holds Active Capture Date Current Copy Patron Barc Patron First Patron Last Pickup Library Request Date Queue Position Ty Status Total Number of Hol E No Copy sitkacirc 2011 02 21 0 2 T Waiting for 3 Chapter 9 Holds 105 4 Highlight the hold you want to edit Click Actions for Selected Holds and the appropriate action you want to take as described in step 3 of the section called Managing Holds in Patron Records Holds E Filter Pickup Library BKCT KAM
77. SITKA LI Payments SITKA Click on the Circulation SITKA subfolder hared Folders Templates 2 admin 2 Linda 2 egamrath jpringle e O Istara Ub O jeffdavis PU SITKA templates LO Circulation SITKA Dues LI Patrons SITKA gt J Custom Templates SITKA LI Payments SITKA n Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 306 4 Select the template you wish to clone In this example we are cloning the Monthly Circulation by Shelving Location template From the dropdown menu choose Clone selected templates then click Submit Circulation created by SITKA templates Limit autputta 10 Select All None name Manthly Circulation F Statistics by One Patron Stat Cat Circulation count based on ane patron s patron Statistical Category A list of items that are still checked aut ar claimsreturned excluding lost items Claimsreturned items and items with 1 Overdues Within Time Span General max fines are indicated Display address and phone numbers When using relative Between dates make sure that the earlier date is first if you want due dates between 28 and 56 days ago 55 days aga is an earlier date sa 56 should be first Popular Titles by List titles circulated more than a threshold number of times F shelving Location within time span Setthe threshold in Circ ID Count Distinct within Time Span filter E Manthly Circulation Humber
78. Sub Call Number Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited R Chapter 42 Binding Process 368 7 Click on Set Current Unit 8 Select New Unit This is will allow you to use 1 barcode for all items within the unit Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Maple Library Item ID 294 295 296 297 200 0uU0 5bUuUN 2 h Item ID Issuance Label 2013 Jan 2013 Feb 2013 Mar 2013 Apr 2013 May 2013 Jun 2013 Jul 2013 Aug 2013 Sep 2013 Oct Issuance Label Distribution Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Cdn House and Showing Bound Items in Current Working Unit Current Working Unit Auto per Item Distribution Holder MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL MPL Stream ID LBEEBERBEEEZEETEEZRE Holder Stream ID Date Published 2012 12 31 2013 01 31 2013 02 28 2013 03 31 2013 04 30 2013 05 31 2013 06 30 2013 07 31 2013 08 31 2013 09 30 Date Published Date Expected 2012 12 31 2013 01 31 2013 02 28 2013 03 31 2013 04 30 2013 05 31 2013 06 30 2013 07 31 2013 08 31 2013 09 30 Date Expected Date Received 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
79. Submission Guidelines IB what to expect when you re expecting EG My Documents ig hy Computer a File name receipt template v My Network Saweastype All Files 3 Click OK to confirm Chapter 5 Getting Started gg Importing Templates 1 Send the exported templates file to the workstation to which you want to import the templates You may do it using memory stick or email etc 2 On Receipt Template Editor Click Import Actions Default Be sure to Save Locally before export Save Locally 3 Navigate to and select the template file that you want to import Click Open Import Templates File Look in Removable Disk H O p e fi E cataloging B circulation bly Recent old stuff Documents Wt barcodes Wh patron handout receipt bemplate Desktop WW reports training EY Screenshots of Evergreen WW Support Submission Guidelines IJ iB what to expect when you re expecting EG My Documents hy Computer File name receipt template i m My Network Files of type All Files v 4 Click OK to confirm on the prompt 5 Click Save Locally Actions Preview Default Be sure to Save Locally before export m M Export Macros x k Import Chapter 5 Getting Started 31 By default all libraries use shared and hard coded templates for Hold Slip and Transit Slip Libraries can switch to using their own templates by setting up a library setting Use legacy hardcoded rec
80. Template This is the template that should be applied to copies when they are received Select a template from the drop down menu and click Apply Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 340 If you have not yet created a serial copy template please refer to 35 1 Create a Copy Template subscription 359 Label Canadian House amp Home Halding Lib MPL Display Grouping Enumeration Legacy Record Entry Receive Unit Template Magazine Summary Method Add to record entry Unit Label Prefix Cancel 4 Click Save ld Instruction on how to setup a Routing List can be found here Serials Routing 37 2 3 Create Captions and Patterns Caption and Pattern objects define the same material that would be described in an 853 854 or 855 MARC tag Here you define how your issues will be captioned and how often you get them 1 Click on the Captions and Patterns tab 2 Click the Add New button Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 341 3 Click Wizard Subscription Details Clone Subscription Batch Item Receive View Edit Distribution amp Captions and Patterns Jssuances ID Type Pattern Code Create Date Active Remove Save Changes 853 Basic Twan gt X Save Changes Add New Import From Bibliographic or Legacy Serial Records Alternatively you can copy and paste a Caption and Pattern string into the empty Pattern Code box See Section 44 1 Caption and Pattern Codes for a list of pre defined Caption Pattern s
81. The Aleph and other stories PO 7797 B635 4 CRANBROOK a 11111000282154 Borges Labyrinths selected stories PQ 7797 B635 L3 1964 CRANBROOK Show Last Few Circulations So 101000143526 Selected poems 1923 1967 ANF 861 BOR Stacks Borges Jorge Cit Tha AbEviba ba Next click the desired information in the popup to copy it to the clipboard Choose the data to copy into the clipboard Author Borges Jorge Luis Barcode 11111000367171 Cal Number Po 7797 BAGS A4 Location CRANBROOK Status Available Title The Aleph and other stories 1933 1969 3 Text from catalogue search results There is no right click menu for copying data from staff client search results To copy the ISBN in the example below highlight it and click Ctrl C To paste into another location use Ctrl V The an stone Book Nora Roberts Call number FC ROB Library Shelving location Call number Status Elkford Public Library Adult Fiction FC ROB Available Manitou Regional Library Adult Fiction Section F Rob Available Valemount Public Library Adult paperback apb hor Available McBride Public Library Adult Fiction pbk Mys Rob Available Publisher New York Penguin Book 2008 ISBN Phys Desc D cm 4 of 4 copies available at Sitka Chapter 5 Getting Started 20 Column Picker From many screens and lists you can click on the column picker icon to change which columns are displayed Barred Birth Date Family Name Fir
82. Toggle Activity Meters Circulation Policies For developers Closed Dates Editor or developers Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor Copy Template Editor De Not Atternpt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds Hold Policies Item Attribute Editor Library Settings Editor Non catalogued Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Negative Balances Reports Search Filter Groups Standing Penalties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Transit List Work Log Items on this menu are visible to anyone logged into the staff client but usually require special permissions to edit The following table describes each of the menu options and their required permission levels Contact the Sitka support team if you have questions about settings that cannot be edited with a Local System Administrator LSA account Menu option Description Permissions Age Overdue Circs to Lost To create a queue of ALL overdue items LSA by selected patron profiles at selected libraries to be marked lost It does not support date parameter This feature is mainly for school libraries end of term Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 417 process To automatically mark items lost when they are overdue for x days contact Sitka support Cash Reports View summary report of cash All staff transactions for selected date range Circulation Limit Set View cir
83. Transforms section for more information Circulation gt Circulating Library Raw Da Oo checkout library BHH did With Action of In List you may choose multiple branches It s easier to use Real Date Heal Date for a one time report Use Circulation gt Check Out Date Time the calendar widget to choose the date or type in using yyyy mm dd format Heal Date M 2012 12 12 Circulation gt Patron gt Statistical Category Entries gt Statistical Category gt Stat Cat ID Equals highlight one patron stat cat Output Options e 7 Excel Output e CSV Output VIHTML Output o Bar Charts o Ll ine Charts Recurring Report E R rence Interval 3 Weeks s ecurrence Interval The output usually will be seas Removing them may cause misunderstanding the results Usually such fields are explained in the template IeyetiatiemoPereagtonsrw bea Yona vlsdetre ab fS you may use the Source Browser to the right to display fields from the selected table only Source Specifier Circulation Patron Circulation gt ILS User Mailing Address Circulation Circulation gt Item gt Call Number Volume gt Bibliographic Record Simple Rec Circulation gt Item Call Number Volume Circulation Circulating Item 3 Circulation gt Item Copy Status 7 Circulation gt ILS User Current Library Card e Circulation gt Billable Transaction Payment Summary Chapter 32 Share
84. Weeks s Recurring Report AE E The output usually will be available in a couple of minutes Run as soon as possible Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 313 4 Setting up a report by using template Items List by Shelving Location in Holdings folder User Params Circulation gt Circulating Library checkout library B MIS With Action of In List you may choose multiple branches It s easier to use Real Date Real Date for a one time report Use Circulation gt Check Out Date Time the calendar widget to choose the date or type in using yyyy mm dd format RealDate 2012 12 12 Circulation gt Patron gt Statistical Category Entries gt Statistical Category Stat Cat ID Raw Data Equals highlight one patron stat cat e 7 Excel Output e cSV Output e HTML Output o Bar Charts o Cline Charts Al 3 Weeks s Recurring Report The output usually will be available in a couple of minutes Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 314 5 Setting up a report by using template Weeding Items with few circulations since a selected month in Holdings folder User Params Circulation gt Circulating Library checkout library a With Action of In List you may choose multiple branches It s easier to use Real Date Real Date for a one time report Use Circulation gt Check Out Date Time the calendar widget to choose the date or type in using yyyy mm dd f
85. a PUIDIERSPUNIOSPIPIRDUR MENU DIOIRENEP RUNE SUP EP IUE RDECO 2 ORO ES E RORERUS 274 ZEE icula MESURE SU Imm 276 27 1 XoODSIDE TOS kd y CO ICIS achecicacgnacsiaesarcitasthncacseagianessrainnsesieneie acne nesniutisatwesdeseienaeseteeneemesnaiast 277 PEE O a F a A EEE EE EEEE T mm 287 28 Generating Reports from TeRTipl ateS 2 2 c212 ssacetseessasssecetansesesneestsneaasseneseecsecasacasaeessessasaccessenaneeseeneeess 292 MEN R POL OUDE e T cem 296 S E E Mai SR TT TD Tm 299 31 Viewing Editing Rescheduling Reports cicnte ceased o o Eom 301 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 2s 2 12 ssscesacasesesasnogeencseantonk sanataaccnsesouacanseanaienssandineedasatanssazaninnaas 302 e WAE LEA OE ES ina S R E 302 32 2 Clone a template from SITKA _templates accininetavandovesacianidctiaaesaoeincaedaneaenrataniaheddaashecranescedetundecs 305 2 MOUIN a eME a E N EE E E E E E E E E 308 32 4 Examples of using Sitka s templates iiiiiriiiiiiiiseiiiiiiiaiirniiiiiiiininriiriirnrirsiierinrariceiririeiiidatadas 310 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database ccccceccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 3316 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators cccccccec ccc eceee cence eeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeees 320 Part V Reports 268 Chapter 25 Reports overview The Reports interface is accessed from the Admin menu under Local Administration Reports Admin Hel Op
86. a barcode for the new unit OR Chapter 42 Binding Process Date Published 2012 12 3 2013 01 3 2013 02 2 2013 0 Date Published 26857984514578 Date Expected 2012 12 3 2013 09 WwW J n Date Expected Date Received 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub Notes Item Dist Sub T pea ee ee pee Call Number MAG CHH JAN MAG CHH FEB 2 MAG CHH MAR MAG CHH APRI MAG CHH SPET MAG CHH OCT Call Number Actions for Selected Rows Date Last Edited m 2013 12 18 NE Unit ID Contents 8841952 2013 Jan _ 8841953 2013 Feb 8841954 2013 Mar 8841955 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 8841960 8841961 Saeco cots C Receive Move Selected 1 D Set Current Unit Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited R 369 12 Enter the callnumber for the item Please enter adjust a call number for the new unit MAG CHH 2013 01 17 13 Click Ok A Successfully bound 12 item s Chapter 42 Binding Process 370 Chapter 43 Routing 43 1 Serials Routing A routing list is made up of users who will receive a copy of a serial before that copy hits its regular shelving location The following instructions assume that you have already setup a distribution as per 36 2 2 Create a Distribution Depending on the status you have setup in the copy template editor we suggest creating a copy template for Routed serials The
87. a c d m AND item form 0 q s Books physical item type a t AND bib level a c d m and NOT item form a b c f 0 q s Musie CD cassetto Serials and Magazines bib_level s and item_form q 0 s electronic Software and Video item_type m Games Toys Puzzles and item_type r Equipment Videos DVD VHS Blu item type g ray The format icons show in the search results and record display in the catalogue The following table shows the fixed fields associated with each format icon Table 19 2 Format Icons Video shown if format item type g and NOT vr format v s b eg vhs dvd is unknown Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 221 Audiobook shown if item_type i and NOT item form o q s and NOT sr format a b c d e l f format eg cassette disc is unknown item type 1 and item form o q s item type a t AND bib level a c d m and NOT item form a b c d f 0 q r s Music shown if format item type j and NOT sr_format a b c d e f 1 eg cassette disc is unknown Toys puzzles or item type r equipment iem ype 19 4 Merging Bibliographic Records in Evergreen This lesson will demonstrate merging bibliographic records in the catalogue A common application for this functionality is to replace brief records with full records You will only need to do this if you are unable to locate a full record in a Z39 target and therefore cannot overlay the brief record on import or
88. actions such as backdated checkin Since one circulation may receive only one pre due overdue for each overdue period notice no new notice s will be generated if aleady sent out For example editing the due date on the day when an item is due will not generate a new pre due notice near the new due date Sitka support team strongly recommends libraries use this function only when staff forgot to set Specific Due Date on Checkout Use Renew with Specific Due Date in other circumstances to avoid undesirable result 7 4 Marking Items Lost Claimed Returned and Claimed Never Checked Out Lost Items Claimed Returned Items Claimed Never Checked Out Lost Items 1 To mark items Lost retrieve patron record and click Items Out Chapter 7 Circulation 67 2 Select the item Click on Actions for Selected Items Mark Lost by Patron Items Out Actions for Selected Items Due Date Fine Copy to Clipboard 2012 06 Add to Item Bucket 2012 06 Author Barcode Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Circulation Mo Copy ID 1 Collin 332940 BPR 7600689 2 Sewel 367571 BPR 7580257 Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Edit Due Date Mark Lost by Patron Show Non Cataloqued Circulations in List Above E Auto Print Hold and Tra Other Special Circulations Mark Claitned Returned Mark Claimed Never Che
89. already been uploaded Process the Transactions Wait until all the appropriate staff workstations have uploaded their transactions to your session You should see the workstations listed in the Uploaded Transactions section You ll need to be logged into Evergreen as a local system administrator to do the processing step 1 Log into Evergreen with a local system administrator s username and password 2 From the menu bar select Admin Offline Transaction Management 3 Highlight the correct session and if necessary Refresh to verify all the appropriate workstations have uploaded their transactions to your session Offline Sessions E Description Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing Date Completed Internet Down 2009 12 02 2009 12 02 11 54 i 0 No testing 1 22 2009 12 01 10 59 1 2 Completed 2009 12 01 11 00 testing 1 2 2009 12 01 10 59 0 0 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 2nd try cko oct909 2009 10 09 13 17 0 0 No October 09 09 2009 10 09 12 28 0 0 Completed 2009 10 09 12 30 09oc9CKO 2009 10 09 12 21 1 7 Completed 2009 10 09 12 31 Uploaded Transactions for Internet Down 2009 12 02 Date Uploaded Workstation 2009 12 02 12 06 BSE tina Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 142 4 Click on the Process button Description 1 Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing 2009 12 01 10 59 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 Completed 2009 10 09 13 17 No 2009 10 09 12 28 Completed
90. and Courtesy Emails had Save The Search and History Preferences tab allows you to configure how many search results are displayed per page on your catalogue searches your preferred pick up location if a member of a multi branch library whether you want to keep a history of your check outs and holds and who you allow to use your library account on your behalf The check out and holds history is not retroactive it takes effect once you choose to retain your history You may also choose to disable a warning about adding items to a temporary list Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Personal Information Notification Preferences Search and History Preferences My Lists Preferences Account Information and Preferences Search hits per page 15 v M Preferred search location Maple Library Y Preferred pickup location Maple Library v Keep history of checked out items 4 Keep history of holds Skip warning when adding to 7 temporary book list Name Place Holds Pickup Holds Borrow Items View Borrowing History Billie R Cyprus r4 v Allow others to use my account Ensure your account has a valid email address so that we can notify you about available holds items that are about to be overdue and overdue items Chapter 22 My Account 254 Items Checked Out Select the tems Checked Out tab at the top of the My Account area to display all of the items you currently have checked out their du
91. and Template Description are for informational purposes only They are hard coded when the template is created At the report definition stage it is not possible to change them Report Name is required Reports stored in the same folder must have unique names Report Description is optional but may help distinguish among similar reports Report Columns lists the columns that will appear in the output This is derived from the template and cannot be changed during the report definition Pivot Label Column and Pivot Data Column are optional Pivot tables are a different way to view data If you currently use pivot tables in MS Excel it is better to select an Excel output and continue using pivot tables in Excel Please note that Pivot tables are suitable to some result data only 9 You must choose a report folder to store this report definition Only report folders under My Folders are available Click on the desired folder to select it 4 Select values for the Circulation Check Out Date Time Use the calendar widget or manually enter the desired dates always in Y Y Y Y MM or Y Y Y Y MM DD format then click Add to include the date on the list You may add multiple dates with an InList operator by repeating the above step Pivot Label Calumn oaBl gt October 2009 Pivot Data Column Cired 7 Tolak i ni wk Sun Mon Tue wed Thu Fri Sat Select 39 1 z 3 Choose a folder to store this report definition Apg 5 7 G8 9
92. appropriate staff Sitka Staff strongly encourage libraries to ensure that shared usernames and passwords are kept secure and are changed as needed especially when staff leave the library Sitka encourages libraries to use the method or methods that work best for them Generic accounts will not be granted permissions to create run reports Libraries are encouraged to have a dedicated account s for reporting purpose The account must belong to an individual staff member and is for office use only To avoid re setting up reports the owner of the account may be updated when the reporting task 1s passed on to another staff member Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 492 55 1 Creating Staff Accounts New staff accounts are created in much the same way as patron accounts using Circulation Register Patron or Shift F1 Select one of the staff profiles from the Profile Group drop down menu Home Library BW x Main Profile Permission Group PL Circ Copy Edit Privilege Expiration Date PL Restricted Access PL Non Resident Internet Access Level PL Federation Active IL PL Custom Barred Public Library Staff Is Group Lead Account PL Cataloguer M PL Circulator Claims returned Count PL Circ 4Full Cat Claims Never Checked Out Count PL Circ Copy Edit PL General Staff Alert Message PL System Administrators PL Local System Administrator PL Federation System Administrator Hold is behind Circ Desk Creating Staff Accounts in 5
93. are two types of bills in Sitka Evergreen Circulation bills and Grocery bills Circulation bills are system generated including overdue fines lost item cost and processing fees etc Overdue fines are added daily once an item is overdue The fine rates are determined by each library When an item is marked as lost bills may be automatically generated to cover the item s cost price in the item record and the processing fee Each library can determine its own processing fee See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for more information Grocery bills are manually created by staff Grocery bill types can be shared by all Sitka libraries or created by an individual library Default price can be attached to each bill type 8 2 Making Payments Bills can be paid by cash check or credit in the patron account Bills can also be resolved by forgiveness work or goods e g replacement copy The following procedure shows how to collect payments 1 Retrieve patron and click on Bills button Refresh Check Out items Out Holds Bits Edit Messages Other Based on your library s setting Bills may be the default screen when retrieving a patron with bills You can configure this screen by use of the Column Picker to display required data and by selecting List ActionsSave Column Configuration Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 80 3 4 The bill screen opens NM Bill History Total Owed 24 66 Refunds Available 0 00
94. as possible for immediate output It is also possible to set up reports that run automatically in the future It is optional to fill out an email address where a completion notice can be sent The email will contain a link to a password protected report output staff login required If you have an email address in your Local System Administrator account it will automatically appear in the email notification box However you can enter a different email address or multiple addresses separated by commas Select a folder for the report s output 7 You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the Action Succeeded Click OK The page at http training sitka bclibrary ca says i m A Action Succeeded Once saved reports stay there forever unless you delete them When a report is deleted all the linked output files will be deleted too Chapter 28 Generating Reports from Templates 294 With version 2 8 report files are viewable and editable You may view the contents of a report You can generate a new report based on the past report file or re schedule a recurring report See Viewing Editing Rescheduling Reports for details The required value for filters should be in a format corresponding to the data transform For example for a call number field transformed to First Continuous Non space string you need to put in the call number prefix for a field transformed to Count you need to give an integer See Template Terminolgoy se
95. back to the Sources pane and selecting the desired fields In this example we are going to add Circulating Item Shelving Location to further refine the circulation report Chapter 27 Creating Templates 282 In the top left hand Sources pane expand Circulation the sign or on an arrow to expand the tree Database Source Browser Sources Mullable Source Mame Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Circulation gt Archived Copy Stat Cat Entries q b Archived Patron Stat Cat Entries gt Base Transaction b Billing Totals gt Check In Library gt Check In Staff gt Checkin Workstation Cire Duration Rule b Circulating Item b Circulating Library b Circulating Staff Depending on your computer you will either click on 11 Click on the or arrow to expand Circulating Item Select Shelving Location 1 Reports an Back an Forward Database Source Browser Sources Default Default Default Default Default Default Mullable Source Mame Circulating Library Circulation Modifier Circulations Copy Nokes Copy Status Creating User B Shelving Location Se carte ee ee Stat Cat entry maps Total Circulations Circulating Library Chapter 27 Creating Templates 283 12 Inthe Field Name pane select Name Database Source Browser Nullable Source Name Field
96. ce sctccesecdueuaesd dei onte ibet med ETE ESEE EEEE poacuecsnesesceseecdunsena 46 1 Local System Administrator Booking Tutorials ccccccccecceeceeceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 46 2 Creating Bookable Non Bibliographic Resources eesesseseseseen 46 3 Editing Non Bibliographic Resources sess Sitka Evergreen Training Manual yi 46 4 Deleting Non bibliographic Resources esee 408 SPEI BION aeo AE E E E IDMRM NM EDU PEUMLOU MF E CV MA IMMUNE II UM SM NES 409 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure sssssssessesessesenn nennen me mene n nennen nemen ii ener eser 411 47 1 Checking in all tems in th IDEO eoeceo sioe en a recu enr ude eua so nd vache ancsacsacsauacseinacentecescunnsteccentdests 411 47 2 Generating reports and search list ccc cccc ccc eec eee eece eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeegeeaeees 414 A eA RERO 415 48 Local Administration Menu cccccececceceeeeceeeececececeececeeceseeaeseeeesecseseseesesecesesgeseseeaeseeesesnses 417 Ao T E E E ee cee E EE E E saeco twee mene seen desc E ve E A E ET 417 285 2 Cash HODODB oed ie ona
97. created by Tina Delete selected report s Limit outputto 10 Select All None i description template edit E BBUL circ count by patron type 14648 2015 07 02 09 35 t 1 mon i Vief Edit E bpr list 9852 2015 03 24 16 28 f 1 day i View Edit E bpr list 11554 2015 03 24 16 36 f 1 day i View Edit LJ Output The report is loaded on report creation screen You may make the changes as when you create a new report Once all the necessary changes have been made click Save Report to update the existing report or Save as New to create a new report Note that if using Save as New you may need to update the report name or choose a different report folder Evergreen does not allow two reports in one folder to share the same name When choosing Save as New to create a new report the old report will be kept If it is a recurring report you will continue receiving the outputs from it Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Create a new report from selected template 1 Sub Limit outputta 10 iw Create a new Template for this folder Select All Mane name description create time Circulations by month for 2009 11 24 TENE l wil one library 15 40 Number of circulations fincluding renewal occured at a library Shelving locations nat an the list had 0 circulation 2009 11 24 1 Monthly Circulation by 15 35 Shelving Location clone jeremybubler When choosing View a report the above scre
98. date above Step 2 Enterthe patron s barcode Item Barcade Due Date BKCT Honour Paperba 2010 01 10 29090000123456 39090000123456 2010 01 10 Check barcode F Step 3 Enter the item due date 2010 01 10 or choose one of these Step 4 Enter the item barcode or choose a non barcoded option Check barcode E Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until done Step 6 Finish Print receipt Cancel The default dates are based on your computer settings Pre catalogued item circulation is not available on Offline Interface If an existing pre cat barcode happens to be used it will be checked out with the previous author and title If a new pre cat barcode is attempted an error of ASSET NOT FOUND item not found will be returned upon processing offline transactions The Delete selected transaction function does not currently work Misscans need to be resolved as exceptions at this time 12 4 Renew To renew you must know items barcode number Patron s barcode is optional Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 135 1 To access renew function click Renew button on the top menu bar Evergreen Offline mazara check iste 2 Renew screen looks very similar to Check Out screen The differences are patron s barcode is optional on Renew screen and non barcoded option is not available as non barcoded items can not be renewed Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 17 57 53 Check Out a a iach aegl Stand
99. detailed information and to place a hold on the item Title The cat s table Michael Ondaatje Author Ondaatje Michael 1943 Publisher Toronto McClelland amp Stewart 2011 Call Number OND Ond ISBN 9780307700117 hc 9780771068645 Physical Description 269 p 22 cm Copies available for this title Alert Bay Public Library Adult Fiction AF OND 1 available Hold a copy of this title at Alert Bay Public Library Cancel Place Hold El 24 2 Mobile PAC Account Information 1 Choose Log in to see account details at top of the page to log into your account 2 Login in with username or barcode and password Chapter 24 Mobile PAC 265 3 You can work in 4 views fines owing items checked out including a summary of overdue items holds placed and search the catalogue Clicking on any of the tabs will expand the view In the expanded view of items checked out you can renew items and in the expanded view of holds you can cancel or suspend holds Log out You are currently logged in as 111111119 0 0 fines owing 1 items checked out 2 overdue 0 other items 2 items on hold Search catalogue Chapter 24 Mobile PAC 266 Part V Reports Table of Contents S mie REATO rr 269 25 FEO eoo pied UEM MU ioe aaesencac ae seeoicaeanoeeevet sae eeeaceseorenee senseees Zit C 5 e 1 E E ne te te net ee ee ee P IC MMC IU ee ee T 2505 N GNF OET
100. display hide Select Auto Width checkbox if you wish Evergreen to automatically adjust the width of each column Set the values for Sort Priority for all the fields that you want to sort by The example list in the above screen will be sorted by Shelving Location Call Number and then Author 7 Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Save 8 Click Print Full List The list will be printed with the selected displayed fields and in the selected sort order The current version of Evergreen may not display a whole list of holds on the screen in Simplified Pull List but the printed list is complete Chapter 9 Holds 109 9 You may perform hold management tasks by using the Actions for Select Holds dropdown list The Holds Pull List is updated constantly Once an item on the list is no longer available or a hold on the list is captured the items will disappear from the list The Holds Pull List should be printed at least once a day 9 4 Capturing Holds Holds can be captured when a checked out item is returned checked in or an item on the Holds Pull List is retrieved and captured When a hold is captured the hold slip will be printed and if the patron has chosen to be notified by email the email notification will be sent out The item should be put on the hold shelf l To capture a hold Select Circulation Capture Holds Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booki Check Out Items Fl Check In Items F2 Renew
101. displayed on OPAC If OPAC Visible is NO for the shelving location this field will have no effect But the NO value in this field will hide the item 1f OPAC Visible is YES for the shelving location Reference Indicates whether the item is reference or not This flag can be used for setting up circulation policies Or statistics purpose Quality Indicates the quality of the item Quality is used to determine whether an item can be used to fill a hold By default only Good items will be used to fill holds Co op support strongly recommends leaving the quality of the item as Good for all items unless you want to block holds on the item The Statistics Column is filled with the copy statistical categories created by your library or federation For information on creating copy statistical categories see Section 48 15 Statistical Categories Editor 15 2 Editing holdings In Evergreen the call number is kept in a separate record called volume or call number record These two terms are used interchangably in this document Call number can not be edited on Copy Editor Items under the same title with the same call number share the same call number record Copy records and volume records can be edited at several places l You may edit items and call numbers on Item Status screen if you know the item s barcode Go to Search gt Search for Copies by Barcode F5 OR Circulation Show Item Status by Barcode F5 OR Ca
102. end of the Permission Context box to select your library in the organizational unit tree 7 Click Save Toolbar 8 The new toolbar group will be displayed together with Circulation and Cataloguing groups when you choose a toolbar group next time Chapter 5 Getting Started 33 Part Il Circulation Table of Contents SMM cQ OIN aie 6 ee ne eR Ionen AAT Cea MINI UCONN S REED CO ODE y SEC BOOS OUI NON NE OUI TQ ELO DEEP _39 6 3 ACCO Ni Status Py Colour CC Oe cacsccsccac5eccccacesesscaseaasacesseeseaasieacseaceaesaeacasauscasienseearionsacaseeeuseeseaanses 42 SPESSO UIN E Faron EOC ONS TE o UE TR 43 SE AUI Up aing Paron MONMaU EN TED OTT TIME 43 6 42 Renewing Library Cards scrissi innean e rE LT AES TEE 45 CAS Marking Library Cards LOSE ssrisiireipiiinictiiasiirena iiia i i PIE SIDINDEORHHORINU E Tna 45 6 4 4 Resetting a Patron s Password gtnecoscadsnnestetinaneccskanentitandiinsdamneyi NEPA SU UU iM QE nS pe DA ds 45 6 4 5 invalidate Email Address or Phone Number saissccscccdsconsswsdeessdiensquacsdeworeciecewaeesieananiestouecueees 46 CA Aa Emm A mmm 47 6 5 Patron Alerts Notes Messages and Notifications cccccccececcecececeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeeaeaeeeseeeeaeaeeas 47 SRM PS lon aca TO mer 47 Co NOE TE I TETTE 49 i Bis NSS AOS TOT DI mmm E 50
103. few screenshots showing you how to set up the reports based on some templates in SITKA templates Some explanation is added in the boxes with light coloured background Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 310 1 Setting up a monthly recurring report by using template Monthly Circulation by Shelving Location updated to include item s owning library in Circulation folder always use Relative Date for recurring report Relative Date 1 Month s ago Circulation gt Check Out Date Time Circulation gt Circulating Library e 7 Excel Output e CSV Output Output o Bar Charts o Ll ine Charts Month s corresponds to the transform of checkout date use month instead of day Run as soon as possible ar ae 2012 12 01 Mdh Use the first day of a month to capture the previous month s stats end completion notification to this xx amp hotmailcom xxx amp shaw Multiple email addresses can be separated by semi colon or comma Email address Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 311 2 Setting up a weekly recurring report by using template Overdues Within Time Span for Patrons without Email in Circulation folder Relative Date T Day s ago Circulation Due Date Time captures 1 7 days overdue items earlier date comes first Circulation gt Circulating Item gt Circulating Library item s owning library may not be the checkout or renewal library Circulation gt
104. functions and corresponding keyboard shortcuts will be demonstrated throughout this manual Keyboard Shortcuts Hotkeys Most menu items have keyboard shorcuts that can greatly increase efficiency Below is a selected list of commonly used shortcut keys AKA HotKeys All or partial hotkeys can be turned off See Workstation Administration section for details S Chapter 5 Getting Started ag Check boxes Most staff client check boxes are sticky if you select or deselect them that status persists For example Auto print which will print the relevant receipts automatically in certain functions is sticky If you select it on one login it will persist for future logins until you uncheck the box Auto Print for Hold Transit Slips Fast Item Add is another sticky check box that makes it possible to add volume and item records from the MARC editor Double Click Double click a line on patron search result list opens the selected record in a new tab Double click an item line on Holdings Maintenance opens the record with Copy Editor in a new tab Copy Paste There are several methods of copying and pasting text in Evergreen depending on where you are in the staff client and the type of information you are copying 1 Underlined blue text Clicking on any of the blue links in the Evergreen client copies the data to the computer clipboard left and right click work the same way for these links To paste into a
105. im OMCK Cl caecus uexiub gradu Erck On EpedeH orci esubtas qe nonc kd uia ar Ve Ree Nd RIVER 190 17 3 Removing a Copy from a Bucket ease Lodo tnde rta ineo shine a eon anbieten ino etin nie Bases takes 192 1754 Retioving Shared BUCKOIS eedcisencacesiduxsdussansacunsdicadsaieesidusaduss duncan En E EEn a S aANT 193 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database ssssssss 194 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual iv 18 1 MARC Records via Z39 50 Interface 2 0 ccc ccc cccccccccccccncccucccucccncecucecucecueesuecuneesueesueeuneeas 194 18 1 1 Importing Records via Z39 50 Interface usine eontra adobe hne naa tnt a oe Hen eere 194 18 1 2 Overlaying Records via Z39 50 Interface cccccccceccececeeceeeeeeeceeseeeeceeaeeeeseeneeaes 197 15 2 IDA B INIDOLD oa su ee di toss scebotiedubeuri dat ense deiu oM aua uM den M e MIU LIPADE 200 18 2 1 Import MARC HeEDIOS eei adidehcdee iuo sagncdetedascecaunaheteted cata ceatedcbecacconceeaendteeecstunsea 200 18 2 2 Uploading MARC Record Files soc cccicsesscvecsascesceardacdaadcosonsacetsacendssdedtentidacadesetceaenes 201 18 2 3 Importing and Merging Records from Queues seseessseeen 203 18 24 Managmng Le 0 ee eee ee nee re Mer eee nae earn Bi E iE ee e ri 207 18 3 Sitka s Minimu
106. item is checked out a circulation record is created When an item is renewed the existing circulation record is closed and another record is created Below are some important timestamps in this table Checkout Date Time the time when an item 1s checked out CheckIn Date Time the effective date when the item is treated as checked in CheckIn Scan Date Time the time when the check in action is taken Due Date Time For all daily loans the due time is 23 59 59 of the day in Pacific Time Hourly loans have specific time with time zone information Fine Stops Date Time the date when the Maximum Fine limit has been reached or the item is returned marked lost or claimed returned After this date the fine generator will not create new overdue fines for this circulation Record Creation Date Time the date and time when the circulation record is created For online checkout it is the same as Checkout Date Time For offline checkout this date is the offline transaction processing date Transaction Finish Date Time the date when the bills linked to this checkout have been resolved For a regular checkout without bills this field is filled with the checkin time when the item is returned The circulating library field in this table refers to the checkout location The circulating library in the Item table refers to the item s owning library Non catalogued Circulation When a non catalogued checkout is recorded a record is created in th
107. library are checked out you will be placed on a waiting list and you will be notified when items become available On the title details page you can select the Place Hold link in the upper right corner of the record to reserve the item You will need your library account user name and password A hold placed on upper right P ace Hold button means any copy attached to the record will fill your hold This is generally the best method when requesting a book as your hold will be filled by any copy of the title record you are viewing However if you want a specific issue of a magazine or a DVD or video in a set you can select to place a Volume hold in the item details view just below In this example the hold is on the April 14 2014 issue of Macleans magazine Maclean s Serial magazine Place Hold i i Available copies Current holds T add to mv list 85 copies at Sitka Show 7 current holds with 95 total copies ef Print Email 8 copies at ISLANDLink Show IX 8 copies at Powell River Public Library Location Call Number Copy Notes Barcode Shelving Location Holdable Status Due Date Powell River Public Library 2014 APR 14 Text 34418001574411 Adult Magazines Volume hold Checked out 05 12 2014 Powell River Public Library 2014 APR 21 Text 34418001483373 Adult Magazines Volume hold Checked out 05 07 2014 Powell River Public Library 2014 APR 28 Text 34418001575020 Adult Magazines Volume hold Checked out 05 16 2014 Y
108. list items by Title A to Z Y Sort Name Dora books Save changes to name or description Description Save Title Author s Local Call Number Publication Date Format Notes Place hold Go Dora the Explorer Dora in Tillworth Mary E DOR Maple Library 2014 Book Wonderland Dora the explorer Dora s JDVD HOL DOR Maple 2004 DVD Seasonal Christmas Library Cowgirl Dora JDVD TV DOR Maple c2003 DVD Great for bedtime Library Dora s Thanksaivin Willson Sarah MH K aple Library c2003 Book You can export your list to a comma delimited file by selecting Download CSV and following your computer s prompts to save the file on your computer Chapter 22 My Account 259 Chapter 23 Integrated Electronic Resources Electronic resources are usually hosted by separate suppliers outside the library Most of these resources have records in the library catalogue Links leading to the suppliers website are provided in these records Some electronic resources can be integrated into the library catalogue which allows users not only to view the records but also to borrow and place holds on the resources on the library catalogue directly Currently e books and e audio books from OverDrive are integrated Users can borrow or place holds on these e resources and view their borrowed or on hold items in their library account When your search result includes an integrated e book or e audiobook from OverDrive you may see the record is
109. lo csc Erte Hotkeys Printer Settings Editor For developers Receipt Template Editor Current d Icon Size Label Position Mode k Configure Toolbars Clear Workstation Default Set Workstation Default to Current 2 Choose a group from the list Chapter 5 Getting Started 32 3 Go back to the above menu Select Set Workstation Default to Current The above selected toolbar group is set as default for this workstation To clear an existing setting click Clear Workstation Default Circulation and Cataloguing are the default toolbar groups Local system administrators can create new groups for individual accounts workstations or all in a particular library 2 Click New Toolbar File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking O ey 6 e t gt 1 Toolbars a Go to Admin Workstation Administration Toolbars Configure Toolbars Admin He Delete Toolbar New Toolbar 1 SITKA 2 SITKA List Actions 7 Owning User Owning Org Unit Owning Workstation Label circ cat Layout circ_checkout circ_checkin toolbarseparator 1 search_opac copy_status toolbarseparator 2 patron_searc circ_checkin toolbarseparator 1 search_opac copy_status toolbarseparator 2 create_marc authority_ma Available Button ID 1 toolbarseparator 2 toolbarspacer 3 browse holds shelf 4 booking capture 5 acq claim elig
110. macros by clicking on the Macros button A macro prints a real value from the database In this example the macro 7LIBRARY prints Prince Rupert Library The macros that are available vary slightly between types of receipt templates 1 e bills holds items Receipt templates are marked up with HTML tags You may use most HTML tags See http www w3schools com html for more information on HTML tags You may insert a link to an image e g your library s logo that exists on the web For example to inlcude Sitka s logo enter tag lt img src http catalogue bclibraries ca opac skin default images sitka png gt in the receipt template The URL is where Sitka s logo is kept on the Web There are several macros that can carry pre built contents specific to individual libraries The contents can be set up in local administration For details see Library Settings Though text can be hard coded in receipt templates the pre built contents will be automatically applied to receipts printed from all workstations without editing each template e INCLUDE notice_text INCLUDE alert_text INCLUDE event_text INCLUDE footer_text INCLUDE header_text 5 Below are some example edits Barcode 3320 7002163014 Due 2006 09 06 5 Eat no pocket Barcode 55054001454553 Due 2006 03 06 EE Due sdue_date 4 Eings Castle Barcode 31039000 791757 Due 2006 09 06 5 Eaty no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09
111. more search words gives fewer and more specific results e This is also true for author searches Both David Suzuki and Suzuki David will return results for the same author Use specific search terms Evergreen will search for the words you specify not the meanings so choose search terms that are likely to appear in an item description For example the search luxury hotels will produce more relevant results than nice places to stay e Search for an exact phrase using double quotes For example golden compass The order of words is important for an exact phrase search golden compass is different than compass golden White space punctuation and capitalization are removed from exact phrases as described above So a phrase retains its search terms and its relative order but not special characters and not case Two phrases are joined by AND so a search for golden compass dark materials is equivalent to golden compass and dark materials To prevent stemming use double quotes around a single word or a phrase So a search for parenting will also return results for parental but a search for parenting will not Use asterisk as a wildcard to truncate search terms e g comp golden may return the same results for compass golden and more Exclude a term from the search using minus For example vacations britain will search for materials on vacations that do not make reference to
112. not happen then these templates will disappear with the next invocation of the item attribute editor Click OK on the confirmation prompt When importing copy templates existing templates will be kept new ones will be added to them If a duplicate template 1s detected Evergreen will prompt you to choose whether to replace the existing one 15 4 Batch Updating via Item Status screen As discussed in the Circulation chapter the Item Status F5 screen is a very useful interface for all library staff Cataloguers can perform multiple tasks from this screen The example below demonstrates updating shelving location on multiple items You can batch update any editable field in item records following this procedure See Section 7 6 Item Status F5 for more details l 2 Press F5 on your keyboard or use the dropdown menu to access Item Status screen Scan all barcodes into Barcode field or use Upload From File if your barcodes are saved in a file Select the barcodes you wish to edit using the Shift or Ctrl on your keyboard Select Actions for Cataloguers Edit Item Attributes The Copy Editor window opens Note all the barcodes different call numbers and shelving locations are displayed Select required shelving location and click Apply just as if editing one record Click Modify Copies at bottom right of screen This will modify all the shelving locations on your selected set of items 15 5 Replacin
113. number starts from O If the second column in the CSV file is record id the field number is 1 If you export one record only you may type in the record ID directly on the Export interface Once you have completed the above form click the Retrieve Records button at the bottom You will be prompted to browse the records and then save them or save them directly into a file QD Holding records can be exported in tag 852 but this includes all item records across the Sitka consortium not just your library s holdings Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 226 To export MARC records from Record Bucket go to Edit Record Bucket Retrieve the bucket containing the records that you wish to export Click Export All Records to select the exported record format You will be prompted to save the file Record Query Pending Records Bucket View Bucket 510 TinaCat Owner JI Tina ZSP B X Remove Selected from Bucket Add Selected to Pending Records Title TCN Edition 1 Leedy Loreen 1sted 0823417107 rei c2005 Holiday House VPL 100516285 The great graph contest 2 Harris Trudy 0761321071 lib c2001 Millbrook Press 12192638 Pattern bugs 3 Francis Daniel 9781550172003 2000 Harbour Pub 102766319 The encyclopedia of British C 4 Kerr J Y K 9780582416659 1999 Pearson Education cotr 30764942 Simply suspense 3 Dora the explorer 0792183126 2002 Paramount bwlcr 102757709
114. of 25 Ne Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 246 If you have selected Group Formats and Editions with your search your search results are grouped by various formats and editions of the same title under My Search Results You can always go back to this page by selecting the link to Return to Grouped Search Results Viewing Results for Grouped Record Search Results Results 1 2 of about 2 page 1 of 1 Preferred library Sitka 1 Harry Potter and the prisoner of Azkaban m TE Refine Your Search Rowling J K mate nud Book El add to my list anaa New York Arthur A Levine Books c1999 T ee ISBN 9780439136358 hc x Reviews amp More Edition 1st American ed TO ec le Phys Desc ix 435 p ill 24 cm Libran Shelving location status ry ng number Powell River Public New Juvenile J FIC uem Library Fiction pee Cm 10 of 13 copies available at Sitka 1 of 1 copy available at ISLANDLink 1 of 1 copy available at Powell River Public Library You can start a new search at any time by entering new search terms in the search box at the top of the page or by selecting the Another Search Basic Search or Advanced Search link at top of search results depending on what screen you are on when wanting to do another search Placing Holds Holds can be placed on either the title results or the title details page If the item is available it will be pulled from the shelf and held for you If all copies at your local
115. of In Process Item must be checked in to become Available or a cataloguer can choose to change the status to Available when creating the item record Your library may choose to alter this behaviour by contacting Co op support who can configure a desired default status for you 14 2 New Copies and Holds Because of the way Evergreen targets holds new copies are not guaranteed to fulfill pre existing holds correctly until 24 hours after cataloguing If your cataloguing turn around time is shorter than 24 hours you can ensure the new copy is captured correctly at check in by using the checkin modifiers Retarget Local Holds and Retarget All Statuses or by following the steps below Co op support recommends single branch libraries use the checkin modifiers as once selected they are sticky and itis a simpler workflow than that described below We recommend multi branch libraries not use check in modifiers to retarget holds as the check in modifier will only re target the top local hold which may not be the top system hold For multi branch libraries we recommend using the following procedure Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 156 l After adding the item select Actions for this Record View Holds Actions for this Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit Holdings Maintenance Manage Conjoined Items 2 If there are outstanding hold requests select the hold that is next in line then choose A
116. of circulations fincluding renewal occured at a by Patron Type library Patron type not an the list had 0 circulation Monthly Circulation Humber of circulations including renewal occured at a In house Lise by by Shelving Location library Shelving locations not an the list had 0 circulation Within time snan hnalvinn laratings nnt nn the list hard fl create_time 2009 11 02 16 51 2009 07 14 12 06 2009 07 06 11 10 2009 07 06 10 57 2009 07 06 10 55 2 Hass ny mE owner SITKA templates SITKA templates SITKA templates SITKA templates SITKA templates By default Evergreen only displays the first 10 items in any folder To view all content change the Limit output setting from 70 to All 5 Choose the folder where you want to save the cloned template then click Select Folder Only template folders created with your account will be visible If there are no folders to choose from please see Chapter 26 Folders Circulation created by SITKA templates Selected Folder lc hange Folders Select Folder Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 307 6 The cloned template opens in the template editor From here you may modify the template by adding removing or editing fields and filters as described in Chapter 27 Creating Templates Template Name and Description can also be edited When satisfied with your changes click Save Database Source Browser Sources m Sou
117. omO06 y T om07 y om08 Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 380 e 8 times a year Restart and year used as volume number 2 o O pe a Vol b No u 22 6 y mon f QW m ox OI y omOI y omO03 Wes e 8 times a year Increments continuously and year used as volume number o 1 SIS T a Vol T D No T u T Aen V wow c CW m a5 d O1 y omOT y omO03 BAM e 7 times a year Restart and year used as volume number n o 2 8 Er a Vol xD No u Su s NI wo t QW m o di OI y omOI y omO03 SEIS e 5 times a year Restart on volume o AO al Ba a 5 vol T D nO T u ic V T 2 s i 1 year j men month a Ds x O1 y om09 y om12 e 5 times a year Increments continuously on volume eee o Hi ae i us 2 dis vol b nO u n es n y em i n 1i year j men month WwW b x OI y 9 9 e 5 times a year Increments continuously on volume om06 y T om08 om06 y om08 om06 y T om0S8 y f om09 y oml2 2 078 154 no Qu S vs C i 1 year j men month wW b x O1 y om09 y T om12 Bimonthly Bimonthly Restart with volume 2 0 8 1 a vol b no u 6 v r 1 year month w b x 01 Bimonthly Restart without volume 2 70 55 fa VOL DS NOU 0 V I1 WS b x OL Bimonthly Increme
118. or editing local penalty thresholds cccceccececceceeeeceeeeseceseceececeeceseeaeseeanees 432 do AO EAE REE RE E 432 zen ON Mr OCOS TE n EET ARNA 433 28 12 Kom ANDU EANO sicicmncatainagaastaanadandanestasait EN E ER N aiii a ainean EFi OE ine TiTi aini 435 a0 19 GEN eS Ed ea E E iM E 437 29 14 Nonm C aildogued Type EID E caarsstoiainsnediuenediabenerovecumiatsaerscentaune madnesiatanteueeeaiaarecdarniedeabaniias 463 25 15 sas Meal alee Mes ECO inanontedstentirdnancenclanaceatatameeecintarkecehiahsscelninudedimnacetedsmumbicdnanchnclacenitts 464 29 15 UNVE VS a E E 469 A NOE EO a A Er 472 SS Sever AO RURSUS EITHER 473 a9 1 Oa ONA ES ose E AES EA EE tieu E E E E A EE 473 eo Vedas Library Hours ol Oeil llOlh 2452125224 2220ccaecenccansenccecssessncaueeacacaneaessaenaeneseaseiseneaubsaeceaneerseeees 474 49 122 Library AOGKESSES oen otro pRE Recte et Pep A 475 49 2 Gal Number Prefix and Call NUMBGr SULIDC 22526 c2c03descececcascastacescouscsbecnseidenvexecsescesiciancadecsenceseides 477 B ON UE ET A EEE EE AEE AAEE E OAE AEEA a 477 BOs An BENI OTT um 479 ado FO OUD e E A 479 50 Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set Up iicisssciicsiacasesctousdeansncrsadanenacsatsannacesbersivgarssuiebsabageenaneasenataws 480 Oe La MANA ES OD E E AE E A E T E E E E A A EET e E T 480 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 481 SPINA ERE Uum 481 D DOLO Faron DOL
119. outlined in this chapter During the importing process all records in the file are first uploaded to the server and kept outside the catalogue as a queue which is viewable on the MARC Batch Import Export Inspect Queue screen Cataloguers can view both the incoming and existing matching records to decide which one to use You may merge the records with either the incoming or existing record as the lead while keeping some MARC tags in both records Overlay Merge Profile decides how two records are merged Do not load a MARC file of more than 1000 records as the importing process can time out If you have more than 1000 records please break into multiple files Holding records can be created if the incoming MARC records contain holding information in pre defined format Contact Co op support about the acceptable format if you want to load holding records All records in a queue can be exported to a CSV file or printed in non MARC format emailing is not available yet All records imported from a single queue can be added to a Record Bucket There are some settings namely Record Display Attributes Record Match Sets Merge Overlay Profiles and Import Item Attributes on this screen that are reserved for Sitka server administration You should not attempt to edit them as they affect all bibliographic records Record Display Attributes set what fields will display on Inspect Queue screen once a file of records have been loaded Imp
120. patron records A patron s name phone number email address and registration date can all be found in this table Follow the links to the table Current Library Card to find a patron s current barcode Circulation to find the circulation history Home Library Mailing Address Physical Address and Main Profile Group etc to find more information about the patron Item aka Circulating Item contains copy records Item s barcode creation date active date last edited date last copy status change date and price are in this table For related information like call number circulating library circ modifier status shelving location etc you need to follow the links to the respective table to find them For title information you need to follow the Call Number table to the Bibliographic Record table to find it Follow the link to the Circulation table to find an item s circulation history Pre catalogued item information such as dummy ISBN title and author are also in this table When a pre catalogued item is checked out an item record is created If the barcode is already in the table and the item is not marked deleted the item record will be updated with the new title author etc Bibliographic Record Contains title information To find the basic bibliographic information such as title author ISBN etc follow the link to Simple Records Extract Circulation Contains circulation records including pre catalogued item circulations When an
121. records that have already been imported To manage the queues you can batch delete from the Inspect Queue interface by checking the box in front of the queue name and then choosing Delete Selected Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 207 an Back Reload an comer GJ Export Records G3 ImportRecords GA Inspect Queue G3 Record Display Attributes 1 Server Settings Select a Queue to Inspect Queue Type Bibliographic Records 3Jueuae BELKDec2LU011 71 8 BhNEAug2T12ltems BhNEAug n12Test ltems BNEAumg23Testltems BNEFeb28 Inar nez MelsanTestFehb 21 ULSLDAnnelanz tal3 ULSLDAnnlan tol3b ULSLDHotListWinter2D13 ULSLDNANCYDECZO12 ULSLDNANCYENMERGSTORYTIME ULSLDRNANC YGRAPHIC ULSLDRNANCY JANTSNEVY ULSLDNANC YREP2012 Delete Selected Xl a a n z E 18 3 Sitka s Minimum MARC record FS Merge Overlay Profiles As there is an approved minimum level for original MARC records the following may assist you when creating original MARC records in Evergreen For more detailed information on MARC standards the Library of Congress has the authoritative website at http www loc gov marc Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 208 Here is an example of aMARC record that meets and exceeds minimum cataloguing standards for a book in a series LDR 01671cam 22200385 a 4500 001 12901170 0 005 20041228203623 0 1
122. same procedure can be used to invalidate patron s phone number Chapter 6 Patron Records 46 6 4 6 Barring a Patron Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record Select Barred checkbox It is good practice to put a note in the Alert Message field to explain why the patron is barred Save the record Barred ir ls Group Lead Account Claims returned Count 0 Claims Never Checked Out Count 0 E Alert Message Barring a patron from one library bars that patron from all consortium member libraries To unbar a patron uncheck the Barred checkbox and remove the alert message 6 5 Patron Alerts Notes Messages and Notifications Alerts Notes Messages Notifications 6 5 1 Alerts If a patron s record has an alert a red Stop sign is displayed when the record is retrieved Alert Holds available 1 Press a navigation button above for example Check Out to clear this alert There are three types of alerts in Evergreen staff generated system generated and standing penalties Staff generated alerts are created and should subsequently be removed manually by staff To insert remove an alert message retrieve the patron record Type delete required message in the A ert Message field Then save the record Chapter 6 Patron Records 47 System generated alerts are automatically inserted on some conditions such as the patron account is expired patron has a ready for pickup hold etc Once the
123. screen shown as step 1 in the section called Title Level Hold Chapter 9 Holds 93 2 Click Advanced Holds Options under the title sos Place Hold Place hold for patron by barcode Place this hold for me Tina Jl Pickup location Squamish Public Library Notify when hold is ready for pickup Yes by Email Email Address XXxxxx amp libraries ca Yes by Phone Phone Number 123 321 4321 E Yes by Text Messaging Mobile carrier Aliant Canada Note camer charges may apply Mobile number Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashe Chapter 9 Holds 94 3 Scan patron s barcode Select the acceptable format s and language s Edit patron hold notification methods and or pickup location if required Click Submit button Place Hold Place hold for patron by barcode sitkatest SITKA test middle Place this hold for me Tina JI Dora s book of manners by Christine Ricci illustrated by Susan Hall Select your desired format s Select your desired language s IF none are selected any available formats may be used If none are selected any available languages may be used English A Pickup location Squamish Public Library Notify when hold is ready for pickup Yes by Email Email Address testing testplace org C Yes by Phone Phone Number 250 250 2500 Yes by Text Messaging Mobile carrier Telus Mobility Canada amp USA Note c
124. shard of history and brings it to vivid life In NN Se 1665 a young man from Martha s Vineyard became the first Native American to graduate from Harvard College Upon this slender factual scaffold she has created a luminous tale of love and faith magic and adventure The narrator of the story is Bethia Mayfield growing up in the tiny settlement of Great Harbor amid a small band of pioneers and Puritans Restless and curious she 3 Next you are asked to confirm that the marked record is the one you want to overlay You can view the record at this time Confirm that this is the correct record by clicking Overlay Overlay this record Overlay Cancel Title Record Summary View MARC Author Pub Date 2011 Bib Call LDR 01769cam a22002533a 4500 001 103737902 003 SITKA 005 20110620145418 0 Edition MARC View gt Print Page 008 110612s 2011 nyu e 000 1 eng ta 9780670021048 tc 31 00 040 tc BFBV 020 100 1 ta Brooks Geraldine ta Caleb s crossing th a 4 You have successfully overlaid the record The Copy Editor will be loaded if you have chosen to Fast Add Item Chapter 18 or you will see the bibliographic record displayed in a new tab Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 199 You may search the Evergreen database by searching Local Catalogue on the Z39 50 interface On the result list you may highlight a record and mar
125. status for these items should be set to In Process or Cataloguing After the item has been routed around it will need to be checked in to display a status of Available 1 Search the catalogue F3 2 Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical 3 Click on the title to open the Record Details screen 4 Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View 5 Click on the Subscriptions tab Record 1 of 907 Start Previous N En Search Results Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library v C Show Subs Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Raw Location Subscriptions EZ SITEA Sitka 4 SPRUCE Spruce Co operative MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library 6 Click on the arrow beside your Library 7 Click on the row with the Subscription 8 Click on the Distribution tab on the right hand side of the screen Chapter 43 Routing 371 9 Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library C Show Subs _ Show Groups Refresh v Actions for Selected Row Location 1 ASITKA Sitka 2 4SPRUCE Spruce Co operative 3 AMDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library 4 gt Subscription 1284 Subscription Details View Edit Subscriptions R 0 0 1 Click on the Hyperlinked Label Captions and Patterns Subscription Details View Edit Distributions
126. status will be changed to Jn transit If you capture the hold on the Check In screen you will be prompted to print the Transit Hold slip shown below If you capture the hold on the Capture Holds screen a Transit Hold slip will be printed automatically if you have a printer attached Qj Transit Slip ESEEEL Transit Slip Destination BSE Sechelt Public Library 5797 Cowrie Street PO Box 2104 SECHELT BC VON 3A0 Barcode 40172374 Title Dora the explorer Dance fiesta Author Gvifterd Chris Hold for patron SITKA test middle Barcode sitkatest Notify by email tt yahoo ca Request Date 2011 04 04 Slip Date 2011 04 04 Options Do Net Pant 10 2 How to receive In transit items At the receiving branch all items received should be checked in so that items status will be changed from In transit to Reshelving If an item has a hold on it a Hold Slip will be printed If the pickup branch for the hold is not your branch the item will be sent In transit again to the pickup branch A Transit Hold Slip will be printed 10 3 Transit Details You may find out the source and destination library of a transit on the Jtem Status F5 screen 1 Retrieve the item by barcode Chapter 10 Items in Transit 116 2 Select the item and go to Alternate View Select Holds Transit tab Transit information is displayed in n Transit on the lower part of the screen Scan Item Barcode Upload From File Alternat
127. that the fine amount for a laptop changes from 2 00 to 5 00 Editing Resource Types L Bring up your list of resource types Select Admin Server Administration Booking Resource Types 2 A list of current resource types will appear 3 Double click anywhere on the line of the resource type you would like to edit 4 The resource type box will appear Make your changes and click Save Following the same procedure you may edit Resource Attributes Attributes Values Resources and Attribute Map by selecting them on Admin Server Administration Booking menu 46 4 Deleting Non bibliographic Resources l To delete a booking resource go to Admin Server Administration Booking Resources 2 Select the checkbox in front the resource you want to delete Click Delete Selected The resource will disappear from the list Following the same procedure you may delete Resource Attributes Maps You may also delete Resource Attribute Values Resource Attributes and Resource Types But you have to delete them in the reverse order when you create them to make sure the entry is not in use when you try to delete it This is the deletion order Resource Attribute Map Resources gt Resource Attribute Values gt Resource Attributes gt Resource Types Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 408 Part VIII Inventory Table of Contents 210 OKAS MENON FOG SCN eoo cider pta ance aartnncetnaoeacanenensetne
128. the drop down menu Some libraries use generic accounts and for those who do staff need to be aware of the implications to other staff members of any changes made to the display Sorting Columns You can sort a list by ascending or descending order on any screen with grid display Clicking the label of a column sorts display by the column One more click reverses the order You may sort by multiple columns Click the column label of your first sorting column Move the cursor to the second sorting column Right click your mouse to choose an option from the list Upload From File A m LL Sort First Ascending Sort First Descending Sort Next Ascending Sort Next Descending Location Due Date I Adult Fiction 2012 04 11 11 59 PM Juvenile Picture books 2012 04 17 11 59 PM Juvenile Picture books 2012 04 21 11 59 PM You may sort by a third column by repeating the above step Chapter 5 Getting Started 21 5 7 Workstation Administration Copy Editor Copy Location Name First Font and Sound Settings Select Hotkeys Configure Printers Set Search Preferences Button Bar Toolbar Copy Editor Copy Location Name First By default when editing item records library code is displayed in front of shelving location in Shelving Location field You may reverse the order by going to Admin Workstation Administration Copy Editor Copy Location Name First Simply click it to make copy location name displayed f
129. the holds shelf To see the holds shelf list select Circulation Browse Holds Shelf Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Bookir Check Qut Items Fl Check In Items F2 Renew Items Ctrl F2 Register Patron Shift Fl Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F8 Capture Holds Shift F2 Pull List for Hold Requests Browse Holds Shelf th Hold F3 Show Item Status by Barcode F5 Retrieve Patron by Barcode F1 Verify Credentials Replace Barcode Record In House Use F6 Scan Item as Missing Pieces Re Print Last F3 Enter Offline Interface Chapter 9 Holds 113 2 The Holds Shelf List is displayed Note the Actions for Selected Holds are available as in the patron record You can cancel stale holds here 3 Select View Clearable Holds checkbox to list expired or cancelled holds only The Clear These Holds button is then lit up Click it and the expired holds will be cancelled Holds Pickup Library v BBI Bowen Island Public Library s im Clearable Holds X Clear these Holds Actions for Selected Holds Available On Capture Date Current Copy Last Notify Time Notices Pickup tibraryPost Clear Request Date Status Title Type R 1 2015 06 05 2 08 PM 2015 06 05 2 08 PM 30947000474912 0 BBI 2015 05 09 Ready for pickup Intolerable a memoir of extremes T 2 2015 06 05 2 07 PM 2015 06 05 2 07 PM 30947000465944 0 BBI 2015 05 01 Ready for pickup Borgen Season 2 C 4 Print the list bring the items down from the hold shelf and
130. their use of the OPAC the context org for this setting should be the top org in the org hierarchy otherwise patrons can trample their user settings when jumping between orgs Enable features that send SMS text messages CO Table 48 12 Security Setting Description Data type Edited by cc level of patrons Enter numbers 1 e 2 Number LSA internet access Unfiltered or 3 No Acess Maximum concurrently Prevent the creation of new self Number Sitka Not in use active self serve serve password reset requests until password reset requests the number of active requests drops back below this number Maximum concurrently When a user has more than this Number Sitka Not in use active self serve number of concurrently active password reset requests self serve password reset requests per user for their account prevent the user from creating any new self serve password reset requests until the number of active requests for the user drops back below this number OPAC inactivity Number of seconds of inactivity Number LSA timeout in seconds before OPAC accounts are automatically logged out Sitka default is 420 seconds 7 minutes Obscure the Date of When true the Date of Birth column True False ILSA Birth field in patron lists will default to Not Visible and in the Patron Summary sidebar the value will display as unless the field label is clicked Offline Patron During offline circulation
131. these attributes Operating System ANY Computing Platform ANY PC Mac 7 Select the pickup location from the dropdown list Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR sid Reserve Selected Reserve Any Existing reservations for Pringle Jen BTE BNELF BFN Cancel selected BTR This user has no existing reservations at this t Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 391 8 If there are multiple copies of the resource and any item listed is acceptable click Reserve Any To choose a specific item select it and then click Reserve Selected Go Back Reload Go Forward Laptop 98723000112235 98723000112234 98723000112233 98723000112244 98723000112236 Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selected Reserve Any 9 A message will confirm that the action succeeded Click OK on the prompt 10 The screen will refresh and the reservation will appear below the patron s name at the bottom of the screen 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservations Go Back Laptop 98723000112235 98723000112234 98723000112244 98723000112236 Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selected Reserve Any Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer Type Laptop Cancel selected Debug Print Page need this resource Between 6 16 2011 and 6 16 2011 With these attributes Operating System ANY Computing
132. to assign the value to Valid Value Enter the value for your attribute 4 Click Save when the required information has been added 5 The attribute value will appear in the list Each attribute should have at least two values attached to it repeat this process for all applicable attribute values Create New Resource l Add items to a resource type Click Admin Server Administration Booking Resources 2 Click New Resource in the top right corner Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 405 3 A box will appear Add information for the resource Owning Library BPR Resource Type Laptop Barcode 98723000112255 Overbook Is Deposit Required Deposit Amount User Fee Cancel e Owning Library The home library of the resource Resource Type Type in the first letter of the resource type s name to list then select the resource type for your item e Barcode Barcode for the resource e Overbook This allows a single item to be reserved picked up and returned by multiple patrons during overlapping or identical time periods s Deposit Required Function not currently available Deposit Amount Function not currently available User Fee Function not currently available 4 Click Save when the required information has been added 5 Theresource will appear in the list One resource type may have multiple resources attached Map Resource Attributes and Values to Res
133. ulli wait between URL test attempts Vandelay default Apply this prefix to any auto addi barcode prefix generated item barcodes Vandelay generate Auto generate deault item barcodes m m default barcodes when no item barcode is present Vandelay default call Apply this prefix to any auto Text LSA number prefix generated item call numbers Vandelay generate Auto generate default item call True False LSA default call numbers numbers when no item call number is present Vandelay default Default circulation modifier value Selection LSA circulation modifier for imported items list Vandelay default copy Default copy location value for Selection LSA location imported items list Vandelay default record Admin setting Selection Sitka match set list Circ default precat circ Selection LSA modifier List Claim Return Mark True False Sitka Default FALSE copy as missing Disallow circulation When true items on booking reserve True False LSA of items when they are during the proposed checkout on booking reserve and period will not be allowed to that reserve overlaps circulate unless overridden with with the checkout the COPY RESERVED override period permission Limit Due Date by If True automatically adjusts item True False LSA Patron Expiry due date to match patron card expiry date if expiry date sooner than due date If False item due date applied Recalls An array An array of fine amount
134. wasn t checked in before it was checked out to another patron would be listed as an Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 143 exception Those transactions causing exceptions may not be loaded into Evergreen database Staff should examine the exceptions and take necessary action The example below shows several exceptions Exceptions for Internet Down 2009 12 03 Export List Print Export Retrieve Item Workstation Timestamp Type Event Name Item Barcode Patron Barcode BSE tina 2009 12 02 12 49 checkout ASSET_COPY_NOT_FOUND 5766 4567 BSE tina 2009 12 02 12 49 checkout OPEN_CIRCULATION_EXISTS 74270 1313 BSE tina 2009 12 02 12 48 checkout ASSET_COPY_NOT_FOUND 12344 1313 These are a few notes about possible exceptions It is not an all inclusive list 1 Checking out a DVD with the wrong date leaving due date set at 2 weeks instead of 1 week doesn t cause an exception 2 Overdue books are not flagged as exceptions 3 Checking out a reference book doesn t cause an exception 4 Checking out an item belonging to another library doesn t cause an exception 5 The Standalone Interface doesn t recognize books on hold no exceptions will be generated for that 6 The Standalone Interface will recognize blocked barred and expired patrons as well as lost cards IF you have recently done an Admin Download Offline Patron List on the workstation on which you re using the Standalone Interface You will get an error m
135. websites online journals or downloadable audiobooks The steps below describe how to catalogue a non physical resource so it appears in OPAC searches These instructions are for adding individual records To upload a batch of records e g from an e book subscription please contact Co op support For libraries that subscribe to OverDrive Co op support creates and updates bibliographic records automatically 1 Locate import or create a bibliographic record as described in the preceding chapters 2 Open the record in MARC Edit view Select Actions for this Record MARC Edit 3 Add an 856 tag to the MARC record Place the cursor in the desired location and press CTRL Enter to add an empty row Enter the tag number 856 You must set the first indicator to 4 and the second indicator to Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 212 0 or 1 The indicators cannot be left blank For information about indicators see http www loc gov marc bibliographic bd856 html 4 Addapplicable subfields from the table below Press CTRL D to add a new subfield CTRL I on MAC OSX Required the URL or link to the resource Appears as a link in the OPAC www linktoresouxteplay the link text is the URI unless subfield y is specified y Optional a display label for the link Click for access Appears as the text of the link instead of the URL defined in u Optional a public note providing more library card Appears in parenth
136. when a creating copy record Some statuses such as Checked Out and On Holds Shelf are not editable They Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 158 can only be used by circulation functions Current barcode of the item The barcode cannot be updated in the Copy Editor See Section 15 5 Replacing a barcode Creation Date Date on which the item was created This field will be automatically filled when the record is saved Active Date Date on which the item goes into circulation This field is empty if an item is created with status of On Order or In Process It is filled when it is checked in or out or its status is edited to others Creator Username of the user who created the item This field will be automatically filled when the record is saved Last Edit Date Date on which the item was last edited This field will be filled updated when the record is saved Last Editor Username of the last user to edit the item This field will be filled updated when the record is saved Table 15 2 Location Location Collection Shelving Copy Location for the item Shelving locations belonging to the circulating library branch and the organizations on a higher hierarchal level library system federation or Sitka are displayed in the dropdown list Multi branch libraries may create system level shelving locations for all branches to share Circulating Library Library currently circulating the item es Owning Lib
137. when checked in with oustanding fines 1 top list bottom list 2 bottom list bottom list 5 top list do not display 6 bottom list do not display Sets the maxinum number of recent user activity entries to retrieve for display in the staff client The maximum number of previous circulations the staff client will display when investigating item details Patron circulation True False LSA summary is horizontal Record in house use of uses threshold for Are You Sure dialog Record In House Use Maximum of uses allowed per entry Regex for Day_phone field on patron registration Regex for Email field on patron registration Regex for Evening phone on patron registration Regex for Other phone on patron registration Regex for phone fields on patron registration In the Record In House Use interface a submission attempt will warn if the of uses field exceeds the value of this setting BEEN Regular expression The of uses entry in the Record In Number House Use interface may not exceed the value of this setting The Regular Expression for validation on the Day phone field in patron registration Note The first capture group will be used for the last 4 digits of phone number as patron password feature if enabled Ex 2 9 d 2 d 3 Ad 4 x d will ignore the extension on a NANP number The Regular Expression on validation on the Email field in patron re
138. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Notes Item Dist Sub Call Number MAG CHH JAN MAG CHH FEB 2 MAG CHH MAR MAG CHH APRI MAG CHH MAY MAG CHH JUNE MAG CHH JULY MAG CHH AUG MAG CHH SPET MAG CHH OCT Call Number 8841958 2013 Jul 8841959 2013 Aug Actions for Selected Rows Date Last Edited R 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 2013 12 18 Receive Move Selected 1 Unit ID Contents Date Unit ID Contents 8841952 2013Jan 8841953 2013 Feb 8841954 2013 Mar 8841955 2013 Apr 8841956 2013 May 8841957 2013Jun 8841960 2013 Sep 8841961 2013 Oct If you want the item to be bound into an existing unit select Recent and select the desired unit from the menu To make a change in bound items receive or bind the items into an already existing unit 9 Select the items to be bound 10 Click on Receive Move Selected Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Maple Library Item ID 11 Issuance Label l 2013 Jan 2013 Mar 2013 Apr Issuance Label New Unit Distribution Holder Stream ID Cdn House and M Cdn House and Cdn House and M Showing Bound Items in Current Working Unit Current Working Unit Distribution Holder Stream ID Scan or Enter the barcode for the item o9 Please enter
139. 0 2 00 circulation Ski key 3 17 11 11 0 3 11 11 565 1 00 circulation Ski key 3 14 11 1 0 23 00 grocery 2 24 11 12 23 50 2 circulation Dora s Christmas carol adven 3 For more information about a particular bill you can select the bill on the list and click Full Details at the bottom of the above screen and the bill details are displayed in a pop up window 4 You may add a bill entry to an existing bill Highlight the bill then click Add Billing button at the bottom of the above screen Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 88 On the Bill History screen you can also view payments by selecting the Payments tab You can view all payments or payments made within a time frame To view the details of a particular payment highlight the line and click the Full Details button at the bottom Payment ID Note 484505 484531 484532 484533 484534 484535 484536 484537 484538 484539 484541 484543 List Actions 7 Cheque Payment Date Time 2 4 11 9 55 AM 2 22 11 3 16 PM 2 22 11 337 PM 2 22 11 3 18 PM 2 22 11 3 32 PM 2 22 11 3 35 PM 2 22 11 4 26 PM 2 22 11 4 29 PM 2 22 11 4 29 PM 2 22 11 4 29 PM 2 22 11 4 30 PM 2 22 11 4 30 PM Start Date Calendar Widget Payment Type cash payment cash payment cash payment cash payment cash payment cash payment cash payment work payment work payment forgrve payment check payment check payment 28 03 2010 x Voided f f f f f f f f f f
140. 013 9 26 1 Wai 2 The catalogue is displayed in the Holds screen Refresh Check Out Items Out Bills Edit Messages Other 0 0 00 Alert V Alert Go Back Go Forward Debug Search the Catalogue Basic Search My Account w Status PL Local System Administrator f Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search WINKLER Internet Unfiltered E Account created on 05 04 2010 Expires on 02 05 2016 Search Input Last Activity 06 14 2013 Keyword gt Contains x Last updated on 06 14 2013 pum Ta ES Cons blackb uj m Holds 3 nd e X ontains z ack bea C Aahe 0 ij And x Author v Contains M x Bills 0 00 Add Search Row E NETUS Alert Ba E Limit to Availabl Se i x imit to Available DUM Search Library Alert Bay Sort Results Sort by Relevance v Long Overdue 0 Search Filters laimed Returned 0 Lost 0 Non Catalogued 15 Item Type Item Form Language Audience Audiobooks Braille Abkhaz Adolescent Books Electronic Achinese V Adult Electronic Resources Large print Acoli General VID and Contact Information Music M Microfiche Adangme m Juvenile Library Card _ sitkalsa 3 Search for the title and place holds using the same procedure as placing holds directly in the catalogue Chapter 9 Holds 97 4 You may continue to sear
141. 08289179 2 0 8 1 a v b Monty 12 T s e sz Year Cyear r with enumeration captions v no Cooking light 108304605 2 0 8 1 a v b Monty 12 T s e sz Year Cyear r with enumeration captions v no Cook s Illustrated 108304588 2 0 8 1 a no 1BiNlontblly qmfonik3 e sw m y cm Year with enumeration caption no Country living 108303839 2 0 8 1 a v b TOoTSSues Ye v DecAah year j r July Aug combined with enumeration captions v no Crafts n things 108304801 2 0 8 1 a V b Sessonbalr 4 Av Issues year s Year Spring Summer Fall Winter with enumeration captions Food network magazine 108304833 2 0 8 1 a v b Tho IsSues Year v Jan FelX year x July Aug combined with enumeration captions v no Gardens west 108219964 2 0 8 1 a v b Ono TsSreSOr gar r 1 J year j m Feb July Aug Nov Dec combined Hello Canada 108221772 2 0 8 1 a No 1 W gkay 5P Tames yr k day w Ladies home journal 108304836 2 0 8 1 a v b tho Issuds Vea v DecrJakyear r combined Maclean s Canada s 108220410 2 0 8 1 a v b Weekly 5 aksstres ear lyear j national magazine Martha Stewart living 108304837 2 0 8 1 a V b MINothha P2TsSues
142. 1 22852 22853 Stream ID 901 901 901 901 Date Published 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 2014 04 30 2014 05 31 4 Select the issue that you want to receive Chapter 38 Receiving Serials Date Expected 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 2014 04 30 2014 05 31 Date Received 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 Notes Item Dist Sub 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number Jan 14 Jun 14 Jan 14 Jun 14 Jan 14 Jun 14 Date Last Edited RR 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 Unit ID Contents 352 5 Select the current working unit Click Set Current Unit located in the lower right corner of the screen A drop down menu will appear Select Auto per item Auto per item Use this if you want to assign a barcode to each item individually New Unit Use this if you want to assign the same barcode to each item within a unit Binding Process No Unit Use this if you do not want to assign a barcode to the item Please note that this selection will not create a copy on the copy table and is not recommended Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Canadian Living ition TCN BIN 30382305 Created By admin Author Database ID 30382305 Last Edited By admin Bib Call Record Owner Last Edited On 2008 11 16 1 45 PM Record 1 of 907 Start Previous N E Search Results Actions for this Recor Serial Control It
143. 1 copy Yes 3 copies n Reference Circulation Modifier No 3 copies Select required shelving location and click Apply just as if editing one record 191 7 All your items shelving locations have been changed Horse Books Items Bucket 233 Horse Books Items Owner bontest BPR Call Mumber 33294000074062 J6361 CALL DVD Drea 3431 LEV 3 This screenshot shows some of the other functions you can do from within a Copy Bucket If you are deleting items it is good practice to display Item Status field from the Column picker and confirm suitable status of items to be deleted Bucket View WILL v New Bucket Delete Bucket Refresh X Remove Selected From Bucket Add Selected Bucket 1846 Horse items Owner wolfcub BPR Barcode Call Number Deleted ocation Title R 1 33294001367465 lo enile Non Fiction Funny Cide how a horse a trainer a jockey and a bunch of high scho 2 33294001515774 lo enile Non Fiction The horse God built Secretariat and the groom who loved him 3 33294000868448 J636 132 GAMM lo juvenile Non Fiction Thoroughbred horses Copy Field from Selected Row to Clipboard Copy List CSV to Clipboard Print List CSV Print List Expanded Format Save List CSV to File Save Column Configuration Show Status Transfer to Specific Volume MM j sEdit Item Attributes Md Delete
144. 10 a 41 12 13 14 15 16 17 42 19 el RESI EE 43 26 28 29 30 Real Date w 2009 10 Gaade Circulation gt Check Out DateTime Year Month In list 2003 10 The Transform for this field is Year Month so even if you choose a specific date 2009 10 20 it will appear as the corresponding month only 2009 10 5 Select a value for the Circulating Library Circulation Circulating Library Equals Chapter 28 Generating Reports from Templates 293 6 Complete the bottom portion of the report definition interface then click Save Output Options Excel Output lc8v Output HTML Output o v Bar Charts o line Charte Recurring Report e d Recurrence Interval Run as soon as possible Send completion notification ta this Email address infotSlibrary com Selected Folder Circulation Choose a folder to store this report s output e C Output Folders gP Circulation Gave Ris Select one or more output formats In this example the report output will be available as an Excel spreadsheet an HTML table for display in the staff client or browser and as a bar chart Please note that charts are suitable to some result data only If you want the report to be recurring check the box and select the Recurrence Interval as described in Recurring Reports In this example as this is a report that will only be run once the Recurring Report box is not checked Select Run as soon
145. 10 000000 oo8 02082032003 nyub 000 1 eng 010 ta 2002030595 1 0 0 o20 a 0743233034 alk paper oo ta DLC c DLC td DLC 043 tan usp 1 10 0 0 0 00 0000000000 050 o0 o a PS3563 A319 b W36 2003 oe2 o o a 137 54 422000 100 1 taMcMurtry Larry S O 245 1 4 a Ihe wandering hill tba novel tc Larry McMurtry 260 a New York b Simon amp Schuster c c2003 300 axiii 302 p bmaps c25 cm 490 1 a Berrybender narratives tv bk 2 soo a Mapa on endpapers 1 0 0 0 0 O 650 o0 a Br tz West U S v Fiction 650 IE ta Eccentrics and eccentricities tv Fiction 651 0 a Yellowstone River v Fiction 650 ERI a Women immigrants 650 nj ta Young women amp 50 0 a Berrybender family tv Fiction a00 HEN ta McMurtry Larry tft Berrybender narratives tv bk 2 Standard Numbers 0 0 Library of Congress Control Number LCCN is the control number for MARC records distributed by the Library of Congress Can often be found in the Cataloging in Publication CIP information on verso page of a book Can be useful searching number 020 International Standard Book Number ISBN is a unique number assigned to items by publisher Can be 10 or 13 digit number Sitka support and training team recommend searching Evergreen and Z39 targets by both numbers if present on item before proceeding to original cataloguing When catalogui
146. 15 I BPE OO a E E E E A A EEE A E e EUM 200 122 MOO NARC RECOS ETE TET ETT EUER 200 1822 Uploading MARC Record Files icem qoe etn bU ran a EEA AE 201 18 2 3 Importing and Merging Records from Queues oc snaczcovaiccssescacsasevscdinnacdeseanovequeeucseaeacadecions 203 10 24 Managing UGS arinrin ier En E E Ei EEEE EEEE Mad tO EE EEES 207 183 Ska STIMU NARC TECON sa ceestenancasczesoiareineeiasesaaocaseectacasansaeeaneteedcanaaesanaucenectaseaanataronecsces 208 18 4 Creating New MARC Pe ONC irpirina E E 210 16 5 Cataloguing nNon PNySICal 1 SSOUICCS erisrniporireriariri Eine inni inni En E iO EEEa aedi 212 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC eC OCG Spey ccdettrnnerenacetecdsaneniedatvotevusdnpneuuaneesecinadetoctawesextndnprereantiabeieannnceds 214 19 Te GMC NATI RE OE ane A E 214 19 2 MARC Record Leader and MARC fixed field 008 esses 217 1909s Forma Miers ANG I OlMelt CONS 2cenacaene pravagesabanaiacatanenlextaidiatadanecdmosiates eudaudmiatduaiantaiesaddenenss 220 19 4 Merging Bibliographic Records in Evergreen cccccccecseceececceeeeceeceeeeceeceeeececeesesaeseeseeaeseegeees 222 19 5 Deleting MARC records bibliographic or title records cccceccecceceeceeceeeeeeeceesueeeseeseeaeeeeseeaes 224 LES ASA 24919 HUI BI s mi RR E NT Temm 225 AM TIC CONG NT T UI mU ITE 228 ZUNIBE GI Record BUCKETS recreere tmm 228 20 2 Adding Hecords tO BUCK S o55052569 692908930390680800 90010802 dan noteratannes ssae
147. 2 Potter Harry Fictitious 11 character Schools 11 Hogwarts School of 9 Witchcraft and Wizardry Imaginary organization Witches England Fantasy fiction 8 Bildungsromans 1 Children s stories 1 Fantasy films 1 Magic fiction Juvenile 1 Ha Potter film wizard Place Hold Sibley Sibley Brian O Add to my list B ea Publisher New York NY Collins Design c2010 1 nen ISBN 9780061397815 Phys Desc 1 v unpaged col ill 29 cm ke Raer Shelving Call nay location number tatus Salt Spring Island Children s s 4372 Checked Public Library library a out SIB 0 of 1 copy available at Sitka Oof1 copy 2 available at eee i i v Rowling JK Place Hold o y Book O Add to my list ISBN 9781551923376 eT Edition ed Li Heviews amp More Phys Desc p cm FARRAR RA RAKA RAAARAAR ANA AAN AAR RASA RAR RAAARANA ARA RAA RARARRARRAA A AAR SARAA R KI vem Shelving Call IDE location number Status Alert Bay Public ERO T Library Juvenile Fiction JF ROW Available 1 of 1 copy available at Sitka 1 of 1 copy available at ISLANDLink If you access the catalogue from http catalogue libraries coop depending on your search scope you may see multiple rows of Available Copies the branch the library the regional libraries and all Sitka libraries that are currently using the Sitka Evergreen system in BC and MB Chapter 21 Search the catalo
148. 2004 Database ID 103337909 Bib Call 372 465 Record Owner Previous Record 2 of 2 P h ISBN Identifier Search Libran Gibson ic Li search Search Type Keyword Format All Formats Library Gibsons Public Libr Recent searches Search Results Showingltem2o0f2 4 Previous Nick Jr Dora the explorer kit phonics reading program Lee Quinlan B Author Nick Jr Firm Added Author 88 V Book puowics Available copies Current holds 1 copy at Sitka Show 0 current holds with 2 total copies You can set MARC Edit as default view by clicking Actions for this Record Set bottom interface as Default To revert to your default display from a different display choose Actions for this Record Reset Display Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 214 2 MARC record is displayed Use scroll bar on right to move record up and down on screen Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Horse Edition TCN BKCT_31448752 Created By admin Author Clutton Brock Juliet Pub Date 2008 Database ID 31448752 Last Edited By admin Bib Call 636 1 Record Owner Last Edited On 2009 12 13 5 50 PM Exe tonto Options F Stack subfields F Flat Text Editor Z Fast Item Add Call Number Item Barcode T jp ie eae ee eee j Bivi m Form Conf o Biog MRe Cty nyu Updatesource
149. 2011 nyub o 000 f eng d 020 a 1101525673 electronic bk 020 a 1101525681 electronic bk 020 ta 9781101525678 electronic bk 020 ia 9781101525685 electronic bk 035 ta ocn 72234196 035 ta OConc 772234196 040 ta TEFOD c TEFOD td LzI 043 ERIS ia n us ma ta n us 049 ta DZIA 050 4 ta PRI619 3 B7153 tb C36 2011eb 082 0 4 tia 823 914 2 22 100 FEE ia Brooks Geraldine armia 3 jp 6 Copy Editor will be loaded for you to edit the item record 7 Once the item record is saved the imported MARC record and the newly created item record will be displayed on Record Details screen If you did not utilize Fast Item Add as described above the Copy Editor will not be loaded Instead the newly imported record will be displayed in a new tab You may now attach holdings as described in Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 18 1 2 Overlaying Records via Z39 50 Interface There are times when it is necessary to overlay an existing MARC record in Evergreen with a better MARC record from a Z39 50 target This lesson will demonstrate the steps required to achieve an overlay Overlaying a MARC record replaces an existing MARC record and leaves all holdings and corresponding holds active circulations bills and fines intact As overlay affects all libraries sharing a MARC record it is critical that this procedure be done judiciously and
150. 2015 Caption Pattern 1641 Holding Type Holding Code Cancel 8 Click on the Create Holding Code button Chapter 41 Special Issues 363 9 Click on the Save button Subscription Details Summary issuances Back N Filter Subscription Creator Editor Label Date Published Caption Pattern Holding Type Holding Code Cancel Distributions Captions and Patterns 1912 913165 913165 Spring 4 1 2015 1641 basic Wizard 4 71 8 1 2 2015 b 10 You must now add an item to the Issuance 11 Click on the ssuance you just created Subscription Details Summary Distributions Issuances CD ack Next Filter Label D Captions and Patterns Ilssuances Date Published Issuances Caption Pattern Holding Type Clone Subscription Refresh Grid New Issuance Batch Item Receive Delete Selected Holding Code 2015 Jan 2015 Feb 2015 Mar 2015 Apr 2015 May 2015 Jun 2015 Jul 2015 Aug 2015 Sep 2015 Oct 2015 Nov oon c Qn AR UN L1 DJ EJ E EJ E31 EJ E31 DJ EJ E E318 12 31 14 4 00 PM 1 31 15 4 00 PM 2 28 15 4 00 PM 3 31 15 5 00 PM 4 30 15 5 00 PM 5 31 15 5 00 PM 6 30 15 5 00 PM 7 31 15 5 00 PM 8 31 15 5 00 PM 9 30 15 5 00 PM 10 31 15 5 00 PM 11 30 15 4 00 PM 4 1 15 12 00 AM Chapter 41 Special Issues 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 basic basic basic b
151. 3 02 PM 2012 05 25 3 02 PM 33294001370618 2012 05 25 Cancelled E No Copy 2012 05 25 Cancelled Retrieve Patron Set Desired Copy Quality Edit Pickup Library Edit Phone Number Edit Mobile T ext Carrier Edit Mobile Text Number Set Email Notification Edit Expiration Date Edit Shelf Expire Time Edit Activation Date Edit Request Date Activate Hold Suspend Hold Set Top of Queue Transfer to Marked Title Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing Find Another Target Un cancel Hold Based on your library s setting hold request time can be reset when a hold is un cancelled Cancelled holds displayed on the Cancelled Holds screen can be limited by hold age amount of time or count a number Individual libraries can set this up in the Library Settings Editor See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Chapter 9 Holds 103 You can view details of a hold by selecting a hold then clicking the Detail View button on the Holds screen Place Hold Show Cancelled Holds Available Cancel Ca Cancel N Cancel Ti Capture D Current C Last Notify Ti Moti Pickup Library Request Date Sta Type BRA 00000000000 3 26 11 2 2 3544400036 O BHH 32 54 Ren m T 3 14 11 2 2 3398700066 0 BW 3 14 11 2 20 In T T You may add a note to a hold in the Detail View Holds Place Hold Show Cancelled Holds Actions for Selected Holds Record Summary View MARC Title Dora s big birthday adven
152. 336 2 Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical Search Results Results 1 10 of about 102 page 1 of 11 Preferred library Maple Library 12345678 Recent searches m t Refine Your Search Topic IMAGE AVAILABLE DVDs 17 Video recordings 16 Video recordings for 11 2 the hearing impaired Feature films 10 House furnishings 6 IMAGE AVAM ADLI Place Canada 13 3 British Columbia Nova Scotia United States England Canadian house and home 2011 NKM 2011 North Kamloops Magazine Library Shelving location Call number Status Ace Hill Library Magazine 2011 06 June Checked out Ace Hill Library Magazine 2011 07 July Checked out 0 of 2 copies available at Green Land Consortium Canadian house and home 2007 KAM 2007 Kamloops Magazine Library Shelving location Call number Status Bayridge Branch Magazine Magazine Available 1 of 1 copy available at Green Land Consortium Canadian house and home 2013 BKM 2013 Bookmobile Magazine 1984 Publisher Toronto Telemar Pub 1984 ISSN 0826 7642 Phys Desc V ill some col 28 cm 3 Click on the title to open the Record Details screen 4 Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records v Place Hold t O addto my list v Place Hold O addto my list f Place Hold 337 Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Canadian house and
153. 4 2 Opie PAC Ac ou nt TDEO AGE p22 tosbetsccdeeccecodectetacuecenasaseeteascdatecscaaaeesscsaeonscdenbewesctenesees 265 Wa PODO R E E E E E E 267 Po PON OV N eraa E E E AS 269 BN OU EET EE E NE 271 25 1 re AU E ea E E E E E MU RME 271 26 2 Madditid ONG cede aate e niubetede tie Seated alan cure abanedutadas tec dbua debedeecedesbanedetad anteendaqucdeieeaaseles 274 27 Greatng TemplalES TE Qmm 276 27 1 Choosing Displayed Fields ccccccceccecceceeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeseeeesseseeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeeseeeeegees 277 272 OOM MAG eNOS T CL LLLI ITEM Em 287 28 Generating Reports from Templates ssssssssssssseeenn nn nnne nennen nennen 292 29 Viewing Report CUNY eoe ees ssc c eee ccc meseectee ius eet etie iaa en ena anii ven oe ni EOE EER NEEE 296 30 Running Recurring Reports ain saunusineadasranurtr iene otia esae i og raa RC to Ro sta De re rt IRR t rd Nn 299 31 Viewing Editing Rescheduling HODOFIS o ce cect essdeceianntvcebesecnccamsscuecsdecdestensseenebreccantanseadeasdeweszeenougees 301 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates sss mener 302 32 1 Wha s in SITKA templates ecanseceecencaceceseeecenyucceaceesesatergueat sec engcesesecntacvecqsaieeaeenseceee seats gece 302 32 2 Clone a template from SITKA templates esses nnns 305 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual V 32 3 Modify a template aee teta oet tton E Ra he Ere Ett teat nan ona due Soxaeeedscektacec
154. 45 10 ta Vaccines and your child tb separating fact from fiction Tc Paul A Offit Charlotte A Moser 250 ta New York tb Columbia University Press tc c2011 300 ta 247 p 22 cm 504 ta Includes bibliographical references and index ta Questions parents have about vaccines General What are vaccines Why do we still need vaccines How do vaccines work How are vaccines made What steps do pharmaceutical companies go through to make vaccines Who recommends vaccines How do we know vaccines work Are vaccine preventable diseases really that bad Isnt it better to be naturally infected than immunized Are vaccines given in a one size fits all schedule Is there any harm in using an alternative schedule Why cant vaccines be combined to lessen the number of shots Why arent more vaccines given by mouth Can avoid vaccines by living a healthy lifestyle Why should trust a system that makes money for drug companies Should vaccines be mandated Is it my social responsibility to get vaccines Safety Are vaccines safe How do know if a problem is caused by vanccinoac What evetomoe ara in nlaco to enciire that werrinee ore cafo Haw do we bnew that different vaccinoc can he awon at the come time Na tan Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 204 4 On Record Queue screen click the blue coloured Matches link to view the match record This takes you to the followi
155. 50 PM BTE E 33294001739598 Pirate latitudes BPR 1 25 11 10 31 AM ETE HEELS 33294001110444 The deader the BPR 1 19 11 11 36 AM BTE ONE TUAM 33204001521385 World without BPR 1 19 11 9 39 AM BTE Show Last Few Circulations 33294001589670 World without BPR 1 19 11 9 38 AM BTE Edit em Attributes 33204001717644 THE BONEMEN BPR 8 25 10 9 52 AM BTE us l l Abort Transit 35194001368356 Last child in th BPR 5 20 10 12 33 PM BVALE Ts 34400000001 224 The art of keepi BPR 3 16 10 4 11 PM BHA Co ye ee Sundays at Tiff BPR 1 13 10 5 20 PM BHA 34400000001364 3 The transit is cancelled It will still display in the list but if you re click Retrieve Transits the screen will be refreshed and the item will no longer display as a transit and the item will have a status of Reshelving Cancelling a Transit at Checkout If an item with status of In transit is to be checked out you can override the block by clicking Abort Transit then Checkout Check Out Failed co x Check Out Failed Copy is in transit Abort Transit then Checkout In Transit by Mis scanning Sometimes mis scanning happens when you check in an item Occasionally the mis captured barcode number happens to be a valid item of another library This sends the item in transit wrongly To correct these mistakes libraries need to regularly access their Transit List and abort the invalid transits Chapter 10 Items in Transit 120 It is good practice fo
156. 82305 Record Owner Bind _ Show All Refresh Created By admin Last Edited By admin Last Edited On 2008 11 16 1 45 PM Actions for this Record Actions for Selected Rows Item ID Issuance Label 22856 V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Cdn Living 22857 V 2 No 10 2014 Oc Cdn Living 22858 V 2 No 11 2014 N Cdn Living 22859 V 2 No 12 2014 amp De Cdn Living 22860 V 3 No 1 2015 Jan Cdn Living 22861 V 3 No 2 2015 Feb Cdn Living 22862 V 3 No 3 2015 Mar Cdn Living 22863 V 3 No 4 2015 Apr Cdn Living 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Showing Recently Received Current Working Unit Auto per Item Distribution Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB Stream ID Date Published 901 2014 08 31 901 2014 09 30 901 2014 10 31 901 2014 11 30 901 2014 12 31 901 2015 01 31 901 2015 02 28 901 2015 03 31 Date Expected Date Received 2014 08 31 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 2015 03 31 Notes Item Dist Sub 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number Unit ID Contents A 0 Alerts Date Last Edited R 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 Receive Move Selected 1 Set Current Unit Issuance Label V 2 No 8 2014 Aug Cdn Living V 2 No 7 2014Jul Cdn Living V 2 No 4 2014 Apr Cdn Living V 2 No 5 2014 May Cdn Living Item ID Chapter 38 Receiving Serials Distr
157. 94865751 V Place Hold Phys Desc 68 p col ill 32 cm e Library Shelving location Call number Status CY Add to mv ist Winkler Library Junior Fiction JF Sew Available 1 of 1 copy available at South Central Regional Library Anna Sewell s Black Beauty the graphic novel Brigman June 2005 Call number JF Sew Publisher New York Puffin Books 2005 ISBN 9780142404089 pbk Phys Desc 176 p chiefly ill 20 cm wp ace Hold Library Shelving location Call number Status poe Reece ess m O add to mylist Altona Library Junior Fiction JF Sew Available 4 Search Results Showingltem11of17 4 Previous Next V chinrghoak Salitinn al Ohaa Semel s Passi Black Beauty by Anna Sewell adapted by Robin McKinley eee BLACK BE ALITY pictures by Susan Jeffers Ih ROBIN McKINLEY SLISAN IEFFERS McKinley Robin Author Jeffers Susan ill Added Author Sewell Anna Black Beauty Li Add to mv list S d 3820 Added Author d Print Email Available copies Current holds c 1 copy at South Central Regional Library 0 current holds with 1 total copy LOCATION CALL NUMBER COPY NOTES BARCODE SHELVING LOCATION HOLDABLE STATUS DUE DATE Winkler Library JF Sew Text 35864001185568 Junior Fiction Place an volume Available 2 Scan or type patron s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode and then tab or move the cursor out of the box Place Hold Place hold for patron by bar
158. AC login identification primary and parent guardian etc You can also filter by patron permission profile Searches can be scoped to your library federation or to all of Sitka but patrons from other Sitka libraries are only listed if they have used their card at your library and have agreed to share their personal information Search Search for patron by Barcode FI This is the recommended method if you have the patron s barcode it is faster and can retrieve accounts from any Sitka library Patrons from other Sitka libraries visiting your library for the first time must consent to sharing their personal information before the account can be used The following example demonstrates how to retrieve a patron account if you do not have the barcode To find patrons press F4 in an active tab or on the top menubar select Search Search for Patrons or simply click Patron Search button on the button bar You must have the Circulation Toolbar activated for the Patron Search button to be present Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Search for Patrons F4 3 the Catalog F Search for record by TEM Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Search for copies by Barcode F5 Search for patron by Barcode Fl Retrieve patron via Database ID Chapter 6 Patron Records 37 2 Enter search criteria such as last name first name phone number etc and select Filter by Permission Profile from drop down menu if desired and click Sea
159. Aggregate Man Aggregate Maon Aggregate Maon Aggregate Man Annarenabe v Add Selected Fields 285 Database Source Browser Source Specifier Sources vi Circulation Nullable Source Mame ER Field Mame El Circulation Base Transaction Default i Base Transaction Billing Totals Default Billing Totals Check In Date Time Default i Check In Library 2 Check In Library Default Check In Staff Check In Staff Default Circ Duration Rule 3 Check Out Date Time Default Circulating Item Circ Duration Rule Default Age Hold Protection Circ ID Default Call Mumber Valume Circulating Item Default Circulating Library Circulating Library Default Circulatian Madifier Iv Circulating Staff Enable nullability selection Y Y Y Y MM corresponding to the selected tranform Template Configuration Mame Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Display Mame Shelving location Circ count Check Gut Date Time Alter Display Header out month The page at Dip Hhephurn pines Pellljparys x 07 Change the column header En Lj Check out month Chapter 27 Creating Templates Data Type text id timestamp Remove Selected Field 18 Select Year Month in the right hand Field Transform pane and click Add Selected Fields Data Type ER Field TransFarm link in money Month Name timestamp Month of Year org_unit Months ago link Quarter of Year timestamp Quart
160. All from Catalogue T 17 3 Removing a Copy from a Bucket To remove a record from a bucket on Bucket View select the item and click Remove Selected from Bucket Bucket View CMT Delete Bucket X Remove Selected From Bucket Add Selected Bucket 574 intransittnrd Owner Tina ZSP B Barcode Call Number Deleted Lacation Title 1017727133 362 25 MIM Yes General Coll The mindful way through depression 101708064 Mot Catalogued Yes Romance Lj 1016335878 Magazine Ves Magazine Canadian home amp country 2006 101756961 745 61 SHE Yes General Coll Calligraphy alphabets made easy 1018207112 78242164092 ROT Yes General Call A freewheelin time a memoir of Gr 1018517097 GUN Yes General Coll Sisterchicks in wooden shoes a Sist Request Items Transfer to Specific Volume rdc gEdit Iter Attributes Delete All from Catalogue You may move some items to the pending area by selecting them and clicking Add Selected beside Remove Selected from Bucket You may temporarily remove these items from the bucket to apply changes to the remaining items then move these items back to the bucket once the editing is done Or you may retrieve another copy bucket and add the items to it Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 192 17 4 Retrieving Shared Buckets Access copy bucket management screen by going to Edit Copy Bucket 2 In drop down menu beside Choose a bucket select Retrieve shared bucket Bucket View Choose a bu
161. Available copies Current holds 1 copy at Sitka Show 0 current holds with 1 total copy 1 copy at ISLANDLink Show 1 copy at Powell River Public Library Location Call Number Copy Notes Barcode Powell River Public Library J FIC SEW Text 76618 Record details ISBN 9780517221105 ISBN 0517221101 Physical Description xi 226 p ill some col 24 cm Publisher New York Gramercy books 2002 General Note Originally published New York Children s classics 1986 Abstract ARRAY 0x7fcfibbb3ca0 Content descriptions General Note Originally published New York Children s classics 1986 Summary etc A horse in nineteenth century England recounts his experiences with both good and bad masters Shelving Location Juvenile Fiction Holdable Volume hold f Place Hold t O Add to my list t O print Email Status Due Date Available Details The record shows details such as the cover image title author publication information and an abstract or summary if available The Record Details view shows how many copies are at the library or libraries you have selected and whether they are available or checked out It also displays the Call number and Copy Location for locating the item on the shelves Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 245 Clicking on Text beside the call number will allow you to send the item s call number by text message if desired Clicking t
162. Batch Export Import then click nspect Queue Click the queue that you wish to examine and import records from The Queue Summary screen will open If you continue to import records right after uploading the MARC file the Queue Summary screen is loaded after you uploaded the file Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 203 1 The Queue Summary shows the total number of MARC records in the queue and items contained in these records if any how many of them have been imported and how many of them encountered an error when Evergreen attempted to import them Queue Filter allows you to display only the selected type of records in the table below A selected number of records 10 20 50 100 are displayed per page Use the dropdown list beside Records per Page to select your preferred number Use Previous and Next to flip over the page The records in the queue can be exported in non MARC format via the method selected from the Export Queue As dropdown list Exporting via email is not currently functional If you imported items via the MARC records you may view them by View Import Items You may add all imported MARC records in the queue to a Record Bucket by using Copy to Bucket Queue Tina5 Queue Actions Queue Summary Queue Filters Import Selected Records Records in Queue 2 Limit to Records with Matches Import All Records Records Imported 0 Limit to Non Imported Records View Import I
163. Call 636 1 Options Stack subfields Flat Text Editor Fast Item Add Call Number item Barcode Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 219 The OPAC icon for textual materials is displayed as in the example below Recent searches 4 Search Results Showing Item 15 of 16 Preferred library Bowen Island Public Library Horse written by Juliet Clutton Brock special photography Jerry Young o Karl Shone Clutton Brock Juliet Author Young Jerry photo Added Author Shane Karl photo Added Author Available copies Current holds 7 copies at Sitka 0 current holds with 8 total capies Record details ISBN 3780755537750 Physical Description 72 p cal ill maps 28 cm 1 CD ROM digital 4 3 4 in Publisher Mew York OK Fub c2008 A correctly coded moving image record for a video or DVD would look like this in the MARC Edit view with g entered in the Type field Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Black Beauty Ln Author Thompson Caroline Pub Date 1994 Bib Call J FIC Options F Stack subfields F Flat Text Editor F Fast Item Add Call Number Item Barcode MARC Record Fixed Fields Record type VIS Bibliographic source Ce pe m Pm i To L P R8 Bv Form o MRe Cy jou eC EN RN NN RN NN ERN Dest s Datel 1994 Date2 e bell IL L IL Update source The record would displa
164. Check In Enter Barcode EffectiveDate 12 3 2013 Actions for Selected Ite Z5P3014 is in transit Fine Tally 0 00 Copy to Clipboard Balance Owed Barcode Bill Checkin Date Family Name Finish Route T Add to Item Bucket i 0 00 75P3014 2770564 2013 12 03 1 5 SITKA 2013 1 Stacks Z3P B Show in Catalogue Show Holds on Bib Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Retrieve Last Patron who circ Alert Message Location Edit Itern Attributes Backdate Post Checkin Mark Item Damaged Printer Prompt Trim List 20 rows Fast Entry Asynchronous Strict Barcod d n Abort Transit Print Spine Label 2 Choose the printer and click OK to print a slip to be inserted into the item 3 The Copy Editor will be opened Fill in the alert message Click Apply and then Modify Copies at the bottom Chapter 7 Circulation 63 Copy Editor Dee ES Identification NC Alert Message o 1 copy ZSP Stacks 1 copy Yes 1 copy Missing disc 2 ZSP3009 1 copy ZSP A 1 copy Yes 1 copy Creation Date Owning Lib Call Number Age based Hold Protection 2013 01 10 1 copy ZSP A E ALB 1 copy Unset 1 copy Active Date Copy Number Floating 2013 01 10 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 copy No 1 copy Creator Loan Duration sitka 1 copy Normal 1 copy Jennifer Fine Level Last Edit Date Normal 1 copy 2013 12 03 1 copy Circulate as Type set Sls Unset gt 1 copy Tina 1 copy Circulation Modifier book 1 cop
165. Click on Export in the Template line on top of the screen This will export all of your templates Copy Editor mm D _ Identification n E 2 Select where you will save the template on your computer name the file and click Save Save Templates File As Save in O training v BR cataloging B circulation copy alert hepburn exercises C holdfreezing local system admin reciept template editor reports C short demos iJ transit report My Do ae ae W e amp ecklist For onsite training and go live E oWRLOOSS trip E WRL1903 tmp E WRL2403 trp Wt 2007 10 26 Pines training 4 My Recent Documents Desktop hy Computer File name templates hy Network Save as type All Files 3 Click OK on the confirmation prompt OQ 3 rp m Wh 2008 01 30 Gap Analysis Workshop Ag B 2008_training schedule 072308 WW barcode samples W barcodes Wh checklist For onsite training and go live Te cocopatrons Wi Evergreen 1 2 training notes October 2 Wi Fort Nelson cheat sheets HH Fort Nelson shortcuts For monitors Wh gap analysis workshop gnu barcodes Ht Meeting with John Egan Ht outline For PG BE Screenshots of Evergreen 4 You could email the file to others or save it to a flash drive and pass it to them so that they can import the file to their Evergreen accounts Alternatively your colleagues may log into Evergreen with their accounts on your computer to import the templates
166. ERDUE 20 00 For user groups that have no limits Sitka Support recommends setting thresholds to 9999 Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 431 48 9 3 Deleting or editing local penalty thresholds To delete a local threshold select the row to remove and click Delete Selected The threshold is removed immediately without further confirmation Penalty Threshold Mew Penalty Threshold Delete Selected Context Org Unit BSP b Group Org Unit Penalty Threshald Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS FINES 10 00 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT 10 00 Public Library Patrons SITKA PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOUT COUNT 50 00 Public Library Patrons BSP PATRONEXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT 20 00 F PL ILL BSP PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT 50 00 To edit a local threshold double click the desired row to open the pop up form Edit the form and click Save New settings take effect immediately ID 28 Group PL ILL X Org Unit BSP V Penalty PATRON EXCEEDS OWI Threshold GH Cancel Sag 48 10 Hold driven Recall Academic libraries usually allow extended loan periods to some patron types on some materials They will recall these items when other patrons request them Hold driven Recall automates this process When libraries recall an item they ususally shorten the loan period and block renewal They may also change the fine rate and maximum fine amount A notice via email is sent to the curr
167. ES gassacapiacscocaniacesticaaacewieseusatsceqacoectonaetncat EAE E TA 483 52 C rnesy Overdue and Hold NOCES errs e e EEEE EAE SEE 486 Secr LD i COU osy INDUCES s 2ssnscaszcsentsseatnavaniterscaunniaasaaanpiananeniaaeaarsianiaapsertetnontaieamasnatenniadasaainies 486 52 2 LIDAN OV GMOS NOUCOS sparingin EE E 486 D2 Os Ilia INOUCCS E A T A 487 52 4 Hold Slp and Holds NoliNCatONS ctnnyaedy Qro Saxo po ctva signe otimanlee deta peetidahecustaitessesmmacede Min seotidancanctten 488 53 Managing Jatermer OFAC StAlOMS ncsisqnenianacnssielesnnnacsinsaranieaancanannenisiaanasieuannidsbsanomianiennelelesnnnianeiasavenies 489 54 Evergreen System Pre dH rem etii S sirsenis E EE 490 lig PG O E 492 Doa Cre emi ole ACCOUNTS uote a r T E E A E E E NES 493 DL ES eM MSIE TT DOO TTE 493 25 ou meli Eel eee DT D TEUER 494 Dome Roseg Your Ir 4 ANTT LUTTE 494 sumeret S NT TT UTE 495 55 6 Granting OollOhal e SiimilsSlomsS cc acsaricotaanganstegnniendaasateniaassaataneeneansacosdentacbacaciegaiachesasiceaicuacanass 496 Part IX Administration tg Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 48 1 Overview Many Evergreen configuration options are available under the Admin Local Administration rollover menu Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Address Alerts Local Administration s Age Overdue Circs to Lost Server Administration Barcode Completion Workstation Administration coup
168. Edit the setting as follows Context By default your library is selected e Value Enter enum to display issues by enumeration This value will become your default setting for display issues in the OPAC Edit Setting Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in the OPAC Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in the OPAC This can be enum or chron Context ZSP B z value Delete Setting Update Setting 5 Click Update Setting 6 Search or scroll to find OPAC Use fully compressed serials holdings History OPAC Use fully compressed serial holdings 7 Click Edit 8 Edit the setting as follows Context By default your library is selected Value Select True from the dropdown menu to view a compressed holdings statement Edit Setting Use fully compressed serial holdings Show fully compressed serial holdings for all libraries at and below the current context unit Context zsPB r Value True Delete Setting Update Setting 9 Click Update Setting 10 Se 11 Click Edit Chapter 35 Serials 328 12 Edit the setting as follows Context By default your library is selected Value Choose one of the following e desc To sort from newest to oldest by active date e asc To sort from oldest to newest by active date call To sort by call number Edit Setting Specify how items are ordered This value specifies how items are ordered in
169. Edition TCN ocn464592731 Created By sthomas Author Silverhardt Lauryn Pub Date c2010 Record ID 103112302 Last Edited By 700173149 Bib Call amp p77 558585Dol 2010 Record Owner Last Edited On 10 29 10 3 51 PM Available On Current Copy Email Notify Phone Notify Pickup Library Request Date Status 3 26 11 2 27 AM 35444000367812 Ves BHH 3 2 11 1 54 Ready for pickup Notes Notifications Notes can be printed on the hold slip if the Print on slip checkbox is selected Key in the message then click Add Note New Note Public Print on slip Title Note Using the Column Picker you can display Queue Position and Total number of Holds Holds Place Hold Show Cancelled Holds Detail View i H Actions for Selected Holds Available On Capture Date Current Copy Request Date itle Type Status Top of Queue Total Number 5 No Copy 2011 03 09 1 1 new record for T Waiting for copy Yes Waiting for cap No 351802001333 2011 03 07 1 2 The girl who kic T No Copy 2011 03 02 0 4 Dora s big birth T Waiting for copy No T No Copy 2011 02 21 0 2 FATAL ERROR Waiting for copy No Chapter 9 Holds 104 Managing Holds in Title Records 1 Retrieve and display the title record in the catalogue 2 Click Actions for this Record View Holds FA ew MARC View Search the Catalogue Advanced Search Refine Your Original Search MARC Edit s Holdings Maintenana
170. Editor is where you fill in the values for item attributes You will use it to create or edit items Below tables provide detailed description of the fields in an item record The Copy Editor will display during the process of cataloguing an item and can be accessed through Holdings Maintenance or from the Item Status screen by choosing Edit Item Attributes from the appropriate dropdown menu 1 Add Item Record Summary View MARC Title Harry Potter and the deathly hallows Edition TCN 100580563 Created By beth Author Rowling J K Pub Date 2007 Database ID 100580563 Last Edited By tnrd cat Bib Call j823 914 Last Edited On 2012 12 13 12 08 PM Auto Generate Barcodes Use Checkdigit _ Print Labels Create Volumes Items _ Copy Editor Identification HI i Statistics 4 Status Alert Message Library Filter In process 1 copy 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 copy Barcode Deposit fakebarcodel23 1 copy 1 copy No 1 copy Creation Date Age based Hold Protection Deposit Amount 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 copy 0 00 1 copy Copy Number 2 Price 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 copy 0 00 1 copy OPAC Visible 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy Table 15 1 Identification Status Current status of the item By default a new copy record is assigned a status of In Process Item must be checked in to become Available or cataloguer can choose to change status to Available
171. Enable nullability selection Add Selected Fields 6 When you select a field in the middle pane the available data transforms of the selected field are displayed in the right pane Transforms specify how data should be processed before they are displayed compared Refer to Template Terminology for details of Transforms for each data type For our example template select Circ ID in the middle Field Name pane and Count Distinct from the right Field Transform pane You are counting the number of circulation records 1 Reports E3 Database Source Browser Sources ea source Specifier circulation Nullable Source Name E Field Mame Data Type FR Field Transform Output Type ER gt Circulation Base Transaction link F Billing Totals money Check In Date Time timestamp Check In Library org uni Check In Staff link Check Out Da be Time timestamp Cire Ds Circulating Library arg uni Circulating Starr link e Add Selected Fields Enable nullability selection Chapter 27 Creating Templates 280 7 Click Add Selected Fields underneath the Field Transform pane to add this field to your report output Note that Circ ID now shows up in the bottom left hand pane under the Displayed Fields tab 1 Reports Database Source Browser Sources Source Specifier circulation Mullable Source Mame Field Mame Data Type E Field Transform Output Type b Circulation Base Transaction link Count Ag
172. Evergreen pushes the due date forward to the next open day Overdue fines Overdue fines are not charged on days when the library is closed To review or edit your library s hours of operation 1 Open the Organizational Units interface as described in the steps above Chapter 49 Server Administration 474 2 Click the Hours of Operation tab Main Settings i Hours of Operation Addresses Organization Unit Name Grand Forks and District Public L Translate Organization Unit Policy Code BGF Main Email Address Main Phone Humber Organization Unit Type Library Parent Organization Unit BCE OPAC Visible Save Delete 3 Review your library s weekly hours editing as necessary To set a closed day click the corresponding Closed button Closed days Monday and Sunday in the example below have open and close times of 12 00 AM Main Settings Hours of Operation Addresses Open time Close time Monday 12 00 AM 12 00 AM Closed Tuesday 10 00 AM 8 00 PM Closed Wednesday 10 00 4M 5 00 PM Closed Thursday 10 00 AM B ud FM Closed Friday 10 00 AM 5 00 PI Clased Saturday 10 00 AM 5 00 Phi Closed Sunday 12 00 AM 12 00 AM Closed Save 4 Click Save to record any changes Operation hours do not contain time zone information Please do not adjust them even though your library is outside Pacific Time Zone 49 1 2 Library Addresses Addresses set in Admin Server Administrations Organizational Units appear in
173. GLCONS Green Land Consortium Label 4PLF Public Library Federation Cdn House and Home 1 distribution AMPL Maple Library A4 Subscription 361 Summary Method Holding Lib MPL 1 distribution Library Specific Options Note Changing the Holding Lib will unset all of these values Legacy Record Entry lt Unset gt 1 distribution 4Distributions lt Unset gt 1 distribution Cdn House and Home gt Issuances Unit Label Prefix Receive Call Number lt Unset gt 1 distribution gt Captions Patterns lt Unset gt 1 distribution Unit Label Suffix Bind Call Number lt Unset gt 1 distribution lt Unset gt 1 distribution 9 Click on the Distribution Label Chapter 42 Binding Process Receive Unit Template Magazine 1 distribution Bind Unit Template lt Unset gt 1 distribution Distribution Notes Modify Distribution s 367 10 In the Distribution window on the right hand side of the screen Click on Bind Unit Template Select your template from the list Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MPL Maple Library v Distribution Holding Lib MPL 1 distribution C Show Subs Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row 363 1 distribution Libsary Speci ary Specific Options Location Subscriptions m 4GLCONS Green
174. Hide these Text LSA fields within the Item Attribute Editor Horizontal layout for The main entry point for True False LSA Volume Copy Creator this interface is in Holdings Editor Maintenance Actions for Selected Rows Edit Item Attributes Call Numbers Replace Barcodes This setting changes the top and bottom panes if FALSE for that interface into left and right panes 1f TRUE Idle timeout If you want staff client windows to Number LSA be minimized after a certain amount of system idle time set this to the number of seconds of idle time that you want to allow before minimizing requires staff client restart Number LSA default 2 Items Out Claims Value is a numeric code describing Returned display setting which list the circulation should appear while checked out and whether the circulation should continue to appear in the bottom list when checked in with oustanding fines 1 top list bottom list 2 bottom list bottom list 5 top list do not display 6 bottom list do not display Items Out Lost display Value is a numeric code describing Number LSA default 2 setting which list the circulation should Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 449 Setting Description Max user activity entries to retrieve staff client Maximum previous checkouts displayed Ul l appear while checked out and whether the circulation should continue to appear in the bottom list
175. Hold Protection E Alert Message Barcode Circulate as Type Circulate C Circulation Library Circulation Modifier E Copy Number Creation Date E Creator D epasit Amount Deposit Fine Level Floating Holdable Last Edit Date C Last Editor Loan Duration E Location Collection OPAC Visible Owning Lib Call Number Price C Quality Reference S11 _ 4 If you wish to unhide a field repeat the above step 1 and 2 Deselect the field and click OK 48 13 Library Settings Editor With the Library Settings Editor local system administrators LSA can optionally customize Evergreen s behaviour for a particular library or library system For descriptions of available settings see the Settings Overview table below Most settings can be changed in the staff client but some Sitka wide defaults are maintained by the support team All staff accounts can view library settings but an LSA login is required to make changes New Sitka libraries should set up local settings as soon as possible after migration Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 437 Editing Library Settings l To open the Library Settings Editor select Admin Local Administration Library Settings Editor 2 Settings having effects on the same function or module are grouped together You may browse the list or search for the entry you want to edit Type in your search term in the filter box You may clear or re ap
176. KA templates gt Patrons Patron Surveys For more information see Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates If you need help tweaking this template please contact Sitka support Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 471 48 17 Work Log l Go to Admin gt Local Adminstration Work Log 2 There are two lists of records The uppper list contains the recent staff actions while the lower list includes the patrons affected by recent staff actions File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking 1 Patron SITKA test middle 2 Work Log 4 Most Recently Logged Staff Actions Message When 1 Tina edited sitkatest SITKA Mon Jun 11 2012 14 51 08 GMT g Most Recently Affected Patrons for Logged Staff Actions and Last Action for each Ma Message When 3 A default number of actions patrons are displayed You can increase or decrease the number by using the up or down arrow and clicking Refresh button 4 Ifyou highlight an entry you can retrieve the item and or patron record by clicking Retrieve Item or Retrieve Patron button Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 472 Chapter 49 Server Administration Most options under the Admin Server Administration menu are global Sitka settings that cannot be changed locally The single exception is the Organizational Units submenu which allows Local System Administrators to edit library contact information hours of operation and addresses
177. Land Consortium APLF Public Library Federation 0 Canadian House amp Home 1 distribution Legacy Record Entry 4MPL Maple Library 1 lt Unset gt 1 distribution 4Subscription 359 Summary Method 4 Distributions Add to record entry 1 distribution Receive Call Number Canadian House amp Home lt Unset gt 1 distribution gt Issuances Unit Label Prefix gt Captions Patterns Unset 1 distribution Bind Call Number lt Unset gt 1 distribution 0 fabel Note Changing the Holding Lib will unset all of these values Unit Label Suffix lt Unset gt 1 distribution Receive Unit Template Magazine 1 distribution v Distribution Notes Modify Distribution s 11 Click Apply 12 Click Modify Distribution s 13 Click Ok 42 2 Binding Units 1 Search the catalogue F3 2 Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical 3 Click on the title to open the Record Details screen 4 Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View 5 Click on the temstab 6 Click in the radial button for Bind Serial Control Co nits Distributions Subscriptions Claims Holder MPL Maple Library v Mode Receive Adv Receivd Bind J Show All Refresh Actions for Selected Rows Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Holder Stream ID Date Published Date Expected Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub
178. List table To make further changes click the survey name to open the detailed view survey List Add Mew Survey Delete Selected End Selected Surveys Display in suveyv ID Name Description vetu SI picis End Date ists Pall Style ls Required User ibrary Date Survey 7 Summary Opt in for receiving zm 12 30 09 11 46 12 29 10 11 46 x x hs newsletter fram Phi Ph the library This is what the survey looks like in the patron registration edit screen Note that in this example this survey question appears in red and is required as the s Required box was checked when creating the survey Newsletter May we use your email address to send you newsletters and p ather library related information yes no To see a patron s response to a survey retrieve the patron record Click Other Surveys to see the response marketing Display Alert and Messaq Notes Triggered Events Barcode Due Date Booking Surveys Group Member Details Test Password User Permission Editor Toggle Summary Delete Patron Account Survey 3 Request for permission to use email address on file to send newsletters and other library rel 1 May we use your email address to send you newsletters and other library related information Last Answered on 04 04 11 Answer mo Reporting on Surveys There is a shared template for reporting on patron surveys in the reporting interface under SIT
179. MARC Import Export interface When you use the latter you may include the holdings information in the MARC records Based on Sitka s configuration the holdings information will be in tag 852 including the copy s circulating library shelving location barcode call number status and others saved in the copy record MARC records can be exported from Evergreen in selected MARC and non MARC format MARC21 UNIMARC MARCXML or Evergreen Record Entry You need to choose one from the dropdown list The exported records can be coded in either UTF 8 or MARCS To export MARC records on Batch MARC Import Export interface click Cataloguing MARC Batch Import Export The default screen is Import Records Click Export Records tab to open the export interface Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 225 Fj Export Records Q3 Import Records E3 Inspect Queue Record Display Attributes Expor Records Use Field Number 0 starting from 0 From CSV File Or Record ID Or Record Bucket ID Record Type Bibliographic Records r Record Format MARC 21 hi Record Encoding UTF 8 z Include holdings in Bibliographic Records Retrieve Records If you want to export more than one record at a time the records need to be saved in a Record Bucket or their IDs saved in a CSV file If the CSV file contains other information than just record ids specify which column is the record id by filling it into the Use Field Number box Note that the field
180. Marne Data Type FR Default Circulating Library Can Circulate bool Field Transform Output Type Count Aggregate Default Circulation Modifier Hold Capture Requires Verification bool Count Distinct Aggregate Default Circulations Is Haldable bool First 5 characters fo Mon Aggregate Default Copy Mates Default Copy Status Is OPAC Visible bool First contiguous non Mon Aggregate First value Mon Aqgregate Default Creating User Default Last Editing User Default Shelving Lacation Default Stat Cat entry maps Default Total Circulations Default Circulating Library Mon A400 i mints A L Enable nullability selection Add Selected Fields LL ee pees Last Value Non Aggregate org_unit Lower case Mon Aqgregate Max Aggregate Min Aggregate Mon Aqgregate 13 In the upper right Field Transform pane select Raw Data and click Add Selected Fields Use Raw Data when you do not wish to transform field data in any manner Database Source Browser Mullable Source Mame Field Mame Data Type ER Field TransForm Output Type Default Circulating Library Can Circulate bool Count Aggregate Default Circulation Modifier Hold Capture Requires Verification bool Count Distinct Aggregate Default Circulations Is Holdable bool First 5 characters Fo Mon Aggregate Default Copy Motes Is OPAC Visible bool First contiguous non Mon 4qqregate Default Copy Status Location ID id First Value Mon Agqgregate Mame text Last Value Mon
181. Mat in list Between DN Not between Equals Is MULL Is not NULL Is NULL or Blank Is not NULL or Blank Value A For multi branch libraries you would select Circulating Library with In list as the operator so you could specify multiple branch es when you run the report Refer to Template Terminology for details of Transforms and Operators and Aggregate and Non aggregate filters 289 Chapter 27 Creating Templates 6 You may add a hint to the filter e g explaining the function of the filter what value is expected when setting up the report etc Select the filter and click Change Field Hint Template Configuration IL JavaScript Application Name Circulation Withi Description Number of circula P Change the field hint to B nad 0 circulation Documentation URI Click the calendar widget to choose a date Click Adi Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate NECS Filter Field Fielt Jperatc Value Field Hint Check Out Date Time Month of Year Circulating Library Raw Data Change Transform 7 Change Operator Change value Remove Selected Fields Change Field Hint In the above example we added some instruction on how to fill up the filter when setting up the report The hint will show up on the report creation screen Below is how it looks like on the report creation screen Coum STranstorm Action User Params Real Date NEN Circulation gt Checkout Date Time Click the
182. Numeric Search oi coccccesscidedecseeseadsccecesanieiwadsetaseuzezetbaderdiaedcesstisaseiedsteuseecieedeedees 147 13 2 MARC Expert SeArCH ssenarisinin rues nianeeds secte REOR shires selbtneuscsetunerstetachiuabedeeaeMas 150 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database ccccccccccecseceeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeneneeees 154 14 1 Adding holdings to title records 15 tcssuiecscssdvieussduderausddadedesinieddateiasodasiwdasdacelwsadeainiaidesdviedasss 154 14 2 New Copies and Eme om 156 14 3 Adding holdings for non physical resources ccccccceccec eee eeceee eee eceeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeseeaeseeaeees Nr 15 EOIN and Maintaining AGIOS 1s opc amr eir sud m oba conte dudas do sxav ara dup tuta ud vau bae duo Uc Raw MD aaR UD MV da ME 158 Bids OP mio io MERECE m 158 dus ONO TIOTONEICIS oos canbneietuer E edd Exe Dur iurEnK A NOV bU PEU TUMU S PELR HUN EPES Iu EEE 162 15 3 Copy E MCN T TUM 165 15 4 Batch Updating via ltem Status SOPBOTI sae orsa sobnas au oa Oae Exe 7o asa dec dan gest Laer ed sud kae sc eas d Srecaes 170 15 5 Replacing a barcode NIRE mS 170 A ONS LADO ea E E E E E E N NaEES 172 15 7 Transferring holdings axons enu satan cand ret tice ti Kad e te iD D Re o EXE a sues A77 15 9 TCC DOAS ern E EE E EE E EE 180 16 COM ELI INED 184 EN Ee ecc TU m TTA 187 17 1 Adding Copy Records to Copy Buckets ccccccecceeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeseeeaeeseeseeeneeees 188 17 2 Woking WII Copies
183. Out Holds Bills Messages Other 0 0 0 0 00 Display Alert and Messa Notes Statistical Categories Surveys Group Test Password User Permission Editor Exit Toggle Summary 3 Place a check in the box next to the desired working location then scroll to the bottom of the display and click Save In multi branch libraries it is possible to assign more than one working location 55 3 Editing Staff Accounts All staff are able to edit their own account when logged in with their account Staff can also edit an account in a lower permission group For example a Local System Administrator can edit a Cataloguer account but cannot edit another Local Administrator Account 55 4 Resetting Your Password Staff passwords can be reset in four ways Edit your account in the staff client while signed in as yourself 2 Use the Forgot Your Password link in the OPAC You must have an email recorded in your account for this to method to work 3 Have a staff member with Local System Administrator permissions assign a temporary password and then use method 1 or 2 to reset it to a secure password This method only works if your account is not a Local System Administrator account 4 Send in a request to Co op Support to have a temporary password assigned and then use method 1 or 2 to reset it to a secure password Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 494 55 5 Staff Account Permissions Below is a general outline of staff account permis
184. P3002 11 4 View Holds Patrons are able to view their current holds by clicking View Holds Items Checked Out Title The emerald atlas Eragon Martin Chuzzlewit The eye of Zoltar Duck in the truck Total items this session 1 Total items on account 5 View Items Out Holds You have 1 item s ready for pickup You haye 3 total holds 4 View Holds p Fines Total fines on account 4 50 View Details Chapter 11 Self Check Author Stephens John Paolini Chnstopher Dickens Charles Fforde Jasper Alborough Jez Due Date 5 74 6 19 14 6 20 14 6 26 14 T 18 14 Type Checkout Checkout Checkout Checkout Checkout 126 2 Items currently on hold display Patrons can also see which if any items are ready for pickup Using the Print button patrons can print out a receipt listing all of the items they currently have on hold Print Title Author Status The borrower a novel Makkai Rebecca Ready for pickup English passengers Kneale Matthew 1 in line with 1 copies The swan thieves a novel Kostova Elizabeth 1 in line with 1 copies 11 5 View Fines 1 Patrons are able to view the fines they currently owe by clicking View Details Items Checked Out Total items this session 1 Total items on account 5 View Items Out You have 1 item s ready for pickup You have 3 total holds View Holds 2 Selected total
185. Platform ANY v Resource Start time End time 98723000112233 2011 06 16 17 30 2011 06 16 18 45 Search the catalogue to create a reservation If you would like to reserve a catalogued item but do not know the item barcode you may start with a catalogue search In the staff client select Cataloguing Search the Catalogue or keyboard shortcut F3 to search for the item you wish to reserve You may search by any bibliographic information 2 Click the title to display the record summary In the Copy Summary select Copy Details in Actions column 3 The Copy Details will appear in a new row In the barcode column click the book now link 4 A screen showing the title and barcodes of available copies will appear Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 392 5 Enter the user s barcode in the Reserve to patron barcode box The user s existing reservations if any will appear at the bottom of the screen 6 Select the date and time in J need this resource section If the date and time set is incorrect the boxes appear in red For example if the time for which the reservation is set has already passed the boxes will appear in red 7 Select pickup location If there are multiple copies and any of the listed items is acceptable click Reserve Any To choose a specific item select it and then click Reserve Selected 8 A message will confirm that the action succeeded Click OK on the prompt 9 The screen will refresh and t
186. SID Al ee o resevai o padeiausc AE T cried opp dUETdR EUER OR Ra E VIO C MEU IE NR PEOe T Fur rau EE E25 2 AMWAY UNS conseua o eiudebius cite sdnhelvbedscauiadtunedebodsuinia dnx bed unsung EEA bursa ME PERDE E SOME WRONG RET TITO TT 43 1 Serials Routing ose ete EET 432 oenas Batch 81h eee ee eee ee ee eae Pen er tan nee Pe cnet 44 Caption and Pattern Codes ssssssssessssssseseesee nennen nnne emere sese ne seas 44 1 Caption and Pattern EIS e SORTEO TEC DET PR VIL B oking TNO CUO RERUM 45 AJ SING the Booking Module 2 ip2e ieee Mecsas ce geceececentarecencueseeserrasnesecbegeceseasosasachpaccescannsevecsesscuncasceseaneels 45 1 Evergreen Booking Tutorial iuo ce adacka dcdit dace ba rendi x rd en ndo ba ia bei 45 2 Creating a Booking eset ANG Micascsccctuces idera eiie conte c neidosneiecupedesacaodousacsted ancencauduaseecuusasece 45 3 Reservation Pull List anser da tick SE Rn HR t aed tak DR ka Roe ER dite Ft bb KU uw 45 4 Capturing Items for Reservations scrape emer en pe Qesmema cedo ea eaae saa vai ba eae ota e vtae aesse o tosu pra 45 5 Picking Up Reservations xu xx 52 Ka d ibd arena t octo Sr tst Gre nem baba Sr dra on ona ind 45 6 Returning Reservations assesses rddtaxiadatbieVeturizax dudipedir ncn nresca adips iai uM EE EVE Ud ni DUREU EM iiaa 45 7 Cancelling a Reservation cccccceccecc ccc eec eee eece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeseeeeeeaeeaeeges Zo 199g Og Admis KANON
187. Sets User Permission Editor Circulation Policies Tae Closed Dates Editor Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor Copy Template Editor Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds Hold Policies ltem Attribute Editor Library Settings Editor Non cataloged Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Negative Balances Reports Search Filter Groups Standing Penalties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Transit List Work Log 2 Double click in the row of the template you want to edit The copy template will appear and you can edit the fields 3 After making changes click Save 36 3 Delete a Copy Template You can only delete a copy template that has never been used Chapter 36 Copy Template 333 1 Check the box beside the copy template you would like to delete 2 Click on Delete Selected Copy Templates New Copy Template Delete Selected Show templates available at or above ZSP B Back Next Filter OPAC Loan Mint Visible Duration Condition r ivi af Magazines 702 True True True 2 2 ZSP Stacks magazine False False False False Alert Message v Name Owning Lib Mat Holdable Fine Level Location Circ Modifier Floating Deposit Reference Age Protect 3 The copy template is now deleted Chapter 36 Copy Template 334 Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 37 1
188. Sitka Evergreen Training Manual Evergreen 2 8 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual Evergreen 2 8 Copyright 2015 BC Libraries Cooperative Last updated November 23 2015 Table of Contents Maids Velo eee mm mmt 1 T Now in Everdioon WOISlON 2 0 2 1 icacacsrevianssenesadestaraignniarncearosiomntarsaenalariageitenatavedsasantenatieaieunnresievniass E NEL ML ERELOSSET TUTTI 3 EE Vae cs IEEE 3 Ts NBS ee ON Oo ttem ES UN ROE D T I MT TNTTTcT ES 2 Revisions to Version 2 8 and Attributions to Contributors eeseseeeeee mm 4 3 olka and e d lie lisible MOT 5 ee Sika Community Documentahol TET TE E 5 a liba E E e E E 6 Ale TOW O CONC UNO SU E EAE E E E EAE A E 6 a2 Guidelines for Support REGUES S 2 2c2se2sa2cescecesessesansessesuencecesaasenssensceaseansacsacecsceeasanseaseeeeneess 6 Ao Me E N E NO mee 7 D INT D T ITE 12 5 1 Installing the Evergreen Staff Client c5cccessienseecwwescedudensecennnchasdseaesedeanaeseveedseendanensecdeedesevacess 12 5 2 WO OISIOUNG d WV ORCS QIIOM ciccascanninavsstencdtacanbiacataacedaamiatansaneiedtaagiiahaiapatadeaeinberatadectianateuanaanes 12 30 OIG He le Rol MEAE o Ot o D meme 13 Di POO GING nl O VAJ EON TOT TT T Mmm 5 stem acue m9o i NETTO E E 16 Dion INAWIC AVION TOT 17 5 7 WY Oli te
189. Title The order of Copy Location can be adjusted on Admin Local Administration Copy Location Order Admin Help Ele Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking 1 On Shelf Pull List 2 Simplified Pull List Fetch More Holds Total Holds 3 Call Number Current Copy Current Copy Location Request Date Title CF Ber v 3 35864000701977 Christian Fiction 2013 05 05 1 23 PM Midnight sun PBF Fre 35864001581089 Adult Fiction 2013 05 04 9 22 PM The way back home PBF And 35864001551751 Adult Fiction 2015 05 04 9 20 PM yl irty List Actions 7 Prin Print Full Pull List Print Full Pull List Alternate strategy Simplified Pull List Interface The maximum number of holds initially displayed on the pull list is about 100 Use Fetch More Holds to retrieve more records To print the pull list you may use Print Full Pull List Print Full Pull List Alternate Strategy or goto Simplified Pull List Interface The full list prints Title Author Shelving Location Call Number and Item Barcode while the alternative stragegy also prints patron barcode Print button prints title only You may export holds pull list to a CSV file then import it into MS Excel to re format it for printing Use List Actions button on bottom left of screen 4 Click Simplified Pull List Interface The pull list will be displayed in a new tab Chapter 9 Holds 108 Hold Pull List Print Pull List Show the pull list for
190. Transforms determine how data is processed when it is retrieved from the database Different data types can be transformed differently Not all transforms are available to a certain data type Source Specifier Circulation Field Mame Data Type EC Field Transform gt Output Type E Check In Staff esses LLL Age Non Aggregate P checkOutDate Time e timestamp Count Aggregate Circ Duration Rule link L Count Distinct Aqgregate Circ ID id 7 Date Mon Aggregate E Circulating Item link E Day Mame Non 4qgregate Circulating Library org_unit Dav of Month Non Aggregate Circulating Staff link Day of Week Mon Aqgregate t Circulation Duration interval Day of Year Mon Aggregate Circulation Tvpe text Firsk Value Mon Aggregate E v n Dark Danaial hanl Haur hlan nanraanaba Add Selected Fields Raw Data To display the data exactly as it is stored in the database It is available to all data types Date This transform presents a timestamp as a human readable date in yyyy mm dd format For example timestamp 2007 11 25 17 54 26 07 will be displayed as 2007 11 25 Date is available to timestamp field Year Month Presents a timestamp as the year and month in yyyy mm format For example 2007 11 25 17 54 26 07 will be displayed as 2007 11 If filtering on a timestamp transformed to Year Month all days in the calendar month are included It is available to timestamp field Upper Case Lower Case Transforms tex
191. Winkler Library Filter aaa Copy Shelving Call Number Assis Title Parts Copy Status Cancelation Capture Current Shelf Currently Location Label note Date Time Sort O Lib Frozen O E o rder 1 Adult Fiction PB F And a playing dirty 35864001551 Available 1000074 f 2 Adult Fiction PBF Fre eethy the way 35864001581 Available 1000074 f barbara back home 3 CSI CFBery3 Pergren 52 midnight sun 36864000701 Available 1000584 f iction tawn 4 m 5 You may sort the list by clicking the column label or you may go to the column picker to choose the displayed fields and sort order Move the cursor to any column in the label row as shown in the above screen and right click your mouse The column picker will be displayed Go Back Go Forward Debug Hold Pull List Print Pull List Column Picker Show the pull list for Winkle Column in El 2 Auto Width Sort Priority Filter si py Location Sort iua s E Go Shelving Location Shelving Location 1 Adult Fiction Call Number Label s s 7 Christian Fiction Author si s 3 Adult Fiction Title si Is Barcode I K I s Copy Location Sart Order Current Shelf Lib si Is Copy Status Currently Frozen Fulfilling Library Fulfilling Staff ry 0o py p o o py py pw Dn Fulfillment Date Time 6 You may select deselect the checkboxes in the Display column to choose the fields that you want to
192. X operating system Linux operating system Chapter 54 Evergreen System Requirements 490 areliable high speed internet connection e 512Mb of RAM OPAC Terminals There is no stand alone OPAC client for Evergreen Patrons search the catalogue using a web browser Each OPAC terminal will require at minimum e areliable high speed internet connection a Web browser e g Firefox Chrome or Internet Explorer The OPAC will not work in Internet Explorer on computers running Windows XP Co op Support recommends you update your operating system or use Firefox or Chrome To limit your OPAC terminals to catalogue searches local configuration will be required Please see Chapter 53 Managing Internet OPAC Stations for more information Barcode Scanners Evergreen will work with virtually any barcode scanner if it worked with your legacy system it should work on Evergreen Printers Evergreen can use most desktop printers configured for your terminal to print receipts check out slips holds lists etc The exception is spine label printing which requires roll printers Evergreen currently formats spine labels for output to a label roll printer If you do not have a roll printer manual formatting may be required Evergreen might not print correctly to receipt printers using the Windows XP Generic Text Only printer driver Please use a printer specific driver instead Chapter 54 Evergreen System Requirements 491
193. a cataloged bookable resource Next To reserve an item that is not yet registered as a bookable resource find it in the catalog or under Display Item and select Make Item Bookable or Book Item Now there Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer Type Resource Start time End time Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 16 17 30 2011 06 16 18 45 Cancel selected Cancel a reservation on reservation creation screen Access the reservation creation screen by selecting Booking Create Reservations 2 Select any Bookable Resource Type then click Next 3 Scan or type in the patron barcode in Reserve to Patron box then hit Enter 4 Patron s existing reservations will display at the bottom of the screen 5 Select those that you want to cancel then click Cancel Selected Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 400 Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration Adapted with permission from original material by the Evergreen Community This chapter describes how to create edit and delete bookable non bibliographic resources Sitka default permissions allow staff members with Circulation privileges to create reservations on all catalogued items or bookable non bibliographic resources and to create bookable non bibliographic resources 46 1 Local System Administrator Booking Tutorials 46 2 Creating Bookable Non Bibliographic Resources Staff with the required permissions Circulator and above can create bookable non biblio
194. ace Barcode Save Columns 5 Use the Spine Label settings to adjust the label to match your physical label s dimensions Click Re Generate to see your changes Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 173 These fields are sticky by workstation so the values you set should appear by default File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking Admin Help 1 Item Status 2 Spine Labels Preview and Print Font size in points 10 Font weight normal or bold normal Left Margin in characters Label Width in characters Label Length in lines 3641 8653 LAM 1 copy Pocket Label Enabled 364i Middle Margin in characters 8653 LAM Label Width in characters Label Length in lines 6 Click Preview and Print 7 Click Print Page File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking Admin Help f 1 ltem Status 2 Spine Labels 3 Spine Labels 8 Depending on your printer settings the spine labels will automatically print to your spine label print or you will get a pop up asking you to select a printer Spine Labels Label Sheet A short video on printing spine labels can be found here Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 174 1 Open the Item Status interface Circulation Show Item Status By Barcode 2 Scan the barcode s of all the items you would like to print spine labels for Ensure the Trim List 20 rows box is not checked or
195. address so staff can alert patrons when there is a problem with their email 52 1 Library Courtesy Notices Library courtesy notices also referred to as pre due notices are generated and sent via email to patrons three days before an item is due Only patrons with email addresses in Evergreen receive courtesy notices These emails are not spam and should not be marked as spam by either patrons or staff The courtesy notice template can be customized at the federation or library level Please contact Sitka Support for customization Libraries can opt out of pre due notices using the org opt_out_email_predue setting in the Library Settings Editor One checkout will receive only one pre due notice If the due date is extended via Edit Due Date after the pre due notice is sent out no new notice will be generated Staff is encouraged to use Renew or Renew with Specific Due Date function instead of Edit Due Date to make sure a second notice will be generated in the due course 52 2 Library Overdue Notices There are three types of overdue notices according to the delivery method Notices delivered by email e Notices delivered by paper Notices delivered by phone Notices delivered by email The server sends overdue emails to patrons once a day after hours when the fines generator runs The emails are generated when an item is 7 days and then 14 days overdue this is a global Sitka setting These emails are not spam and sho
196. ae E 411 47 1 CDeckino in all items in the NDAY s caacnscaveacatdonecdacasasunnvacciacprouaniaredsnasiscanuies aiaa aiaiai 411 47 2 Generating reports and search list secenscesecdeureresananovecceanetessanncses draxeercansesevensacsacananiaecdnanspesenaneeass 414 Part VIII Inventory 410 Chapter 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure Inventory Module is part of Evergreen s long term development plan At the moment there is no dedicated inventory function The following procedure was developed by the Sitka Team based on the current available resources and the experience of inventory projects done by some Sitka libraries Evergreen has a feature that when an item is checked in out or edited a timestamp is captured in the Last Edit Date field in item record Sitka Team s proposed inventory procedure is based on this feature together with item status reports which can be generated on the Report Interface from Sitka standard templates The procedure starts from libraries checking in timestamping every item in the library Then reports can be generated to list all items that have in library status but do not have a timestamp within the time range when items were scanned This will be the search list 47 1 Checking in all items in the library You need to freeze circulation of items in a small area a shelf a row of shelves or one item type etc before you start checking in the items on shelf Depending on the devices you use you may choose one o
197. aged or missing and other functions 1 To mark items damaged or missing retrieve the item on the Jtem Status screen Chapter 7 Circulation 74 2 Select the item Click on the Actions for Selected Items dropdown list and Mark Item Damaged or Mark Item Missing Alternate View Actions for Cataloquers Actions for Selected Items ue Date Location Status Copy to Clipboard 7117 2013 11 59 PM General Coll Reshelving Add to Item Bucket Add te Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Holds on Bib Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Make Item Bookable Book Item Now Request Item Find Originating Acquisition Edit Item Attributes Edit Items Volumes Per Bib Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing Abort Transits Depending on the library s policy when marking an item damaged bills cost and or processing fee may be inserted into the last borrower s account Overdue fines if any may be voided at the same time See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for more information Following the above procedure you can check in and renew items by using the Check in Items and Renew Items on the dropdown menu Item alerts The Edit Item Attributes function on the Actions for Selected Items dropdown list allows you to edit item records Here we will show you how to insert item alert messages by this function See Part III Cataloguing for more information on item editing 1 Re
198. ago Non Aggregate Default Call Number olume 4 Circulating Item link Raw Data Non Aqgregate Default Circulating Library Circulating Library org_unit Week of Year Non Aggregate Default Circulation Modifier Circulating Staff link Year Non Aggregate Default Circulations v Circulation Duration interval iv Year 4 Month Non Aggregate m C Enable nullability m Add Selec Fields Template Configuration Name Source Specifier m Description Circulation Circulation gt Item Shelving Location Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Filter Field Field Transform Operator Check Out Date Time Year 4 Month Equals Change Operator Operator Change value value Remove value Remove Selected Fels Remove Selected Fields Change Field Hint Change Field Hint Hint 3 Select Check Out Date Time Click on Change Operator and select Jn list from the dropdown menu This operator allows you to count circulations done within each month for several months by just one report Template E Mame Description Displayed Fields Fields Base Filters Base Base Filters Aggregate Filters Filter Field BS Field Transform Operator Check Out Date Time T Year Manth In list BENE Change Transform 7 Change Operator a Change value Remove Selected Fields Change Field Hint Chapter 27 Creating Templates 288 4 on Add Selected Fields
199. ai eiua torpe dante orto ind br daa deo sbudedebedacceecsandedabedested datededss 495 55 6 Granting Additional PermisSiONS side sanusvaxceunsacuia tesseutasisadess des Vedan AED VELIE NEE a E aana PSP Us 496 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual vii List of Tables UESTRUM le T tet eter tens ener mmm 158 Wie O NU T T aca cubedeventautdiasieacauaaanied 159 O e CATO i E TT EET 160 Toe NI eie MT E 161 I9 T FORT MWS ou cm bre EER E Deredibix QVEM RC HA EMPIRE Cavatiioiunsntina sh oeucananente tues vdER Gad RES CES cannot thas FORM E DERE 221 1 2 EOT NOMS A E E N 221 44 1 Popular Caption and Pattern Codes eee ne ea ee ee et on cee ee ae ars Ae eds 87 7 1e DOORIMG ne a O oa E ai 440 ao a TO a E A E E eee ee eee eee ee IM UE 442 29 9 he Cit E E E E E ILU CbUN iu bI UR PDEdE 446 Ss FAC ES e E nme Him este itae Ernie pera A E E E E E E E E AA 447 20 5 GUE Graphic Usor Mern aCE saosan CMM NEN RRUAMIEDHUMMAEERIARDURPIEP RULES REED P DIA PERRUPKMNORA ENS 448 ANON a Mi EMERICUS KNEE 452 AEN aee ETT UU T 453 25 9 LIDESTU a nbus ND END UNDE RENDUM AME PMID D PM UN DM cinay EA N 455 n0 0c 456 AT ORO aa T OO r a E E E E 458 48 11 Receipt Templates and SMS Text Message c cccseccecceccceeseeseeeceeseeceeeceeseeecaeseesseeceeseesenseeesess 459 d OMIM ce IA EMT TUM n 460 sordos En EE meee I 461 AA
200. ake the ticket easier to identify assign and classify This will also be the subject line for emailed replies Screenshots or other files that help describe the problem may be attached here For guidelines on the kind of information that may help the Sitka Team respond to your request please see Section 4 2 Guidelines for Support Requests View and Add to Existing Tickets l Login to RT Self Service as shown above 2 Click a ticket number or subject to view details or reply 3 Additional information about the selected ticket appears including when it was created and last updated Also displayed is correspondence between the requestor and Co op Support either of whom may add to the ticket by clicking Reply History Brief headers Full headers n Mon Jun 11 16 31 08 2012 Fictional Library Ticket created Subject Need to reset RT password The original request sent by email or submitted with RT Self Download untitled Service appears here The subject line of your initial email text html 163b becomes the subject of the RT ticket Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 9 4 Enter your reply in the form and click Submit Status new Unchanged v Subject Need to reset RT password Atisoh Browse al Replies appear in RT and are sent to the requestor s email Emails with the RT ticket number in the subject line are kept together in the same ticket On Mon Jun 11 16 31 08 2012 Fictiona
201. alogued Type Editor This is where you configure your non catalogued types that appear in the dropdown menu for non catalogued circulations Select Admin Local Administration Non Catalogued Type Editor Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 463 2 To set up a new non catalogued type type the name in the left hand box and choose how many days the item will circulate for Click Create Non Catalogued Type Editor Create a new non catalagued type 14 Days iw Circulate In House LJ SITKA se Focus Location BTE s Owning Location Duration Circulate In House Delete Foreign Language Terrace Public Library eu Days French Books Adult Terrace Public Library e Days French Books Junior Terrace Public Library e Days Select the Circulate In House box for non catalogued items that will circulate in house This can be used to manually track computer use or meeting room rentals This is what the dropdown menu for non catalogued circulations in the patron checkout screen looks like Refresh Check Out Items out Holds Bills Check Out COO Barcode ate Title ETE Magazines SITEA Comic books SITEA Donated Magazines SITEA Paperback Book 48 15 Statistical Categories Editor This is where you configure your statistical categories stat cats Stat cats are a way to save and report on additional information that doesn t fit elsewhere in Evergreen s default records It is po
202. alone Renew Step 1 Check today s date above Hem Baronie Due Date Step 2 Optional Enter the patron s barcode Check barcode T Step 3 Enter the item due date 2010 01 10 Step 4 Enter the item barcode Check barcode El Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until done Step 6 Finish Print receipt T Delete selected transaction 3 Follow the same procedure as checking out described above Skip patron barcode if you do not have it 12 5 In House Use 1 Toaccess In House Use click In House Use button on the top menu bar Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 18 18 07 Check Out 2 Make sure the date 1s correct Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 136 3 Type in the number in Enter the number of uses of the item box Standalone In House Use Step 1 Check today s date above Step 2 Enter the number of uses for the item 4 Scan or type in the item barcode number in Enter the item barcode box Step 3 Enter the item barcode 79090000234567 Check barcode E 5 Repeat the above 2 steps until all items have been scanned 6 Click Save these transactions Make sure Print receipt checkbox is selected if you want to print a receipt Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until done Step 5 Finish Print receipt ra Save these transactions 12 6 Check In 1 Click Check In button on the top menu bar Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 18 32 58 Chapter 12 Offline Tran
203. ami m efi New Barcode 29090000123456 Billing Address New Password 1726 Line 1 123 Reader Street Line 2 Last Name Thomas City Vancouver First Name lenafer Province BC Date of Birth 1883 01 01 Pastal Code V3AATS Ident Value null Ced 12 3 Check Out Click Check Out button to access check out screen ERE TIWEEE y Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 132 2 The Standalone Check Out screen will open Step 1 Check today s date above Item Barcode Step 2 Enter the patron s barcode Check barcode Step 3 Enter the item due date 2010 01 10 Step 4 Enter the item barcode Enter or choose a non barcoded option Check barcode Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until done Step 6 Finish Print receipt 77 3 Make sure the date on the left end of the menu bar is correct 4 Scan the patron s library card barcode in Enter the patron s barcode box Evergreen Offline Standalone Check Out Step 1 Check today s date above Step 2 Enter the patron s barcode 29090000123456 Check barcode F Chapter 12 Offline Transactions Delete selected transaction 133 5 Check that the due date is correct You may delete then type in a due date in Enter the item due date box You may also click choose one of these dropdown list to select a relative due date based on the loan period Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 17 17 30 Check Out
204. ance Owed Bill inis Total Billed Total Paid Payment Pending Ez List Actions 7 Receipt Options 7 Voided this session 0 00 Payment Change Owed Billed Paid yPending 0 00 10 00 Total 0 00 0 00 0 00 Change Due Upon Payment 10 00 3 Checked 9 90 0 00 0 00 qz Convert Change to Patron Cred Change from payment can also be converted to credit Bill History Total Owed 10 00 Refunds Available 0 00 ayment Type Total Checked 10 00 Credit Available 15 00 Cash rF Payment Received 12 00 Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply Payment History Actions for Selected Transactio Balance Owed Bill Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type r Payment Pending v 10 00 12060567 2 22 11 4 10 00 0 00 grocery 10 00 List Actions 7 Receipt Options 7 Voided this session 0 00 Payment Change Owed Billed Paid Pending 10 00 2 00 Total 10 00 10 00 0 00 CDS Due Upon Payment mL V NU Checked 10 00 10 00 0 00 M Convert Change to Patron Credit fmo To use patron credit to pay bills select Patron Credit as the payment type If your library chooses not to use Patron Credit you may turn it off through a library setting See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for more information Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 84 8 4 Voiding Bills All bills under one transaction are grouped under one bill line You can void the whole amount or pa
205. ank and receive the item through the Serials Control View or Batch Receive function you can create the Copy Record at that time 41 2 Edit an Issuance The following instructions are for entering Special Issues or for editing an existing Issuance 1 From the Serial Control View gt Click on the Subscriptions tab 2 Click on the arrow beside your library name 3 Click on the arrow beside Issuances 4 Click on the Issuance you would like to edit 5 Edit the label date published Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims BMH 100 Mile House Branch C Show Subs Show Groups Refresh v Actions for Selected Row Location 4Subscription 375 b Distributions 4 ssuances V 22 No 1 2013 Jan V 22 No 10 2013 Oct V 22 No 11 2013 Nov V 22 No 12 2013 Dec V 22 No 2 2013 Feb V 22 No 3 2013 Mar V 22 No 4 2013 Apr V 22 No 5 2013 May V 22 No 6 2013 Jun V 22 No 7 2013 Jul V 22 No 8 2013 Aug V 22 No 9 2013 Sep gt Captions Patterns 6 Click Modify Issuance Chapter 41 Special Issues Subscriptions R Subscription Creator Editor Label Date Published Caption Pattern Holding Type Holding Code Modify Issuance V 22 No 11 2013 Nov 11 1 2013 31 basic ra 1 0 Cw a 22 0 10 0 365 41 3 Delete an Issuance 1 From the Subscriptions tab in Serials Control View 2 Click on the arrow beside your
206. anuaneceaianais ntareasieanetanesenainesec 230 Part Ill Cataloguing 146 Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes It is critical to search the database before adding titles volumes or copies Good practice is to assume the item you are adding already exists and to do an exhaustive search for the item before cataloguing it By doing so you will discover whether you need to add your item to an existing title record or if you need to import or create a new title record It is very important that you scope your cataloguing searches to the entire Sitka database either at the time of each search or via Workstation or My Account preferences You can set workstation search preferences to configure default search location and preferred search library and you can choose to have Numeric Search or MARC Expert search be the default advanced search view These workstation preferences override account login preferences set in My Account For cataloguing workstations it is recommended that the Default Search Library be set to Sitka This will ensure staff using those workstations are always searching all of Sitka 13 1 Advanced Numeric Search To search the catalogue for holdings select Cataloguing Search the Catalogue or Search the Catalogue or press F3 Acquisitions Booking Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve ilie by ICM Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Display Item E F5 Manage Copy Buckets Manage R
207. appear Use Back and Next buttons to browse the whole list Resource Types Context Org Unit BPR Back Mext Filter Inter booking y asinine Fine Interval Fine Amount Transferable and e uz Le yp circulation Amount Interval 1 E Reader 02 00 00 1 00 MDB False False 00 15 00 20 00 2 Laptop 02 00 00 0 50 MDB False False 00 15 00 20 00 You may also see cataloged items in the list Those items have been marked bookable or booked before 3 To create a new resource type click New Resource Type in the top right corner Admin Help x Debug Print Page New Resource Type Delete Selected Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 402 4 A box will appear in which you create your new type of resource Resource Type Name Tablet Fine Interval 02 00 00 Fine Amount 0 50 Owning Library BPR Catalog Item Transferable Inter booking and Inter circulation Interval 00 15 00 Max Fine Amount 25 DU Resource Type ID 1098 Cancel Save Resource Type Name Give your resource a name e Fine Interval How often will fines be charged This period can be input in several ways second s minute s hour s day s week s month s year s sec s min s s m h 00 00 30 00 01 00 01 00 00 Fine Amount The amount that will be charged at each Fine Interval e Owning Library The home library of the resource Catalog Item Function not currently available e Transferable This a
208. arget the record is shown as selected once you are back on the Record Queue screen You may inspect other records on the list Once finished inspecting the list click Import Selected Records under Queue Actions Queue Tina5 Queue Actions Queue Summary Records in Queue Import All Records Records Imported View Import Items Record Import Failures Delete Queue Items in Queue Copy To Bucket Items Imported Item Import Failures Failure Time ll View MARC Matches Import Import 1 Ek View MARC Matches m View MARC 1 PPP rra 4 TATTOO The girl with the dragon tattoo Queue Filters Limit to Records with Matches L Limit to Non Imported Records L Limit to Records with Import Errors Author of Language of work work GIRL WITH THE DRAGON Larsson Stieg Larsson Stieg English by Stieg Larsson translated from the Swedish by Reg Keeland 1354 2004 n 8 You are prompted to select import options Make your choices and click Import Import Items Merge Profile Import Non Matching Records Merge On Exact Match 901c Merge On Single Match 1 Merge On Best Match Best Single Match Minimum Quality Ratio Insufficient Quality Fall Through Profile Copy Import Actions Auto overlay In process Acquisition Copies Auto overlay On order Cataloguing Copies E E E E LI LI Use Org Unit Matching in Copy to Determine Best Match Cancel For Merge P
209. argets from the list Note that most free targets do not have a User name or Password field Some free targets and the subscription services held by some Sitka libraries require login Once you have made your choices click Save as Default to save the services you usually search and any user names and passwords you have entered They will be automatically selected the next time you open the Z39 50 screen Service and Credentials Local Cataloque AMICUS Access PEN m Assiniboine Community College Australian National Library o 0 0 0 m m Brandon University GBV Common Library Network in Germany Halifax Public Library Milwaukee County Public O aA a O m E ni a o Ca o m tA blic Library 3 Fill in preferred search criteria and click Search Note that the active search fields will change depending on the targets you select Different targets may support different search types For instance Keyword and Subject will only be active if the local catalogue is selected When you select multiple targets to search an active box may apply to only one target MARC Import via 39 50 Query Tip Click a search field label and then the Save as Default button to have that field focused by default Item Type All Farmats Keyword Pub Date Subject m Author ISSN Title caleb s crossing ISBN Publisher _ S S I Raw Search Clear Form Search
210. arrier charges may apply Mobile number 250 306 6206 Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashes Submit Cancel Using Group by Formats and Editions Search 1 Search for the meta record on which you want to place a hold On the Advanced Search screen select the Group by Formats and Editions checkbox Select the search type and type in search terms Click Search Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Search Input Keyword Contains x And Title Contains harry potter x And Author Contains x Add Search Row Search Library Sort Results Cariboo Regional Librar ir El Limit to Available Chapter 9 Holds 95 2 Click Place Hold beside the the meta record on the result list 36 Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows Part 1 2 F Place Hold DVD vus Publisher Burbank Calif Warner Home Video c2011 Add to my list ISBH OTRO TGR 0 e Phys Desc 1 videodisc 146 min sd col 4 3 4 in 66 of 99 copies available at Sitka 9 of 15 copies available at North Central Library Federation T of 11 capies available at Cariboo Regional Library The icons indicate the available formats at the search location The number in the parenthsis beside the title indicates the number of records with physical items Click the title to view these records Meta record holds do not cover E resources But E resource icons may be displayed if th
211. ary gt Check In Staff gt Checkin Workstation Circ Duration Rule dit Age Hold Protection gt Call Number Volume i OPAC Visible Peer Record Maps Peer Records Precat Dummy Author REE Dummy Tile Price Shelving Location Stat Cat entry maps ey M bool link link text text money link linl First Value Last Value Lower case Max Mi Raw Data Substring Upper case Non Aggregate Non Aggregate Non Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate Non Aggregate Non Aggregate Non Aggregate Default b Circulating ihrars _ Enable nullability selection Add Selected Fields QD You can not change the starting source table but have to follow the links to tables in the Sources pane Changing the starting table will remove all existing fields meaning building a new template from scratch Select Base Filters or Aggregate Filters to add or remove filters The steps are the same as adding or removing displayed fields Be careful with filters as usually changing filter makes a difference in the result set 32 4 Examples of using Sitka s templates Please clone templates in S TKA templates and set up your reports from your own copy This is to avoid any potential impact that may be resulted from changing the orignal templates The Support Team regularly maintains these templates Deletion may happen Deleting a template will delete all linked reports and output files Below are a
212. asic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic 4 4 15 4 1 rar rar 4 1 part part part part 4 1 4 1 T T pi z ra pi E 14 3 2 2015 14 3 2015 14 5 2 2015 1 6 2 2015 4 77 3 2015 1 8 2 2015 1 9 3 2015 p 1 10 3 2015 p 1 11 2 2015 b 1 12 3 2015 b 1 13 3 2015 b 2015 p 4 c o c c c c c c c c c co 1 2 2 2015 b 01 x A oh o ame TT TUITT TT TIT TT 364 12 Click on the New Items button Items Showing items attached to the issuance Spring Back Next Filter v ID Creator Editor 13 Enter Date Expected and click Create Items Showing items attached to the issuance Spring Back Next Filter X ID Creator Editor 5 21 15 C 1 33863 zsplsa zsplsa 12 03 PM Create Date Edit Date Create Date Edit Date Stream None Date Expected Date Expected Date Date 4 1 15 12 00 AM Received Received Status New Items Status Unit Expected Refresh Grid Refresh Grid Delete Selected Delete Selected 14 The item is now ready to receive If you complete the Date Received field and change the status to received then it will receive the issue but it won t create the associated copy record whereas 1f you leave it bl
213. atform Owning Library BPR Resource Type Laptop Is Required Cancel Resource Attribute Name Give your attribute a name Owning Library The home library of the resource Resource Type Type in the first letter to list then choose the Resource Type to which the Attribute is applicable s Required Function not currently available 4 Click Save when the necessary information has been entered 5 The added attribute will appear in the list One resource type may have multiple attributes You may repeat the above procedure to add more Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 404 Create New Resource Attribute Value One resource attribute may have multiple values To add new attribute value select Server Administration gt Booking Resource Attribute Values 2 Click New Resource Attribute Value in the top right corner 3 A box will appear in which you assign a value to a particular attribute Values can be numbers words or a combination of them that describe the particular aspects of the resource that have been defined as Attributes As all values appear on the same list for selection values should be as unique as possible For example a laptop may have a computing platform that is either PC or Mac Owning Library BPR Resource Attribute Computing Platform Valid Value PC Cancel Save e Owning Library The home library of the resource e Resource Attribute The attribute you wish
214. ath Patron Display the Items Out navigation button This setting will prevent Claims Returned circulations from counting toward these tallies Hold shelf status delay The purpose is to provide an interval Duration LSA of time after an item goes into the on holds shelf status before it appears to patrons that it is actually on the holds shelf This gives staff time to process the item before it shows as ready for pickup Include Lost In the Patron Display interface the True False LSA circulations in lump number of total active circulations sum tallies in Patron for a given patron is presented in the Display Summary sidebar and underneath the Items Out navigation button Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 443 This setting will include Lost circulations as counting toward these tallies Invalid patron address When set if a patron address is set True False LSA penalty to invalid a penalty is applied Item status for missing This is the Item Status to use for Selection LSA items that have been marked or list scanned as having Missing Pieces In the absence of this setting the Damaged status is used Load patron from When scanning barcodes into True False LSA Not in use Checkout Checkout auto detect if a new patron barcode is scanned and auto load the new patron Lost checkin generates Enabling this setting causes True False LSA new overdues retroactive creation of not yet existing overdue fines o
215. ation modifier eg books juvenile collection etc and library user home items owning and circulating library with additional parameters of maximum holds and whether a hold can be placed at all Transit Range defines where the library s materials can go to fill holds Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 434 3 Select the individual hold policy for viewing by double clicking on the desired row In the below example Public Library Users are able to place holds on BELK library s items of any circulation modifier and pick up these items at BELK library They can have up to a maximum of 20 holds Hold Policy Configuration Context Org Unit BELK Back Next Filter Matchpoint ID 18 Strict OU matches User Home Library x Request Library Pickup Library T Owning Library BELK M Item Circ Library BELK Requestor Permission Group Public Library Users Iv Circulation Modifier 7 MARC Type MARC Form v MARC Bib Level z Videorecording Format T Active iv Copy Age Hold Protection Rule T Holdable Fa Item Age Max Holds 20 Max includes Frozen Range is from Owning Lib Reference Transit Range Library x User Permission Group Public Library Users Cancel Save 48 12 Item Attribute Editor This is where you can choose to hide some unused fields on Edit Item Attibute aka Copy Editor screen such as Deposit Amount l Select Admin Local Administration Edit Item Attribute The Copy Ed
216. ay be generated and passed to the email server to be delivered to patrons Triggered events are viewable on the staff client via patron or item records They may help libraries find out whether notices have been generated for a particular patron or item To view triggered events for a patron l Find the patron record and go to Other Triggered Events Chapter 6 Patron Records 51 By default events with complete status for pre due and overdue notices are displayed Triggered Event Log patron specific Det Reset Sel ected Events Cancel Selected Events Print Selected Events Print All Events Show events at and below Powell River Public Libran Event Ede ed Target Target Siah State vo Event Name Reactor Event State Co Circulation Circulation 15 va x Time Baade Title Author Complete m IslandLink 3 Day n4 ann UN Core Type bi E 1 Courtesy Notice SendEmail 2013 12 1 complete 34418002 the glass room cleeves ani m x IslandLink 3 Day 044 mE i ann Baai a oe Circulation mj 2 Courtesy Notice SendEmail 2014 01 1 complete 34418001 pray for silence castillo linc IslandLink 3 D Ai Apply slandLin 8y oo 014 0 3 comptes en m ash f Courtesy Notice sendEmail 2014 01 1 complete 34418001 gone missing castillo linc 4 n t 3 Use the filter on the right to view hold notification even
217. ber lt Unset gt 1 copy Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Circulate Yes lcopy Holdable Yes 1 copy Age based Hold Protection lt Unset gt 1 copy _ Floating No 1 copy Loan Duration Normal 1 copy Fine Level Normal 1 copy Circulate as Type lt Unset gt 1 copy Circulation Modifier book 1 copy m lt Unset gt 1 copy Deposit Mo 1 copy Deposit Amount 0 00 1 copy Price 16 50 1 copy OPAC Visible Yes 1 copy Reference Mo 1 copy Quality Good 1 copy E Statistics 4 Library Fi d BW Legacy Type lt Unset gt 1 copy EW Vendor k 467 Patron stat cats Below are some examples of patron stat cats Patron stat cats can be used to keep track of information like the high school a patron attends or the home library for a consortium patron e g InterLink You would see these in the lower part of registration edit patron screen Copy Statistical Categories To edit or view information about an entry click on the entry in the drop down menu Some sip fields may only be valid on one stat cat Entries using them may not save Statistical Category Name cu sc No pick up Senin suada On Off On On Off 20Mile Add Edit District Library SIP location System Thompson WS Nicola Regional zi No Gender District Library Off Off Off on Sp Off Female Add Edit System Thompson Geographic Nicola Regional T l No Code District Library Off Off Off On SIP O
218. blic Library Federation gt MPL Maple Library 6 Select the branch that will own the subscription Your Library Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records Pub Date 1984 4 Previous Next gt AGE HOLD PROTECTION Hone Hone None None None None None 338 01 30 01 23 02 18 03 07 0415 05 15 065 05 7 Click on Actions for Selected Row and select Add Subscription MPL Maple Library C Show Subs _ Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row Location d Add Subscriptio vA SBE or AaGLCONS Green Land Consortium APLF Public Library Federation gt MPL Maple Library Add Issuance Add Caption Pattern Make Predictions Delete Subscription Delete Distribution Delete Issuance Delete Caption Patte 8 Complete the subscription information e Owning Library This field is automatically populated with the library you selected in step 5 e Start Date Use the calendar to select the date that the subscription begins and click Apply e End Date Enter the date that the subscription ends This date is required to generate renewal reports Bibliographic Record Entry This field is automatically populated with the record ID of the bibliographic record Expected Date Offset Optional Enter the difference between the nominal publishing date of an issue and the date that you expect to receive your copy For example if an issue is published the first day of each month bu
219. brary barcode If this is your first time logging in your username will be your library card number You have the option to change your username on the Account Preferences screen 3 Enter your password You should have been given a password when you received your library card If you do not have or cannot recall your password please contact your local librarian to have the password reset or use the Forgot Your Password link Chapter 22 My Account 250 4 Click on the Login button Log in 22 2 Resetting Your Password If you have an email address recorded in your library account you can use the Forgot Your Password link in the event that you forget your password 1 Click on the Forgot Your Password link 2 Enter your username or barcode into the appropriate field Note you must enter only one value this 1s an either or choice as some people only use their barcode to access their account while others only ever use a user name 3 Click Submit Please enter your user name or barcode to identify your library account and request a password reset Note You must have a valid email address associated with your library account If not please contact your local library for further assistance 4 Check your email account for the Library Account Password Reset Request email Chapter 22 My Account 251 ld Reset emails are sent every two minutes 5 Open the link provided in the Library Account Passwo
220. c Library Ex BOT RUT Available Tumbler Ridge Adult APB RUT Available Public Library Paperback 3 af 3 copies available at Sitka Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 148 5 To access the record click on the title link sf Place Hold The EC of Ireland _Rutheturt Edward G gt Book 3 LJ Add to my list Publisher Toronto j Seal Books 2006 Phys Desc D 0 000000000000 00000 000 nnne i Shelving Call m Cray location number tatus Fort St John Public Adult Library Paperbacks PB RUT Available nc Paperback PBK FIC Salmo Public Library Exlion RUT Available Tumbler Ridge Adult Public Library Paperback APB RUT Available 3 of 3 copies available at Sitka 6 Confirm bibliographic data as displayed in the brief record If satisfied that the record matches the item in hand you can proceed to add holdings as described in Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database Location Call Humber Copy Notes Fort St John Public Library PB RUT Text Salmo Public Library PBK FIC RUT Text Tumbler Ridge Public Library APB RUT Text Record details ISBN 9780770429072 ISBN 0770429076 Physical Description p cm Publisher Toronto Seal Books Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 149 7 Youmay also choose to view MARC record from this screen by clickin
221. cable in Sitka a patron will be waiting for a hold OPAC to be fulfilled this 1s the default estimated length of time to assume an item will be checked out Default hold shelf Hold Shelf Expiry Time is Duration LSA expire interval calculated and inserted into hold record based on this interval when capturing a hold Expire alert interval Time before a hold expires at which Norns in use to send an email notifying the d nan Expire interval Amount of time until an unfulfilled Duration uM hold expires Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 453 Hard boundary Administrative setting for Sitka use UC only Has local copy alert If there is an available copy atthe True False LSA requesting library that could fulfill a hold during hold placement time alert the patron Has local copy block f there is an available copy atthe True False LSA requesting library that could fulfill a hold during hold placement time do not allow the hold to be placed Max foreign circulation Time a copy can spend circulating Duration Sitka time away from its circ lib before returning there to fill a hold Maximum library target When this value is set and greater Number Sitka attempts than 0 the system will only attempt to find a copy at each possible branch the configured number of times Minimum estimated When predicting the amount of time Duration Sitka Not applicable in Sitka wait a patron will b
222. calendar widget to choose a date Click Add Year Month 7 Once you have configured your template you must name and save it Name this template Circulations by month for one library You can also add a description In this example the title is descriptive enough so a description is not necessary Click Save Template Configuration Name Circulations by month for one library Description a Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Filter Field Field Transform Operator Check Out Date Time Year Month In list Circulating Library Raw Data Equals Je Transform 7 Change Operator Change value Remove value Remove Selected Fields Change Field Hint Chapter 27 Creating Templates 290 8 Click OK The page at tp Ehe pburn pinescbe eraty x Mame Circulations by month for one library 9 55 Description Save Template Cancel 9 You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the template was successfully saved Click OK 69 gt Template Circulations by month For one library was successfully saved Cancel The bottom right hand pane is also a source specifier By selecting one of these rows you will limit the fields that are visible to the sources you have specified This may help to find out the source of the fields e g a circulating library is from the circulation table or item table Use Ctrl Click to select or deselect items Source S
223. cation Status g Copy to Clipboard 1 33294001367465 798 4 FUNN 2008 05 21 11 42 AM Adult Non Fiction Available Add to Item Bucket Add ae Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Edit Items Volumes Per Bib Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Add Items Edit Volumes Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library Delete Items Delete Volumes Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 189 You may highlight multiple items and add all of them to a copy bucket at one time 17 2 Working with Copies in a bucket Once you have your records in a bucket there are a variety of functions you can do from within that bucket One of the most common functions is to batch edit records This example demonstrates batch editing the shelving location of a handful of copy records Access your Copy Bucket view by choosing Edit Copy Buckets or Cataloguing Manage Copy Buckets 2 Select appropriate bucket from drop down menu Choose a bucket Choose a bucket Betrieve shared bucket re barcoding BPE 3 When bucket is displayed click Edit Item Attributes Bucket View Bucket 1846 Horse items Owner wolfcub BPR Barcode Call Number Deleted Location Title SHINE CO eo TOE FUNN P oe coeeeeereeeeeeeeee Funny Cide how a horse a
224. cause is resolved e g patron s account has been renewed or patron has checked out the on hold item these messages will disappear automatically Standing penalties are inserted when a patron s circulation condition meets certain criteria set up by your library e g the maximum fine threshhold the maximum number of items allowed to be checked out or the maximum number of overdue items allowed Standing penalties block some of the patron s circulation activities For example if a patron has a standing penalty of exceeding maximum number of overdue items the patron can not check out more items before returning renewing the overdue items If a patron has an exceeding maximum fines penalty he she can not check out or renew any item before he she clears the fines or lowers the amount to below the maximum fines threshold Standing penalties automatically disappear once the cause is resolved Standing penalties can be overriden on an item by item basis Alternatively you can remove the standing penalties temporarily to carry out the circulation actions that need to be overriden If the conditions persist once you refresh or re access the patron record the penalties will be re applied immediately To remove standing penalties go to Messages Highlight the penalties Click Actions for these penalties Remove Penalty Message Refresh Check Out Items Out Holds Bills Edit Messi 8 1 3 21 66 Staff Generated Penalties Messages
225. ce 2011 07 15 1 Biographies BPR DI cop l i Ci ca py CD ROMs BER lt Unset gt 1 copy 20 00 lc Creator US DENN Loan Duration OPAC Visible leah 1 copy ener som Normal 1 copy Yes 1 ca Children s Area Toddlers BPR i i Last Edit Date Children s Desk BPR Fine Level Reference 2013 04 10 l copy Children s Videos Educational BPR Normal 1 copy No 1 cc Children s Videos BPR Christmas Display BPR Circulate as Type Quality Christmas Storage 4 BPR a The order of the shelving location name and library code can be reversed by setting up Admin Workstation Adminstration Copy Editor Copy Location Name First This is where the shelving location appears in the OPAC Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 427 Search Results Showing Item 3of251 Previous Next I Er ULNOLD LOWE Frog amp Toad together Arnold Lobel vf Place Hold Q gon d To Lobel Arnold Author d i b ae ri ad Available copies Current holds Add to my list P oge hep 41 copy at Sitka 0 current holds with 2 total copies B5 Print Email w aii a rs CALL NUMBER em LOCATION COPY NOTES BARCODE SHELVING LOCATION HOLDABLE STATUS DUE DATE Powell River Public Library ER LOB Text 34418001175935 Juvenile Easy Reader Fiction Place an volume Checked out 05 08 2013 Prince Rupert Library LOBE Text 33294001203454 Juvenile Picture Books Place on volume Available 48 6 Copy Location Order This is the pla
226. ce where you specifiy the copy location order on Pull List of Hold Requests Items are grouped together by Copy Location first on the list to ease the process of tracing items on shelves You may adjust the order according to the layout of your library s shelves Drag a Copy Location on the list to the proper position then click Apply Changes 48 7 Copy Template Editor See Section 36 1 Create a Copy Template in Serials Adminsitration section 48 8 Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting This is the place where you select receipt slip type s to disable auto print attempt for it No printing will be attempted if the receipt slip type is selected Auto print button on individual function screen is automatically disabled for the selected receipts slips The optional receipts slips are Checkout Bill Pay Transit Slip Hold Slip and Hold Transit Slip Select deselect one or more then click Update Setting For multi branch libraries you may use the dropdown list of libraries to make your selection effective to the selected branch or your whole library system Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 428 f You may also remove receipt slip type s from Library Settings Editor Program Disable Automatic Print Attempt Type List 48 9 Group Penalty Thresholds Group Penalty Thresholds block circulation transactions for users who exceed maximum check out limits number of overdue items or fines Settings for your library are visibl
227. ch for more titles Once you are done click the Holds button on top to go back to the Holds screen Click the Refresh button to reflect your newly placed holds 9 2 Managing Holds Holds can be cancelled at any time by staff or patrons Before holds are captured staff or patrons can suspend them or set them as inactive for a period of time without losing the hold queue position activate suspended holds change notification method phone number pick up location for multi branch libraries only expiration date activation date for inactive holds etc Once a hold is captured staff can change the pickup location and extend the hold shelf time if required Staff can edit holds in either patron s records or the title records Patrons can edit their holds in their account on the OPAC Managing Holds in Patron Records 1 Retrieve the patron record and go to the Holds screen 2 Highlight the hold record then select Actions for Selected Holds Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Retrieve Patron Set Desired Copy Quality Edit Pickup Library Edit Phone Number Edit Mobile Text Carrer Edit Mobile Text Number Set Email Notification Edit Expiration Date Edit Shelf Expire Time Edit Activation Date Edit Request Date Activate Hold suspend Hold Set Top of Queue Transter to Marked Title Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing Find Another Target Cancel Hold Cave fl nliimncz gt 3 Manage the hold by cho
228. check them in If you cancel a ready for pickup hold you must check in the item to make it available for circulation or trigger the next hold in line Hold shelf expire time is inserted when a hold achieves on hold shelf status It is calculated according to the individual library s default hold shelf time expire interval in the Library Settings Editor See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Chapter 9 Holds 114 Chapter 10 Items in Transit Evergreen s n Transit feature is used to keep track of items transferring among branches within a library system or libraries It makes it easy for libraries to provide services such as allowing patrons to return items at any branch or place holds on items belonging to another branch 10 1 When will an item go In Transit 1 When an item is checked in at the non owning branch the status will be changed to Jn transit and a Transit Slip can be printed Items in transit should be set aside and sent to the destination branch according to your library s policy and workflow Transit Slip l a em Transit Slip Destination BHH Hudson s Hope Public Library 3905 Dudley Drive Box 269 Hudson s Hope BC voc 1VO Barcode 35444000367812 Title Dora s big birthday adventure Author Silverhardt Lauryn Slip Date 2011 03 30 Options mew Do Ne Pi Chapter 10 Items in Transit 115 2 When you capture a hold with a pickup branch other than your branch the item s
229. circulation have been resolved Bills include replacement charges overdue charges and manual charges added to the existing bills The following are some common scenarios you may encounter Chapter 7 Circulation 68 No payment has been made yet When the item is returned the lost bills are voided and there is no restored overdue charge The bill and circulation record will be closed and the item will disappear from the Items Out screen No payment has been made yet When the item is returned the lost bills are voided but there are restored overdue charges The overdue bill will be open The item will be displayed on the Items Out screen due to the unpaid bill The item will disappear once the overdue charges are cleared The lost bills have been paid already When the item is returned the lost bills are voided and there is no overdue charge or the restored overdue charges are less than the replacement cost There will be a negative balance in the bill A refund see Section 8 7 Refund for more details needs to be made to close the bill and the circulation record Or you may add a billing to the bill to make the balance 0 00 Once the outstanding amount has been refunded the bill and circulation record will be closed and the item will disappear from the tems Out screen If your library chooses not to automatically void a lost item billing when it is returned staff need to deal with the bills manually as per your loca
230. cked Out 3 By default the lost item now displays in the Other Special Circulations pane Other Special Circulations Actions for Selected Iterns Checkin Date Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Libr Fines Stopped Title id 33294001780840 A The Hunger games Book 1 of Trilogy Marking an item Lost will automatically bill the patron the replacement cost of the item as recorded in the price field in the item record or the price limits set up by the library and a processing fee as determined by your local policy If the price field is blank a default replacement cost as determined by the library is used Based on the library s setting if the price is 0 00 the replacement cost charge may be 0 00 or the default amount If there is no default cost you may manually add the replacement cost portion to the bill See Section 8 5 Adding New Grocery Bills for more information If the lost item has overdue charges based on your library s setting the overdue charges may be voided or retained When a lost item is found and returned your library may choose to Always void lost charges Void lost charges if the item is returned within a specified time period e g within 6 months since the due date Restore existing overdue fines e Generate new overdue fines based on the checkin date By default a lost then returned item will disappear from the tems Out screen only when all bills linked to this particular
231. cked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Items on Hold E items on Hold Holds History Physical Items Place E Item on Hold Title Author Availabili Formats Actions Place hold Chapter 23 Integrated Electronic Resources 261 Click Place Hold and enter your email address This address will be kept in the hold record at OverDrive separate from your library account If you wish to use another email account to receive notification after holds have been placed you need to update it in every pending hold Click Place Hold again Once the hold is placed you will receive a confirmation message and the E items on hold screen will be displayed Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists E items on Hold Holds History Physical Items Place E Item on Hold Title Author Availability Formats Actions Wolf Hall Wolf Hall NIE copies al You will be notified by email when e Adobe EPUB eBook ud Oof4avalal a Copy becomes available OverDrive Read Hilary Mantel Email address Mobile ca Place hold Cancel vacy Help 23 3 Checked out and on hold e resources in My Account You may view e resources currently checked out to or on hold for you after you log into your account The summary is displayed at top right of your screen Overdrive Test Messages My Account My Lists Logout Checked Out On Hold Ready for Pickup Fines E items Checked Out E items on Hold E items Ready for Checkout Click the E it
232. cket 3 Enter bucket number as told to you by the bucket creator and click OK The page at http demo gapines org says tmj 4 The requested bucket is displayed Note bucket number and owning library is displayed Bucket View Save Columns Copy to Clipboard X Remove Selected From Bucket tAdd Selected Retrieve shared b Bucket 1 Send me to the bookmobile Owner CFN123 ARL ATH Barcode Call Number Deleted Location Status Title R 33207001081159 FIC COR No Adult Available Air Force One a novel 19818161631 J ROWLING No Adult In process Harry Potter and the goblet of fire J 232323234234 TESTAAA No Adult On holds shelf Gone with the wind 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F No Adult Missing Water all around 3635300990762 F Adult Missing Water all around m 5 You are now able to work with the records in the bucket Bucket numbers are assigned by Evergreen Bucket number and owner are displayed whenever a bucket is retrieved Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 193 Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database When there is no matching MARC record for your ite
233. code 4321245 0 Place this hold for me Isa sitka Chapter 9 Holds 92 2 4 Edit patron hold notification methods and pickup location if necessary and click Submit Black Beauty Anna Sewell illustrated by Alan Marks Pickup location Winkler Library Notify when hold is ready for pickup Yes by Email Email Address testemaili xxXxxxxx cCOMm Yes by Phone Phone Number 250 xxx 1234 Yes by Text Messaging Mobile carrier Telus Mobility Canada amp USA Note carrier charges may apply Mobile number 25 xxx 98 7 Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashes ELS Click Continue or Cancel if the hold failed to go back to search result In step 2 checking the Place this hold for me radio button will set the login staff as the hold requester If this is your personal account you can use this button to place holds for yourself A default hold expiration date will be recorded if the libary has set up a default holds expiration period in their library settings See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Uncaptured holds will not be targeted after expiration date To view and edit the expiration date go to Holds under My Account Meta record Level Hold There are two ways of placing meta record holds Using Advanced Holds Options button l To place a Meta record level hold do a regular search for the title Click Place Hold link on either the result list or record details
234. code 1212012345678 Replace Barcode OPAC Staff Client User Name sitkatest 3 Save the changes by clicking Save button at the top right corner If the username is still the original barcode it should be replaced with the new barcode number Once a library card is marked lost Evergreen marks the card inactive and keeps it in the database If the patron has lost a library card before the See All button shows up beside the Replace Barcode Click it All barcodes that the patron has had are displayed in a pop up window Staff can now reactivate an inactive card by de selecting Active for current card and selecting Active for card they wish to activate Staff can also assign the active barcode as the primary card and these two edits should be done in tandem the Active card has to be the Primary Card Click Apply and Save 6 4 4 Resetting a Patron s Password Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record Click Reset Password button or type in a new password in Password and Verify Password fields Save the record Password 1234 lur dubio Reset Password Chapter 6 Patron Records 45 Existing password is not displayed in patron records for security reasons If your library uses the last 4 digits of phone number as the default password Patron Password from phone is set to True on Library Settings Editor please do not use Reset Password button Instead type in the phone number then save the record Clickin
235. correctly Please refer to Sitka s cataloguing policy Co op support or your library s cataloguing mentor if in place for more information about this process and its effect on the shared database Marking a Record for Overlay You must first identify the MARC record in Evergreen which you wish to be overlaid You do this by marking it for overlay The marked for overlay effect is temporary for a login session and only one record at a time can be marked When you mark another record the previous record is unmarked Once a record is marked it stays marked until it is overlaid or another record is marked or you log out of Evergreen Therefore you can mark and overlay one record at a time following through the entire process to completion before moving on to another record Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 197 l Select Cataloguing Search the Catalogue Search Search the Catalogue or press F3 to search Evergreen for the record that needs to be overlaid It is best practice to start with a fresh search screen so that all prior searches are cancelled This ensures the correct title record is opened and marked 2 Click on title link to display the record details It is important that you ensure the record is fully loaded on screen and displaying title information for the correct record in the top Record Summary area 3 Select Actions for this Record Mark for Overlay Record is now marked You will see
236. cted the email address will be printed on the hold slip A blank email address indicates that email notification was not selected 1 For automatic email notice and SMS Text it works the same way as the automatic overdue notices The notification email SMS Text is generated and sent to the patron 5 to 30 minutes after the item achieves on hold shelf status In order to receive these notices the patron must have chosen these notification methods when placing the hold and the email address in his her account and the given mobile number carrier must be valid 2 For phone notification staff needs to phone patrons individually Phone numbers are printed on the Hold Slips when holds are captured if Phone Notification is chosen Holds Cancelled by Staff Notice This notification is optional for individual libraries The notification templates can be customized on library level Please contact Sitka Support if your library wishes to use this service An email is sent to the requester when a hold is cancelled by staff on the Staff Client The note put in by staff on cancellation will be included in the email explaining the cancellation reason Shelf Expired Holds Cancellation Notice This notification is optional for individual libraries The notification templates can be customized on library level Please contact Sitka Support if your library wishes to use this service The emails are sent to the requesters when staff view and clear hold shelf exp
237. cted Rows Add Items to Buckets Record Summary View MARC Title Horses Edition 1st American ed TCN VPL 100741835 Created By beth Author Budd Jackie Pub Date 1995 Record ID 100741835 Last Edited By beth Bib Call SF302 B83 1995 Record Owner Last Edited On 09 11 17 7 32 PM Record 1 of 1 Start Previous Next End Actions for this Record Holdings Maintenance BPR Prince Rupert Library Limit thi Library This System Consortial Total 4 Available Fl Show Volumes P Show Items Show Libraries With Items Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library Due Date Location ASITKA Sitka Add Items to Buckets 4BNCLF North Coast Library sow Bem Del 4BPR Prince Rupert Library 1 4 636 1 BUDD J 636 1 BUDD i 33294000911354 J636 1 BUDD Juvenile Non Fiction Show Last Few Circulations Make This Item Bookable Y You can either add to an existing bucket or a new bucket Item Buckets Copy this ttem into which bucket Horse Books Items Add to New Bucket To add copy records to a copy bucket on the tem Status F5 screen From the tem Status screen select required record s and choose Actions for Cataloguers Add to Item Bucket as shown below or choose Actions for Selected Items Add to Item Bucket Scan Item Barcode Upload From File Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Barcode Call Number Due Date Lo
238. ction for more on Data Transforms Action corresponds to Operator used for filter fields It specifies how the given value will be compared with the field value See Template Terminolgoy section for more on Operators When creating a report you may disable an unwanted filter in the template by choosing an appropriate value for it For example if a template lists items created within a time frame specify a time frame between 1900 01 01 and today to cover the whole collection select all copy statuses on the list to bypass the filter on item status If the calendar widget is not provided for a date filter key in the date in format yyyy mm dd Chapter 28 Generating Reports from Templates 295 Chapter 29 Viewing Report Output Once a report is finished the output is stored in the specified Output folder and will remain there until manually deleted Evergreen sends an email with a link to the output if an email address s is supplied when the report was set up 2 To view the report output in the staff client open the reports interface from Admin Local Administration Reports Click on Output to expand the folder Select Circulation where you just saved the circulation report output L Templates circulation patrons ATE n cataloging Shared Folders Templates H Reports H output View report output is the default selection in the dropdown menu Select Recurring Monthly Circ by Location
239. ctions for Selected Holds Find Another Target This forces Evergreen to re target the hold and recognize the newly catalogued item Holds Filter Pickup Library BPR Actions for Selected Holds Available On Capture Date Pickup Library Request Date Status Title Copy to Clipboard 09 11 24 Waiting for copy Dora s box Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Retrieve Patron Show Notices Edit Pickup Library Edit Phone Notification Set Email Notification Edit Expiration Date Edit Activation Date Activate Hold Suspend Hold Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missi Find EE Save Columns 3 Check in the new item to capture it for the selected hold 14 3 Adding holdings for non physical resources There are two ways to catalogue non physical resources in Sitka Evergreen Recommended process is to use specially coded MARC records as described in Section 18 5 Cataloguing non physical resources Alternatively you may add dummy holdings to a MARC record using the same steps as adding physical holdings as described above Adding dummy holdings will scope your non physical resources to your catalogue If you use dummy holdings it is important to use item barcodes from within your designated barcode range Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 157 Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 15 1 Copy Editor The Copy
240. culation limit on combination Viewable to LSA Contact Sitka Support of circ modifier and patron profile for editing Circulation Policies View circulation policies Viewable to LSA Contact Sitka Support for editing Closed Dates Editor Set library closure dates affects due LSA dates and fines Copy Locations Editor Create and edit copy locations also LSA known as shelving locations Copy Location Groups Allows one or more shelving locations to be grouped together as a search location Sitka Support Copy Location Order Change display order of copy locations on Holds Pull list also known as shelving locations Copy Template Editor Admin settings for Serials LSA Serials staff Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Override default settings to block automatic receipt printing in selected staff client transactions not yet documented Field Documentation Create custom notes describing individual staff client fields to library staff currently applies only to the patron registration fields Sitka support Group Penalty Thresholds Set library specific thresholds for maximum items out maximum overdues and maximum fines Hold Policies View Hold Policies LSA Item Attribute Editor Hide unhide field s on Edit Item LSA Attributes screen Library Settings Editor Detailed library configuration settings LSA Sitka supprt Non Catalogued Type Editor Create and edit optional non catalogued LSA item types Notifications
241. culation rules at your library and the federation level You can filter the display to show rules applied to just your library s items Click Filter under Context Org Unit In the popped up window select Copy Circ Lib from the first dropdown list s from the second list and your library the third Click Apply to limit display to just your library Circulation Policy Configuration Context Org Unit BPRDP Back Next Filter Copy Copy User MARC Most Item i On ZAPI res irculz wv MARC MARI H Vide Age Age a J oF Active om Org Cire Ownin Home Renew Juvenil As Copy MORG MERE Bib bies Refere or Pe Age Group Unit i EM Modifi Locatii Type Form Forma Lower Upper Lib Lib Lib Level lt Bound Bound Filter Results Copy Circ Lib 2 Im Cancel 3 True BC ISLAN BABM Unset Unset book False OneCz Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 420 3 The resulting screen provides a summary view of each circulation rule for your library and more detail can be seen by clicking on the individual entries Circulation Policy Configuration Context Org Unit BPRDP v Minim Availat Copy t Ratio User User Circuli Copy MARC MARC MARC videor Age Age ad Forma Lower Upper Bib Bound Bound Item Hard Grace Max Age ssa Duratic Renew Copy Copy User Circ Ownin Home Renew Juvenil zaj i Lib Lib Lib m Locate Typa JL IL j L PL audio ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset False Fa
242. d Templates in SITKA templates 309 To add a displayed field go to the Sources to open the source table to find the field or follow the links to the appropriate table which contains the field you want to display Click the text in the Sources to display fields in the table in Field Name pane Click the arrow in front of the text to display the linked tables in the Sources pane Once find the field select it in Field Name pane and the appropriate transform in Field Transform pane Click Add Selected Fields The below screenshot shows how to add Precat Dummy Title field Find Circulating Item table which is linked from Circulation Click it text to display its fields in Field Name Select Precat Dummy Title and then Raw Data in Field Transform lReports 2Tab 2 Go Back Reload Database Source Browser Sources Source Specifier Circulation Circulating Item Nullable Source Name Field Name Data Type R Field Transform Output Type 4Circulation Last Edit Date Time timesta Count Aggregate Default Archived Copy Stat Cat Entries Last Editing User link Count Distinct Aggregate Default Archived Patron Stat Cat Entries Loan Duration int First 5 characters for US ZL Non Aggregate Default gt Base Transaction Monograph Parts link First contiguous non spac Non Aggregate Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default gt Billing Totals gt Check In Libr
243. d record details pages Open Reviews amp More If set to TRUE Reviews amp More True False LSA in a new tab links in the search results to be opened in a new tab Org unit hiding depth Admin setting controlled by Sitka Number Sitka 0 Org Unit is nota hold If set this org unit will not be True False Sitka pickup library offered to the patron as an option for a hold pickup location This setting Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 456 Setting Data type Edited by Notes has no affect on searching or hold targeting Paging shortcut links The characters in this string in Regular Sitka for OPAC Browse order will be used as shortcut links expression for quick paging in the OPAC browse interface Any sequence surrounded by asterisks will be taken as a whole label not split into individual labels at the character level but only the first character will serve as the basis of the search Patron self reg display Number of seconds to wait before Duration Sitka timeout reloading the patron self registration interface to clear sensitive data Patron self reg expire If set this is the amount of time Duration Sitka interval a pending user account will be allowed to sit in the database After this time the pending user information will be purged Payment history age The OPAC should not display Duration LSA Not in use limit payments by patrons that are o
244. d to it For example you may have created a volume record but did not add a copy to it To delete it you need to find the title Go to Holdings Maintenance Highlight the orphan volume record select Actions for Selected Rows Delete Volumes If this is the last volume the bibliographic record will be deleted too Delete a bibliographic record without volume copy attached You may have created imported a MARC record but did not use it for your copy In such a scenario you may delete the record Find the title on the catalogue select Actions for This Record Delete Record The record will be deleted If you do not see any copies under the record but are prompted that the record can not be deleted very likely there are orphan volume records still under the title You need to go to Holdings Maintenance to locate and delete the volume records The MARC record will be deleted when you delete the last volume Deleted MARC records can be retrieved and undeleted if you know the record s database id Go to the dropdown menu Cataloguing Retrieve Title via Database ID Type in the record id Once the record is displayed with red coloured background select Actions for This Record Undelete Record to undelete it Co op support regularly cleans up volume records without copies and bibliographic records without copies or volumes Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 183 Chapter 16 Copy Alerts This lesson explains wh
245. d volume starting in July 2 0 8 1 a vol b no 1 year month w q x 06 Quarterly Increments continuously without volume 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year month w q x 01 Quarterly Restart and volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 4 v r 1 year month w q x O1 Quarterly Restart and year used as volume number 27705 95 1 dq VoL DUNO S M d VIS Wee Gs ks OL e Quarterly Restart and volume starting in March 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 4 v r 1 year month w q x 03 Quarterly Restart and volume starting in July 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 4 v r 1 year 1 month w q x 07 Quarterly Restart and volume starting in October 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 4 v r 1 year 1 month w q x 10 Half yearly Half yearly Increments continuously without volume number 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year month w f x 01 Half yearly Increments continuously with volume number E o I a Vol Po eae no i 1 year j men month Ww ae ae O1 Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 382 Half yearly Restart with volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 2 v r w Px 01 Half yearly Restart wit
246. de You can pay your fines at the library Chapter 22 My Account 256 22 4 My Lists The My Lists section allows you to create edit share and remove lists Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Create New List Enter the name of the new list Share this list No v Submit Cancel List description optional My Existing Lists Saved Lists Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List DVDs _ MM EE CE Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List Travel books uc Lists are lists of items that can be used for a number of purposes For example to keep track of what books you have read if you have not chosen to retain your checkout history as described in previous section books you would like to read to maintain a class reading list to maintain a reading list for a book club to keep a list of books you would like for your birthday etc There are an unlimited number of uses You can see the lists you have created in the My Lists section of the My Account area How do I create a list Best practice is to create a list after you have logged in to your account In the My Account area click on My Lists In the Create new list section enter a name for your list into the text box You may also enter an optional description Decide if you would like to share the contents of the list with other users and click the Submit button You can a
247. diobook Publisher ISBN Phys Desc Electronic resource Electronic resource England Pottermore 2012 9781781100127 electronic bk 1 online resource ill Click to access online library card required Click to access online library card required 154 of 200 copies available at Sitka 12 of 20 copies available at North Coast Library Federation 1 of 4 copies available at Prince Rupert Library 6 Harry Potter and the prisoner of Azkaban 3 Rowling J K V Book E book E audiobook cD audi Book E book E audiobook 4 CD audiobook Publisher ISBN Phys Desc Electronic resource Electronic resource England Pottermore 2012 9781781100097 electronic bk 1 online resource ill Click to access online library card required Click to access online library card required 145 of 185 copies available at Sitka 14 of 15 copies available at North Coast Library Federation 3 of 4 copies available at Prince Rupert Library You may select acceptable formats on placing hold screen Place Hold Place Hold place Hold 3 O Add to my list Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows electronic resource by J K Rowling illustrations by Mary GrandPr Select your desired format s Select your desired language s If none are selected any available formats may be used If none are selected any available languages may be used Book CD audiobook
248. dit date True False LSA for entry edit of patron into patron standing penalties and standing penalties and messages messages Show billing tab first If true accounts for patrons with bills True false LSA when bills are present will open to the billing tab instead of check out Show XXXXX field on The XXXXX field will be shown True False LSA patron registration on the patron registration screen Showing a field makes it appear with required fields even when not required If the field 1s required this setting is ignored True False LSA Suggest XXXXX field The XXXXX field will be suggested on patron registration on the patron registration screen Suggesting a field makes it appear when suggested fields are shown If the field is shown or required this setting is ignored Toggle off the patron When true the patron summary True False LSA summary sidebar after sidebar will collapse after a new first view patron sub interface is selected Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 45 URL for remote The format and naming convention Text Not in use directory containing list for the files found in this directory column settings match those in the local settings directory for a given workstation An administrator could create the desired settings locally and then copy all the tree_columns_for_ files to the remote directory Uncheck bills by Uncheck bills by default in the True False
249. e Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booki Check Qut Items Fl Check In Items F2 Renew Items Ctrl F2 Register Patron Shift Fl Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F8 Capture Holds Shift F2 Pull List for Hold Requests Browse Holds Shelf Place Hold Fi Show Item Status by Barcode F5 Retrieve Patron by Bartede 2 Scan the barcode or type it and click Submit The current status of the item is displayed with selected other fields You can use the column picker to select more fields to view Scan Item larcode ER z 7 3 Column Picker Barcode Upload From File Alternate View Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Sele Conun Peter l Alert Message Barcode Call Number Due Date Location Status Title a 1017461593 E DOR 4 14 11 11 59 PM Easy Checked out s D ora s storytime collection Chapter 7 Circulation 72 3 Click the Alternate View button and the item summary and circulation history will be displayed Scan Item Barcode Upload From File Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Alternate View x Title Dora s storytime collectior Edition TCN BKCT 31395626 Created By admin Author Pub Date c2003 Record ID 31395626 last Edited By admin Bib Call E DOR Item Call E DOR Record Owner Last Edited On 12 13 09 5 50 PM Quick Summary Circulation History Holds Transit Cataloging Info Barcode 1017461593 Circ Library BKCT KAM Item Call Status Checked
250. e Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available There are 3 settings in the Library Settings Editor that must be configured for your serials OPAC to display in this manner For more information please refer to Section 35 2 Administration Chapter 39 OPAC 358 Chapter 40 Reports 40 1 Serials Report Templates An account with Reporter permissions is required to clone templates from the Shared Folders section and save them to My Folders For more information regarding reports and creating reports from templates please see Part V Reports 1 Subscription Titles by holding library for selected year provides a list of all current subscriptions used for reviewing subscriptions serial Titles by Branch ite Proper format ame End ae Ganaan ting New Springfield each a Metpkgidibed pe gamer magazine 2008 New Springfield Branch powers New Springfield Branch 2 Subscription Titles with End Date within Time Frame provides a list of subscriptions with an end date used to generate titles for renewal You must enter an end date in your subscriptions for this report to generate titles 3 Serial Circulation Report provides circulation statistics for serials used to generate circulation statistics for Serials 4 Serials Claiming Items List prov
251. e Record Match Set SitkaMatch Limit matches to bucket Holdings Import Profile Select a Record Source oclc Record Import Actions Merge Profile Import Non Matching Records Merge On Exact Match 901c Merge On Single Match Merge On Best Match Best Single Match Minimum Quality Ratio 0 0 Insufficient Quality Fall Through Profile Copy Import Actions Auto overlay In process Acquisitions Copies Auto overlay On order Cataloguing Copies Use Org Unit Matching in Copy to Determine Best Match New Record Quality Quality of Best Match i File to Upload Upload 3 Leave SitkaMatch 1n Record Match Set box QD The NoMatch profile matches records on tag 901 c only and should only be used after a false match is detected using SitkaMatch as described below Sitka cataloguing policy strives to avoid record duplication so Sitka policy requires batch imports use SitkaMatch first 4 Choose a Holdings Import Profile from the dropdown list if your MARC records include holdings information and you wish to load it Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 202 QD You need to contact Co op support for holding information format before asking your vendors to include it in the MARC records 5 Select a Record Source from the dropdown The default is oclc but choose the one that best matches your file eg ULS Whitehots etc Contact Co op support if you need to load records for non physica
252. e View Title Author Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Dora s big birthday advent Edition TC ocn464507731 Pub Date c2010 Item Call E SIL Circulation History Holds Transit Cataloging Info Silverhardt Lauryn Bib Call amp p77 558585Dol 2010 Quick Summary Created By sthomas Record ID 103112302 Last Edited By 700173149 Record Owner Last Edited On 10 29 10 3 51 PM This item is not captured for a hold SITKA test sitkatest Transit Completion Time Transit Destination Transit Send Time Transit Source Transit Completion Time Transit Destination Transit Send Time Transit Source MEM OBH 33X0427AM v KCT KAM Trim List 20 rows Strict Barcode Aute Print Hold and Transit Slips 10 4 Transit List The Transit List report can be used as a tool to help manage your incoming and outgoing transits Chapter 10 Items in Transit 117 Address Alerts Age Overdue Circs to Lost Barcode Completion Cash Reports Circulation Limit Sets Circulation Policies Closed Dates Editor Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor Copy Template Editor Held Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Local Administration Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds Hold Policies Library Settings Editor Reports Standing Pena
253. e books OR you can choose the individual format The individual choices are Books physical Books large print E Books Audiobooks physical or E Audiobooks Note that Audiobooks physical are books read aloud on CDs or other physical media whereas E Audiobooks are books read aloud available online e Videos will search all videos formats such as DVD VHS and Blu ray Music will search music on CD or other media e Serials Magazines will search on magazine serial or journal titles only e Software Video Games will search on games databases and other software Libraries If you are using a catalogue in a library or accessing a library s online catalogue from its homepage the search will return items for your local library If your library has multiple branches the result will display items available at your branch and all branches of your library system separately If your library participates in Interlibrary Connect the results may display items available across your federation If you access the catalogue from http catalogue libraries coop you may scope your search result to Sitka regional libraries a library system or a library branch by clicking into the n box on the catalogue homepage and selecting the target library from the drop down list You will then be able to see how many copies of a title are available in all Sitka member libraries across Sitka or within the regional libraries or within the library system or within
254. e dates and the number of times you can renew them Items are sorted by the due date You can simply select the items you wish to renew and then click Go beside Renew Selected Titles Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Current Items Checked Out Check Out History Current Items Checked Out Renew Selected Titles Go Title Author Renewals Left Due Date Barcode Call number Rachel Carson s Silent sprin 2 05 21 2015 33987000814367 SUS DVD 632 9 RAC Silent spring Carson Rachel 1907 1964 3 05 28 2015 33987000229947 SUS 632 9 CAR Wolf Hall Mantel Hilary 1952 3 05 28 2015 33987000665769 FIC MAN Items on Hold The Holds tab shows the materials you currently have holds reserves on The title author format pickup location status and expiration date are displayed The Active column shows whether your hold is currently active Clicking the Edit link will bring you to the hold editing screen where you may suspend the hold if not already captured or change the activation date or cancellation date If your library has multiple branches you may also change the pick up location Account Summary Messages ltems Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Editing Hold List all holds The inconvenient Indian a curious account of Native People in North America King Thomas 1943 Format o gt Status Waiting for copy 1 hold on 1 copy Pickup library Maple Library
255. e displayed on top of the existing address in patron record for staff to approve Address Mailing Billing This is a pending address Approve Address Replaces address MAILING C 1 Reader St street 2 Vancouver BC V1V 474 Type MAILING Postal Code V1V ATA Street 1 10 Library Dr Street 2 City Vancouver County State BC Country Canada Valid Address x Within City Limits L Address Mailing Billing Type MAILING Postal Code V1V 4T4 To approve it click Approve Address It will replace the existing address Chapter 6 Patron Records 44 6 4 2 Renewing Library Cards Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record and update the expiration date in the patron s record You can use the calendar widget which shows up automatically once clicking in the field or simply click the Update Expire Date button Clicking the Update Expire Date button will re calculate the user s expire date to 3 years from today s date Once done click Save button at the right top corner Main Profile Permission Group PL Adult secondary Groups Privilege Expiration Date 2017 06 11 YYYY MM DD Update Expire Date Internet Access Level Filtered 6 4 3 Marking Library Cards Lost 1 Follow the steps above to retrieve the patron record Click Replace Barcode beside Barcode Barcode sitkatest Replace Barcode See All OPAC Staff Client User Name sitkatest 2 Scan or type a new barcode in the blank field Bar
256. e manually transferred to the destination record Transferring copies Sometimes you may need to transfer copy records only from one volume to another e g transferring a copy from reference collection to circulating collection using a different call number or transferring one copy from one branch to another that already has a voume and copy 1 To transfer a copy record to another volume find your target record in the catalogue and go to Holdings Maintenance screen 2 Find your target volume on the record and right click on it and select Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Or you may select Actions for Selected Rows Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination 3 Go to the catalogue and find the record containing the copy you wish to transfer and go to Holdings Maintenance Highlight the record you wish to transfer Select Actions for Selected Rows Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Alternatively you may do this transfer step by scanning the item barcode into tem Status F5 screen and making the same choice from Actions for Cataloguers menu The screenshot below is from Item Status screen Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Copy to Clipboard Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Cataloque Show Holds on Bib Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes 4 Confirm the transfer details and click Transfer You may t
257. e orta ous Imdet edenda css 116 10 3 Transit Detalls can ones quet RENE REED KEUERUy eei ocU ANDE TEE curd EERE Aa EEEE R UR LAM IKR TEAM ES 116 TOSS Wig SI RISE o ocsoecctwtedessibeksd E EEE Eun Er ERE UAR UAE MOR E SPURS Cmud dU b vdsR d ORE 117 10 5 POO GIG JESTISIES eocoiesees tc tiet eben eaten boca dessmensece en r eiris beans ER EENAA ARTEEN Era Ea Era 120 UREE E EE E E E AEAEE E AAA E EE E AAEE EE O cig E se ieee a I E E 122 11 1 Staff Functions in the Evergreen Self Check 2 00 0 cccccccccccecceeceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 122 MUS SURE CHR D LET E 123 NESESUACMISRSUNTTTT NOTTE 125 UE TONS E PEA EE SA EE NAA T A OE EAE AA AT 126 TLS VEN M NETT A EE ETEA E AE AEE EEE EEA 127 2 Ue T aO a T E EEE EEEO 128 12 1 Offline Module SOLU ceciecascacctdcscdxtenssdiensentedstesasiecstdccndwarndadancaansed lt dexstiensidadedusancsdieasensedaiees 129 LEA Fe an RE EI ET TOT OTT EEE E EA 130 UNE Ce RU MERERI 132 L2 ESSI M a E rd FECE OR PER vdusd ut cIdeI PME du Tap INIT I edd MU IPVIGUP EN dETUFPnEI PA a Ed MU EE E dU terns 135 12 59 I HOUSE USE Sic ede eae teehee see ceca e a e EE E EEE ATE 136 IAN NCCI A E AE A EEN A E E E AAEE EN AAEN AE E AA TEE E 137 12 7 Uploading offline transactions sicisasascnsscwsdnnndisieaavarnsiacasead tht mine FEY IRE EE dna XE dtp Sitat ik al iar niae 139 TB RUAN ON aos T TC 0 Ote 145 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes ssesessssnee mene 147 13 1 Advanced
258. e search location owns matched E resources The link s will show up only when the search location and or the preferred library of the login account is a library or branch and owns the E resource Click the link s in the summary to access these E resource records 3 Type in or scan the patron barcode at the prompt 4 Select the acceptable formats Use the CTRL key together with a mouse click to select multiple entries Click Submit once done If no format is selected All available formats are targeting candadites Format information is from the MARC record leader and fixed fields Requested formats are listed in the Holdable Formats column in hold records Use the Column Picker to display it Once a new Web browser based staff client is used format icons would be displayed in this column Right now you will see a string Look for the language format codes such as eng fre book dvd blue ray etc All the selected formats in any of the selected language s are targeting candidates After a meta record hold is placed if a new MARC record is added and it meets the grouping criteria title author and format items under this new record will be used to fulfill the existing holds Volume Level Hold 1 To place a volume level hold retrieve and display the record 2 On the holdings grid click Volume in HOLDABLE column in the row of your chosen volume CALL HUMBER COPY SHELVING AGE HOLD CREATE l I DUE LOCATION m
259. e subject To make tickets easier to identify in RT please provide as descriptive a subject as possible Example of a descriptive subject line Circ Full Cat login unable to edit item record Example of a non descriptive subject line Editing question Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 6 e What where when how Be specific about what you were doing in Evergreen what results you obtained versus what you expected and the steps required to reproduce the problem If you cannot reproduce the problem exactly please describe the circumstances in which it occurred and the symptoms observed including relevant patron and item barcodes nclude error messages If the problem caused any OPAC or staff client error messages please copy and paste error text or attach screenshots when possible See the section called Submitting Images to Support for guidelines e Include example barcods and IDs A problem in circulation Make sure you include the patron and or item barcodes that were in use when the problem occurred Cataloguing issues Make sure you include the item barcode and or the record ISBN ISSN or record ID where the problem occured Trouble shooting Spare yourself a boring or obvious email from the Support Team tell us what steps you have already taken to try and resolve the problem Submitting Images to Support When submitting images to Co op Support please follow the guidelines below e Save as a jpg or png The best file fo
260. e to name the bucket Horses Records 20 2 Adding Records to Buckets Now that you have created a bucket you can begin to add records Search for retrieve and display any bibliographic record then choose Actions for this Record Add to Bucket Chapter 20 Record Buckets 230 2 Select the appropriate bucket and click Add to Selected Bucket Record Buckets Copy this record into which bucket Cook Books Dog Books 3 If required go back to the Record Bucket tab to confirm the action You will see your bucket now contains the record Record Query Pending Records Bucket View Horse Books Contains 1 bucket items Bucket 854 Horse Books Owner test bontest BPR X Remove Selected from Bucket Add Selected to Pending Records Publication Date Publisher 9780312340995 2006 S St MartinsPress Man o War a legend like lightning _ 4 Youcan continue adding records as required You may also add bibliographic records to a bucket via the F5 Item Status screen Scan item barcodes into the screen select all choose Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and choose Add to Record Bucket This will place all the bibliobgraphic records associated with the item records you scanned into a bucket Note the column picker allows you to manipulate data display within the bucket Clicking on List Actions Save List CSV to File exports al
261. e under Admin Local Administration Group Penalty Thresholds There are four penalties in use now Penalty Effect PATRON EXCEEDS FINES Blocks new circulations and renewals if patron exceeds X in fines PATRON EXCEEDS OVERDUE COUNT Blocks new circulations if patron exceeds X overdue items PATRON EXCEEDS CHECKOUT COUNT Blocks new circulations if patron exceeds X items out PATRON EXCEEDS LOST COUNT Blocks new circulations if patron exceeds X lost items Accounts that meet or exceed penalty thresholds display an alert message when opened and require staff overrides for blocked transactions sitka test Refresh Check Out Items Out Holds Bits Exlit Messages Other 0 Ot 33 25 Juvenile Maximum Bills Has Bills Invalid Date of Birth Standing Matron exceeds Fine threshold Status Patrans BECT KAM Internet Unfiltered A Expires on 2013 02 18 2 ert Halds 1 Available Q EM 3325 4 BECT Patron exceeds fine threshold Check Guts Overdue D Press a navigation button above for example Check Out t LlongOverdue 0 Claimed Returned Q Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 429 48 9 1 Penalty threshold inheritance rules Local penalty thresholds are identified by Org Unit and appear in the same table as the Sitka defaults Penalty Threshold Context Org Unit BSQ Back Next w Group Org Unit Penalty Threshold E 1
262. e waiting for a hold OPAC to be fulfilled this is the minimum estimated length of time to assume an item will be checked out Org unit target weight Org Units can be organized into hold Number Sitka target groups based on a weight Potential copies from org units with the same weight are chosen at random Reset request time on When a hold is uncancelled reset True False LSA un cancel the request time to push it to the end of the queue Skip for hold targeting When true don t target any copies at True False Sitka this org unit for holds Soft boundary Holds will not be filled by copies Number Sitka outside this boundary if there are holdable copies within it For this amount of time holds will Duration Sitka not be opportunistically captured at non pickup branches Use Active Date for age When calculating age protection True False LSA protection rules use the Active date instead of Soft stalling interval Default TRUE the Creation Date ms Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 45 Setting Data type Edited by Notes Notes 0 otes Use weight based hold Use library weight based hold True False Sitka targeting targeting Table 48 8 Library Change reshelving Amount of time to wait before Duration The default is at status interval changing an item from Reshelving midnight each night for status to available items with Reshelving status for over 24
263. e when a lost item is checked True false LSA when returned in the item replacement bill item price is voided If the patron has already paid the bill a credit is applied But libraries may choose not to adjust bills if already resolved by Do not change fines fees on zero balance LOST transaction Void lost max interval Items that have been overdue this Duration LSA long will not result in lost charges being voided when returned and the overdue fines will not be restored either Only applies if Circ Void lost item billing or Circ Void processing fee on lost item are true Void processing fee on If True the processing fee is voided True false LSA lost item return when a lost item 1s returned Long Overdue status is not in use on Sitka Evergreen All settings related to Long Overdue may be ignored Table 48 3 Credit Card Processing Credit card payment is not currently supported All settings can be ignored Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 446 Table 48 4 Finances Allow credit card If enabled patrons will be able to True False Sitka Not in use payments pay fines accrued at this location via credit card Charge item price when If true Evergreen bills item price to True false LSA marked damaged the last patron who checked out the damaged item Staff receive an alert with patron information and must confirm the billing Charge lost on zero If set to True default item pric
264. e will True false LSA be charged when an item is marked lost even though the price in item record is 0 00 same as no price If False only processing fee if used will be charged N Disabled when set to O Charge processing fee Optional processing fee billed to umber dollb3A for damaged items last patron who checked out the damaged item Staff receive an alert with patron information and must confirm the billing Default item price Replacement charge for lost items if Number dolllh amp S price is unset in the Copy Editor Does not apply if item price is set to 0 Disable Patron Credit Do not allow patrons to accrue credit True Fasle LSA If set to TRUE Patron or pay fines fees with accrued credit Credit will not be displayed on Bills screen Leave transaction open If True it leaves the lost copy on the True False Sitka Sitka default False when lost balance patron record when it is paid equals zero Lost materials The amount charged in addition to Number processing fee item price when an item is marked dollar lost Maximum Item Price When charging for lost items limit Number dollbSA the charge to this as a maximum Minimum Item Price When charging for lost items charge Number dollbSA this amount as a minimum Void overdue fines If true overdue fines are voided True false LSA when items are marked when an item is marked lost lost Chapter 48 Loca
265. earch Results Showing Item 5 of 207 Preferred library Library 4 Previous Next M Add to Bucket Mark for Overlay Delete Record Undelete Record Open An Autobiography Agassi Andre Author Add Volumes Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 154 3 On Holdings Maintenance select your library or branch es from the list and click Actions for Selected Rows Add Volumes or click on Add Volumes link at top left Pon 0 Record Sum Add Volumes View MARC Title Open an autabiograph Edition TCN bwlcr 102811637 Created By admin Author Agassi Andre Pub Date 2009 Database ID 102811637 Last Edited By admin Bib Call 796 342092 AGA Record Owner Last Edited On 2010 05 17 9 58 PM aH Search Results Actions for this Recor Holdings Maintenance BPR Prince Rupert Library E te Sub branch V Show Volumes V Showltems F Hide Empty Libs ConsortialTotak 3 Available 3 PENE Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library Due Date Location Owning Libr i 1 aSITKA Sitka Copy to Clipboard 2 aBNCLF North Coast Librar S BPR Prince Rupert Library 0 lt 0 gt Show Item Details Make This Item Bookable Y Show Last Few Circulations Edit Items Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Link as Conjoined Items to Previously Marked Bib Record Add Volumes Mark esbrary as Volume Transfer Dest
266. ecord Buckets Create New MARC Record Import Record from 239 50 MARC Batch Import Export Replace Barcode Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Manage Authorities Link Checker Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 147 3 4 The advanced search screen is displayed In this example the search screen defaults to the Numeric Search page You can customize the look of this screen via Workstation Administration In this example note the search library is set to Sitka A cataloguer must ensure they are searching the entire Sitka database 1 Catalog Go Back Reload Go Forward Debug Print Page Search the Catalogue Basic Search Browse the Catalogue My Account Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Numeric Search ISBN v Identifier Enter your search criteria and click Search Search the Catalogue Basic Search Browse the Catalogue Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Numeric Search ISBN 9780770429072 Search Library Sitka In this example the item in hand has 3 copies in Sitka 1 The princes of Ireland cis Rutherfurd Edward S 2 Aio my Book L Add to my list Fublisher Toronto Seal Books 2006 Ree e URRRRRRDOREEERNPRRISAR a EINE SNR R RE CEMRRRE RARE N ERR SSRREEREERATIRKR RES Phys Desc MEM MM SS SS S LL S 2525 LLL Shelving Call ately location number tatus Fort St John Public Adult Library Paperbacks PB RUT Available Paperback PBK FIC Salmo Publi
267. ecord buckets You may work on copy records with Copy Buckets and MARC records with Record Buckets Some possible uses for buckets are batch editing items deleting items and grouping like items temporarily to change their status or to create bibliographies and pull lists While you can batch edit records a variety of ways in Evergreen using common Windows functions such as select all and edit buckets are useful for keeping records together over a period of time For example if you scan 20 items into the Item Status screen you can batch edit or delete from there by selecting all but you have to enact those changes right then while records are all together on the screen By utilizing Evergreen s bucket functionality you can create a bucket and add records to that bucket and they stay there until you are ready to work with them whether that be immediately or days later Adding items to a bucket is like creating and saving a query The record being in a bucket does not affect normal library functions such as circulation as being in a bucket is not a status Buckets can be shared or private and are associated with a login Deleted records are not automatically removed from buckets It 1s recommended that you always display Deleted field in Bucket View When a bucket 1s retrieved all information about the records in it 1s transferred to the workstation It consumes the computer s resources It is recommended that a copy bucket contain no more t
268. ect the two records you want to merge by pressing down the CTRL key and clicking each record Click Merge Patrons on the top right of the screen mE fete Paron a Birth Date First Name Middle Name bgipatron Bseluvenile bselsa circcat patronAcct Chapter 6 Patron Records 54 4 Select the record you want to keep by checking the radio button Lead Record on top of the record Click Merge button Merge these records Select the lead record first Lead Record 264840 4 Patrons BSE Internet Unfiltered Expires on 2012 11 25 Available Bills um Check Outs Non Catalogued ID and Contact Information Library Card bsel010 ID 1 Other ID 2 Date of Birth lt Unset gt Day Phone Evening Phone Other Phone OPAC Login bsel010 Email email tt ca Patrons BSE Internet Unfiltered Expires on 2012 11 24 Holds Available Bills T Check Outs Non Catalogued ID and Contact Information Library Card 1818 ID 1 Other ID 2 Date of Birth lt Unset gt Day Phone Evening Phone Other Phone OPAC Login 1818 Email email tt ca Once two records have been merged the notes bills holds and outstanding items under the non lead record are brought to the lead record Staff inserted alert messages are not Local System Administration permission is required to merge patron records Sitka support recommends discarding the non lead card and delet
269. ection will link to the copy table if available URL associated with the Library information URL library setting Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 455 rather than the library information page generated by Evergreen Setting Description Data type Edited by Table 48 9 OPAC Allow Patron ee Allow patrons to oos NR True False Sitka Registration creating pending user accounts Allow pending If true patrons can edit their True false LSA addresses addresses in the OPAC Changes must be approved by staff Auto Override True false Sitka Defalt FALSE Permitted Hold Blocks Patrons Ignore the Global Admin setting on e records scoping True False Sitka luri as copy flag for this OU Jump to details on 1 hit When a search yields only 1 result True False jump directly to the record details page This setting only affects the public OPAC Jump to details on 1 hit When a search yields only 1 result True False LSA staff client jump directly to the record details page This setting only affects the PAC within the staff client Limit the depth of Admin setting on e record link Number Sitka XXXXXX display Limit the number of Admin setting on e record link Number Sitka URIs on the results display page OPAC login message HTML blob to be rendered in an Text Sitka interstitial page upon OPAC login Number of staff client If unset the default is 10 Number LSA saved searches to display on left side of results an
270. ed as one result For example the DVD and the first and second print editions of Harry Potter and the Chamber of Secrets will appear together Search Library The current search library is displayed under the Search Library box If you accessed the catalogue from your library s homepage or catalogue URL the default search library is your library The search returns results for your local library only If your library system has multiple branches use the Search Library box to select different branches or the whole library system If you access the catalogue from http catalogue libraries coop your default search library is Sitka or the library you have selected on the homepage You may use the Search Library box to select a different library or regional libraries or all libraries 1n Sitka to search Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 236 Shelving Location Select a Search Library to filter by Shelving Location Shelving Locations that are not OPAC visible will not be displayed Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Search Input Keyword wy Contains And Title w Contains And Author w Contains Add Search Row Search Library Sort Results i E Powell River Public LE 4 Sort by Relevance Limit to Available Group Formats and Editions Search Filters Format Language Audience All Audiobooks English Adolescent All Books French Adult Books e audio zm General Books electronic v Athapascan Juv
271. eipts slips Details see Library Settings Button Bar Toolbar There is an optional toolbar with buttons providing quick access to commonly used staff client functions When activated the toolbar appears below the menu bar Circulation Buttons File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking Check Out e Checkin Search Catalogue Item Status Patron Search Patron Registration Cataloguing Buttons File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking e Ey amp bed bed bed Check In Search Catalogue Item Status Create MARC Record Manage Authorities Retrieve Last Record The look of the buttons can be customized Use Mode Label Position and Icon Size on the Toolbar menu shown on the screen below to select your preference A group of buttons can be selected or activated by default for all workstations at a particular library see Library Settings for details A different default group can be set up on individual workstations by the following steps Go to Admin Workstation Administration Toolbars Current Admin z perator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Patron Search bd Patron Registration 7 Local Administration Server Administration Copy Editor Copy Location Mame First External Text Editar Command Workstation Administration Toggle Activity Meters Global Font and Sound Settings
272. elf Receive Selected Items Create Units For Received Items 7 Click on Receive Selected Items Chapter 43 Routing 375 8 Print Routing List Print Canadian Living V 2 N0 9 2014 Sep MDB Cdn Living Unlabeled stream ID 901 l Reader acqadmintest Burns Christine MDB Mailing address 123 street coquitlam v3k2r2 Canada Reader sitkaserials Serials Sitka MDB Mailing address shaw Burnaby vir2k Canada 3 Department Technicial Services Chapter 43 Routing 376 Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 44 1 Caption and Pattern Codes Sitka support has created Caption and Pattern Codes for popular magazines and frequencies Please copy and paste the whole string Including Square brackets in the Pattern Code box Table 44 1 Popular Caption and Pattern Codes Database ID Pattern Code Notes BC Business 108282856 fo Oe dx x Nonthil Yu 12 23s0 Y 84 i year j With Enumeration captions BC Home amp Garden 108225216 2 0 8 I a v Bi Monthly 6 Issues b no u 6 v r 1 Y amp aear J month w b x OT BC nature 108527928 2 0 8 1 a V b Sessonbalr 4 Av Issues year s Year Spring Summer Fall Winter with enumeration captions V No BC outdoors sport fishing 108419744 2 0 8 1 a v b LOnoISSues vdr K atr 1 year j and outdoor adventure Sport Fishing amp
273. emplate from the dropdown menu Click Close to exit the Copy Editor Identifi al By i Faperback Status Available Barcode Creation Date 2007 11 03 2007 11 03 Creator Last Edit Date 2012 02 11 Last Editor wmedutt 33294001370618 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy BPR BLAC 1 copy Copy Number lt Unset gt 1 copy Using Copy Templates 1 copy Yes lcopy Age based Hold Protection Unset gt 1 copy Loan Duration Normal 1 copy Fine Level Normal Circulation Modifier videos features 1 copy 1 copy Alert Message lt Unset gt 1 copy Deposit No 1 copy Deposit Amount 0 00 lcopy Price 20 00 lcopy OPAC Visible Yes lcopy Reference Mo lcopy Library Filter BPR Supplier Unset gt 1 copy BPR test lt Unset gt 1 copy To use a copy template when cataloguing editing items on Copy Editor choose the template from the dropdown list as shown on the above screen and click Apply beside it Those fields covered by the template will display with green coloured background Exporting Copy Templates Templates are saved on Evergreen server but only viewable by the staff account that created them To share templates with other staff you will need to export them and the other staff to load them into their accounts Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 167 1 To export copy templates go to Copy Editor
274. ems Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library V Mode Receive Adv Receive O Bind ShowAll Refresh Actions for Selected Rows Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Holder Stream ID Date Published Date Expected Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub Call Number Unit ID Contents Date Last Edited R 22855 V 2 No 8 2014 Aug Cdn Living MDB 2014 07 31 2014 07 31 0 0 0 2014 06 02 22856 V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Cdn Living MDB 2014 08 31 2014 08 31 1 0 0 2014 06 02 22857 V 2 No 10 2014 Oc Cdn Living MDB 2014 09 30 2014 09 30 0 0 0 2014 06 02 V 2 No 11 2014 N Cdn Living MDB 2014 10 31 2014 10 31 0 0 0 2014 06 02 V 2 No 12 2014 De Cdn Living MDB 2014 11 30 2014 11 30 0 0 0 2014 06 02 V 3 No 1 2015 Jan Cdn Living MDB 2014 12 31 2014 12 31 0 0 0 2014 06 02 V 3 No 2 2015 Feb Cdn Living MDB 2015 01 31 2015 01 31 0 0 0 2014 06 02 V 3 No 3 2015 Mar Cdn Living MDB 2015 02 28 2015 02 28 0 0 0 2014 06 02 6 o0ou5 uNxv 2 s v Showing Recently Received L 0 Alerts Receive Move Selected 1 Current Working Unit Auto per Item Item ID Issuance Label Distribution Holder Stream ID Date Published Date Expected Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub Call Number Unit ID Contents Date New Unit 22854 V 2 No 7 2014Jul Cdn Living MDB 2014 06 30 2014 06 30 2014 06 02 0 0 0 2014 22851 V 2 No 4 2014 Apr _ Cdn Living MDB 2014 03 31 2014 03 31 2014 06 02 0 0 0 Jan 14 Jun 14 9407077 V 2
275. ems Checked Out tab to view the titles you have checked out and download a copy from there Click the E items on Hold tab to cancel an unwanted hold check out a ready for pickup hold or suspend a pending hold Just click the respective buttons and follow the on screen prompts When suspending a hold you have the option to suspend it for a limited period or indefinitely until you activate it again Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists E items on Hold Holds History Physical Items Current E Items on Hold Title Author Availability Formats Actions Waiting for copy Wolf Hall 24 24 holds on 4 copies Adobe EPUB eBook Cancel by Email notification will be sent to sdineen gsitka bclibraries ca OverDrive Read ilarv M Hold was placed a few seconds ago Suspend Link to Overdrive Account to change preferences If you wish to update the email address for hold notifications you need to do it on OverDrive s website Click onLink to OverDrive Account to Change Preferences to access those settings Chapter 23 Integrated Electronic Resources 262 OverDrive allows users to keep some preference settings such as preferred loan period These preferences can be set up or updated on OverDrive s website only Chapter 23 Integrated Electronic Resources 263 Chapter 24 Mobile PAC The Mobile PAC is designed for users with mobile or smaller screen devices eg smart phones tab
276. en will be displayed in non editable mode In order to get a new report by editing a non recurring report you have to give the report a new name or save it in another folder Evergreen does not stop you editing a non recurring report But without using Save as New the new report will not be generated Chapter 31 Viewing Editing Rescheduling Reports 301 Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates The Sitka support team has created generic templates for commonly requested reports and shared them under the SITKA_templates folder This chapter describes how to make local copies of these templates for routine reports or as a Starting point for customization When creating a new template it is a good idea to review the shared templates first even if the exact template you need does not exist it is often faster to modify an existing template than to build a brand new one A Local System Administrator account is required to clone templates from the Shared Folders section and save them to My Folders 32 1 What s in SITKA_templates The Sitka support team uses a dedicated staff account SITKA_templates to share ready to use templates Below is what a Local System Administrator can see after going to the Reports interface then follow the path to Shared Folders click the arrow or sign in front of Templates and then SITKA_templates Go Back Reload Ga Forward J Templates Reports Output Shared Folders O Templates
277. en you might use a copy alert how to create one and how to remove one It also illustrates what copy alerts look like in the Item Status screen at checkin and checkout Copy alerts are a useful type of alert for a physical copy of an item For example you might create a copy alert when one piece of a four part kit is missing You might use a copy alert when you are checking out an item to a patron and notice that the spine label needs to be replaced You might create a copy alert when you notice that an item has been damaged When the item is checked in or out the alert will pop up on the screen Creating copy alerts Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitio Search for Patrons F4 Search the Cataloque F3 Search for record by TCN Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Search for copies by Barcode F5 Search for patron by Barcode Fl Retrieve patron via Database ID 2 Scan in the item barcode Scan Item Barcode 112233485566 Upload From File Select Search for copies by Barcode or use the keyboard shortcut F5 Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Barcode 3 Select the row and under Actions for Selected Items select Edit Item Attributes Chapter 16 Copy Alerts Alternate View Actions for Cataloguers Acti Call Number Due Date ons for Selected Items Copy to Clipboard Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Item Detail
278. endar widget to choose a date then click Apply Use the Remove button to unset the date amp Select Date or Timestamp Modifying Holds Activation Date Please enter an Activation Date or choose Remove to unset for hold 440720 This will also Suspend the hold Date 58 03 201 12 00 00AM March hg SMTW TF S 12 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 KE 29 30 31 4 Your library may set up a hold shelf time Hold shelf expire time is automatically recorded in the hold record when a hold is filled You may edit this time by using the Edit Shelf Expire Time on the Action for Selected Holds dropdown menu You will be prompted to enter the new date Use the calendar widget to choose a date then click Apply 5 If you want to enable or disable phone notification or change the phone number click Edit Phone Notification You will be prompted to enter the new phone number You must follow the format of XXX XXX XXXX The phone number is used for this hold only and can be different from the one in the patron account It has no impact on the patron account If you leave it blank no phone number will be printed on the hold slip Choose a Hold Notification Phone Number E x Please enter a new phone number for hold notification leave the field empty to disable phone notification 604 123 4567 6 If you want to enable or disable email notification for the hold click Set Email
279. enile Literary Form Publication Year Comic strips ls Dramas Essays Fiction not further specifi Limit to Available This checkbox is just below the Search Library box Select Limit to Available to limit by item s current circulation status Titles without available items in the selected search library will not be displayed Search Filter You can filter your search by Format Language Audience Literary Form Publication Year and Shelving Location Publication year is inclusive For example if you set Publication Year Between 2005 and 2007 your result items will be published in 2005 2006 and 2007 Numeric Search If you have numeric details on the exact item you wish to search for use the Numeric Search option from search tabs across the top of the screen Use the drop down menu to search by SBN ISSN Call Number LCCN TCN or Item Barcode Enter the information and click Search Browse the Catalogue Patrons and staff can browse records in the OPAC The following fields are browsable title author subject and series The browse is constructed by the term starting with To browse the catalogue click Browse the Catalogue select a field to browse and enter a keyword and click Browse A list of results will appear Click on the bolded text to view bibliographic records You may move backward or forward through your results by clicking on Back or Next Note your results are alphabetical with results prior to your searc
280. ent borrower to inform him her of the change Evergreen uses three library setting entries to trigger hold driven recall and define change parameters When a hold is placed and there is no availabe copy Evergeen will check whether the Recall settings are set up for the library If settings are on and recall condition is met a recall will be triggered Go to Admin Local Administration Library Settings Editor to set them up 1 Recalls Circulation duration that triggers a recall This is the threshold that decides whether a recall is triggered Recalls are triggered only when items are checked out with a loan period longer than the one specified in this entry For example in a library the longest general loan period is 35 days Extended loan to faculty is 92 days You may specify e g 36 days or 90 days in this Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 432 entry to trigger recalls on items checked out to faculty with extended loan period But you need to consider the next entry to make your decision Evergreen uses the loan duration rule in circulation records as the loan period of a circulation It does not calculate the loan period from the checkout and due dates If you set specific due date on checkout the actual loan period and the loan duration rule may not match 2 Recalls Truncated loan period When a recall is triggered Evergreen will reset the due date in the current circulation record The new due date is calcu
281. eports J Output hared Folders J Templates Lj Eannrta 2 Select the box beside Circulations by month for one library Select Create a new report from selected template from the dropdown menu Click Submit Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Create a new repot from selected template d Limit outputta 10 m Create a new Template for this folder Select All Mane name description create time owner Circulations by month for 2009 11 24 SPOT REIT l wi one library 15 40 Number of circulations fncluding renewal occured at a library Shelving locations not an the list had 0 circulation 2009 11 24 1 Monthly Circulation by 15 35 Shelving Location iclone jeremybuhler 3 Complete the first part of report settings Only Report Name and Choose a folder are required fields emplate Mame Circulations bv month far ane library emplate Creator jeremybuhler emplate Description Report Name e October 2009 circ Prince Rupert circulation stats by shelving Report Description e location for October 2009 Check out month Report Columns e Shelving location Circ count Pivot Label Column Select One optional Pivot Data Column Cire court Selected Folder Circulation Choose a folder to stare this report definition 3 d C Report Folders ul Circulatian Chapter 28 Generating Reports from Templates 292 Template Name Template Creator
282. er 35 Serials 326 Click Admin Local Administration Library Settings Editor Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Address Alerts Local Administration Age Overdue Circs to Lost Server Administration Barcode Completion Workstation Administration nm pos Toggle Activity Meters Circulation Limit Sets User Permission Editor Circulation Policies For developers Closed Dates Editor Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor Copy Template Editor Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds Hold Policies Item Attribute Editor Non cataloged Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Negative Balances Reports Search Filter Groups Standing Penalties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Transit List Work Log 2 Search or scroll to find Serials Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in the OPAC Organization Unit Settings Context Location ZSP B serials Filter Clear Filter Export Import Indicates the setting is not inherited from the parent org unit at run time Edt History Group Setting 0000000000000000000000000 Edit History Serials l Default display grouping for serials distributions presented in the OPAC 3 Click Edit Context Value Chapter35 Serials gg 327 4
283. er an item goes into the on holds shelf status before it appears to patrons that it is actually on the holds shelf This gives staff time to process the item before it shows as ready for pickup Examples 5 days 1 hour Context BW x Value 1 hours Delete Setting Update Setting Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 438 5 Click History to view the previous values if any of a setting You can revert back to an old value by clicking revert History Hold Shelf Status Delay Date Changed Location Original Value New Value 2012 06 01T15 59 49 0700 BW 1 hours S hours Revert 2012 06 01T15 59 42 0700 BW 1 hours 1 hours Revert 2012 06 01T15 41 08 0700 BW 3 hours 1 hours Revert Please note that different settings may require different data format which is listed in the Settings Overview table Refer to the Data Type table at the bottom of this page to find the data format used for each data type Exporting Importing Library Settings To export library settings click Export button on the above Library Setting Editor screen Click Copy in the pop up window Those settings displayed on the screen are copied to clipboard Paste the content to a text editor such as Notepad Save the file on your computer Export Copy this to your clipboard and save it to a file to export the settings i circ offline skip checkout if newer status changed time a i org l0 value null circ claim return copy status
284. er libraries within your library federation Shared Folders Templates Custom Templates SITKA ei A KLF BCK j Beaver Valley BCK PO Castlegar BCK L Ferie BCK L Nelson BCK LJ Rossland BCK LJ salmo BCK LI Holdings SITKA LI Holds SITKA L3 inventory SITKA J LLB Reports SITKA These folders are created when the Support Team creates or customizes templates for individual libraries The templates go to these folders when there are similar templates in the standard folders already or the Support Team does not anticipate wide use of the templates The Support Team tries to limit the number of templates in each standard folder so that staff may find the target template easily 32 2 Clone a template from SITKA templates The steps below assume you have already created at least one Templates folder If you have not done so please see Chapter 26 Folders Access the Reports interface from the Admin menu under Local Administration Reports Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 305 2 Under Shared Folders expand the Templates folder and the SITKA_templates subfolder To expand the folders click on the grey arrow or folder icon Do not click on the blue underlined hyperlink hared Folders Templates a gt 7 admin ob O Linda 2 ipringle james fr se templates 1 Circulation SITKA S Holdings SITKA L Patrons SITKA O custom Templates
285. er to Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen Database The ultimate goal of reporting is finding the records in the database which meet the requirements Sometimes the result records are processed to some extent before they are included in the output such as counting and displaying the count of the records found instead of showing the records themselves The requirements include two parts the conditions used to extract the records and the information to be displayed in the result file Evergreen is designed to achieve the above goal by creating a template first The template specifies the fields to be displayed in the result file Displayed Fields and the fields on which conditions can be applied Filter Fields Chapter 25 Reports overview 269 For example in an overdue template Due Date in the circulation record should be a filter field so that a date can be given in order for the reporting program to compare and decide whether a checkout is overdue while patron s names may be displayed fields so that staff may know who has the overdue item In short a template simply contains a list of displayed fields and a list of filter fields The template can be used for multiple times For example the afore mentioned overdue template can be used to run a report to capture circulation records with Due Date before 2012 01 01 It can also be used to capture circulations with Due Date before 2012 02 15 Once a template is ready the next step is assi
286. erator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Address Alerts Local Administration Age Overdue Circs to Lost Server Administration Barcode Completion Workstation Administration Cash Reports Toggle Activity Meters Circulation Policies For developers Closed Dates Editor Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor Copy Template Editor Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds Hold Policies Library Settings Editor Non catalogued Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Megatrve Balances Reports Standing Penalties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Transit List Work Log Only users with reporting permissions granted by Sitka Support on libraries request can access the Reports interface but the output can be visible to all staff accounts Reports are owned by the account used to create them though the owner can allow other people to view and copy template only them if he she shares them with other staff in the library other libraries in the federation or the whole Sitka Consortium Evergreen has very powerful reporting functionalities It is possible to report on almost every field in every table in the database Connections between tables are pre made on the Reports interface Some views are also provided to group together records meeting certain conditions For details ref
287. ernate print strategies instead Set Search Preferences You may set up a default search library and preferred library for a workstation These settings will override the same settings in the login account You may also select a default search method for Advanced Search l Go to Admin gt Workstation Administration gt Set Search Preferences 2 Read the description carefully Use the down pointed arrow to list the options Click your choice and Save Search Library can be easily overridden on search screens by using the dropdown list in Search Library box Preferred Library can only be chosen in either Workstation Administration or Account Preference Settings in Workstation Administration take precedence Chapter 5 Getting Started 25 5 7 1 Configure Receipt Templates There are many default receipt templates included with the Evergreen staff client These templates are saved on individual workstations Customization can be done workstation by workstation or by exporting the templates to import to other workstations The follwing example will walk you through how to customize the receipt that is printed on Checkout 2 Select Admin Workstation Administration Receipt Template Editor Select the checkout template from the dropdown menu Templates ID Actions Mame item status Ivi Preview Default Be sure to Save Locally before export Type item status Export 1 i Macros Save Locally t
288. ers ago link Raw Data id Week oF Year link Year oe org unit EER link el iL ave i Field Transform Raw Data Count Distinct Year Month Change Field Hint Output Type Aggregate Mon Aggregate Mon Aggregate Maon Aggregate Mon Aggregate Maon Aggregate Mon Aggregate Mon Aggregate Mon Aggregate Mon Aggregate b d d Add Selecte i Fields B 19 Check Out Date Time will appear in the Displayed Fields pane In the report it will appear as a year and month 20 Select the Check Out Date Time row Click Alter Display Header and change the column header to Check 286 21 Move Check out month to the top of the list using the Move Up button so that it will be the first column in an MS Excel spreadsheet Now the report output will sort by the checkout month first then by shelving locations Template Configuration Mame Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Displav Mam Data Tvpe Field TransForm Raw Data Circ count Count Distinct Alter Display Header Change Transform Note the Change Transform button in the bottom left hand pane It has the same function as the upper right Field Transform pane for fields that have already been added Circ count i count Distinct Count Count Distinct Raw Data Alber Display Header Change Transform Remove Selected Field Change Field Hint 27 2 App
289. es BARCODE qoaa PHEIBECTICN NE HOLDABLE STATUS a North Library j SEW Text 1016455584 Juvenile None 12 29 2004 Place on copy volume Available 3 Scan or type patron s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode Chapter 9 Holds 96 4 Edit patron hold notification fields as required and click Submit Note the hold is identified as a Volume Hold Copy Level Hold 1 Retrieve and display the record 2 On the holdings grid click Copy in HOLDABLE column in the row of your chosen copy CALL NUMBER SHELVING AGE HOLD CREATE DUE E LOCATION arene BARCODE oa al ED HOLDABLE STATUS zn Qutreach Services ABjSEW Text 101445471 General Call None 10 28 1999 Place on ES volume Reshelving 3 Scan or type patron s barcode into Place hold for patron by barcode 4 Edit patron hold notification fields as required and click Submit Note the hold is identified as a Copy Hold Placing Holds in Patron Records 1 Holds can be placed from patron records too In the patron record Holds screen click the Place Hold button on the left top corner Refresh Check Out items Out WETTER Eis cit messages Other n 3 0 00 Holds Place Hold Show Cancelled Holds Active Available Current C HoldID Last Moti Pickup Library Request Date Selectio Sta Detail View Actions for Selected Holds Yes 366200016 1299547 0 WINKLER 06 14 2013 1 31 1 War Yes 358640011 1299518 0 MTSIR 06 12 2
290. es tabs to display functions Tabs allow all software functionality to be open in one window You can have multiple tabs open at once and you can have more than one tab of a single function open at the same time You simply move through the tabs to perform your work You can operate on Windows and Tabs using the dropdown menu under File You can also use the plus sign beside the last tab title and the cross sign at the end of the tab title line to open a new or close the active tab You can also use the following keyborard shortcuts hotkeys too Some functions will automatically open records in new tabs Keyboard shortcuts hotkeys for working with tabs e Ctrl T new tab e Ctrl W close tab Chapter 5 Getting Started 17 Ctrl Shift W close all tabs Ctrl Tab tabs forward through open tabs Ctrl Shift Tab tabs backward through open tabs In the example below the MARC Template tab is active Click on any open tab to bring that screen to the front You can also use Ctrl Tab to move to the required tab Fille Edit Search Circulation Cataloging 1 Tab1 2 Catalog 3 Check Out 4 Item Check in 3 MARC Template Now the Check Out tab is the active screen File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging 1 Tab 1 2 Catalog 3 Check Out 4 Item Check In 5 MARC Template Once you are in the selected tab you can use the drop down menus or keyboard shortcuts to perform required functions Menu
291. es to all items until you change the date de select Specific Due Date checkbox or quit the patron record Check Out Specific Due Date 26 03 2011 E 1 48 20AM Barcode Due Date Title al March 2011 5 M TW T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E 2 28 29 30 31 Check Out Specific Due Date 30 gah 2011 ie 11 24 30 PM 7 2 Check In F2 Regular Check In Backdated Check In Backdate Post Checkin Mark Item as Missing Pieces Regular Check In l To check in an item select Circulation Check In Items or press F2 Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booki Check Out Items Fl Check In Items F2 Items Ctri F2 Register Patron Shift Fl Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F8 Chapter 7 Circulation 60 2 Scan item barcode or enter manually and click Submit Check In Enter Barcode 39081000001224 Effective Date 26 03 2011 7 Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Balance Owed Barcode Bill Call Number Checkin Date Family Name Finish Location Route To Stat Title A Backdated Check In This is useful for clearing a book drop l To change effective check in date select Circulation Check In Items or press F2 Use the calendar widget to choose the effective date Check In Enter Barcode 39081000001234 Effective Date 56 03 2011 amp Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Balance Owed Barcode Bill CallNu
292. eserve to patron barcode Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selected Reserve Any 4 Enter the user s barcode in the Reserve to patron barcode box The user s existing reservations if any will appear at the bottom of the screen Reserve to patron barcode Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 390 5 Select the date and time for the reservation in J need this resource area Click the date field A calendar widget will be displayed for you to choose a date Click the time field to choose time from the dropdown list need this resource Between ITI EE 00 15 5 15 30 With these attributes 15 45 Operating System ANY 16 00 16 15 16 30 Computing Platform ANY If incorrect date and time is selected the date time boxes will appear in red For example if the time for which the reservation is set has already passed the boxes will appear in red The times must be set correctly for the reservation to be created There must be at least 15 minutes between the creation of the reservation and the start time of the reservation 6 For non catalogued resources patrons may specify special feature s if any of the resource The With these attributes allows you to do so For example if a patron is booking a laptop they can choose between PC and Mac and even choose a specific operating system if they need to Click the dropdown arrow to select your option from the list With
293. eses to the information about the resource and password right of the link required Required your library code Not displayed in the OPAC but required for the record to be included in searches scoped to your library 5 After the tag 856 is added the record will be displayed as search result on OPAC for the library in 9 The image below shows a sample 856 tag and the corresponding OPAC display This record would appear in OPAC searches of the Bowen Island Public Library catalogue BBI ase 4 0 tu http dosmloads bclibrary ca ContentDetails htm ID 3193B008 408B 47D0 B amp BF 4F6ZF3CEBEEl y Click to access online library card required 5 BBI Common purpose electronic resource how great leaders get organizations to achieve the extraordinary Joel Kurtzman Kurzman Joel CATR COMMON PURPOSE Electronic resources A separate 856 tag should be added for each library that catalogues the resource Multi branch libraries may add a single 856 using the code for the library system e g SCRL BCREK if all branches are allowed to access the resource Evergreen creates an invisible call number for each tag 856 with subfield 9 with the code in subfield 9 as the owning library This call number like a copy record is used for scoping the seach result to a selected library To remove a non physical record from your library s collection you need to delete your library s tag 856 If your library s tag 856 is the only one yo
294. ess the output through the Reports interface as described in Chapter 29 Viewing Report Output To set up a monthly recurring report follow the procedure in Generating Reports from Templates but make the changes described below 1 Select the Recurring Report check box and set the recurrence interval to 1 month Recurring Report Recurrence Interval 2 Donot select Run ASAP Instead schedule the report to run early on the first day of the next month Enter the date in YY Y Y MM DD format IH LT m Eom as soon as possible w 3 Ensure there is an email address to receive completion emails You will receive an email completion notice each month when the output is ready Send completion notification to this Email address taratesitka bclibraries ca 4 Select a folder for the report s output Selected Folder circulation Choose a folder to store this report s output ae icireulatian L patrons h EE cataloging 5 Click Save Report Selected Folder circulation Choose a folder to store this report s output Chapter 30 Running Recurring Reports 299 6 You will get a confirmation dialogue box that the Action Succeeded Click OK The page at http training sitka bclibrary c E A Action Succeeded With the above settings you will get an email on the first day of each month with a link to the report output By clicking this link it will open the output in a web browser It is still p
295. essage indicating the patron status from within the Standalone Interface at check out time 7 ROUTE ITEM Indicates the book should be routed to another branch or library system You ll need to find the book and re check it in online to get the Transit Slip to print 8 COPY STATUS LOST Indicates a book previously marked as lost was found and checked in 9 CIRC CLAIMS RETURNED Indicates a book previously marked as claimed returned was found and checked in IO ASSET COPY NOT FOUND Indicates the item barcode was mis scanned mis typed 11 ACTOR CARD NOT FOUND Indicates the patron s library barcode was mis scanned mis typed 12 0PEN CIRCULATION EXISTS Indicates a book was checked out that had never been checked in 13 MAX RENEWALS REACHED Indicates the item has already been renewed the maximum times allowed or it S a video DVD Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 144 Part Ill Cataloguing Table of Contents 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes ccccccsccseneesececeeeeceeecescesceeseecedensesecesceecersenes 147 LEER E PON aC eG UMMELIC SO ANCI a EE EO 147 e MARC Eper E e TEE 150 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database ccccccecceceeceeceeeeeeeceeseeeeseeseeaeeeeseeaess 154 141 OIG holdings TO title FSG OS seien A A 154 LC RCM SI CO aa
296. etc The output will look something like this Start Date 2014 05 13 Ez End Date 2014 05 20 Ez Welcome Ting YYYY MM DD View reports for Castlegar Public Library v Desk Payments workstation cash payment check payment credit card payment BCD juvenile 23 40 0 00 0 0 BCD CIRCULATION2 57 40 0 00 0 0 80 80 0 00 0 00 User Payments usr credit payment forgive payment work payment goods payment XXXX 0 00 39 50 0 00 0 0 YYYY 0 00 2 60 0 00 0 0 volunteer 0 00 5 35 0 00 0 0 0 00 47 45 0 00 0 00 Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 419 By clicking on the hyperlinked column headers i e workstation cash payment check payment etc it is possible to sort the columns to order the payments from smallest to largest or largest to smallest or to group the workstation names Customized payment reports can be created from the reports interface Several shared templates are available under SITKA templates Payments For instructions on using shared templates see Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 48 3 Circulation Policies 1 A user with LSA privileges can view your library s circulation policies Changes to circulation policies can be requested through the Sitka support team Select Admin Local Administration Circulation Policies 2 By default your library is selected in the box after Context Org Unit 1 e Checkout Library The initial display will show all cir
297. ew edit button in holdings grid in catalogue view Option to place another hold on the same title on the staff client Permalink on record details screen which provides a simplified URL for individual records Messages in My Account staff may leave messages for patrons which are displayed in My Account Email notification opt out setting in My Account in OPAC and patron account in staff client 1 3 Administration A new library setting Do not change fines fees on zero balance LOST transaction to allow libraries to not void lost charges on returned lost and paid items Two new library settings Void lost item billing when claims returned and Void lost item processing fee when claims returned to allow libraries to void lost charges when a lost item is marked claimed returned You may consider using these new settings if your library automatically marks long overdue items lost 1 4 Reports New Field Hint field for template filters which allows notes to be displayed on Report Creation screen Co op support plans to add informational notes to some filters after the upgrade e View edit existing reports which allows new reports to be created by editing existing reports or recurring reports to be updated or rescheduled Chapter 1 New in Evergreen Version 2 8 3 Chapter 2 Revisions to Version 2 8 and Attributions to Contributors Version 2 8 of this manual was published July 13 2015 Below are subsequent content changes in
298. exndsdesneskdedcanpancetasieexese 437 48 14 Non Catalogued Type Editor osrscectimeveedod E vOua d Un cesa VUE Eco rU ocu ocu bua bad UPC raVV HP xcd flne ect M ORE 463 48 15 Statistical Categories Editor ccccccceccseesecceccceeseeseeccecseecseccecseeseaeceeseesceeseeseeeceeseeses 464 A29 15 UOS E E A A A E E E UR DUI DUES 469 AoT WOK EOQ serenade neesii riS AEN AR EEA ER RRRA 472 Ad epu FAC IMMA Stl EE E E EE A tec etseedececnd ecd edu aec T ATUM UII ELDER E 473 49 1 Organizational Units eiie itineri deat cedeceatetetadeasereseatedeceas aura sdatededeeanceaneeenedetadatceteeeatsdis 473 49 1 1 Library Hours of Operation eaico sa coossosot edere derat ite torinese tiet odore deter bent seti dissert e 474 49 1 2 Library Addresses sssssssssssssessesenn nennen nnne nnne nenne snae nennen 475 49 2 Call Number Prefix and Call Number Suffix erotische ona Seen ee nnus 477 49 3 Copy Statuses 2iuiecekes ccdendesscetsnshcdcaanadecetsubscenctbeaedcannacsnescendidntenaiseecadsdeceeenatsercancehexdeeessensSde 477 A Mmi DUE DAE e E E EAEE EAE EEN 479 49 5 Floating GOUD pipe cateecennatcactonsiedateet cr acieveeinemteetes dene bent mr ntUa SE EEEE ESENE ENS EEE 479 50 Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set Up eeessssssssseeseeeeeneen nennen 480 50 1 MILAN Serp NT TET m TT _480 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 481 51
299. f Place Hold F3 Show Item Status by Barcode F5 Retrieve Patron by Barcode F1 Verify Credentials Replace Barcode Record In House Use Scan Item as Missing Pieces Re Print Last Enter Offline Interface 2 To record in house use for catalogued items enter number of uses scan barcode or type barcode and click Submit Record In House Use Call Number 3 To record In house Use of non catalogued items choose appropriate item from the dropdown menu in Barcode box and click Submit Audio Book Computer Equipment Microform Beference Video BRP Enitting Chapter 7 Circulation 71 The statistics of in house use are separated from circulation statistics The in house use count of catalogued items is not included in the items total use count 7 6 Item Status F5 The Item Status screen is very useful Many actions can be taken by either circulation staff or cataloguers on this screen Here we will cover some circulation related functions namely checking item status viewing past circulations inserting item alert messages marking items missing or damaged etc Checking item status To check the status of an item select Search Search for copies by Barcode or Circulation Show Item Status by Barcode click on the tem Status button on circulation tool bar or press F5 You can also click on barcode in copy summary view in catalogue to go directly to Item Status from the catalogu
300. f f End Date 287 03 2011 LI Retrieve Payrnents Transaction Type Last Billing Type Title Adjustment de grocery circulation circulation grocery circulation circulation circulation grocery circulation circulation circulation circulation Damaged Item Frogs AWeso Adjustment de Adjustment de Adjustment de Damaged Item FROGS FROGS Frogs Horizon Legac Adjustment de Adjustment de Adjustment de Adjustment de Show Item Details FROGS FROGS FROGS FROGS Items can be deleted from the catalogue even if a charge for that item is still attached to the patron s record The charge will remain on the patron s account after the deletion 8 7 Refund Sometimes paid bills need to be voided such as when lost and paid items are returned A negative balance may be created once such bills are voided To close such bills staff may refund the balance amount or add a bill entry Balance Qwed 2 00 Bill 12060604 Chapter 8 Bills and Payments To refund select the bill on the Bills screen Total Billed 2 24 11 1 0 00 2 00 Total Paid Type circulation Dora s Chr ass Bu eastern Actions for Selected Transact Click Actions for Selected Transactions Refund Show in Cataloq Show Item Details Void All Billings Refund Add Billing Full Details 89 2 3 4 Read t
301. f any listed ticket to view past correspondence or add new information Status usually progresses from new to open to resolved as a ticket is addressed See also Ticket Status Tickets are assigned to individual Co op Support members depending on availability and expertise A ticket may be owned by Nobody while the Support Team gathers more information about the problem Access any of your tickets by number with the Goto ticket field Tickets submitted by other libraries are not visible When finished please Logout Create New Tickets l Login to RT Self Service as shown above 2 Click New ticket RT for Coop Logged in as FictionalLibrary Logout Goto ticket 0 13138 Need to reset RT password new 13139 Cannot edit patron record new Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 8 3 Complete the form and click Create ticket Queue Support SITKA Support MFeqestors info fictionallibrary ca he Subject Need to reset RT password amp Anach file Browse Describe the issue below iil o The original request sent by email or submitted with RT Self Service appears here The subject line of your initial email becomes the subject of the RT ticket By default the Requestors field contains the email address associated with your RT login Any replies to this ticket will also be sent to this address The Subject should be descriptive to m
302. f the field matches the given parameter It is case sensitive Contains Matching Substring Ignore Case This operator is identical to Contains Matching Substring except it is not case sensitive Chapter 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators 323 Part VI Serials Table of Contents SIVE Tn 326 SNP ACIE NET ETE EET 326 e ONAN O a a E A E E A E E E TNT 326 OL COPY T NDA E E E E E E 330 SoN Whe ake a MEMMIUS mmm 330 30 2 Edit d C T RAE ia A A E NONE EIER P URR d OU UR 333 36 3 Delete a Copy Template mE OT UTE 333 SYL rS t vici Nc CT OTOTO TT mmm 335 eM 121002 O10 DUM AL TTD 835 Bro aN eae IC COMIS aa E EAA E 336 Oia he SOME ALS 1a o eH a E E E E E E 336 eee a EIC e DETTO E 340 372 3 Create Capions Alri AUG CN UT mmm 341 ors Edi Caption Ed T 5L sierraad ranra oaa E E E 342 eT ties ARA ACUTE E A E Ce E EE E 343 Oi 2s aede an EE r R 347 e a Cenerale F ed CTO CRT ET Tm m 349 Salt EE E 2302 Oils Rie AS CUN TRETEN 02 Oz atc LOGGING Ciel NT 356 OP a E E A E 3538 39 1 Searching for RII in ihe OPAC NT T TIU TIME 358 Oa OPAC e e BIS ANTT UU TT 358 AO ADE A AAE A 359 40 1 oetals Repon TEMAS 2 enne rr eus Qui ed Eee ed vdd nd Erde e d rara ua ER pa 359 As Po Cll WG SUIS np aces cutee E Tm 360 deLA li NS SU ANG E e E E dad E E E EE E A E E 360 A E E CO E meom S09 Zi WO Clete a WSS UENCE tac n
303. f the following methods to do the check in Method 1 Checking in items on a laptop with Evergreen Staff Client installed and Internet access e On Check In F2 screen scan every item on shelf in the frozen area Methhod 2 Checking in items with a portable barcode scanner 1 Scan every item barcode on shelf in the frozen area 2 Export the barcodes to a text file Sitka team recommends using Notepad to a computer with Evergreen installed The barcodes should be in one single spaced single column without extra space anywhere 3 Use Cut and Paste functions to break the big list of barcodes into smaller lists and save each list as an individual text file suggest each list contains about 50 barcodes Name your files in sequence e g inventoryOOT inventory002 so that it will be easy to follow when you upload the files Chapter 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure 411 4 On Jtem Status F5 screen of Evergreen click Upload From File Y J Ss UCU I I eu a a EN 030 1L oF e ir Fs fi ji 21 bn Pm sero ce rs Ferli pm File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Preview 1 Bib Record DYNIX 121189 4 Item Status Scan Item Alert Message Barcode Call Number Date Last Edited Due Date Location Status Actions for Cataloguers Actio List Actions 7 Trim List 20 rows Strict Barcode a TH 5 You are prompted to browse your local computer to find the barcode files Nav
304. ff ASHCROFT Add Edit System xp Tapis No Home ae Off Off Off on I Off False Add Edit sue District Library SIP Service System Thompson Staff PC HENUURE ig Off Off on JO Off False Add Edit 7 District Library SIP I System Thompson Visually Micola Regional No Impaired District Library Off Off Off on SIP Off False Add Edit System There are two more options when creating a patron stat cat Allow Free Text allows staff to type in the values when on patron registration edit screen Show in Summary displays the stat cat 1f there is a value in patron summary This is what the patron stat cat looks like in the patron registration screen Statistical Categories Gender Geographic Code Readers Home Service m Staff Visually Impaired gt Volunteer Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 468 48 16 Surveys This section illustrates how to create a survey shows where the survey responses are saved in the patron record and explains how to report on surveys Surveys questions can be optional or required Surveys come up when a patron is first registered and edited subsequently Required survey questions have to be answered whenever the patron record is edited Some examples of survey questions might include Would you use the library if it were open on a Sunday Would you like to be contacted by the library to learn about new services Do you attend library programs To find out the survey
305. files you can tell them apart by the profile names You may use the name provided here or use one of your own Enter new profile name Ace Hill Branch Your user settings preferences and other user related data will be stored in CAUsersNuser AppData Roaming OpenllSVopen ils staff clientNProfiles syi wihw5 Ace Hill Branch Choose Folder Click Finish to create this new profile 8 Select the profile you wish to use and click Start Evergreen Evergreen stores information about your settings preferences and other user items in your user profile l amp default Create Profile PENES Delete Profile Work offline 4 Don t ask at startup 5 4 Logging in to Evergreen An account with library staff permissions is required to log in to the Evergreen staff client Each staff member can have their own username and password or generic logins can be used For more information about staff profiles and permissions see Chapter 55 Staff Accounts Normal Login 1 Open the Evergreen staff client 2 The hostname should display in the Server section Status and Version should both display as 200 OK Chapter5 GettingStarted a If Status displays as There was an error testing this hostname check that the hostname has been entered correctly and that your internet connection is working If Version displays as 404 Not Found check that your staff client ve
306. for holdings select Cataloguing Search the Catalogue or Search the Catalogue or press F3 and click on Expert Search tab Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 150 2 Enter tag definitions and search criteria and click Search Search the Catalogue Basic Search Browse the Catalogue Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Expert Search Tag 260 Subfield b Value Random x Add Search Row Search Library Sitka i 3 You may search multiple tags by clicking Add Search Row search the Catalogue Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Expert Search Tag subfield Value Tag Subfedi Values its E x 4 Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 151 4 5 You may now search multiple tags Search the Catalogue Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Expert Search Tag 260 Subfield b Value Random x Tag 100 Sub eld a Value Novik x Add Search Row Search Library Sitka Search C Matching records are retrieved This example is the MARC view of one result LDR 00604cam a22001812 4500 00520070516161122 0 008 0608285 xx 000 0 eng d 9780739468715 1c535 00 Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes 152 You can manipulate the view during a session and set a default view by clicking on Actions for this Record on right of sc
307. g in the circulation policy to these three values Use Normal if only one fine level is used Please contact Co op support if you need multiple fine levels for one circulation modifier shelving location Circulate as Type When circulation policy is controlled by the media type in MARC records this field can be used to override the MARC media type for individual items It can also be used for statistics purpose Circulation Modifier An identifier used for applying circulation A shared list of circulation policies and or statistical purposes modifiers displays in the dropdown list for all libraries Each library selects circulation modifiers to use and for each selected circulation modifier the library may define its own circulation policy Table 15 4 Miscellaneous Alert Message This message will show up when the item is retrieved or checked in or out Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 161 Deposit Indicates whether the checking out item requires a deposit or not Deposit Amount Amount required as a deposit for the item When the item is checked out a bill for this amount is automatically created in the patron account Price of the item The price entered is used when the system generates lost or damaged bills for the item OPAC Visible Indicates whether the item is visible in the Leave it as YES unless the OPAC or not item is with an OPAC visible collection shelving location but should not be
308. g a barcode The simplest way to replace an item s barcode is to use Replace Barcode function on the Circulation or Cataloguing dropdown menu You will be prompted to enter the old barcode and then the new barcode Replace Barcode function is also available on Holdings Maintenance screen Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 170 The Edit function the link beside item s barcode on Record Details screen on the catalogue allows you to update barcode too You may also replace a barcode on the tem Status F5 screen 1 Access the tem Status screen and scan or enter the existing barcode you wish to edit 2 Highlight the item row and select Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and choose Replace Barcode ah FALLI LUE ILICTTI OUCREL Add to Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Halds on Bib Show Iter Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Make Itern Bookable Book Item Now Request Item Find Originating Acquisition Edit Item Attributes Edit Items Volumes Per Bib Mark Itern Darnaged Mark Item Missing Abort Transits Check In Items Renew Items 3 Scan or enter new barcode and click OK 4 Your item is displayed on tem Status screen with its new barcode and the old barcode will no longer retrieve the item Alert Message Barcode Call Nurnber _20000789012345 gt 791 43 72 2 sitkatestbar gt 791 43 72 Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 171 15 6
309. g a third party self check please contact the vendor for that third party self check 50 1 Initial Set Up l 5 6 Library sets up a computer specifically for self check with the following e a mouse e a barcode scanner library security system RFID pad demagnetizing equipment etc e a keyboard e a receipt printer e Internet Browser The self check is known to be compatible with Chrome Firefox and Internet Explorer e amethod for locking down access so patrons cannot use the computer for other functions Sitka Support recommends that you consult with your local IT support on the best method to lock down your computer Library contacts Sitka Support to get a self check interface set up with the library s logo and colours Sitka Support supplies library with URL for self check and a self check specific Local System Administrator account Library saves URL as a favourite in browser or as a shortcut on the computer s desktop for easy access Library sets needed self check library settings See Table 48 13 Self Check Library teaches patrons to use self check For instructions on using the native Evergreen Self Check see Chapter 11 Se f Check Chapter 50 Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set Up 480 Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool The patron deletion tool developed by the Sitka Support team allows Local System Administrators to delete inacti
310. g into Evergreen with a local system administrator username and password Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 139 2 From the menu bar select Admin Offline Transaction Management Operator Change New Offline Transaction E E Download Offline Patron List Local Administration Server Administration Local Administration User Permission Editor Toggle Button Bar For developers 3 The Offline Transactions screen will open Previously created sessions will be listed in the Offline Sessions section Otherwise the Offline Sessions section will be blank 4 Inthe upper Offline Sessions section click on the Create button to create a new session Description 5 Enter a name for the session like Internet Down 2009 12 02 Click OK The page at http flinflon sitka bclibraries ca says TX Q Please enter a description y Internet Down 2009 12 02 OK Cancel S 6 Inthe Offline Sessions section highlight the session you just created An Uploaded Transactions section will appear in the bottom of the screen Initially this section will be empty Offline Sessions ipn Description Date Created Upload Count Transactions Processed Processing Date Completed R Internet Down 2009 12 02 2009 12 02 11 54 0 0 No testing 1 22 2009 12 01 10 59 1 2 Completed 2009 12 01 11 00 testing 1 2 2009 12 01 10 59 0 0 Completed 2009 12 01 10 59 2nd try cko oct909 2009 10 09 13 17 0 0 No October 09 09 2009 10 09
311. g on MARC Record button below record summary or selecting Actions for this Record gt MARC View or MARC Edit at top right of record Last Edited On 04 13 2013 12 34 PM Actions for this Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit HoldingsMaintenance 8 This presents detailed bibliographic data to help you determine whether the record matches the item in hand 1 1088231880 oos SKA aos 20120606061320 0 aoa 06040722006 00 0 eng d 020 a 9780770429072 020 a 0770429076 pap sauto Nz 100 1 ta Rutherfurd Edward 5 of Ireland c Edward Rutherfurd tb Seal Books c 2006 650 O a Historical o a52 1 912 99 h PR i RUT p BFSJ101838 830 0 a Dublin It is possible to search ISBNs by keyword but results may not be exhaustive We recommend using Numeric Search as described in this lesson If an OCLC number is nine digits then Evergreen uses ocn as a prefix For example ocn123456789 If an OCLC number is less than 8 digits then Evergreen uses ocm as a prefix In addition Evergreen will automatically prefix the number with zeros so that it is nine digits For example ocm01234567 or ocm00123456 If searching a LCCN do not use a hyphen add a 0 in place of a hyphen e g 2001001234 13 2 MARC Expert Search l To search the catalogue
312. g record Import Item Attributes are profiles set up by Sitka to allow importing of item records with vendor supplied MARC records The vendor will need to send item level information in a local MARC tag and subfields eg Oxx or 852 and this information can be mapped into item records when the bibliographic records are loaded Please contact Co op support if you are interested in loading item records with your bibliographic records 18 2 2 Uploading MARC Record Files l Select Cataloguing MARC Batch Import Export Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve title by ITEN Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Display Itern B F5 Manage Copy Buckets Manage Record Buckets Create Mew MARC Record Import Record from 239 50 Replace Barcode Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Manage Authorities 2 The MARC File Upload screen opens Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 201 You may create a new queue for the file you are to upload or append the file s records to an existing queue To create a new queue type in a name for your file in the box beside Create a New Upload Queue To append records to an existing queue choose a queue from the dropdown list beside Add to an Existing Queue Do not use or slash or backslash in import queue name Evergreen MARC File Upload Record Type Bibliographic Records 5 Create a New Upload Queue 160624 or Add to an Existing Queu
313. g the Reset Password button will generate a random number You can only reset passwords for accounts with less permissions than your account For example if your account is PL Circ Full Cat you can reset a password for PL Circulator but you cannot reset a password for PL Local System Administrator 6 4 5 Invalidate Email Address or Phone Number Invalidating patron emails ensures that Evergreen does not continue to attempt to send emails to an invalid email address Accumulated bounced back emails may result in emails from Evergreen such as overdue and pre due notices being blocked by some email service providers GMail Hotmail etc It may affect all Sitka Evergreen users Libraries should regularly check the bounced back emails and invalidate the email addresses accordingly to ensure smooth notification services from Evergreen 1 Open the patron s record 2 Click Edit 3 Beside the patron s email address click the Invalidate button This button will only appear if the email field is filled 4 Click Save 5 Click Refresh 6 The patron s email will be cleared from the email field and a message will now appear at the top of the patron s record saying Invalid Email see messages Clicking on this message will take you to the Messages screen 7 Here you can see the invalid email can compare it with what the patron says their emails should be and can delete the the message when it is resolved The
314. gister a workstation 7 Click Login 8 Inthe Workstation section enter a name for your workstation in the WS Name field Co op Support recommends that a unique meaningful name is used for each workstation such as checkout or reference Do not use slash or backslash in your workstation s name as it may interfere with offline transaction uploads Chapter 5 Getting Started 12 9 Select the correct organizational unit from the Organization drop down menu Multi branch libraries need to ensure the correct branch is selected 10 Click Register 11 A pop up will appear to indicate successful registration Click OK 12 Re enter the Local System Administrator account password or login using a different staff account 5 3 Adding the Profile Manager The profile manager makes it possible to create multiple profiles that can be used to login to Evergreen To use the profile manager you will need to edit the desktop shortcut once the Evergreen staff client is installed The screenshots provided here are for the Windows version of the staff client but should be similar in the Linux staff client The profile manager is not currently available for the Macintosh staff client 1 Access Properties for the Evergreen staff client 2 Add P or ProfileManager to the desktop shortcut In Windows this is done by adding profilemanager to the end of the Target field Target type Application Target location
315. gistration Regular expression The Regular Expression on validation on the Evening phone field in patron registration Regular expression The Regular Expression on validation on the Other phone field in patron registration Regular expression The Regular Expression on Regular LSA validation on phone fields in patron expression 450 Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu registration Applies to all phone fields without their own setting Regext for Postal The Regular Expression on Regular LSA Code field on patron validation on the Postal Code field expression registration in patron registration Require at least one Enforces a requirement for having at True False LSA address for Patron least one address for a patron during Registration registration If set to False you need to delete the empty address before saving the record If set to True deletion is not allowed Require XXXXX field The XXXXX field will be required True False LSA XXXXX can be on patron registration on the patron registration screen Country Day phone Evening phone Other phone DOB Email or Prefix Require staff initials for Appends staff initials and edit date True False LSA entry edit of copy notes into note content Require staff initials Appends staff initials and edit date True False LSA for entry edit of patron into note content notes Require staff initials Appends staff initials and e
316. gning values to the filter fields for example giving 2012 01 01 to the Due Date field This process is commonly known as defining a report or running a report or setting up a report The process also schedules the report s run time and frequency one time only or on regularly basis selects the result file format s and designates output file receivers if preferred The information provided during this step is saved in a file called Report on Evergreen This file contains the template information and the value for each filter Unfortunately most of these contents are neither viewable nor editable after the file is saved When a report starts to run the program goes through the database and gathers the records that meet the conditions into a file in the selected format s This is the Output file that contains the result records The three types of files created during the above procedure need to be kept separately in different folders on the Reports interface Before anything you must create at least one Template Report and Output folder as described in Chapter 26 Folders This chapter focuses on the movements on the Reports interface while demonstrating how to create reports in Evergreen Once you understand how to navigate around the Reports interface you can create your own reports from scratch or take advantage of Sitka s pre packaged report templates Some background knowledge of Evergreen database and database terminology are at the e
317. go to the Items Out screen ELS rmm a Edit Messages Other Items Out Actions for Selected Items Author Barcode Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Circulation Mo Copy ID Due Date Fines Stopped Remaining Renewals Title EZ 1 Collin 332940 BPR BPR book 7600689 2012 06 The H 2 Sewel 367571 BPR J NL Chapter 7 Circulation 65 7 Select the item you want to renew Click on Actions for Selected Items Renew If you want to renew all items in the account click Renew All instead Items Out Actions for Selected Items Author Barcode Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Circulation Mo Copy ID Due Date Fine Copy to Clipboard 1 Collin 332940 BPR 7600689 2012 06 Add to Item Bucket 2 Sewel 3675 1 BPR bo Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Show Non Catalogued Circulations in List Above E Auto Print Hold and Tra Edit Due Date Mark Lost by Patron Lost Claimed Returned Long Overdue Has Unpaid Billings Mark Claimed Returned Mark Claimed Never Checked Out Barcode Checkin Date Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Renew abe All Renew with Specific Due Date Check In Add Billing Save Columns 3 If you want to specify the due date click Renew with Specific Due Date you will be prompted to select a due date Once done click Apply Se
318. graphic resources such as laptops projectors and meeting rooms The following pieces make up a non bibliographic resource Resource Type e Resource Attribute e Resource Attribute Values e Resource Resource Attribute Map You need to create resource types and resource attributes features of the resource types and add booking items resources to individual resource type Each resource attribute may have multiple values You need to link the applicable features resource attributes and values to individual item resource through the Resource Attribute Map Before you create resources booking items you need to have a resource type and associated resource attributes and values if any for them Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 401 Create New Resource Type Select Admin Server Administration Booking Resource Types ACQUISITIONS Admin Help Actor Stat Cat Sip Fields Operator Change Mew Download Offline Patron List Age Hald Protect Rules Asset Stat Cat Sip Fields Authorities Best Hold Selection Sort Order Local Administration Billing Types Server Administration Offline Transaction Management Booking Resource Attribute Maps Call Number Prefixes Resource Attribute Values Call Number Suffixes Resource Attributes Circulation Duration Rules Resource Types Circulation Limit Groups Resources Circulation Matchpoint Weights 2 A list of current resource types will
319. gregate Biling Totals money Count Distinct Aggregate Check In Date Time timestamp Raw Data Mon Aggregate Check In Library org unit Check In Staff link Check Out Date Time timestamp Circ Duration Rule link Circ ID id Circulating Item link Circulating Library org_unit Circulation 5FaFF link lv Enable nullability selection Add Selected Fields Template Configuration Mame Source Specifier Description Circulation Displayed Fields Aggregate Filters Display Mame Data Type Field Transform Circ ID id Count Distinct Alter Display Header Remove Selected Field Ch Chapter 27 Creating Templates 281 8 Circ ID will be the column header in the report output You can rename default display names to something more meaningful To do so in this example select the Circ ID row and click Alter Display Header Template Configuration Description Displayed Fields Base Filters Aggregate Filters Display Mame Data Type Field Transform Circ IDO zw a gt o EI tunt Distinct a Alter Display Header j hange Transform Remove Selected Field Change Field Hint Double clicking on the displayed field name is a shortcut to altering the display header 9 Type in the new column header name for example Circ count and click OK The page at http hepburn pines bclihrary E 2 Change the column header to 10 Add other data to your report by going
320. gue 244 Basic Search Advanced Search Browse Sort by Relevance EE Search Results Results 31 40 of about 343 page 40135 4 Previous 31 Wizards 132 Potter Harry Fictitious 123 Rowling J K gt Book 12345678 Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows by J K Rowling illustrations by Mary GrandPre Next character Publisher New York NY Arthur A Levine Books 2007 Maai 102 ISBN 9780545010221 agic 102 Edition 1st ed Schools 80 Phys Desc 759 p ill 24 cm Hogwarts School of 60 Witchcraft and Wizardry Imaginary organization Library Bren Del Win Centennial Library Centennial Library England 83 Bren Del Win Centennial Library Angleterre 3 Gold Bridge Branch UCN Norway House English speaking countries 2 Public Library Genre Viewing a record Shelving location unior fiction Juvenile Fiction UCNYA eS available at Sitka Call number Rowling J Rowling W J Howling J ROW YA FIC ROW Status Available Available Available Available Available wv Place Hold ole LJ Add to my list Click on a title to view a detailed record of the title including descriptive information location and availability and options for placing holds Black beauty Anna Sewell illustrated in color by Lucy Kemp Welch Sewell Anna 1820 1878 Author Kemp Welch Lucy 1869 1958 ill Added Author Book
321. h incoming and existing record s if the match record is a true match but a brief record you may mark the match MARC record as a merge target by selecting the checkbox in front of the record in the Merge Target column Click Back to Import Queue once done Go Back Reload Go Forward RI Export Records G ImportRecords lE InspectQueue G Record Display Attributes Merge Overlay Profiles amp Record Match Sets G3 Importitem Attributes Import Matches Back To Import Queue Queued Matched Merge Target ID View MARC Match Score Record Record Creator Create Date a Source TCN Source TCN Value Quality Quality 107267770 View MARC 0 0 1 tnrd cat 3 13 12 6 9 12 2 SITKA 107267770 i 392 If the match record in Evergreen is a true match but a full record Sitka policy requires you to use the existing record instead of importing another Do not import the record However if the incoming record contains local information in tags 092 590 690 852 or 856 that you want to bring into the existing record such as loading holding records to existing MARC records you need to mark the match record as a merge target In this scenario you would use the Merge Using EXISTING Record merge Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 205 profile as described in next step If you are interested in loading holdings item information please contact Co Op support to set it up 7 If you have marked a merge t
322. h term and after listed Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 237 Basic Search Advanced Search Browse the Catalogue Browse for Tiles V starting with red i re colonised planet 5 1 real stories from the rink 1 recipes for fat free living cookbook 1 reconnaissance and exploration 1 redfish and the kootenay bioregion 1 rediscovering america on the appalachian trail 1 reflections of a christian pacifist 1 relax amp renew music by the sea 1 reliminary metallogical map of north ameria 1 reluctant ghost 1 MARC Expert Search If you are familiar with the MARC system you may search by tag inthe Expert Search option from search tabs across top of the screen Enter the three digit tag number the subfield if relevant and the value or text that corresponds to the tag For example to search by publisher name enter 260 b Random House To search several tags simultaneously use the Add Row option Click Search to run the search 21 3 Search Tips You do not need to enter an author s last name first nor do you need an exact title or subject heading as all searches are keyword search Evergreen is also forgiving about plurals and alternate verb endings so if you enter dogs Evergreen will also find items with dog Do not use an AND operator to join search terms e An AND operator is automatically used to join all search terms So a search for golden compass will search for e
323. han a few hundred records Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 187 17 1 Adding Copy Records to Copy Buckets You may create a copy bucket by going to the dropdown menu Edit Copy Buckets Click New Bucket You may also create a new bucket when attempting to add an item to a bucket Pending Copies RN Barcode Call Number Deleted Location List Actions 7 Add All Add Selected Bucket View Choose a bucket Delete Bucket X Remove Selected From Bucket Add Selected Call Number Deleted Location ta R L Transfer to Specific Volume erc Edit Item Attributes Delete All from Cataloque To add items to a bucket select or create a bucket in the Bucket View first Scan item barcodes into the box in the Pending Copies pane shown on the above screen Select Add All or Add Select to move pending items to the selected bucket in the lower pane Use Ctrl or Shift with mouse clicking to select multiple items Copy record is now in the selected bucket Horse Books Items New Bucket Bucket 233 Horse Books Items Owner bontest BPR You may also add copy records to a bucket when they are displayed on some other screens such as Holdings Maintenance Item Status Check In and Items Out in patron accounts Add Items to Buckets is included in the actions list on these screens Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 188 To add a copy record to a copy bucket from the Holdings Maintenance screen highlight the item and choose Actions for Sele
324. hapter 45 Using the Booking Module Adapted with permission from original material by the Evergreen Community With the Evergreen Booking Module you can reserve catalogued bibliographic or non catalogued non bibliographic items for a particular patron for a specified time period This chapter will help staff create reservations generate pull lists for reserved items capture reserved resources and pick up and return reservations The Booking Module allows you to lend out non bibliographic items They are called resources in Evergreen Almost anything you lend out can be entered as a resource Laptops projectors cables ski locks bike locks cameras easels meeting rooms even staplers can be lent using the Booking Module The Booking Module can also be used to reserve bibliographic items For example do you have a special program coming up that you need all the books on ducks for You can reserve them for the specific day of your program to make sure they will come back and are not checked out when getting near to your program day 45 1 Evergreen Booking Tutorial 45 2 Creating a Booking Reservation Only staff members may create reservations A reservation can be started from a patron record or a booking resource To reserve catalogued items you may start from searching the catalogue if you do not know the booking item s barcode To create a reservation from a patron record 1 Retrieve the patron s record 7 Select Other
325. hapter 48 Local Administration Menu 452 Patron username format Regular expression defining the Regular Sitka patron username format used for expression patron registration and self service username changing only Table 48 7 Holds Behind desk pickup If a branch supports both a public True False LSA supported holds shelf and behind the desk pickups set this value to true This gives the patron the option to enable behind the desk pickups for their holds by selecting Hold is behind Circ Desk flag in patron record Best hold selection sort Defines the sort order of holds when Selection Sitka order selecting a hold to fill using a given list copy at capture time Block renewal of items When an item could fulfill a hold do True False Sitka needed for holds not allow the current patron to renew Cancelled holds display Show all cancelled holds that were Duration LSA age cancelled within this amount of time Cancelled holds display How many cancelled holds to show Number LSA count in patron holds interfaces Clear shelf copy status Any copies that have not been put Selection Sitka into reshelving in transit or on list holds shelf for a new hold during the clear shelf process will be put into this status This 1s basically a purgatory status for copies waiting to be pulled from the shelf and processed by hand Default estimated wait When predicting the amount of time Duration Sitka Not appli
326. he instructions and confirm Refund Excess Payment Refund Excess Payment Are you sure you would like to refund excess payment on bill 12060604 This action will simply put the amount in the Payment Pending column as a negative value You must still select Apply Payrnent Certain types of payments may not be refunded The refund may be applied to checked transactions that follow the refunded transaction Options Select payment type and click Apply Payment History Total Owed 2 00 Refunds Available 2 00 Total Checked 2 00 Credit Available 0 00 Bill Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type Title Payment Pending A 12060604 2 24 11 1 0 00 2 00 circulation Dora s Christmas car 200 es Refund can be converted to patron credit by selecting Patron Credit as payment type Refunds are reflected in the Cash Report Non cash payment can not be refunded Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 90 Chapter 9 Holds 9 1 Placing Holds Holds can be placed by staff on the Staff Client and by patrons on the OPAC In this chapter we demonstrate placing holds on the Staff Client See Part IV OPAC for placing holds on the OPAC Holds Levels Evergreen has four different levels of holds Library staff can place holds at all four levels while patrons can only place Meta record Title level and Volume level holds The chart below summarizes the four levels of holds Meta record M Patron want
327. he last item To select several non sequential items hold down the Ctrl key and click on the items you wish to select What copy alerts look like If you scan this item in the tem Status screen you will see the copy alert Barcode C T Due Date Location 332040003700 BLAC 2012223121 59PM Children s Videos Chapter 16 Copy Alerts 185 When this item is checked out the copy alert will look like this 8 Override Checkout Failure Exceptions COPY_ALERT_MESSAGE Spine label needs replacing The requested copy has an alert message attached Override Force this action When this item is checked in the copy alert will look like this 8 Override Checkin Failure Exceptions COPY ALERT MESSAGE Spine label needs replacing The requested copy has an alert message attached Override Force this action Chapter 16 Copy Alerts 186 Chapter 17 Copy Buckets Buckets is the name for a batch change functionality in Evergreen or for a function that groups records in one place Batch changes allow you to group together many records and enact changes on them all at once instead of individually editing them Buckets can also be used to create pull lists Buckets allow you to track and work with your materials in arbitrary ways and more easily collaborate with others This chapter will demonstrate a variety of ways in which you can manage your records with Buckets Currently there are copy and title r
328. he location library link will reveal information about owning library such as address and open hours Below the local details you can open up various tabs to display more information You can select Reviews and More to see the book s summaries and reviews if available You can select Shelf Browser to view items appearing near the current item on the library shelves Often this is a good way to browse for similar items You can select MARC Record to display the record in MARC format If your library offers the service clicking on Awards Reviews and Suggested Reads will reveal that additional information Search Additional Items by Author Subject or Series You can search for additional items by an author one of the subjects in the record or other works in the same series Clicking the author subject or series will start a new search in the catalogue You can do this from the results page or from within the record details view as shown below Search for related items by subject Subject Survival gt Fiction Television programs gt Fiction Interpersonal relations gt Fiction Contests gt Fiction Genre Dystopias Science fiction Young adult fiction Going back When you are viewing a specific record you can always go back to your title list by clicking the link Search Results on the left of the page Library Home Search the Catalogue Advanced Search SEARCH All Formats Y For ca Search Results Showing Item 1
329. he reservation will appear below the user s name Reservations on catalogued items can be created on tem Status F5 screen Select the item then Actions for Selected Items Book Item Now 45 3 Reservation Pull List Reservation pull list can be generated dynamically on the Staff Client To create a pull list select Booking Pull List Create Reservations Pull List Capture Resources Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations 2 You can decide how many days in advance you would like to pull reserved items Enter the number of days in the box adjacent to Generate list for this many days hence For example if you would like to pull items that are needed today you can enter 1 in the box and you will retrieve items that need to be pulled today 3 Click Fetch to retrieve the pull list 1 Booking Pull List 3o Back Reload ml Go Forwar Debug Print Page Booking Pull List See pull list for library BPR Generate list for this many days hence 1 Fetch Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 393 4 The pull list will appear Click Print to print the pull list 1 Booking Pull List Go Back Go Forward Booking Pull List See pull list for library BPR Generate list for this many days hence 1 Fetch Title or name Barcode Reservation details Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 17 17 30 2011 06 17 18 45 at BPR for Pringle Jennifer 98723000112236 2011 06 17 13 00 2011 06 17 14 00 at BPR for Mar
330. he title on the catalogue and display it on record details screen by clicking the title link on the result list 2 Select Actions for this Record Holdings Maintenance Click on your item barcode row and select Actions for Selected Rows Delete Items Note that in this example there are 11 consortial items attached to this MARC record Consortial Tota 11 Available 11 Actions for Selected Rows Copy to Clipboard Add Iterns to Buckets Show Item Details Make This Item Bookable Y Show Last Few Circulations Edit Items Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Link as Conjoined Items to Previously Marked Bib Record Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Add Items Edit Volumes Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library F I e Delet Wolumes 4 Confirm deletion at prompt by clicking Delete Item is deleted In this case your library s volume record is also deleted as Sitka Evergreen has been configured to do This Sitka wide setting helps keep the consortial database free of orphaned volume records The MARC record with other consortial holdings is left intact If the item being deleted is the sole copy on this MARC record the volume and MARC record will be automatically deleted as explained above If you have Evergreen configured to alert on last copy Alert on empty bib records the alert would be presented The alert and the effect of dele
331. her library in BC or MB and scan that card Patrons may be unaware that they are part of a consortium and their current library card will work at your library If modification is required you should modify the existing patron s record instead of creating a new one See Sitka policy about how to manage new and existing patron BC or MB library cards in Evergreen QD Always use Search Search for patron by Barcode for the thorough search if the patron has a library card Using barcode as a search term on the patron search screen F4 is different from using Search Search for patron by barcode F1 It does not search those patrons who have not opted in to your library Chapter 6 Patron Records 39 Press Shift F1 or select Circulation Register Patron or click Patron Registration button on circulation toolbar Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Bookin Check Qut Items Fl Check In Iterns F2 Renew Items Ctrl F2 Register Patron Shift Fl Pent ng Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F8 2 Hill in required information This screen can look different depending on your library s choices regarding required and suggested fields and whether or not you are displaying all fields required fields or suggested fields Debug Print Page Barcode OPAC Staff Client User Name Save Save amp Clone Password Generate Password Show Only Required Fields Verify Password Show All Fields First Name Middle Name Last Name Date of Birth E
332. home 2013 Author BEM 2013 Bookmobile Magazine Bib Call PETAI Record 3 of 102 Start Previous Next End Search Results Go Back Reload Go Forward Advanced Search Refine Your Original Search Recent searches Search Results Showing Item 3 of 102 Preferred library Maple Library Canadian house and home 2013 BKM 2013 Bookmobile Magazine Author Available copies Current holds 2 copies at Green Land Consortium 0 current holds with 7 total copies AV Y LAB E E Record details ISSN 0826 7642 Physical Description v ill some col 28 cm Publisher Toronto Telemar Pub 1984 LOCATION CALL NUMBER COPY NOTES BARCODE SHELVING LOCATION Cadillac Book Bus 2013 02 February Text 35444001114833 Magazine Cadillac Book Bus 2013 02 February Text 35444001127835 Magazine Cadillac Book Bus 2013 03 March Text 35444001114940 Magazine Cadillac Book Bus 2013 04 April Text 35444001371599 Magazine Cadillac Baok Bus 2013 05 May Text 35444001371292 Magazine Cadillac Book Bus 2013 06 June Text 35444001128239 Magazine Cadillac Baok Bus 2013 07 July Text 35444001128023 Magazine 5 Click on the Subscriptions tab Record 3 of 102 Start Previous En Search Results Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MPL Maple Library v Show Subs L Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row Location Subscriptions EZ 4GLCONS Green Land Consortium APLF Pu
333. hours Claim never checked When a circ is marked as claims True False LSA out mark copy as never checked out mark the copy as missing missing Claim return copy Claims returned copies are put into Selection Sitka status Sitka wide default status of Claimed list Returned This is not configurable at library Courier code Courier Code for the library Not in use Available in transit slip templates as the courier_code macro Juvenile age threshold Upper cut off age for patrons to be Duration considered juvenile calculated from years date of birth in patron accounts Library information URL for information on this library Text LSA URL such as contact information hours of operation and directions Use a complete URL such as http example com hours html Mark item damaged When an item is marked damaged True False LSA voids overdues overdue fines on the most recent circulation are voided Pre cat item circ lib Override the default circ lib of Text Sitka here with a pre configured circ lib for pre cat items The value should be the shortname aka policy name of the org unit Telephony Arbitrary This overrides lines from Text Sitka Not in use line s to include in opensrf xml Line s must be valid each notice callfile for your target server and platform e g Asterisk 1 4 LSA Use external library If set to true the library name in the True False information URL in copy details s
334. hout volume number 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 2 v rw P x OL Annually Annual report 2 0 8 1 1 year w a e Annual report Increments continuously 2 0 8 1 a no 1 year w a x 01 e Annual report Increments continuously with volume number 2 70 59 1 due VOL SD NOs N Ws 1 rive ce OL ear w a x 01 Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 383 Part VII Booking Module Table of Contents do ale ie POONG NOGUE eae toro Seren ees sek tre se ere SH ne eh Serer Wee cree a reer neee Serer ee eee ters errr rr A5 l F citis NER ENT TT E Umm 45 2 Creating a Booking Reservation Z5 ds oe LV alo FUN EE oanpt sEIAE RHENUM a E EOE D IROPMEDIE P IND ERIRDRI UTR OPUS 45 4 Capturing Items for Reservations 45 5 Picking Up Reservations 45 6 Returning TSS Cl VallOllD a cai ocdaede enda red niens coe D aroma nue Ein EN N ENN evade qe REN CEDE LED ECC E US 45 7 Cancelling a Reservation a0 ooi Module Mme sii el OT osea it Ieec o Sotnaie usd nta niei E 46 1 Local System Administrator Booking Tutorials 02st looo EXE ree EUOE S DXPx S PoHROO E kiniinin aiiai 46 2 Creating Bookable Non Bibliographic Resources 46 3 Editing Non Bibliographic Resources seisiriraakipiaik PE bRRPEPIGERETRPREPRULRR nDKERIRIATEDIRPYRLRRPPRRPRPREPERORTRI Add RR 46 4 Deleting Non bibliographic Resources Part VII Booking Module 385 C
335. how Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Edit Items Volumes Per Bib Iransfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Add Items Edit Volumes Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library Delete Items Delete Volumes Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing Print Spine Label Replace Barcode Save Columns x Admin Help 176 x 6 Open your spine label template in a work processor Contact Co op Support if you require assistance setting up a template 7 Click inside the document so the cursor appears in the middle of the first box 8 In Evergreen highlight the first label and copy Ctrl C the text File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking Admin Help 4 Item Status 2 Spine Labels 3 Spine Labels x Debug Print Page 9 Paste Ctrl P the label into the template 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all the labels appear in the template 11 Adjust the formatting fonts etc of the labels as desired 12 Print the page on your label stock 15 7 Transferring holdings There are times when you need to move copy records from one title record to another or move copies from one volume to another under the same or another title record This lesson will demonstrate the steps required to achieve a transfer The critical step is to ensure
336. i Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 195 4 Search results are displayed in the lower pane You may click on Hide Top Pane to make more space for the result list You may Fetch More Results if applicable Information about each retrieved record appears on a separate summary line with various columns of information If a cover image is available it will display as well The Service column indicates where the record was found If native evergreen catalog is listed in this column the record is in Evergreen You may view MARC records choose to import or overlay MARC records This example demonstrates importing a record To import a record choose the record from the results list that you would like to import You should view the record first by choosing MARC View When you are sure you have chosen the correct record to import click mport Results Showing 12 of 26 No record marked for overlay Fetch More Results Ust Actons j a cro 9781441790 2 Blackstone Audo 0cn7449685 Caleb s crossing FF 1101525673 Viking Caleb s crossing Ge ral di ne B rooks Brooks Gerald 9781441790 p20 Blackstone Audo 0cn6921570 Caleb s crossing serber of PROFLE OF THE BOOK Brooks Gerald 9780142429 Penguin Audio 0cn6972828 Caleb s crossing Brooks Gerad 9780670021 20 Viking 2010051207 Caleb s crossing Brooks Gerald 2 Blackstone Audo 0cn7449685 Caleb s crossing Brooks Gerald 20 Vik
337. i org 1 value 107 cat default copy status normal t org 10 value S j circ holds clear shelf copy status m fMorg 10 value null circ offline skip checkin if new er status changed time arg 10 value null circ missing pieces copy status IN i org l0 value nulli circ selfcheck block checkout on copy status i org l0 value null i cat default copy status fast T Copy Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 439 To import library settings click Import button on Library Settings Editor screen Open your previously saved file and copy the content Click Paste in the pop up window Click Submit Import Paste in your exported settings Paste Submit The exported settings may inlcude entries with context of Sitka When importing settings with such entries you may see errors of permission denied This is considered normal as LSA can not and should not edit entries in the Sitka context Settings Overview The settings are grouped together in separate tables based on functions and modules which are affected by the setting They are in the same sequence as you see in the staff client Each table describes the available settings in the group and shows which can be changed on a per library basis At bottom is the table with a list of data types 463 with details about acceptable settings values For settings used by Acquisitions Module please refer to Acquisition User Ma
338. ible 6 edit copy buckets 7 acq create invoice 8 create marc 9 acq create po booking reservation acq unified search portal Home JL Label Toolbar Separator Toolbar Spacer Browse Holds Shelf Capture Resources Claim Ready Items Copy Buckets Create Invoice Create MARC Record Create Purchase Order Create Reservations General Search Larane A 1 n A 8 A lt E Selected Button ID circ_checkout I circ checkin toolbarseparator 1 search opac copy status toolbarseparator 2 patron search patron register toolbarspacer 3 hotkeys toggle w 0 oO Uo UN Permission Context SITKA v Owning Org Unit Owning Workstation 3 Inthe prompt window type in a name for the new group and then click OK Label Check Out Check In Toolbar Separator Search Catalogue Item Status Toolbar Separator Patron Search Patron Registration Toolbar Spacer Toggle Hotkeys Owning User Cancel Changes 4 Choose the function buttons you want to add to the new group Click gt A to add You may select one in the Selected pane and then click R to remove it 5 Check one of the radio buttons Owning Org Unit Owning Workstation or Owning User to specify that the new group should be available to every workstation in your library or this workstation or yourself only 6 If you chose Owning Workstation in the above step click the down pointed arrow at the
339. ibution Stream ID Date Published 901 2014 07 31 901 2014 06 30 901 2014 03 31 901 2014 04 30 Date Received 2014 06 09 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 Date Expected 2014 07 31 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 2014 04 30 Notes Item Dist Sub FATA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number August 2014 Jan 14 Jun 14 Jan 14 Jun 14 Unit ID Contents 9407079 V 2 No 8 2 Date Last Edited m 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 354 notes sorted by type Notes can also be edited or deleted from this window Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber MDB Item ID 22057 22058 22050 22000 22061 22062 22063 22864 SN C vn 4 uU MTS a Issuance Label Vi2 No 102014 0c V 2 No 11 2014 N V 2 No 12 2014 De V 3 Mo 1 2015 an V 3 No 2 2015 Feb V 3 Mo 3 2015 Mar V 3 Mo 4 2015 pr V 3 Mo 5 2015 May a Lo m Li a Showing Recently Received Current Working Unit Auto per Item Item ID Issuance Label Distribution 1 22856 V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Cdn Living 2 22855 V 2 No 8 2014 Aug Cdn Living 3 22854 V 2 No 7 2014 Jul Cdn Living 4 22851 V 2 No 4 2014 Apr Cdn Living a Item Notes ID 22857 Edit This Note Chapter 38 Receiving Serials Delete This Note Distribution Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn Living Cdn L
340. ides a list of serials that have not yet been received used for claiming missing issues Chapter 40 Reports 359 Chapter 41 Special Issues 41 1 Add an Issuance The following instructions are for adding additional Issuances to an existing subscription This process is used for unpredicted or special Issues l From the Serial Record gt Click on the Actions for this record button 2 Select Alternate Serial Control Actions far this Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit Holdings Maintenance Manage Conjoined Items Manage Parts View Holds View Place Orders Add to Bucket Mark for Overlay Delete Record Undelete Record Add Volumes Mark as Title Hold Transfer Destination Transfer All Title Holds Mark as Target for Conjoined Items Duplicate in New Tab Remove this Frame MFHD Holdings Serial Contr Set bottom interface as Default Chapter 41 Special Issues 360 3 Click on the subscription ZD Subscriptions Show subscriptions related to owned at or above ZSP A Back Next Filter Start Date End Date 11 15 12 00 12 31 15 12 00 AM 4 Open on the ssuances tab Subscription Details Summary Distributions Captions and Patterns D Issuances Clone Subscription Batch Item Receive Refresh Grid New Issuance Delete Selected Generate Predictions 5 Date Published Caption Pattern Holding Type Holding Code 2015 Jan 2015 Feb 2015 Mar 2015 Ap
341. ifier any local holds will be given an in transit status instead of on holds shelf The intent is to stop the system from sending holds notifications before the item is ready to be placed on the holds shelf and item will have a status of in transit until checked in again If you wish to simply delay notification and allow time for staff to process item to holds shelf you may wish to Chapter 7 Circulation 62 use the Hold Shelf Status Delay setting in Library Settings Editor instead See Local Administration section for more information e Manual Floating Active This check in modifier works in conjunction with floating groups as configured for your library by Sitka support See Floating Groups These options may be selected simultaneously The selected option is displayed in the header area Mark Item as Missing Pieces If an item is returned with missing pieces you may mark the item as missing pieces You will be prompted to print a slip which can be inserted in the item insert a copy and a patron alert message into the respective records and print a letter or note to inform the patron The item s status is set to Damaged When the missing pieces are returned you need to check in the item which sets the status to Reshelving You also need to manually remove the patron and copy alert messages Select the item on the Check In screen click Actions for Selected Items Marking Items as Missing Pieces Click OK on the prompt
342. igate to and select your first file and click Open 6 Every item on the list is retrieved and displayed It may take a while if the list is long Select all items by using Shift key together with mouse Click Actions for Selected Items Check in Items Chapter 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure 412 7 admin GBPR Tina training sitka bclibraries ca ue File Edit Search Circulation Cataloguing Acquisitions Preview 1 Bib Record DYNIX 62849 2 Item Status Scan Item Barcode Upload From File Actions for Cataloguers Actions for Si Alert Message Barcode Call Number Date Last Edited Due Date Copy to LEDE 2008 02 07 Stacks Add to I 443 21 OXFO 2008 02 07 Stacks Add to I Show in Show Ite Show La Make Ite Book Ite Edit Iten Mark Ite Mark Ite Abort Tr Chech jn Renew Il List Actions Trim List 20 rows Strict Barcode Print Spi Replace Save Co 4 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to check in items in all files You may see prompt popups for items with special status such as lost missing checked out in transit or routing to the holds shelf Once you confirm the prompt the loading will continue But you need to follow up with items going on hold shelf and in transit Method 3 Checking in items on a laptop using a text processing program 1 Open a text processing program on your laptop Sitka team recommends using Notepad and scan about 50 items on shelf Save your file with t
343. ii E E R 115 10 2 How to receive in transit NOMS cascecassasccasacanseauenssoia sate noepseieaniacctcancanatadncacdeeaneateaannsanseaseeenaniaece 116 T A O S a E E E T 116 SERE A E E 117 Bg i e eaae EE E i E EO EIA EEEE NE E EITE E A E ENTER 120 BW OSGI a E A E 122 11 1 Staff Functions in the Evergreen Self Check sac cnctuccscsensacsatcaneessieunacaacenbancarscanaeseseenesaseunarseceeeeons 122 IEA ee CN OE E 123 115 wew Hems CML XcuspsstensuopreEU DEFENDANT OPEN MAII n ERU detnr rM EID MT 125 EF MES Mem 126 a mI NT US mere 127 Part II Circulation gs 12 Offline Transactions sueco entere Bet iecateeteerteee there semine imet imoe Abest Miam DRM aussie thadnactenaeieegcecteen eeacieencecie 12 1 Offline Module Setup ase se crac ret esc cess estu tUe eer toi ce ise casts a luee ue Dinar ira Dei i 12 2 Patron PAS ONS AION cu sasexadagauns raniebst ones Eis aki a EUR ED KI que IM Rt Er ER PUN UA SEREEN EEEN elena HE RIS 123 OBS CO sc evo v dec EFEIPEN TOI EHE TUNI IMIM E MRETIHUMUMI den 12 d PRONON occ cies citare cece E a E E E A EEE E caer ebcbenenceceedetuectoees OWN SIS VS e e E E E N E E E E E E E E EE Oe CRE CK RE E E E EE E OT 12 7 Uploading OMe Then eH OT TII TIT Part Il Circulation 36 Chapter 6 Patron Records 6 1 Searching Patrons There are two ways to retrieve patron records in Evergreen Search Search for Patrons F4 Search by patron name email address phone number OP
344. ill be only when they are a full day or more and end on a closed date though other options can alter this It works when the above setting True False LSA Auto Extend Grace Periods is set to TRUE If enabled when the grace period falls on a closed date s it will be extended past all closed dates that intersect but within the hard coded limits your library s grace period T It works when the above setting rue False LSA Useful when libraries Auto Extend Grace Periods is bookdrop equipped set to TRUE If enabled grace with AMH periods will include closed dates that directly follow the last day of the grace period A backdated checkin with effective date on the closed dates will assume the item is returned after hours on the last day of the grace period This prevents the system from True False LSA charging more than the item price in overdue fines When set to True fines will be True False LSA charged during scheduled closings and normal weekly closed days When a patron checks out an True false LSA item and they have no holds that directly target the item the system will attempt to find a hold for the patron that could be fulfilled by the checked out item and fulfills it On the Staff Client you may notice that when a patron checks out an item under a title on which he she has a hold the hold will be treated as filled though the item has not been assigned to the patron s hold Chapter
345. in date Click Apply Overdue fines if any will be adjusted according to the new effective check in date Pa Cancel Hold fo E 98 Backdate Backdate Already Checked In Circulation Number of circulations selectec 1 At the right bottom corner there 1s a Checkin Modifiers pop up list The options are e Ignore Pre cat Items no prompt when checking in a pre cat item Item will be routed to Cataloguing with Cataloguing status e Supress Holds and Transit item will not be used to fill holds or sent in transit Item has Reshelving status Amnesty Mode Forgive Fines overdue fines will be voided if already created or not be inserted if not yet created e g hourly loans Auto Print Hold and Transit Slips slips will be automatically printed without prompt for confirmation Clear Holds Shelf Checking in hold shelf expired items will clear the items from the hold shelf holds to be cancelled Retarget Local Holds When checking in in process items that are owned by the library attempt to find a local hold to retarget This is intended to help with proper targeting of newly catalogued items Retarget All Statuses Similar to Retarget Local Holds this modifier will attempt to find a local hold to retarget regardless of the status of the item being checked in This modifier must be used in conjunction with the Retarget Local Holds modifier Capture Local Holds as Transits With this checkin mod
346. inactive patrons checkbox searches both active and inactive patrons Being active inactive is controlled by the Active checkbox in the patron record Chapter 6 Patron Records 38 Patrons from other Sitka libraries not a branch of your library system have to present their Sitka library card for their first visit Their records can only be found by Search Search for patron by barcode F1 They need to give consent to your library to access their records You will be prompted to opt in the patron after scanning such a card After opting in these patron records are searchable on the Patron Search F4 screen Patron Library Opt In Confirmation Patron Library Opt In Confirmation Does patron Buhler Jeremy From Prince Rupert Library BPR consent to having their personal information shared with your library Options The default search scope on Search Search for patron by barcode F1 is the whole Sitka database On Search Search for patron F4 it is your library s patrons and the patrons who have opted in to your library The Limit results to patrons in function takes effect on your library s patrons and opted in patrons only Non opted in patrons are not searchable on F4 even by barcode 6 2 Registering New Patrons Before registering a new patron you need to do a thorough search to make sure he she does not already have a record in Sitka Evergreen It is good practice to ask the patron if they have a library card from anot
347. ination 4 Inthe Volume and Copy Creator section of the screen Enter a number in the Z of volumes field e Type in a call number or use the call number that is autofilled from the MARC record Use the drop down lists for prefix and suffix if your library uses that functionality Enter the appropriate number of copies and scan barcode s Use Tab Enter or mouse to move through fields Record Summary View MARC Title Open an autobiography Edition TCN bwlcr 102811637 Created By admin Author Agassi Andre Pub Date 2009 Database ID 102811637 Last Edited By admin Bib Call 796 342092 AGA Record Owner Last Edited On 2010 05 17 9 58 PM oe M onec ocn M os EZE Volume and Copy Creator mocne AA O oo mm BPR 1 Classification Prefix Call Number Suffix of Copies Barcode Part Designation Dewey DDC BPR NF 796342092 AGA a m Auto Generate Barcodes Use Checkdigit Print Labels Create Volumes Items reer bs Copy Editor Status Location Collection Circulate Alert Message Library Filter gt In process icopy AdiNareiien ve icy ume 1copy BPR Supe Barcode Girculation Library Holdable Deposit lt Unset gt 1 cop 30000000 1 copy BPR 1 copy Yes 1 copy No 1 copy BPR test Creation Date Owning Lib Call Number Age based Hold Protection Deposit Amount Suma Top 1 coov 1lconv l _ lt linset gt 1conv 4 0 00 Icon i ES 4 n LI
348. ince each patron has a unique id she her will be counted once only Count Distinct is available to text integer id money and timestamp Max It compares the values in the field of all result records and then returns the one record with the highest value Max is available to text integer money and timestamp For timestamp the highest value means the latest date For example if a checkout date is transformed by Max the returned date is the last checkout date Min It works the same way as Max except that it returns the lowest value Min is available to text integer money and timestamp Output Type Note that each transform has either an Aggregate or Non Aggregate output type Source Specifier Circulation Field Mame Data Type EC Field Transform Output Type E Check In Staff link a Age Mon Aqgregate Jf Check Out Date Time cm count Aggregate Circ Duration Rule link q Count Distinct Aggregate Circ ID id 7 Date Mon Aggregake E Circulating Item link 7 Dav Mame Non Aggregate Circulating Library org uni Dav of Month Mon Aqgregate Circulating Staff link Day of Week Mon Aggregate Circulation Duration interval Dav of Year Non Aggregate Circulation Type text First Value Mon Agaregate Iv 0 How amp Kloon fooraoske aid Selected Fields Dark O anaal haal Whether an output is Non Aggregate or Aggregate depends on whether the output value relies on a single reco
349. ing 0cn7722341 Caleb s crossing Brooks Gerald i 9781441790 p20 Blackstone Audo Caleb s crossing Brooks Gerald 9780670021 C2 Vking 106894931 Caleb s crossing 10 Brooks Gerald 9781441790 2011 p2011 Playaway Digital native evergree 103897138 Caleb s crossing E F p S 11 Brooks Gerad 9780670021 C2011 vking native evergree 103880681 Caleb s crossing h 4 12 Brooks Geradi 9781410437 2011 Gale Cengage native evergree 106815514 Caleb s crossing or Sitka has profiled certain fields primarily 9xx fields to be automatically stripped when records are imported through Z39 50 The default fields that are stripped are 906 923 925 936 948 955 959 963 Please contact Co op support if you would like to see additional fields automatically stripped Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 196 5 The record opens in the MARC Editor From here you can edit fixed and bibliographic fields Note that you may also select Fast Item Add and input call number and barcode data from this screen Once your edits are complete click mport Record Options Stack subfields Flat Text Editor Tw Fast Item Add Validate Import Record Help Cal Number eic BROOKS Item Barcode 1234543234 MARC Record Fixed Fields Record type BKS LDR 03059nam a2200445Ka 4500 005 20120207010915 0 006 m d 007 Bd cr cnu unuuu 008 120110s
350. ing email address for password reset requests Restore overdues on lost item return Specify search depth for the duplicate patron check in the patron editor Suppress hold transits group Suppress non hold transits group Suppress popup dialogs during check in Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is closed Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 44 If True in the Patron editor True False LSA addresses are copied from the cloned user If False addresses are linked from the cloned user which can only be edited from the cloned user record Full URL path to a Javascript File Text to be loaded when printing Should implement a print custom function for DOM manipulation Can change the value of the do print variable to false to cancel printing d MEM If true when a lost item is checked in True False LSA overdue fines are charged up to the maximum fines amount When using the patron registration page the duplicate patron check will use the configured depth to scope the search for duplicate patrons To create a group of libraris to Text Sitka supress Hold Transits among them All libraries in the group should use the same unique vaule Leave it empty if transits should not be suppressed To create a group of libraris to Text supress Non Hold Transits among them All libraries in the group should use the same unique vau
351. ing it as described in Section 51 1 Deleting Inactive Cards Your library can also choose to automatically delete inactive card by configuring the Library Setting Patron Merge Barcode Delete to True An inactive card will retrieve the active account when used on Check Out screen The system alerts staff to the situation with an informative message Chapter 6 Patron Records 55 6 7 Deleting Patron Records Sitka s in house Patron Deletion Tool is available on the Welcome page See Patron Deletion Tool Local System Administrator s permissions are required to delete a patron record Chapter 6 Patron Records 56 Chapter 7 Circulation Besides the regular items in the catalogue Sitka Evergreen can circulate pre catalogued and non catalogued items too Regular circulation circulation of regular items in your catalogue with a barcode e Pre catalogued aka pre cat circulation circulation of items that have a barcode but have not been catalogued yet You may check them out and send for cataloguing after they are returned Many Sitka sites use this functionality to circulate interlibrary loan items from other libraries There is no need to route to cataloguing when using pre cat for ILL you can simply ignore the alert Non catalogued aka non cat circulation circulation of items that are not in your catalogue and without a barcode These items are usually identified by categories such as magazines paperbac
352. ing lists multiple lists for discussions of Evergreen Messages sent to the General Developer and DIG Evergreen lists are searchable at http georgialibraries markmail org search 3 1 Sitka Community Documentation We encourage Sitka sites to share locally produced Evergreen documentation with the wider Sitka community If you have any guides tutorials or tip sheets to share please contact Sitka support and we ll link to them in the table below Chapter 3 Sitka and Evergreen Resources 5 Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support The Co op Support team strives to respond to new requests within 24 hours excluding weekends To manage requests also referred to as tickets the Support team uses ticket tracking software called Request Tracker RT 4 1 How to Contact Support There are four ways to contact Co op Support for Evergreen support l Request Tracker Interface Submit and track requests with RT Self Service After logging in you may use the form to create new tickets track the progress of open tickets or review issues that have been resolved Email Send questions to the support email address Requests submitted by email generate RT tickets and can also be viewed online by logging in to RT Self Service Online Contact Form Send questions to Co op Support through the contact form on the BC Libraries Cooperative website Requests submitted through the contact form generate RT tickets and can also be viewed online by l
353. ing out first Go to Admin Change Operator New in Evergreen main window In the popup window type in the new staff username and password Read the instruction carefully and choose a New Login Type from the dropdown list Click Authorization The menu bar s background colour will be changed to red Chapter 5 Getting Started ag Exception Operator Change Please enter the credentials for the new login session Note that the previous session is still active Authorization Username sitkalsa Password eee e eee EES Mew Login Type Temporary logins expire with a few minutes of inactivity Staff logins are the same as the initial login into the staff client Permanent will discard the existing K login session and replace it with the new one Cancel Permanent Temporary logins expire in a few minutes of inactivity Choose it if you need the new account for some specific task which can be finished very quickly Remember to switch back to the old login once you finish it or else staff may see the session expired prompt The old session may NOT be restored if the timeout occurs at some screens Log out and re log in if it happens Staff logins are the same as the old login but you can switch back to the old login at any time Permanent logins discard the old login and replace it You can not switch back To switch back to the old account Go to Admin Change Operator NewUsername 5 6 Navigation Tabs Evergreen us
354. ing patron s contact information renewing an expired library card marking a library card lost resetting patron s password barring a patron inserting a note or alert message etc 6 4 1 Updating Patron Information Retrieve a patron record Here we use Search Search for patron by barcode or F1 Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Search for Patrons F4 Search the Catalog F3 Search for record by TCM Shift F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Search for copies by Barcode F5 Search for patron by Barcode F1 Retrieve patron vt Database ID 2 Scan the barcode or type barcode and click Submit 1 Check Qut Retrieve Patron Barcode 23294000364820 A Chapter 6 Patron Records 43 3 Once the patron record is loaded Check Out is the default screen Your library may choose to display the Bills screen first if the patron has bills See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Click Edit to retrieve patron information items Out Holds Bills Messages Other 1 10 0 00 Check Out Barcode E Specific Due Date 06 04 2011 x 1 55 39 PMI Barcode Due Date Title 4 Edit required fields 5 Once editing is done click the Save button at the right top corner QD Required Survey questions if any need to be answered every time when saving the patron record Patrons may edit their address on OPAC if your library allows it in the Library Settings Editor Such addresses will b
355. inistration Item Attribute Editor OR you can create a copy template when editing an existing item record Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 165 2 On Copy Editor select enter value for each required item attribute sharing the same default value and click Apply for every edit Once done click Save Copy Editor Identification Status Available Barcode 33294001370618 Creation Date 2007 11 03 Active Date 2007 11 03 Creator Last Edit Date 2012 02 11 Last Editor wmecduff lcopy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy ee SSS I tion Collecti Circulation Library BPR Owning Lib Call Number BPR BLAC Copy Number Inset lcopy 1 copy 1 copy Circulate Yes Holdable Yes Age based Hold Protection Unset Normal Fine Level Normal Circulation Modifier 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy rn ection Alert lt Unse Depos No Depos 0 00 Price 20 00 OPAC Yes Refer No Good Hide Fields 3 Entera template name at prompt and click OK The page at http hepburn pines bclibrary ca says D Enter template name Paperback Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 166 The page at http hepburn pines bclibrary ca says Template is saved Click OK A Template Paperback saved m 5 Back on Copy Editor you can now see your new t
356. inked table in the Source pane The value in this field could be a bibilographic record id a volume record id or a copy record id depending on the hold type Timestamps in this table Capture Date Time The time when the hold achieves hold shelf or hold in transit status Fulfillment Date Time the time when the on hold item is checked out Hold Cancel Date Time the time when the hold is cancelled Hold Expire Date Time This could be the date calculated based on your library s default Hold Expire Interval or a selected date when placing the hold Last Targeting Date Time The last time the hold targeting program checked for a target copy for the hold It usually has the same time as the Hold Request Time It is usually not useful for reporting But it may serve as an indicator of whether the request time has been edited Notify Time when the email notice is sent out Request Date Time Usually this is when the hold is placed But it is editable on the staff client So sometimes this may be the request time chosen by the staff Shelf Expire Time the date is calculated based on the Shelf Time and your library s Default Hold Shelf Expire Interval Shelf Time when the hold achieves On Hold Shelf status Thaw Date the activation date for a suspended hold Bills tables and views Scroll down to the bottom of the Source list Hover your mouse over All Available Sources A new list will pop up to the right Move your cursor to the lis
357. insconemuatet an hean antes stan RCRUM Du bD inhi CINE xb CRIME o oed T REDE cU QE SINELURU EDI 366 A Ie EO mE TRE E E 367 Zo PINA TANS er E EE EE E EE E AT SUU IS 367 22 2 BO O e T A 368 di KOGUN NOT Otter EROR 371 A e E ROG ee A A eecaieacavaesoecseiecieaseueans 237 rales ees ie ere iT T UTERE 79 ad Caplin and Pattern JOH 3995551232505 06098050608 059555080020300001 8040590080508 906900902 ni aiii niidi idi iE riii 377 295 ey a UION abd Fanen COUPS arerin Memes dm PME vA P MN 377 Part VI Serials 325 Chapter 35 Serials Adapted with permission from original material by the Evergreen Community This documentation is intended for users who will be ordering subscriptions distributing issues and receiving issues in Sitka Evergreen The described processes have been tested by Sitka support in Sitka s shared environment and are the sole supported workflow for serials in Sitka Evergreen Sitka support strongly recommends adherence to this prescribed workflow 35 1 Serials Videos 1 Introduction to Serials This 2 minute video provides a brief overview of the serials module Click here to view the video 2 Serials Tutorial in Sitka Evergreen This 10 minute video outlines the basic procedure for creating a subscription and receiving Issues Click here to view the video 35 2 Administration The following settings will need to be configured in the Library Settings Editor before you start using the Serials module Chapt
358. ion Server Administration Workstation Administration Toggle Actrvity Meters User Permission Editor For developers 12 2 Patron Registration Patron registration on Evergreen Offline Interface records the minimum patron information necessary to register a new patron Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 130 All fields except Line 2 of Billing Address on Patron Registration screen are required If your library does not record information for any field you need to work out a standard fake value for it e g 1900 01 01 for Date of Birth The account password will be automatically generated Patrons can access their account with the password after the offline transactions are uploaded and processed 1 Click Register Patron on the top menu bar Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 19 33 57 heck Oui R iE Check In Register Patron 2 Patron Registration screen is displayed Check In Register Patron Home Library BKCT KAM Kamloops bL Patrons New Barcode Billing Address Mew Password 1726 Li Line 2 Last Name City First Name Province OM Date of Birth Postal Code Identification Type Ident Value Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 131 3 Fill in the form with patron information Use the drop down list if available Click Save patron registration button Click OK on the confirmation pop up window Evergreen Offline Standalone Patron Registration Home Library BKCT KAM K
359. ion Add Selected Fields Template Configuration Mame Source Specifier Displayed Fields Base Filters Display Mame Data Type Field Transform Description Alter Display Header Change Transform 7 Remove Selected Field Change Field Hint The Enable source nullability checkbox below the sources list is for specifying the join type between linked source tables In most cases it should be left unchecked by default See for how to use Enable source nullability checkbox 319 The relationship between tables can be found by displaying Relationship field using the Column Picker in the low Source Specifier pane Chapter 27 Creating Templates 278 4 Select Circulation in the Sources dropdown menu Note that the Core Sources for reporting are listed first however it is possible to access all available sources at the bottom of this dropdown menu Database Source Browser S urces Ivi Core Sourcez Aged patronless Circulation BAC phe Record Circulation Classic Item List Classic Open Transaction Summary Combined Aged and Active Circulations Copy Transit Hold Request Hold Transit ILS User In House Use Inter system Copy Transit Item Mon catalaged Circulation Mon catalaged In Hause Use Open Circulation Balance by Circulating Library and Owni Open Circulation Balance by Owning Library Open Circulation Balance by User Home Library and Gwm
360. ion Protecti Dat New Springfield Branch fif Text testlocation view edit test None 04 24 2014 squamish Public Library CD J DOR Text 33110002564878 view dm Junior Music CD None 10 25 2010 Record details Content descriptions Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 163 You may edit call number and barcode on this screen If you do not wish to edit any item attribute click Re barcode Update Items otherwise click Edit then Re barcode to load the item in Copy Editor for further editing Volume and Copy Creator lt No change Se 0 7 Library of volumes BSQ 1 ificati Prefix Suffix of Copies Barcode Part Designation Auto Generate Barcodes Use Checkdigit Print Labels Re barcode Update Items Edit then Re barcode You may edit copy and call number records on Holdings Maintenance screen To edit a call number highlight the line with call number and click Actions for Selected Rows Edit Volumes Holdings Maintenance MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library Limit This Sub branch Show Volumes V Showitems F Hide Empty Libs Consortial Totat Z Available MN Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library Due Date Location Owning Library J 1 ASITKA Sitka Copy to Clipboard 2 ASPRUCE Spruce Co op Add Items to Buckets 3 AMDB Bren Del Win C 2 2 Show Item Details 4 DVD CHILDREN DOR DVD CHILDREN DOR Make This Item Bookable Y 5 35144000034913
361. ir items 2 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 Footer eral chr 255 5HORTMAMESS TODAY TRIM lt br gt bri gt ETE 2008 08 27 11 21 podre al items online at http terrace catalogue bclibrary ca or phone the library at 250 Renew your items online at http terrace catalogue bclibrary ca or phone the library at 250 635 8177 Chapter 5 Getting Started 29 6 Once you have the checkout template how you want it click Save Locally to save the template to your computer Templates ID Actions Mame checkout Iv Default Be sure to Save Locally before export T B z SSS i d Save Locall Macros Exporting templates As you can only save a template on to the computer you are working on you will need to export the template if you have more than one computer that prints out receipts e g more than one computers on the circulation desk or another computer in the workroom that you use to checkin items or capture holds with 1 Click on Export Actions Preview Default Be sure to Save Locally before export Export Save Locally Macros 2 Select the location to save the template to name the template and click Save Save Templates File Ac ss Removable Disk H v F e E z stellate j circulation hy Recent old stuff Documents Wt barcodes i WE patron handout WW reports training BE Screenshots of Evergreen Wt Support
362. ired holds click Clear These Holds on Browse Holds Shelf on the Staff Client Chapter 52 Courtesy Overdue and Hold Notices 488 Chapter 53 Managing Internet OPAC Stations This chapter contains some suggestions on how to manage public access to your Internet enabled online catalogue search stations in your library They are meant as guidelines only and their efficacy in your library will depend on many factors Some possible factors that will affect how you manage your search stations are do you want only Internet browser access to your catalogue or do you want Internet access limited to a few sites or do you want access to other applications such as printing and so on How you interpret and use these guidelines will be specific to your library s needs Finally depending on how your library network is configured you may need assistance from a system technician or administrator Firefox Plugins There are numerous plugins for Firefox which could be combined to create a kiosk like effect Clever patrons can still use CTRL ALT DEL to cancel the program https addons mozilla org en US firefox addon 1659 If you need to restrict the workstation to specific websites we recommend looking into plugins that advertise parental controls https addons mozilla org en US firefox addon 435 1 Internet Explorer Internet Explore is very prone to security problems however there are various ways to get a kiosk in IE http suppor
363. irst The setting is saved on the workstation Font and Sound Settings You may change the size of displayed text or turn staff client sounds on and off These settings are specific to each workstation and stored on local hard disk They do not affect OPAC font sizes l Select Admin Workstation Administration Global Font and Sound Settings 2 To turn off the system sounds like the noise that happens when a patron with a block is retrieved check the disable sound box and click Save to Disk Adjust Sound Disable sound Save to Disk Chapter 5 Getting Started 22 3 To change the size of the font pick the desired option and click Save to Disk Adjust Global Font Large g 10pt X Large m Larger than Default a ant Restore Default lipt XX Large 13pt 14pt Save to Disk E 224 54 5d on SS e Select Hotkeys All or partial hotkeys can be turned on or off It can be done for all workstations at a particular library see Library Settings for details or for a particular workstation by going to l Admin 3 Workstation Administration gt Hotkeys Current Select from Default Minimal and None Admin Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Managemen Local Administration Server Administration Copy Editor Copy Location Name First Workstation Administration External Text Editor Command Toggle Acti
364. is example Patron Visible is selected Click OK at confirmation prompt Patron Visible Title Left Umbrella at Vernon Branch Note Jan 20 2011 Chapter 6 Patron Records 49 To delete a note go to Other Notes use the Delete This Note button under each note Left Umbrella at Vernon Branch 3 25 11 4 24 PM Patron Visible Jan 20 2011 6 5 3 Messages Staff can also add Note Alert and Block on Messages screen 1 Retrieve patron record Click Messages 2 Click Apply Standing Penalty Messages Overdues Staff Generated Penalties Messages Apply Standing PenaltyfMessage Actions for these Penalties Messages Archived Penalties Messages Start Date 25 93 2010 7 EndDate 957 03 2011 7 Retrieve Archived Penalties Applied On t 3 Inthe pop up window select Note Alert or Block Then type the message in the box below W Apply Standing Penalty Message Apply Standing Penalty Message Notes Alerts Blocks Note Alert Block Chapter 6 Patron Records 50 4 Click Apply button To remove Note Alert Block highlight it and click Actions for these Penalties Messages Remove Penalty Message Staff Generated Penalties Messages Apply Standing Penalty Message Actions for these Penalties Messages Applied On Label Remove enalty Message Note no blocks Modify Penalty Message Alerting Note no blocks Suche Hendb TE Mote no blocks MARNE Ma 6 Note Aler
365. is good practice to do this as soon as possible but if the local system administrator isn t on site for a day or two do not panic The terms Offline Interface and Standalone Interface mean the same thing a separate program to handle simple circulation tasks while the network is down Once you can connect to the server there are 3 steps to uploading offline transactions 1 Create a session to be done by local system administrators at an administration workstation 2 Upload transactions to a session to be done by circulation staff at circulation workstations 3 Process the uploaded transactions to be done by local system administrators at an administration workstation Once the network has come back up a local system administrator must first create a session before uploading transactions Then staff can upload transactions from each of the workstations used in offline circ to that session Once all of the branch workstations have uploaded their transactions to the session the local system administrator will process all the transactions in the session at once Circulation Staff uploading transactions to the session does not put the transactions into the Evergreen database It just copies over the offline transaction file saved in individual local workstations to the Evergreen server The transactions will not be sent to the Evergreen database until the local system adminsitrator processes the session Create a Session 1 Lo
366. is table Non catalogued item category can be found in the linked Non Cat Item Type table In house Use Contains the catalogued item in house use records Non catalogued In house Use Contains the non catalogued item in house use records Follow the link to Jtem Type to find the non catalogued item category Chapter 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database 317 Copy Transit When a copy is sent in transit regardless of whether it is going back to its circulating library or going to fill a hold a copy transit record is created in this table Follow the link to Transit Copy to find the item information Hold Transit When a copy is sent in transit to fill a hold a hold transit record is created in this table and the Copy Transit table So this table contains a subset of records of the Copy Transit table You may find hold information following the link to Hold Requiring Transit Follow the link to Transit Copy to find the item information Hold Request When a hold is placed a hold record is created in this table You may find the hold receiver s information in Hold User Requesting User is the person who takes the placing hold action It can be the hold receiver or a staff member Generally if the Hold User is different from the Requesting User this is a staff placed hold Hold Copy Map equals Eligible Copies Copies that can be used to fill the hold are in this table Target Object ID is shown as a link But there is no l
367. ist or the due date is before a selected date You may use these templates to set up your overdue reports capturing items which are at a certain number of days overdue Circulation statistics reports These templates are in Circulation folder The regular circulation statistics can be grouped by various criteria patron s home library profile and or stat cat items owning library and or shelving location There are two sets of templates one set limit the circulation period by selected dates the other selected month s The latter are for monthly recurring reports Other circulation statistics related templates are non catalogued circulation count e pre catalogued circulation count e pre catalogued circulation count for items with dummy title prefix of ILL ILL statistics via pre catalogued circulation e checkin count e in house use count for non catalouged items e in house use count for catalogued items in house use count per title Other circulation related templates are lost and paid item list lost with outstanding bills item list claimed returned item list Reports on collection These templates are in Holdings folder You will find templates counting items or titles of your whole collection or catalogued within the selected time period new title items statistics The numbers are grouped by shelving location and or circulation modidfier Another group of templates in Holdings folder are item title lists for item
368. istration Menu 422 48 4 Closed Dates Editor These dates are in addition to your regular weekly closed days see Section 49 1 1 Library Hours of Operation Both regular closed days and those entered in the Closed Dates Editor affect due dates fines and targeting for holds Due dates Due dates that would fall on closed days are automatically pushed forward to the next open day Likewise if an item is checked out at 8pm for example and would normally be due on a day when the library closes before 8pm Evergreen pushes the due date forward to the next open day Overdue fines Overdue fines are not charged on days when the library is closed unless your library chooses to charge via Library Settings Editor Charge fines on overdue circulations when closed Hold Targeting By default items at a closed library are not targeted for holds This means that available items that patrons have placed holds on will not appear on the Holds Pull List until the next open day If you wish items to be targeted when the library is closed to the public perhaps staff are still working and would like to pull items for holds you can use the library settings Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is closed and Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is closed IF the circ lib is the hold s pickup lib to override the default behaviour Sitka libraries not in the Pacific time zone must off set their closed dates to ensure correct behaviou
369. item from The items in the list will appear Select the item you would like to remove from the list click on Actions for these items select Remove from list and click Go Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List Dora books Sort list items by Title A to Z Y Sort Name Dora books Save changes to name or description Description Save Title Author s Local Call Number Publication Date Format Notes Edit Remove from list Actions for these items Dora the Explorer Dora in Tillworth Mary E DOR Maple Library 2014 Book Place hold Wonderland Remove from list 4 Dora the explorer Dora s JDVD HOL DOR Maple 2004 DVD Christmas Library Cowgirl Dora JDVD TV DOR Maple c2003 DVD Library Dora s Thanksgiving Willson Sarah E WIL Maple Library c2003 Book Managing items in a list You can place a hold on an item from your list by selecting the item and choosing Place hold in Actions for these items menu You can annotate your lists by using the Notes feature Click on one of your lists to open it and display the contents A Notes column will appear with an Edit hyperlink beside it Click Edit enter your note and click Save Notes Your note will display in your view of your list If the list is shared the note will also display in title record on the webpage used to access your shared list Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List Dora books i E Sort
370. itka Support team recommends checking it for all correct addresses Chapter 49 Server Administration 476 49 2 Call Number Prefix and Call Number Suffix If you library uses prefixes and or suffixes in call numbers you can build a standard list which will be displayed as dropdown lists when creating editing call number record This is how it looks on the call number creating editing screen Volume Editor Auto Merge on Volume Collision ao chrge es Oo Prefix Label Suffix Owning lib Classification BW Dewey 000 xil KIT CD E08 To create a call number prefix suffix go to Admin Server Administration Call Number Prefix Suffix Click New Prefix Suffix Type in the label Choose your library as the Owning Library and then Save GoBack Reload Go Forward Debug Call Number Prefixes New Prefix Delete Selected Context Org Unit BW Back Next wv amp Label Owning Library 1 DVD BW 2 JF BW Label To delete a prefix suffix check the record and then click Delete Selected QD Call Number Prefix Suffix created here are different from Label Prefix Suffix created on Copy Location Editor The former are displayed as part of call number in OPAC while the latter are on printed labels only 49 3 Copy Statuses This table describes the copy statuses in use by Sitka updated as of January 2012 Chapter 49 Server Administration 477 If the Sets copy active 1s set to NO an ite
371. itor opens Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 435 2 Click Hide Fields button at the left bottom corner 1 Admin Item Attribute Editor m Copy Editor Dc Co e Menifestion vatna aen teen Available 1 copy Barcode fake item 1 copy Creation Date 1 copy Active Date 1 copy 1 copy Last Edit Date 1 copy Stacks 1 copy Circulation Library BKCT KAM 1 copy Owning Lib Call Number lcopy Copy Number Unset lcopy Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu Yes 1 copy Holdable Yes 1 copy Age based Hold Protection lt Unset gt 1 copy Loan Duration Normal 1 copy Fine Level Normal 1 copy Circulate as Type lt Unset gt 1 copy Circulation Modifier lt Unset gt 1 copy Miscellaneous 3 lt Unset gt 1 copy Price 0 00 1 copy OPAC Visible Yes lcopy Quality Good 1 copy Librar 436 3 By default your library is displayed on top of the list If you wish to hide fields for all branches of your library system change it to your library system Check the field s that you want to hide and click OK button Those selected fields will disappear from the Copy Editor Close the tab This i5 a list of hideable elements for this interface Check the ones that you want hidden and the library and descendants you want to affect BKCT KAM Kamloops Library Workstation library BKCT KAM ts not currently hiding any of these elements Active Date T Age based
372. iving Bren Del Win Centennial Library Holder MDE MDE MDE MDE MDE MDE MDE MDE ul E Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB Serial Alerts Stream ID 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 on Stream ID 901 901 901 901 Date Published 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 2015 03 31 2015 04 30 D Date Published 2014 08 31 2014 07 31 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 ba Date Expected 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 26 2015 03 31 2015 04 30 i i Date Expected 2014 08 31 2014 07 31 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 Close Window Serial Alerts at Receive Time The new Alerts button on the Items tab displays the number of alert notes that are available for the selected items and clicking this button opens a window which displays all applicable alert Receive Date Recerved Date Recerved 2014 06 09 2014 06 09 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 355 3 Adv Re Mate 170 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D ur Mot 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 2 Batch Receive Serials It is also possible to receiving multiple copies of a serial using the Serials Batch Receive interface This procedure is for sites receiving multiple copies of the same issue l Click on Actions for this record 2 Select Serials Batch Receive 3 Enter an identifier for a bibliographic record SSN or Database ID 4 Click on Find Record En
373. k it as the overlay target by using the Mark Local Result as Overlay Target button Before you do so you need to view the full record to make sure this is the correct record to be overlaid If you wish to check holdings you may use the Show in Catalgoue button to display the record in the catalogue in a new tab If the record that you wish to overlay contains local information e g tag 590 or 690 you need to manually add these tags to the record you intend to import You may add the tags before overlaying Or you may import the record first then merge the two records When merging the records the two records will be displayed side by side on screen which makes it easier to copy over the local tags from the non lead record 18 2 MARC Batch Import 18 2 1 Import MARC Records If the title records you need are not already in the Evergreen database it is possible to upload vendor supplied MARC files into Evergreen Each file may contain one or more MARC records During the uploading process Evergreen matches each record in the file with existing records in Evergreen based on pre defined match points called Record Match Sets Records without matches may be imported directly into the catalogue Records with matches must be examined by cataloguers Due to the nature of Sitka s shared database the Co op suppport strongly advises against allowing Evergreen to select a merge target and cautions you to adhere to instructions for selecting a match as
374. ka 3 gt BCK Kootenay Library Federation BGF un Forks and District Public I 3 The Main Settings tab opens displaying settings for your library Only Main Email Address and Main Phone Number should be edited please leave all other settings at their default values Main Settings Hours of Operation Addresses Organization Unit Name Grand Forks and District Public L Translate Organization Unit Policy Code BGF Main Email Address Main Phone Number Organization Unit Type Library V Parent Organization Unit BOK V OPAC Visible Save Delete 4 Click Save to record changes The Organizational Units screen flashes green when saving changes to any tab see screencast below only available in the online version of the manual If there is no flash or flash in red please ensure you are using an LSA login and click Save again Contact Sitka Support if you still cannot save the changes 49 1 1 Library Hours of Operation Local System Administrators can use the Organizational Units interface to set the library s hours of operation These are regular weekly hours holiday and other closures are recorded in the Closed Dates Editor Hours of operation and closed dates affect due dates and overdue fines Due dates Due dates that would fall on closed days are automatically pushed forward to the next open day Likewise if an item is checked out at 8pm for example and would normally be due on a day when the library closes before 8pm
375. ke the final notice to be sent and provide Sitka support with the wording you would like to appear on the notice Libraries have the option to have Evergreen automatically mark long overdue items as lost Contact Sitka Support if you would like to set this up for your library Please include the interval at which you would like long overdue Chapter 52 Courtesy Overdue and Hold Notices 487 items to be marked as lost This interval can be set to coincide with your final notice so that patrons receive a bill for lost items This does not apply to items that are manually marked lost by staff 52 4 Hold Slip and Holds Notifications Hold Slip A hold slip is generated when a hold reaches ready for pickup status The content of the slip can be from a shared template saved on the server legacy slip or a receipt template saved in individual workstations Local hold slip template is used when the library setting called Use legacy hardcoded receipts slips is set to FALSE Ready for pickup Hold Notice The ready for pickup hold notification templates can be customized at the federation or library level Please contact Sitka Support for customization When a hold is ready for pickup the requester can be notified via automatic email and or SMS Text and or manual phone call by staff depending on the choice made when he she placed the hold The selected notfication method s may be indicated on the hold slip For example if email notification is sele
376. ks etc 7 1 Check Out F1 Regular Items To check out an item press F1 or select Circulation Check Out Items lation Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking Check Qut Items Fl Renew Items Ctrl F2 2 Scan or enter patron s barcode and click Submit if entering barcode manually If scanning number is submitted automatically 1 Check Out Retrieve Patron Barcode 06201960 3 Scan or enter item barcode manually clicking Submit if manual Check Out NUMEN 23294000156676 Barcode Call Number Due Date Chapter 7 Circulation 57 4 Due date is now displayed Check Out O Barcode Due Date Title 34520000969847 2007 12 12 Black Beauty M 5 When all items are scanned click Done at bottom right of screen to generate slip receipt or to exit patron record if not printing slip receipts Pre catalogued Items l Goto patron s Check Out screen by Circulation Check Out Items 3 Scan the item barcode 3 At prompt click Pre catalogued Barcode testyfyl was either mis scanned or is a non cataloged item Checkout as a pre cataloged item Chapter 7 Circulation 58 4 Enter required information and click Checkout wu so Pre Catalogue Field Entry Title Dora s Christmas Author Jane Doe ISBN 1234567123123 Circ Modifier i On check in Evergreen will prompt staff to re route the item to cataloguing Non catalogued Ite
377. l Administration Menu 447 Table 48 5 GUI Graphic User Interface Setting Description Data type Edited by E on empty bib Alert GC when the last copy fora True False LSA records record is being deleted Button bar If TRUE the staff client button True False LSA bar appears by default on all workstations registered to your library staff can override this setting at each login Cap results in Patron The maximum number of resutls Number Search at this number returned per search If 100 is set up here any search will return 100 records at most Default Country for This is the default Country for new Text New Addresses in addresses in the patron editor Patron Editor Default hotkeyset Default Hotkeyset for clients Tex filename without the keyset Examples Default Minimal and None Default ident type for This is the default Ident Type for Selection LSA patron registration new users in the patron editor list Default showing Instead of All fields show True False LSA suggested patron just suggested fields in patron registration fields registration by default Disable the ability GUI Disable the ability to save list True False LSA to save list column column configurations locally If set configurations locally columns may still be manipulated however the changes do not persist Also existing local configurations are ignored if this setting 1s true Example for The example on validati
378. l Books c Notated music d Manuscript notated music mn me e Cartographic material LDR Im l F Manuscript cartographic material oof g Video Recordings cos i Audiobooks BE Music ao ae n7 EE k Two dimensional nonprojectable graphic coos m Computer File i40 m Electronic Resources ozaj f gigi e p Mixed materials EH Se Three di ional artifact Fur all ing object ozo f r Three dimensional artifact ar naturally occurring objec azs i L E Manuscript language material Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 218 4 You can press the Tab key or use the mouse to click through to each field and can delete and add text as required by backspacing or highlighting existing text and over typing Here the publication date is being edited OPAC searches filtered by date rely on correct coding in the 008 Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Horse Edition Author Clutton Brock Juliet Pub Date 2008 Bib Call 636 1 Record 2 of 302 Options E Stack subfields F Flat Text Editor Fast Item Add Validate Call Number Iter Barcode cy E prr Cwe aw sre a avin l m Ferm Conf 0 Biog MRec Ctry nyu Update source Sechs D fs ren s pee oue EE p 5 Click Save Record Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Horse Edition Author Clutton Brock Juliet Pub Date 2008 Bib
379. l column headers and displayed data to your computer in a text file format This can be useful for creating bibliographies or similar lists Clicking on List Actions Print List CSV prints column headers and displayed data Chapter 20 Record Buckets 231 Part IV OPAC Table of Contents roa WM ete 16 Apa ea EIN mue 234 2 Wea SOOO oe CUIRE 234 eo PCV MO ESI eset tan ESO UNTERE DUM EMIT NER TNI ER EE E E E E EE E E 235 Ao OM MDS Rm 238 a Se NGI Wy RO AON SLE TTE Eten 240 21 5 CALC ROSE S ae EA 241 22 COIN che E EE N EE EA E A EEEN A EEE E E A E A E E TS 250 22a LOGON Ee lote TE TT Umm 32590 22e niin heel FAS SW Ol a OTT 251 E a PECOU OAO o E 252 ee WU MVS E E ANE E A E E A EE E EE E TE EE EE E 257 23 Med ated ElecHonie Me SOUNCCS as2ccsaeaaceacanesatnearanseansenaaeevecanaieaeesaeeoaateascanagasecevacussiacasy nee etanenoeasseeaoienes 260 Os la GNECK OUL te te SOE Umm 260 ZO Place R05 ON ce S OUI GO RE TENTER 261 23 3 Checked out and on hold e resources in My Account cccccc ccc ec nec eeeeceeeeceeeeseeeaeseeseceeaeseeaeaes 262 24 WOON T ceni casa nisqessaaes T ET E RMIPP IAS PSI IM PIN PUPPI 264 24 1 Se MGI UNG COU We asset racic rnm 264 24 2 MODE FAC ACCOUN IR ISTE UT Tm 265 Part IV OPAC 233 Chapter 21 Search the catalogue The Sitka catalogue can be accessed through the computers at your local library or online from any location via the Internet
380. l items such as an e record collection like ebrary 6 You do not need to choose a Merge Profile now 7 Check Import Non Matching Records box to automatically import records without matches into the catalogue Co op support strongly advises that you do not select other import options These options allow Evergreen to automatically merge records before you inspect them It is best practice to inspect the potentially merged records first If you want to view your incoming records first without importing any you may leave Import Non Matching Records box unchecked You will be able to view all records in the file on Inspect Queue and import all selected records with without matching records there 8 You do not need to select any of the checkboxes in Copy Import Actions now 9 Click Browse to choose the source MARC file on your computer then click Upload Depending on the size of the file it may take a while for the uploading to finish Once it is finished records will be displayed in Inspect Queue view You may continue to examine and import records in the queue as described below Or you may come back later to find the queue to examine and import the records Records in a queue are saved on the server but outside the catalogue By importing you bring the records into the catalogue 18 2 3 Importing and Merging Records from Queues If you want to import records from queues uploaded before go to Cataloguing MARC
381. l not print when using the Offline Module T O Receipt O Label O Mail O Offline 3 After choosing Printer Context click Set Default Printer and Print Test Page and follow the prompts If successful test output will print to your chosen printer Test Print 1254567890 1254567890125 4567890 1254567890125 45678901235 4567890 v lt T i set Default Printer and es Page Fage Settings Chapter 5 Getting Started 24 4 Optional to further format or customize printed output click Page Settings and adjust settings When finished click OK and print another test page to view changes Page Setup Format amp Options Margins amp Header Footer Format Orientation Scale im 3h Shrink Ta Fit Page width Options Print Background colors amp images x Generally you need to set all the margins to 0 and headers and footers to Blank Advanced Settings If you followed the steps above and still cannot print there are two alternate print strategies e DOS LPTI Print sends unformatted text directly to the parallel port e Custom External Print configuration required In most cases changing the Advanced Settings is a last resort if the Default print stragety Mozilla Print does not work Please contact Sitka support if you need help with these settings Evergreen cannot print using the Windows Generic Text Only driver If this driver is the only one available try one of the alt
382. l policy From version 2 6 libraries have the option to set up whether where to display Lost items on tems Out screen For all the above mentioned settings See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for more information Claimed Returned Items l 2 2 Chapter 7 Circulation To mark an item Claimed Returned retrieve patron record and go to the Items Out screen Select the item then Actions for Selected Items Claimed Returned from the dropdown menu Items Out Barcode 39 3515100 6 3515100 J 3515100 B 3515100 3515100 we 2915100 twee 3515100 Show Non Catalogued Circulations in List Above Other Special Circulations Mark C Actions for Selected Items Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Libr Copy ID Due Date Fines Copy to Clipboard BTE BTE a 7445510 2012 04 26 11 59 PM Add to ltem Bucket BTE BTE 7608037 2012 04 26 11 59 PM we EN E BTE BTE we 4256297 2012 04 26 11 59 PM i BTE BTE ve 7512732 2012 04 26 11 59 PM mo Bem Detal BTE BTE 6989147 2012 04 19 11 59 PM Show Last Few Circulations BTE BTE 5468355 2012 04 19 11 59 PM Show Triggered Events BTE BTE a 7439558 2012 04 12 11 59 PM Edit Item Attributes Auto Print Hold and Trar Edit Due Date Mark Lost by Patron imed Returned Claimed Never Checked Out Select a date and click Apply Date 56 03 2011 Select Date or Timestamp Claimed Returned Date Claimed Enter a clai
383. lLibrary wrote gt The original request sent by email or submitted with RT Self Service T appears here The subject line of your initial email becomes the gt Subject of the gt RT ticket E Submit p 5 The new message is added to the correspondence history iP H RO Brief headers Full headers A Mon Jun 11 16 31 08 2012 Fictional Library Ticket created Subject Need to reset RT password The original request sent by email or submitted with RT Self Download untitled Service appears here The subject line of your initial email text html 169b becomes the subject of the RT ticket n Mon Jun 11 16 31 27 2012 Jennifer Pringle Taken n Mon Jun 11 16 36 23 2012 Jennifer Pringle Requestor FictionalLibrary added Mon Jun 11 16 53 17 2012 Fictional Library Correspondence added Reply Replies appear in RT and are sent to the requestor s email Download untitled Emails with the RT ticket number in the subject line are Kept text html 467b together in the same ticket On Mon Jun 11 16 31 08 2012 FictionalLibrary wrote The original request sent by email or submitted with RT Self Service ae gt appears here The subject line of your initial email becomes the gt subject of the gt RT ticket It is not possible to edit past correspondence To make corrections please add a new reply Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 10 Review Closed Tickets Resolved tickets do not appear on the RT Se
384. lated based on the value entered in this entry and the above The later date generated by these two entries will be the new due date For example the truncated loan period is 7 days and the threshold in the above entry is 36 days On 2013 07 01 a recall is triggered on an item checked out on 2013 06 09 and the new due date based on truncated loan period will be 2013 07 08 2013 07 01 7 days while 2013 07 15 is based on the recall threshold 2013 06 09 36 days Evergreen will set the new due date to 2013 07 15 If the above item is recalled on 2013 07 10 the due date from the truncated loan period will be 2013 07 17 This will be the new due date In other words the recall threshold is the minimum loan period an extended loan can be shortened to and patrons with extended loan items will have at least the truncated loan period when they receive the recall notice QD Under extreme circumstance overdue items loan periods may be extended e g an extended loan checked out in last term 1s recalled in this term 3 Recalls An array of fine amount fine interval and maximum fine This is optional If you wish to set up new fine rules on recalled items follow the example quoted in the Library Settings Editor Make sure the brackets and double quotation around the fine interval are included 48 11 Hold Policies 1 A user with LSA privileges can view your library s hold policies Changes to hold policies can be requested through the Sitka
385. ld you like to predict 5 A confirmation message will appear Click OK Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 350 6 Delete first Issuance e Click on the arrow beside the subscription e Click on the arrow beside ssuances Right Click on the dummy issuance you created and choose Delete Issuance Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims ZSP B New Springfield Branch C Show Subs _ Show Groups Refresh Location 4Z5P B New Springfield Branch d Subscription 377 gt Distributions Aa ssuances December V 22 Mo 1 2013 Jan V 22 Mo 10 2013 O ct V 22 Mo 11 2013 Mov V 22 Mo 12 2013 Dec V 22 Mo 2 2013 Feb V 22 No 3 2013 Mar V 22 No 4 2013 Apr V 22 No 5 2013 May V 22 Mo 5 2013 Jun V 22 Mo 7 2013 Jul V 22 No 8 2013 Aug V 22 No 9 2013 Sep gt Captions Patterns Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records Actions for Selected R Subscriptions 1 Add Subscription Add Distribution Add Issuance Add Caption Pattern Make Predictions Delete Subscription Delete Distribution Delete Issuance Delete Caption Pattern 351 Chapter 38 Receiving Serials 38 1 Receive serials Receiving serials is done through the Serials Control View 1 Goto the Items tab Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Author Bib Call Canadian Living Record 1 of 907 Start Previous Serial Control Items Uni
386. lder than any interval defined here Specify how items are This value specifies how items are Text LSA Default is call ordered ordered in search results and record views within the org unit To sort from newest to oldest by active date use desc To sort from oldest to newest by active date use asc To sort by call number use call Tag Circulated Items in When a user is both logged in and True False LSA Default TRUE Results has opted in to circulation history tracking turning on this setting will cause previous or currently circulated items to be highlighted in search results Use fully compressed Show fully compressed serial True False Sitka serial holdings holdings for all libraries at and below the current context unit Warn patrons when Present a warning dialog when a True False Sitka adding to a temporary patron adds a book to the temporary book list book list Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 457 Table 48 10 Offline and Program Skip offline checkin if newer item Status Changed Time Skip offline checkout if newer item Status Changed Time Skip offline renewal if newer item Status Changed Time Disable automatic print attempt type list Retain empty bib records Sending email address for patron notices Skip offline checkin transaction True False LSA raise exception when processing if item Status Changed Time is newer than the recorded tra
387. le Leave it empty if Non Hold Transits should not be suppressed When set to True no pop up True False LSA window for exceptions on check in But the accompanying sound will be played If this setting is true ata given org True False LSA unit or one of its ancestors the hold targeter will target copies from this org unit even if the org unit is closed according to the actor org unit closed date table If this setting is true ata given org True False LSA unit or one of its ancestors the Sitka Not in use NY gt lt 5 C1 closed IF the circ lib is hold targeter will target copies the hold s pickup lib from this org unit even if the org unit is closed according to the actor org unit closed date table IF AND ONLY IF the copy s circ lib is the same as the hold s pickup lib Truncate fines to max True False LSA Sitka default TRUE fine amount status Warn when patron If set the staff client displays a Duration LSA account is about to warning this number of days before expire the expiry of a patron account Value is in number of days LSA Void lost item billing If True when a lost item is claimed True False when claims returned returned the item replacement bill item price is voided Void processing fee If True the processing fee is voided True false LSA 2 on lost item claims when a lost item 1s claimed returned 2 returned Void lost item billing If Tru
388. lect Date or Timestamp Renew with Due Date Renew with Due Date Enter a new due date for these items to be renewed 1017573397 Date 26 93 203i 1 7 25 19PM Renewal can also be done on the Item Status screen See Section 7 6 Item Status F5 for more informaiton Editing Due Date 1 Retrieve the patron record and go to the Items Out screen Chapter 7 Circulation 66 Select the item you want to renew Click on Actions for Selected Items Edit Due Date Items Out Actions for Selected Items Author Barcode Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Circulation Mo Copy ID 1 Collin 332940 BPR 2 Sewell 35 571 BPR Due Date Fine Copy to Clipboard 2012 06 Add to Item Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Edit Item Attributes Show Non Catalogued Circulations in List Above Auto Print Hold and Tra Edit Vee Mark L st by Patron 3 Select a new due date in the pop up window then click Apply You can select multiple items by pressing down the CTRL key on your keyboard and clicking each item you want to edit Edit Due Date changes the due date in the existing circulation record without reducing the remaining renewal count or creating a new circulation record It does not generate new circulation statistics Outstanding issues on the circulation such as overdue fines may be affected by future
389. lets as well as for users with dial up or slower connections You can search the catalogue using the Mobile PAC as well as log into Your Account to manage items checked out items on hold and fines You can also place holds using the Mobile Catalogue A link called Mobile Catalogue at the bottom of the catalogue provides access to the Mobile PAC Log in to see account details Search catalogue cats table Keyword Filter search by _ Alert Bay Public Library Limit to Available All Formats Sort results by Relevance 24 1 Searching the Mobile PAC 1 Click on the Mobile Catalogue link at the bottom of the OPAC 2 The Mobile PAC provides a search box with a drop down to choose the desired index to search keyword title author subject or series 3 Enter your search term You can also set your search parameters such as library or branch availability format and sorting Click on Search after you have entered your search term s Chapter 24 Mobile PAC 264 4 The search result screen shows the search results including availability location call number and cover images when available Log in to see account details Search catalogue lt The cat s table Ondaatje Michael 4 4 available IL 2011 print 269 p 22 cm text Alert Bay Public Library Adult cats table o Keyword Filter search by __ Alert Bay Public Library Limit to Available 5 Click on the title for more
390. lf Service welcome page but can be viewed and re opened if a problem recurs 1 Login to RT Self Service as shown above 2 Click Closed tickets RT Self Service Open tickets Goto ticket My open tickets Subject Status 13138 Need to reset RT password new 13139 Cannot edit patron record ne Requestors 3 Closed tickets are listed with status resolved Click on a number or subject link to review a ticket Logged in as FictionalLibrary Logout RT Self Service Closed tickets Goto ticket My closed tickets 8 Subject 13140 Limit on holds on new material To re open a closed ticket simply add a new reply This will change the status to open and alert Co op Support q that more attention is required Ticket Status Ticket status provides general information about a support request and affects display in RT Self Service Most status changes are made by Co op Support but resolved tickets change back to open with any new correspondence Recent ticket awaiting reply from Support Team Open Tickets opea Support Team has replied but the issue is not yet resolved Open Tickets resolved Issue resolved question answered or a satisfactory work Closed Tickets around identified stalled No immediate solution available but future development Open Tickets configuration or policy changes may provide a fix Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 11 Chapter 5 Getting Started 5 1 Installing the Everg
391. libraries usually want to know how many circulations were done within a selected time period When an item is checked out on the staff client a record is created in the circulation table You want a count of the number of circulation records created within the time period So the Circulation table is likely the source with which you want to start You may wish to break down the number of circulations by items shelving locations to see the circulations by different types of materials or the patrons profile groups In this case the count of circulation records and the shelving location or patron profile are the potential displayed fields For the filter fields you need to limit the circulations done within a time period so checkout date should be a filter You probably want to count the circulations done at your library only as you are part of a consortium or for all the branches of your library system In such a case you may want to see the checkout library in the result too So the circulating library will be another filter With the above analysis we will build the template from scratch in the following section to demonstrate the procedure on the template creating screen Chapter 27 Creating Templates 276 27 1 Choosing Displayed Fields 1 Click on the My Folder template folder where you want the template to be saved Folders Templates Circulation EUM Reports Output Shared Folders 2 Templates g
392. library name 3 Click on the arrow beside your subscription 4 Click on the arrow beside Issuances 5 Right Click on the Issue you would like to delete Select Delete Issuance Chapter 41 Special Issues 366 Chapter 42 Binding Process 42 1 Binding Template In order to Bind serials you must assign a Bind Unit Template You can use the same template as your Receive Unit Template or create a new one For more information about Copy Templates please see 35 1 Create a Copy Template 1 Search the catalogue F3 2 Select the bibliographic record for the magazine or periodical 3 Click on the title to open the Record Details screen 4 Click on Actions for this Record and select Serial Control View 5 Click on the Subscriptions tab Record 3 of 102 Start Previous En Search Results Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MPL Maple Library ShowSubs Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row Location Subscriptions EZ AGLCONS Green Land Consortium APLF Public Library Federation gt MPL Maple Library 6 Click on the arrow beside your Library 7 Click on the arrow beside your Subscription 8 Click on the arrow beside your Distribution Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims MPL Maple Library v Distribution ID 365 1 distribution C Show Subs Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row Location Subscriptions R A4
393. list character o gt Beak tr Wizards 45 Publisher New York NY Collins Design c2010 S Reviews amp More E PENERE d an ISBN 9780061997815 Witchcraft and Wizard Phys Desc 1 v unpaged col ill 29 cm Imaginary organization 5 l _ Library Shelving Call Status Magic 35 location number Schools 33 Salt Spring Island Children s a 4372 Checked Public Library library i 0 of 1 copy available at Sitka England 33 0 of 1 copy available at ISLANDLink 2 Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows electronic Cf mo Add to my list Gene mer resource J K Rowling _ aay st Rowling J K z Fantasy fiction 45 cc X Reviews amp More 45 Ml A in 1 E audiobook Electronic books 10 Publisher England Pottermore 2012 uds 9 ISBN a m sound recording OverDrive MP3 Adventure fiction 7 Edition Unabridged Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 243 Availability The number of available copies and total copies are displayed below the title details If you are using a catalogue inside a library or accessing a library s online catalogue from its homepage you will see how many copies are available in that library If the library belongs to a multi branch library system you can see how many copies are available in all branches Basic Search Advanced Search Sort by Relevance Search Results Results 1 10 of about 26 page 1 of 3 Preferred library Sitka 123 Next gt 1 Wizards 1
394. llows the item to be transferred between libraries e Inter booking and Inter circulation Interval The amount of time required by your library between the return of a resource and a new reservation for the resource This interval uses the same input conventions as the Fine Interval Max Fine Amount The amount at which fines will stop generating 5 Click Save when you have entered the needed information Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 403 6 The new resource type will appear in the list Resource Types Context Org Unit BPR Back Next Filter Inter booking Resource gene on Owning une esa and Inter Max Fine e Fine Interval Fine Amount Library Catalog Item Transferable circu m Interval E Reader 02 00 00 1 00 MDB False False 00 15 00 20 00 02 00 00 0 50 MDB False False 00 15 00 20 00 02 00 00 0 5 BPR False False 00 15 00 25 Create New Resource Attribute l Select Server Administration Booking Resource Attributes 2 Click New Resource Attribute in the top right corner 3 A box will appear in which you can add the attributes of the resource Attributes are categories of descriptive information that are provided to the staff member when the booking request is made For example an attribute of a projector may be the type of projector Other attributes might be the number of seats available in a room or the computing platform of a laptop Resource Attribute Name Computing Pl
395. lse 14 1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe ILL cds cn PL Extenc ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset areal False False 14 1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe Loans PL Extent ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset book _1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe Loans PL BC ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset book 1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe OneCz PL No fine Public Library ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset book _1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe Users PL Extenc ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset compa _1 Inherite Inherit twenty Inherit fivedoll Inhe Loans Permis Org edet fom Active Group Unit Due Fine Period Fine Form evel Rule Or Dat Rule Overric Rule ISLAN BPRD Unset Unset book 1 InheriteInheriti zero Inheritizero Inhe Circulation policies define the loan duration renewals recurring fine rate maximum fine amount grace period and maximum items out rules for different combinations of User Permission Groups and Home Library and Circ Modifiers for items belonging to one library or library system Other item attributes may be used for more specific rules Please contact Sitka support The current circulation polices allow items to be checked out and renewed at any library in your library federation Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 421 4 Select the individual circulation policy for viewing by double clicking on the desired row Chapter 48 Local Admin
396. lso create a temporary list from search results but you then have to create a permanent list and add the contents of your temporary list to the permanent list From a search results page click on Add to my list Say ahhh Dora goes to the doctor Beinstein Phoebe C2008 Vf Place Hold Call number EFB DOR 1 of 1 copy available at Fort Nelson Public Library gt et i L Addo my list x Reviews amp More Chapter 22 My Account 257 Click on View My List at top of search results page If you are not already logged in you will be prompted to do so Create a new list as described above Select the titles in the temporary list then click on the drop down menu labeled Actions for these items and make the appropriate choice Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Create New List Share this list No v m Enter the name of the new list List description optional My Existing Lists Sort list items by Title A to Z v Sort Temporary List Title Author s Local Call Number Dora books Go Actions for these items Dora the Explorer Dora in Wonderland Tillworth Mary E DOR Maple Library Place hold Remove from list Dora the explorer Dora s Christmas JDVD HOL DOR Maple Library Move selected items to list DVDs JDVD TV DOR Maple 4 Cowgirl Dora Library n Dorr books 4 Dora s Thank
397. lties Statistical Categories Editor Surveys Non cataloged Types Editor Notifications Action Triggers Patrons with Negative Balances Transit List Weak Log Server Administration Workstation Administration Toggle Activity Meters User Permission Editor For developers Actions for Selected Transits Request Date Ez To access the Transit List report select Admin Local Administration Transit List 2 Specify Transit to or Transit from library from the dropdown menu to retrieve transits coming to or sending from your library Go Back Reload Transit Filter Chapter 10 Items in Transit Go Forward Prince Rupert Library Transit Destination Transit Send Time Transit Source Debug Print Page Actions for Selected Transits Request Date R 118 3 Pick a date range in Transit Date falls between fields Transit Filter Transit Library Transit from BPR Prince Rupert Transit Date falls L Today Retrieve Transits Barcode Transit Destination 4 Click Retrieve Transits WF Transit Filter Transit Library Transit to EPR Prince Rupert Transit Date falls between Today r Today 7days v 5 Those items which were sent In Transit within the date range and with an In Transit status are listed Go Back Go Forward Debug Transit Filter Transit Library Transit to Prince Rupert Librar
398. ltiple parameters and returns TRUE if the field is equal to any one of the given values Not In List Itis the opposite of In List Multiple parameters can be specified TRUE will be returned only when none of the parameters is matched with the value in the field Greater Than This operator returns TRUE if a field is greater than your parameter For text fields the string is compared character by character in accordance with the general rule that numerical characters are smaller than alphabetical characters and upper case alphabeticals are smaller than lower case alphabeticals for timestamps Greater Than can be thought of as later than or after Less Than This operator returns TRUE if a field is less than lower than earlier than or smaller than your parameter Between Two parameters are required by this operator TRUE is returned when the field value is Greater Than or Equal to the smaller given value and Less Than or Equal to the bigger given value The smaller parameter should always comes first when filling in a filter with this operator For example between 3 and 5 is correct Between 5 and 3 will return FALSE on the Reports interface For timestamp earlier date always comes first Is NULL or Blank Returns TRUE for fields that contain no data or blank string For most intents and purposes this operator should be used when there is no visible value in the field Contains Matching Substring This operator checks if any part o
399. lts Results 1 2 ofabout2 page 1 of 1 Hogwarts School of 2 Witchcraft and Wizardry Imaginary organization Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry imagina lace Magic Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 1 Preferred library Sitka GrandPr 3 WIE K Publisher Engi ISBN 9781781 1001 34 ae bk Phys Desc 1 online resource ill 144 of 190 copies available at Sitka 4 of 6 copies available at ISLANDLInk 242 Refine Your Search You may refine your search results by Authors Subjects and Series Selecting one of these links on the left side of search results page narrows down the search results to that subject author or series You may also refine your search by clicking the hyperlink labelled Refine My Orignal Search at top of search results Refining a search this way allows you to add search filters such as Publication Date Format Language etc to your original search Search Catalogue title harry potter Type Keyword v Format All Formats v Library SLANDLink Search Advanced Search Browse the Catalogue Refine My Original Search Basic Search Advanced Search Browse Sort by Relevance v Search Results Results 1 10 of about 70 page 1 of 7 Preferred library Sitka 1234567 Next 1 i i i Ha Potter film wizardry written by Brian O ERREN Sibley iR CER R Potter Harry Fictitious 48 Sibley Brian c Add to my
400. lying Filters Without filters all records in the database will be in the result which is seldom desired especially in Sitka s context where libraries share the same database So some filters should be applied to keep out the unwanted records The following procedure shows how to add filters to the example template 1 Select the Base Filters tab in the bottom Template Configuration pane Chapter 27 Creating Templates 287 7 For this circulation statistics example select Circulation Check Out Date Time Year Month and click on Add Selected Fields You are going to filter on the checkout month Database Source Browser Sources Source Specifier Circulation Nullable Source Name Field Name Data Type R Field Transform Output Type R Circulation Base Transaction link A Last Value Non Aqggregate la Default Base Transaction Billing Totals money Max Aggregate Default Billing Totals 4 Check In Date Time timestamp Min Aggregate Default Check In Library j Check In Library org unit Month Name Non Aggregate Default Check In Staff Check In Staff link Month of Year Non Aggregate Default Circ Duration Rule Check Out Date Time timestamp Months ago Non Aggregate Default Circulating Item Circ Duration Rule link Quarter of Year Mon Aggregate Default Age Hold Protection Circ ID id Quarters
401. m you may import one from the Z39 50 sources or the files supplied by your vendors Or you may create a new MARC record if you can not find one from other sources 18 1 MARC Records via 239 50 Interface It is good practice and Sitka policy to check the Evergreen database for existing records before importing a record You may search the catalogue first Or you can configure the Z39 50 screen to search the Sitka Evergreen database as well as multiple Z39 50 targets at once If searching Evergreen via the Z39 50 screen and you find a record it is best practice and Sitka policy to then find that record in the catalogue and attach your holdings to it If you have confirmed that there is no record in Evergreen that matches the item in your hand but have found a record in another database simply import the new record into Evergreen and then attach holdings 18 1 1 Importing Records via Z39 50 Interface l To access Z39 50 interface select Cataloguing Import Record from Z39 50 Cataloguing Acquisitions Booking Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve title by ICN ShifE F3 Retrieve title via Database ID Display Item BE FS Manage Copy Buckets Manage Record Buckets Import Record from 239 50 HAEC Bate Impor saji Replace Barcode Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Manage Authorities Link Checker Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 194 2 Select single or multiple pre configured Z39 50 t
402. m MARC record cccccccceccececcecceeeececceeceseccaeceseesecceseeseeuseeseeceseeseesees 208 18 4 Creating New MARC RecordS conce censo escono qpes2 teur repel oput empate otn acessa Une d tue t a SUPR p ares 210 18 5 Cataloguing non physical resources cccecc ccc eec eee eec eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 212 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC recordS 6 eceaee sc aco ce tence cdc cnass eecendecacacnsweccdeneinacewceenecdetvcnscaceceaiaaeee 214 19 1 Editing MARC Records tacit ad ate cpatarttnnsdctsdctauenseepttaaetasedan tessaaned acc ae sarees asaeueedanens seatedesanes 214 19 2 MARC Record Leader and MARC fixed field 008 cccccecceceececeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeaeeeeeeeaees 217 19 3 Format Filters and Format Icons iumenta ena rta i koe de e khe i e n vans anne 220 19 4 Merging Bibliographic Records in Evergreen cccccecceceeceeceeeececeeseceeceeeeseeseeeeeaeeeeseegees 222 19 5 Deleting MARC records bibliographic or title records eseeseseereeeeeeeeeeee 224 19 6 Exporting MARC mm 600 NUNT DEDE 225 20 Record NP NO UT Unc 228 he UNG Record Bl els eceeocimidenciee eden Opec seco acies Dee CdsA FISH MN rar E IM IEEE Asc MUN EE 228 20 2 Adding Records to Buckets iiir obe erattu eden bieten den tex cp Era cue a tb s edat tti se aA lebe Ded ceto e 230 W OPAO ae eee eeepc P 232 21 Search the catalogue
403. m created with this status will not have the Active Date field filled The date will be filled later when the item achieves a status with Sets copy active is set to YES Item Status Definition Holdable OPAC Sets copy Visible active ES Item 1s on the shelf Steet We fh Item is ini ANN catalogued or in cataloguing gad sare Checked out O KS Claimed Returned Patron reports item has been returned Libraries develop own procedure for deciding when to make an item Claimed Return Discard Weed Item is no longer in collection it has been weeded or discarded In process Item is being processed and will soon be Yes Yes No available In transit Item is travelling between libraries and remains in the In Transit status until checked Lost Declared lost by patron or library either pier i or ROO On display Item is on display and is not in its usual shelving location On holds shelf Item is awaiting pick up by patron Item is Yes Yes usually on a holds shelf within the library On order Item has been ordered but not yet received Yes Yes No from a vendor On reservation shelf Used with room booking module When an No Yes Yes item has been booked reserved it is placed in a unique location for pick up Ren 0 mmemeekem fe e e Reshelving Item has been returned but not yet shelved Status automatically changes to Available after 24 hours Storage On site or On site or off site storage On site or off
404. mber Checkin Date Family Name March 2011 Start Tite m S MTWTEF S5 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E 27 28 29 30 31 2 The top green bar changes to red The new effective date is now displayed in the header Check In Enter Barcode I Effective Date 25 03 2011 Actions for Selected Items Alert Message Balance Owed Barcode Gill Call Number Checkin Date Family Name Finish Location Route To Stat Tite R 3 Move the cursor to the Barcode field Scan the items When finishing backdated check in change the Effective Date back to today s date Backdate Post Checkin After an item has been checked in you may use the Backdate Post Checkin function to backdate the check in date Chapter 7 Circulation 61 Select the item on the Check In screen click Actions for Selected Items Backdate Post Checkin Check In Enter Barcode Effective Date 307 03 2011 E Actions for Selected Items testlib is in transit Transaction far testlib billable 52 10 Fine Tally 2 10 Copy to Clipboard Alert Message Balance Owed Barcode Gill Call Number Checkin Date Family Mame Finish Location Add to Item Bucket 210 testlib 1206 Not Catalog 2011 03 30 4 SITKA 2011 Stacks E Show in Catalogue Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulati Retrieve Last Patron wh Edit Item Attributes Backdate Post Checkin 2 Use the calendar widget to select an effective check
405. med returned date for these items 1017573397 Sco 8 07 50PM Apply 69 4 The Claimed Returned item by default displays in the Other Special Circulations pane Other Special Circulations Actions for Selected Items Barcode Checkin Date Checkout or Renew Library Circulation Library Fines Stopped Title A 35180000103050 BLP LL BLP LL LOST FROGS AND TOADS 33987000557537 BW BW LOST D ora s Christmas carol adventure 1017573397 BHH BKCT KAM s CLAIMSRET Dora s pirate adventure The date entered for a Claimed Returned establishes the fine If the date given is past bills will be adjusted accordingly When a Claimed Returned item is returned if there is an outstanding bill associated with it by default the item will not disappear from the tems Out screen It will disappear when the outstanding bills are resolved If a patron pays the fine but staff don t find the item and check it in there is a known bug in Evergreen that makes the Claimed Return item disappear from patron s account which is not correct behaviour Sitka support recommends the following workaround until bug is resolved programmatically You may check the item in and if wanting to pursue with original patron check it back out to that patron and mark it Claimed Returned Alternatively you can change the item s status to Missing or simply delete the item based on library policy and facts of the case Please contact Sitka sup
406. mon second level enumeration is number or no Enter the number of bibliographic units per next higher level Choose the enumeration scheme from the drop down menu Previous Use enumerations w and na are common first and second level enumeration captions Enumeration Caption Units Per Higher Level Numbering Continuity First level Second level e Num ae ities w Remove Add Enumeration Add Alternate Enumeration 3 Calendar To use months seasons or dates in your caption check the box adjacent to Use calendar changes dentify the point in the year at which the highest level enumeration caption changes nthe Type drop down menu select the points during the year at which you want the calendar to restart nthe Point drop down menu select the specific time at which you would like to change the calendar To add another calendar change click Add Calendar Change There are no limits on the number of calendar changes that you can add Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 343 e When you have finished the calendar changes click Next Previous Use calendar changes Identify any points during the year at which the highest level enumeration caption changes Type Point At start of a month w January v Add Calendar Change 4 Chronology To add chronological units to the captions check the box adjacent to Use chronology captions Choose a chronology for the first level If you
407. mple in a patron record you can find patron s names address phone number barcode profile etc all in one record But in the database patron s address barcode and profile are in separate tables You do not need to know where these fields are from when editing a patron record on the Staff Client but you have to know it when creating a template on the Reports interface Since various information about one patron is saved in separate tables there must be a mechanism of matching the information about one patron correctly to make sure all information is about the same patron This is done via recording the patron id a unique number in the main patron record in every related table So via recording the id of a record in another table two tables are connected The connections among many tables are pre made by the Reports interface You just need to follow the link to find the data saved in the related table Below is a simplified diagram showing the connections among some commonly used tables views on the Reports interface which can be a guide for you to find various fields in different tables Some explanation of these tables is after the diagram Circulation ol timestamps Request requester target A simplified diagram of the tables and connections among them made by the Reports interface Chapter 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database 316 Commonly used tables and views ILS User aka Patron or User contains
408. ms You can use this function for items such as paperbacks or magazines that you may not care if the patron doesn t return Items are checked out with a due date but when the due date expires the items disappear from the patron s record and no fines accrue Circulation statistics are collected Non cat circulation statistics are kept separately from regular and pre cat circulation statistics Use Sitka s non cat circulation reports to generate the numbers l Go to the patron s Check Out screen by Circulation Check Out Items 2 Click on the drop down list in Barcode and choose the type of non catalogued items Due Date 3 Enter the number of items being circulated and click OK The page at http demo gapines arg says axe 22 Enter the number of Comics circulating Cancel Chapter 7 Circulation 59 Due Dates Circulation periods may be pre set When items are checked out due dates are automatically calculated and inserted into circulation records if the Specific Due Date checkbox is not selected on the Check Out screen The Specific Due Date checkbox allows you to set a different due date to override the pre set loan period Before you scan the item select the Specific Due Date checkbox Use the calendar widget to select a date Or click in day month or year then use the up or down arrows to make the change or simply delete the data then enter again Time is used for hourly loan only This date appli
409. n Bill History Total Owed 10 00 Total Checked 10 00 Refunds Available 0 00 Credit Available 20 00 Bill Patron 3 Create Bill Location Transaction Type Grocery Billing Type Damaged material Amount Mote Chapter 8 Bills and Payments Eatonton Putnam County Library Pay Bill Payment Type Payment Received 9 90 Annotate Payment See Distribution Actions for Selected Transactio Grocery is the only available transaction type Choose appropriate billing type from the drop down menu 86 4 Enter amount in Amount field and any required note in Note field Click Submit this Bill and then confirm it Create Bill Location Eatonton Putnam County Library Transaction Type Grocery Billing Type Damaged material Amount 5 00 Note Ripped cover Submit this Bi Local bill types may have a pre set amount To add a grocery bill to an existing bill line l 2 3 Retrieve the patron record and go to the Bills screen Select the bill to which you want to add and click Actions for Selected Transactions Add Billing Click Yes on the confirmation prompt i Actions for Selected Transactions Balance Owed Bill Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type Title Show in Catalog 10 00 12060567 A2211 4 10 00 0 00 grocery Show Item Details Void All Billings Ref
410. n 2008 11 16 1 45 PM Actions for this Record Actions for Selected Rows Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB Issuance Label Distribution V 2 No 8 2014 Aug Cdn Living V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Cdn Living V 2 No 10 2014 Oc Cdn Living V 2 No 11 2014 N Cdn Living V 2 No 12 2014 De Cdn Living V 3 No 1 2015Jan Cdn Living V 3 No 2 2015 Feb Cdn Living V 3 No 3 2015 Mar Cdn Living Item ID 22855 22856 22857 22858 22859 22860 22861 22862 CNAME WKH h Showing Recently Received Current Working Unit Auto per Item Stream ID 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 Date Published 2014 07 31 2014 08 31 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 Date Expected 2014 07 31 2014 08 31 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number a 22262 M 3 No AQD15 Anr i Cdn living MDE oni 2015 02 21 2015 02 21 ALALA 2014 06 02 Date Last Edited R 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 Unit ID Contents v Receive Move Selected 1 A 0 Alerts Set Current Unit Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB Issuance Label Distribution V 2 No 7 2014 Jul Cdn Living V 2 No 4 2014 Apr Cdn Living V 2 No 5 2014 May Cdn Living V 2 No 6 2014Jun Cdn Living Item ID 22854 2285
411. n doit ce naair EE EETA ERE aia 419 48 3e E Le cuo M DLE RETE E TOO tT 420 48 4 Closed Dates Editor ucieonee eeepc rrt terni ron inge ata ma cna Sit roten nere e esu ita demie nien bti nd 423 BO 0D OC AUIS MON acces dee sce ee cote desse dac epp ide s cesta ween sed en sone EEE NNE 425 48 6 Copy Location Order iius uieo epe tek oria endo rheia inn sbueedebecescececdadedebedesinecadeeedebodaedeoecsedsdadedasieds 428 45 5 Copy Template TCM Ole tse ereceetrceetaceeaseceuececacaeecsscounnessvert aA EN a Ehad SS aiaiai 428 48 8 Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting cc ccccccccceeceeceee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeaes 428 45 9 GOUD Penalty Tes ONO S oi ctaes ca csee cece anbeiescoatecacadsetncanatens saueesunsasaduineve emeenestatenanceceseewoeaccs 429 48 9 1 Penalty threshold inheritance rules cccceccecceeeeceeeeeeeceeseeseeeeseeseeeesseseeeeesenenneees 430 48 9 2 Creating local penalty thresholds eel eese eee ee eee e eese 430 48 9 3 Deleting or editing local penalty thresholds ccccceececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaes 432 ONC AI Te docs pec ees des ean E Moro etuewoniscasenennse disepsdetcennsalacusecseeececaudubsecdeteosecs 432 S811 HO POCOS seiniin riisi rin ai NE EEES ra E OA EREA 433 Z8 12 kom Pre EdItOL cisuuntuscnuennsvsanssiecenainsevisadetendhand AAE E a EEREN di 435 48 13 Library Settings Editor aea iint rn eara three tano annoa tak Sapsac
412. n ey CMe CUO ieri AA EE EA 22 NU C nigure Recepi Fe Mill RT TOT 26 MEE ED E e EE EEEE E TE E EE E E EE gcse E EEA TEA Ue E EA E EE MUN 34 D ESO HOO 265925295 92 900 09095255 0590 5292000985 000 000008000099 200050 00 09 99 009 0 205 09 2 0 00 9 9 0 5 0 20 855 4995099524 37 6 1 eal CHING Falo G a E EE 37 Bue Rodena NEW I SIEOLIS sue erro inina eana EEE 39 6 3 ACCOUN Status Dy COOU COCE arse nae EU ERI TINI ERE inp EE EEEE A 42 DE Updating Falhon In CONS 4 2225 cscseeoacascanentataenonos n eri EAn a iin a aE aiii 43 De 1 Upd ling Faton TOES MODI os ote eR e qE RE SCIRR E CFR EEE 43 64 2 henewing Library CardS COE TTE ae niian 45 6 4 3 Marking Library Cards RESCUE TRITT NE 45 6 4 4 Resetting a Patron s Password scrscavaiaescarsasatavasnesaneninorcantingicaasignesavatmaensiaaeaiansannnsacs 45 6 4 5 Invalidate Email Address or Phone Number cccccecseceeceeceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseees 46 CA e A EE A O iT EE 47 6 5 Patron Alerts Notes Messages and Notifications cccccccccecec eee ececeeeeeeeeseeeeaeaeeeeeeeeaeaeees 47 Ca LAS ar E I IRI SPAM IPSE ENIISO I UIS De ODRS s eSRG EP Aid deE 47 C INOS a woe dsc ieeru date mme 49 a N EE IN T TT TTE TETUR Tem mE 50 is NOCOU reinen extr A A COT M D DRDAlM CEPI e xPR DIE CPI La DE A D D AA 51 C6 Merdnd Faon RECOS OT TOT D3 C D PEA E E A E E E 56 FER SINIT ETUR Dr ume O ue mete Ree eet eee A E E E E A PEE 57 eZ CNE SEES E A 60 7 3 Renewal and Edi
413. n lost item checkin up to the point of checkin time or max fines is reached This is different than restore overdue on lost because it only creates new overdue fines Use both settings together to get the full complement of overdue fines for a lost item Lost items usable on Lost items are usable on checkin True false LSA checkin instead of going home first Max patron claims When this count is exceeded a staff Number LSA returned count override is required to mark the item as claims returned Maximum visible age If this is unset staff can view User Duration LSA Not working of User Trigger Events Trigger Events regardless of age in Staff Interfaces When this 1s set to an interval it represents the age of the oldest possible User Trigger Event that can be viewed Minimum transit In Transit items checked in this Duration LSA checkin interval close to the transit start time will be prevented from checking in Patron merge address Delete address es of subordinate True False LSA delete user s in a patron merge Patron merge barcode Delete barcode s of subordinate True False LSA delete user s in a patron merge Patron merge deactivate Mark barcode s of subordinate True False LSA card user s in a patron merge as inactive Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 444 Patron Registration Cloned patrons get address copy Printing custom Javascript file Require match
414. n setting up this notice e the wording you would like to be used on each notice This wording of the paper notices is customizable by library PDF notices are set up through the Sitka support team and cannot be modified in the staff client Please submit required revisions to Sitka support Notices delivered by phone You can set up a recurring report to generate a list of overdues for all patrons or for those without an email address only Then you can phone each person individually You may specify an email address to receive an email reminder each time a list is generated There are two shared templates for overdue reports in the SJTKA templates gt Circulation folder See Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates for more about using shared templates Sitka support staff will be very happy to assist if you need help in this process 52 3 Final Notices The final paper overdue notice sent to patrons can be set as a billing notice which includes processing fees and replacement costs The price is taken from the price entered in the price field of the copy editor for the item If the price field is blank the price is taken from the Default Item Price setting in the Library Settings Editor The processing fee comes from the Lost Materials Processing Fee setting found in the Library Settings Editor Final notices are set up as part of the paper overdues When setting up your paper overdues specify the interval at which you would li
415. n staff client first Evergreen will work down to a 3Mbps connection but the performance will get progressively worse the lower the connection speed gets While Evergreen will be functionally usable at 3Mbps it may of limited use at lower speeds Table 54 1 Recommended Internet Connection Speeds Category Downstream Upstream Latency to Sitka Bare Minimum To Function 3Mbps 786Kbps less than 200ms Adequate 6Mbps 1 Mbps less than 125ms 12Mbps 2Mbpbs less than 75ms Mbps stands for megabit per second and can also be represented as Mbits Kbps stands for kilobit per second and can also be represented as Kbits ms stands for milliseconds Most of the bandwidth usage in a library is not from Evergreen but from other usage of the Internet by both staff and patrons When staff workstations share an ISP connection with public workstations libraries ideally should have at least 1 5 2x more down upstream capacity than what is recommended in the table above Staff Terminals Staff terminals connect to the central database using the Evergreen staff client available for download from https bc libraries coop support staff client executables The Evergreen staff client must be installed on each staff workstation and requires at minimum e Windows 10 8 7 or Vista operating system Win 10 users may need to manage Win 10 privacy settings based on best practice in Windows community or on advice of your IT department or vendor Mac OS
416. n to transfer Pre Cat records to MARC records You may need to first create a volume record on the destination title record or at minimum mark a volume as tem Transfer Destination then go to Item Status F5 screen to transfer your Pre Cat item to the destination record You may edit the Circulating Library field on Copy Editor to move a copy to another branch But the call number s owning library will remain unchanged On Holdings Maintenance screen the item will be displayed under the call number s owning library 15 8 Deleting holdings When adding items to the catalogue you need to have a bibliographic record first then you create a volume and copy record When you delete holdings you need to follow the reverse order You need to delete copy records first By design and Sitka s configuration Evergreen will also attempt to delete the volume and bibliographic record These records will be deleted if they are not used by other copies volumes If you delete your library s last copy the volume record will be deleted together with the copy If this is also the last copy for the title no other libraries have a copy the bibliographic record will be deleted too So for most cases you just need to delete the copy records only If possible Evergreen will delete the volume and bibligraphic records automatically Occasionally you may want to delete an orphan volume without any copy or bibliographic without any volume record Deleting copy
417. nage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Create a new repart from selected template v Limit output to 10 v Create a new Template for this folder Ho items to display 3 Select Change folder name from the dropdown menu and click Go Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Delete this folder Create a new subfolder Ghare this falde Hide un share this folder 4 Enter the new name and click Submit Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Change folder name iw C Enter new name Circulation Statistics Subit D s Chapter 26 Folders 274 5 Click OK The page at http hepbum sitka bclibrary ca says 6 You will get a confirmation box that the Action Succeeded Click OK The page at http hepburn sitka bclibrary ca says imm Action Succeeded Chapter 26 Folders 275 Chapter 27 Creating Templates Once the folders are ready you can create or clone a template Templates allow you to run a report more than once without building it anew every time by changing definitions such as values for the filters to suit current requirements For example a template counting patrons with a registration date within a time frame can be used to find out the number of patrons registered within the last month or the last ten days Another example is a shared template that reports on circulation statistics at a given lib
418. nd Circ Desk checkbox is selected in the patron record you will be prompted to route the item to Private Hold Shelf See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu for how to set up Behind Desk Pickup If a patron has a OPAC Staff Client Holds Alias in his her account it will be used on the hold slip instead of the patron name Holds can also be captured on the Circulation Check In Items screen If you have selected the Auto Print Hold and Transit Slips checkbox the hold slip will be printed automatically without confirmation prompt 9 5 Find Another Target for Holds For an item on the Holds Pull List but not found on the shelves or the item is not in proper condition for circulation staff may mark it missing or damaged and find another item for the hold if it is not the only copy Finding another target for holds or retargeting the holds can be done at several places View Holds in title record selecting Actions for this Record View Holds Holds in patron record Chapter 9 Holds 112 Holds Pull List You need to select the hold and click Actions for Selected Holds Find Another Target Evergreen immediately searches for an available copy for the hold and puts it on the Holds Pull List If there is no available copy the hold s status will be set to Wait for copy Evergreen s holds targeting program the holds targeter identifies holdable copies and builds a holdable copy list once a day at midnight When an i
419. nd click Return 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservation Return Go Back Go Forward Reservations Return Pringle Jennifer Patron currently has these reservations out Title Barcode Pickup time Return Patron has returned these resources today Patron has not retumed any resources today Clear New Patron 5 The screen will refresh to show any resources that remain out and the reservations that have been returned 1 Reservation Return Go Back Go Forward Debug print Page Reservations Return Return by barcode of Resource 98723000112233 Pringle Jennifer Patron currently has these reservations out Patron has no more reservations out at this time Patron has returned these resources today Title Barcode Due time Return time Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 17 18 45 2011 06 17 14 47 Clear New Patron Reservations can be returned from within patron records by selecting Other Booking Return Reservations 45 7 Cancelling a Reservation A reservation can be cancelled in a patron s record or reservation creation screen Cancel a reservation from the patron record 1 Retrieve the patron s record Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 398 2 Select Other gt Booking Create or Cancel Reservations Triggered Eyents Statistical Categories Booking Pick Up Reservations Surveys Return Reservations Group Member Details Test Password U
420. nd of this chapter Chapter 25 Reports overview 270 Chapter 26 Folders There are three main components used on the Reports inferface Templates Reports and Output Each of these components must be stored in a folder Folders can be private accessible to your login only or shared with other staff at your library other libraries in your federation or with the whole Sitka Consortium It 1s also possible to selectively share only certain folders and or subfolders A shared subfolder must be created in a shared folder The sharing scope of the subfolder should be within the sharing scope of the parent folder For example a subfolder shared with Sitka Consortium should only be in a parent folder shared with Sitka It should not be in a folder shared with your library only Though creating shared subfolders in unshared folders or a subfolder with the sharing scope exceeding its parent s is not blocked by Evergreen serious consequences will be caused by such folders You must be cautious when creating shared subfolders There are two parts in the folders pane The My Folders section contains folders created with your Evergreen account Folders that other users have shared with you appear in the Shared Folders section under the username of the sharing account You can only view the contents or clone the templates in the shared folders but not make any change in the shared folders The cloned template can only be saved into your own folder
421. ng Import Matches screen 5 On the Import Matches screen you will see the match record s ID number and some non MARC information Click View MARC The existing MARC record is displayed in view mode You can not edit it Once done click Return to go back to the Import Matches screen Go Back Reload Go Forward GI ExportRecords H3 ImportRecords G3 InspectQueue G3 Record Display Attributes Merge Overlay Profiles amp Record Match Sets G Import Item Attributes Import Matches s Back To Import Queue Queued Matched Merge Target ID View MARC Match Score Record Record Creator Create Date rete Source TCN Source TCN Value Quality Quality 107268984 View MARC 600 0 0 tnrd cat 3 15 12 6 9 12 2 SITKA 107268984 Match Score is the total score from all matched fields specified in the Record Match Set This list shows the matching points and the scores assigned to each point of SitkaMatch Match scores are used to indicate how well two records are matched For example if two records contain the same value in tag 901 c highly likely they are matches So tag 901 c is assigned a very high score If the incoming and existing records match on tag 010 a and 020 a the match score will be 600 Match Points amp Scores of SitkaMatch Record Match Set Your Expression GOR 901 tc Match score 800 020 ta Match score 100 010 ta Match score 500 022 ta Match score 90 035 fa Match score 25 6 Upon inspecting bot
422. ng an item if both numbers are present enter both in separate 020 tags 022 International Standard Serial Number ISSN is a unique number assigned to a serial title 024 Universal Product Code UPC is a twelve digit number often assigned to sound recordings and videos 028 are Publisher Control Numbers formatted numbers used for sound recordings printed music and videorecordings Classification Numbers Evergreen does not display call numbers from the shared MARC record but the data is useful for searching matching and assessing quality of a MARC record Evergreen uses each library s volume record for local call number display and will give you the option to auto fill your number from the MARC record if you want to use that call number as yours 05X are standard classification call numbers that are or can be present in a MARC record The most common are the 050 which is the Library of Congress Classification Number LCC assigned by the Library of Congress and the 055 which 1s the Canadian LCC 082 is the Dewey Decimal Classification number DDC 090 and 092 are tags reserved for a library s local call number This data is not used by Evergreen for call number display but you will often see data there from a different library whose system may use the MARC record for call number display Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 209 Title 245 tag contains all the important title information and General Mate
423. ngfield Branch Please select an object to edit C Show Subs _ Show Groups Refresh Actions for Selected Row Location Subscriptions ER ASITKA Sitka 0 4UNFEDERATED Unfederated 0 4ZSP Springfield Public Library 0 gt ZSP B New Springfield Branch 1 5 Claims Not currently used Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 335 37 2 Managing Serials Records Create a Subscription Create a Distribution Create Captions and Patterns Pattern Code Wizard Create an Issuance Generate Predictions 37 2 1 Create a Subscription A subscription is designed to hold all information related to a single serial title Therefore each library is likely to have only one subscription per serial title A subscription must be added to a catalogue record so to start you must locate the record in the catalogue If the record is not already in the catalogue you can import it via any of your preferred methods MARC import Z39 50 search etc 1 Search the catalogue F3 search the Catalogue Basic Search Browse the Cataloque Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Search Input Keyword Contains And v Title v Contains And e Auhor w Contains w Add Search Row Search Library Sort Results l Bren Del Win Centennial y Sort by Relevance 7 Limit to Available Group Formats and Editions Search Filters Language English French Athapascan Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records
424. ni Open Circulation Billing by Circulating Library and Owning Open Circulation Billing by Owning Library Open Circulation Billing by User Home Library and Cwnin Overdue Circulation Payments All Payments Brick and mortar Payments Desk Payments Non drawer Staff One template can have only one starting source table If you need information from other tables you should follow the links made by the Reports interface to those tables The reporting program can not put two pieces of isolated information together into one record in the result When you change a starting table all your existing selected fields will be removed Chapter 27 Creating Templates 279 5 Click on Circulation to retrieve all the fields and links which will be displayed in the middle pane The Field Name column contains the label of each field The Data Type column shows what type of data is in the field For details of data type see Template Terminology Note that the Source Specifier above the middle and right panes shows the path that you took to get to the specific field Database Source Browser Es Nullable Source Mame m Field Name d ic BALDNESS Archived Copy Stat Cat Entries Archived Patron Stat Cat Entries Base Transaction Billing Totals Check In Date Time Check In Library 4 Check In Staff Check Out Date Time E he In Scan Dates lime Field Transform Output Type E Raw Data Non Aggregate Circulation C
425. nit l Date Mon Aqgrec Default Check In Staff Check In Staff link Day Name Mon Aggrec Default Circ Duration Rule d Check Gut Date Time timestamp Day of Month Mon Aggrec Default Circulating Item Circ Duration Rule link Day of Week Mon Aggrec Default Circulating Library 1 Circ ID id Dav of Year Mon Aggrec Default Circulating Staff Circulating Item link First value Mon Aggreg Default Circulation Type ve Circulating Libr sess nra umik Hear Man anrar Enable nullability selection Data Type is associated with each field It tells what kind of information is stored in the field The system handles the information differently based on the data type Each data type has its own characteristics and uses Boolean Contains either true or Examples in Evergreen deleted in item patron record false circulate in item record ID Unique number assigned by IDs look like numbers but the id data type is treated the database to identify a specially by the software for determining how tables are record linked Id is a good candidate field for counting records Integer A number like 1 2 3 Examples in Evergreen remaining renewal count in circulation record claimed returned count in patron record Interval Time intervals such as Examples in Evergreen loan duration and grace period weeks and 6 months in circulation record Link It is similar to the id data Examples in Evergreen user id and
426. nother location use Ctrl V ID Contact Info Library Card 21041000138247 2 Text displayed in tables To copy information from a staff client table first select the desired row then right click and choose Copy to Clipboard alternatively select Actions for Selected Items Copy to Clipboard Boe Upload From File Actions For Cataloguers Actions For Selected Items Barcode Author Title Call Number Location Status EH 35151000040469 Borg Bobby The musician s handbook a 780 23 Bor Adult Non Fiction Available 35101000222468 Borges Jorge Labyrinths BC BOR shelf 11111000262121 Borges Jorge The Aleph and other stories PO 7797 RAJS A CRANRROOK Available d 11111000282154 Borges Labyrinths selected stories esse OK Available 35101000143326 Borges Jorge Selected poems 1923 1967 Add fiter Bucket Available 33294000168807 Borges Jorge Dreamtigers E eaae 001324961 Borges Jorge Collected Fictions show tem Details ion Available Chew d sek Esa CieciidlaFienc Fiction Available Chapter 5 Getting Started ag Eatu Upload From File Actions For Cataloguers Geama narra l Barcode Author Title Call Number Location Copy to Clipboard 35151000040469 Borg Bobby The musician s handbook a 780 23 Bor Adult Non Fiction 35101000222468 Borges Jorge Labyrinths BC BOR AV shelf Shaw in Catalogue 11111000262121 Borges Jorge
427. nsaction time WARNING The Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this Skip offline checkout transaction True False LSA raise exception when processing if item Status Changed Time is newer than the recorded transaction time WARNING The Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this Skip offline renewal transaction True False LSA raise exception when processing if item Status Changed Time is newer than the recorded transaction time WARNING The Reshelving to Available status rollover will trigger this Disable automatic print attempts Text from staff client interfaces for the receipt types in this list Possible values Checkout Bill Pay Hold Slip Transit Slip and Hold Transit Slip This is different from the Auto Print checkbox in the pertinent interfaces in that it disables automatic print attempts altogether rather than encouraging silent printing by suppressing the print dialog The Auto Print checkbox in these interfaces have no effect on the behavior for this setting In the case of the Hold Transit and Hold Transit slips this also suppresses the alert dialogs that precede the print dialog the ones that offer Print and Do Not Print as options Retain a bib record even when all True False Sitka Default FALSE based attached copies are deleted on Sitka cataloguing policy This email address is for Text automatically generated patron Chapter 48 L
428. ntries that contain both golden and compass Boolean operators such as and or not are not considered special and are searched for like any other word So a search for golden and compass will not return the title golden compass Putting it another way there are no stop words that are automatically ignored by the search engine So a title search for the and or not of and in any order yields a list of titles with those words Don t worry about white space exact punctuation or capitalization White spaces before or after a word are ignored So search for golden compass gives the same results as a search for golden compass A double dash or a colon between words is reduced to a blank space So a title search for golden compass or golden compass is equivalent to golden compass However space matters in this case No result for golden compass or golden compass Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 238 e Punctuation marks occurring at the front or end of a word are removed Diacritical marks amp orllocated anywhere in the search term but not within a word are removed Words linked together by dot are separated into two words So a search for golden compass amp is equivalent to golden compass Upper and lower case letters are equivalent So Golden Compass is the same as golden compass Enter your search words in any order A search for compass golden gives the same results as a search for golden compass Adding
429. nts continuously without volume 2 7 0 8 1 a no u 6 v c 1 year Qonth w b x 01 Bimonthly Increments continuously with volume 2 0 8 1 a vol b no u 6 v c 1 year j Qonth w b x 01 Three times a year Three times a year without volume and increments continuously 2 0 8 1 a No u 3 v c 1 year j month w t x 01 Three times a year with volume and increments continuously 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 3 v c 1 year j month w C x 01 Three times a year with volume and restart 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 3 v r 1 year j Gmonth w t x 01 Chapter 44 Caption and Pattern Codes 381 e Three times a year with volume and restart starting in July 2 0 8 I a Vol b no u 3 v re 1 year 1 month w t x 07 Three times a year with volume and restart starting in August 2 0 8 1 a Vol b no u 3 v re 1 year 1 month w t x 08 Three times a year without volume with restart 2 0 8 1 a Vol b No u 3 v r w t Quarterly Quarterly Increments continuously and volume 2 0 8 1 a vol b no 1 year month w q x 01 Quarterly Increments continuously an
430. nual Long Overdue item status is not in use in Sitka thus none of the long overdue related entries are included in the table below Table 48 1 Booking and Cataloguing T Booking Allow email Permit email notification when a rue false LSA notify reservation is ready for pickup Default Classification Defines the default classification Number Sitka Affects call number Scheme scheme for new call numbers sorting Generic 2 Dewey 3 LC Default copy status fast Default status when a copy is Selection LSA Default In process created using the Fast Item Add list interface Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 440 Default copy status Default status when a copy is Selection LSA Default In Process normal created using the normal volume list copy creator interface Defines the control Admin setting Sitka number identifier used in 003 and 035 fields Delete bib if all True False Sitka copies are deleted via Acquisitions lineitem cancellation Delete volume with last Automatically delete a volume when True False Sitka Default TRUE copy the last linked copy is deleted Maximum Parallel The maximum number of Z39 50 Number Sitka Z39 50 Batch Searches searches that can be in flight at any given time when performing batch Z39 50 searches Maximum Z39 50 The maximum number of search Number Sitka Batch Search Results results to retrieve and queue for each record Z39 source during ba
431. o Patron Credit checkbox Bill History T Lis Pay Bill Total Owed 10 00 Refunds Available 0 00 spi Total Checked 10 00 Credit Available 20 00 Fecal REE 1200 Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply Payment Actions for Selected Transaction Balance Owed Bill Finish Total Billed Total Paid Type Payment Pending Ez v 10 00 0 00 grocery 10 00 List Actions Receipt Options Voided this session 0 00 Payment Change Owed Billed Paid Pending 10 00 2 00 Total 10 00 10 00 0 00 Change Due Upon Payment 2 00 Checked 10 00 10 00 0 00 Convert Change to Patron Credit 6 When partial payment is made the money applied starts at the top of the list of checked bills Click the See Distribution button and the payment distribution will be displayed in the Payment Pending column To pay selected bill s uncheck the other bills Note the presence of the Uncheck All and Check All options as shortcuts Bill History Total Owed 24 66 Refunds Available 0 00 ramen ne Total Checked 24 66 Credit Available 0 00 payment Received 1 00 E Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply Payment Balance Owed Bill Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type Title 6 00 12060661 3 14 11 1 23 00 17 00 grocery 3 00 12060658 3 11 119 3 10 111 500 2 00 circulation Ski key 1 00 12060657 3 10 11 1 1 00 0 00 circulation Ski key 5 00 3 2 11 1 3 00 0 00 circulation Dora s big bi
432. ocal Administration Menu 458 notices e g email overdues email holds notification It is good practice to set up a generic account like info nameofyourlibrary ca so that one person s individual email inbox doesn t get cluttered with emails that were not delivered Table 48 11 Receipt Templates and SMS Text Message Text HTML Macros to be inserted into receipt templates in place of INCLUDE alert_text Text HTML Macros to be inserted into receipt templates in place of INCLUDE event_text Text HTML Macros to be inserted into receipt templates in place of INCLUDE footer_text Text HTML Macros to be inserted Content of alert_text include Content of event_text include Content of footer_text include Content of header_text mo LSA Text D include into receipt templates in place of INCLUDE header_text Text HTML Macros to be inserted into receipt templates in place of INCLUDE notice_text D D D Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 45 Content of notice text include Disable auth requirement for texting call numbers Disable authentication requirement for sending call number information via SMS from the OPAC Current features that use SMS include hold ready for pickup notifications and a Send Text action for call numbers in the OPAC If this setting is not enabled the SMS options will not be offered to the user Unless you are carefully silo ing patrons and
433. ocn D Cn M To 0m du i 1 T h ze o T7 m E r moins 1 In r d li Ho rm rn L m n al Yr 0n cs 2 A m n E 1 1n m 1 5 Tabular output looks like this Chapter 29 Viewing Report Output 297 6 If you want to manipulate filter or graph this data Excel output would be more useful Excel output looks like this in Excel B4 File Edit View Insert Format LAG d aldi5 r ie f Tools Data Window Help Arial AT hd amp Check out month 1 Check nut month Shelving location Adult Fiction Adult Fiction Second Floor Adult Man Fiction Adult Man fictian Adult Paperbacks Mystery Adult videos Adult videos Educational Biographies CD ROMs COs Children s Videos Children s Videos Education Christmas Storage DD s JP Basement Storage Juvenile Easy Readers Juvenile Fiction Juvenile Non Fiction Juvenile Picture Books Large Print Literacy Collection Multilingual Collection bdiiltilieciil th Chapter 29 Viewing Report Output nan nilo Branch 298 Chapter 30 Running Recurring Reports Recurring reports are a useful way to save time by scheduling reports that you run on a regular basis such as monthly circulation and monthly patron registration statistics When you have set up a report to run on a monthly basis you may request an email informing you that the report has successfully run You can click on the link in the email that will take you directly to the report output You can also acc
434. ogging in to RT Self Service Phone Telephone support is available 9 00 AM to 4 00 PM Pacific Time Monday to Friday with emergency after hours support 7 days a week Call our toll free number during regular hours to speak with support staff or after hours to leave a message or request emergency server support To protect our staff we do not accept anonymous calls so please ensure your caller ID is not blocked The Co op Support toll free number and email address can be found on the Splash page in the Sitka Evergreen Staff Client The toll free number can also be found on the Sitka Support page This information is also given to libraries during migration 4 2 Guidelines for Support Requests Thorough and consistent reporting makes it easier for Co op Support to respond to your requests Report problems as they occur Prompt reporting may help us catch a problem before it affects other patrons respond quickly to issues that impact multiple libraries or save you time if there is an easy solution Please report issues as soon as is convenient One issue per request Please submit one issue at a time Emails generate tickets in RT which are assigned to support team members Reporting each question separately helps us assign classify and prioritize tickets more efficiently Contact information We strive to offer friendly personalized service Please include your name and use an email address where we can reach you directly Descriptiv
435. on 4 Ready for pick up holds holds are captured and items are on the Hold Shelf waiting for patrons to pick up 5 Reserved Pending holds holds are captured and items are in process and to be put on the Hold Shelf The status will be automatically changed to Ready for pick up once the delay time period specified in Library Settings Editor expires Besides capturing holds when checking in items Evergreen matches holds with available items in your library at regular intervals Once a matching copy is found the item s barcode number is assigned to the hold and the item is put on the Holds Pull List Staff can print the Holds Pull List and search for the items on shelves Chapter 9 Holds 106 l To retrieve your Holds Pull List select Circulation Pull List for Hold Requests Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booki Check Out Items Fl Check In Items F2 Renew Items Ctrl F2 Register Patron Shift Fl Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron F Capture Holds Shift F2 Pull List for Hold Requests Browse Holds Shelf Place Hold BR Show Item Status by Barcode F5 Retrieve Patron by Barcode F1 Verify Credentials Replace Barcode Record In House Use F6 Scan Item as Missing Pieces Re Print Last F3 Enter Offline Interface Chapter 9 Holds 107 2 The Holds Pull List is displayed By default the items on the list are grouped first by Copy Location then by Call Number You may re sort it by clicking the column labels e g
436. on is granted to this account Depth limits application to the staff member s library and should be left at the default Evergreen blocks attempts to set Federation or Sitka wide privileges If checked this staff account will be able to grant the new privilege to other accounts not recommended Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 497 4 To allow processing of offline transactions check the Applied column next to OFFLINE_EXECUTE WARA IEW ON AULUS SHELF MARK ITEM ON ORDER MARE ITEM RESHELVING MAK RENEWALS REACHED override MERGE BIB RECORDS MERGE USERS oO Library m El MR HOLDS OFFLINE EXECUTE i Library Ivy El OFFLINE UPLOAD OFFLINE VIEW DSOWTT2 o S4 T SXSOGTET 5 Scroll down and click Save to apply the changes i group application user vendor money collections tracker create money collections tracker delete Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 498
437. on on Text LSA Day phone field on the Day phone field in patron patron registration registration Example for Email field The example on validation on the Text LSA on patron registration Email field in patron registration Example for Evening The example on validation on the Text LSA phone on patron Evening phone field in patron registration registration Example for Other The example on validation on Text phone on patron the Other phone field in patron registration registration Individual workstations default overrides this Example for phone The example on validation on phone Text fields on patron fields in patron registration Applies registration Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 448 Setting Setting Description Description Data type Edited by Notes Notes 0 to all phone fields without their own setting Example for Postal The example on validation on Text Code field on patron the Postal Code field in patron registration registration Format Dates with this Format Dates with this pattern Text pattern examples yyyy MM dd for 2010 04 26 MMM d yyyy for Apr 26 2010 Formats are effective in display not editing area Format Times with this Format Times with this pattern Text LSA pattern examples h m s SSS a z for 2 07 20 666 PM Eastern Daylight Time HH mm for 14 07 Formats are effective in display not editing area GUI
438. only 20 items will listed 3 Highlight all the line items File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking Admin Help 1 Item Status Call Number Location 641 865 BAI Adult Non Fiction T 287000686286 _ Make bake and decorate cupcakes 1 1 11 33987000845452 3398 7000371509 o F S____ 33987000066554 FICSUL Adult Fiction Inproces Shipsooner o sss m 6 33987000238799 JFCD BAR Juvenile Fiction on CD press Peter Pan Lu m kJ Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 175 4 3s Click Actions for Cataloguers or Actions for Selected Items and choose Print Spine Label File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging l Acquisitions Booking 1 Itern Status Scan Item Barcode Upload From File Call Number 641 865 zs Location Adult Non Fiction JFCD BAR 33987000238799 Juvenile Fiction on CD In process Peter Pan Click Preview and Print File Edit Search Circulation Cataloging Acquisitions Booking 1 Item Status 2 Spine Labels Font size in Mim Ian Font weight normal or bold narmal Spine Label Left Margin in characters Label Width in characters 5 Label Length in lines 6 Pocket Label F Enabled Middle Margin in characters 2 Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings Admin Help Copy to Clipboard Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Holds on Bib Show Item Details S
439. ords that predate 2008 but for correct current series cataloguing use the 490 tag Notes 5xx tags are useful keyword searchable notes tags which assist in description and retrieval of items Use the 500 tag for a note that cannot be placed in any other 5xx tag as per MARC standards Subjects xx contain subject headings that follow standards for personal topical geographical and genre terms Use 690 for local non standard subject headings Hovering your mouse over a MARC tag in MARC Edit view presents a short description of the tag and its intended use You can also hover over a subfield and retrieve textual information about the subfield s intended use LDR o1059cam 2200325 a 4500 20050530131724 0 oo8 oz0820s2003 oid ta 2002030595 o20 a 0743233034 hc c 41 00 oss ta proosas 00000 The ISBN mnm to a monographic publication by designated agencies in each country participating in the program The field may include terms of availability and canceled or invalid ISBNs It may be repeated for multiple numbers associated with different entities e g ISBNs for the hard bound and paperback manifestations ISBNs for a set as a whole and for the individual parts in the set ERIE od uei d C zasi a ta The I hill tba novel 260 ta New York ta Toronto b Simon amp Schuster c c2003 ann ta wiii 307 n fb mana fc 241 cm 18 4 Creating New MARC Records
440. ormat Circulation gt Patron gt Statistical Category Entries gt Statistical Category Stat Cat ID highlight one patron stat cat Al 4 N eeksis The output usually will be Weeks s available in a couple of minutes Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 315 Chapter 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database You are creating updating records when you work on Evergreen Reporting means you extract some of these records from the database that meet your requirements Understanding the Evergreen database and how records are created updated when tasks are performed on the staff client will help you when you create templates and set up reports on the Reports interface There are various kinds of data used by Evergreen such as patron s names address barcode item s barcode shelving location status price checkout date returned date fines and bills and so on This data must be organized in an efficient and effective way to make sure they can be stored and retrieved easily Evergreen uses various tables to keep each type of records You can visualize a table as an MS Excel Worksheet a specified number of columns with unlimited number of rows Each column is called a field in the database terminology and each row is a record There are many tables in Evergreen database Each contains a certain type of records The fields in a record you see on the Staff Client may be from more than one tables For exa
441. ortant descriptive MARC tags and control numbers are selected to display Record Match Sets are profiles set up by Sitka to allow for different match points to be used when loading records The default profile is SitkaMatch It matches on the 901c record id 010a LC Control Number 020a Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 200 ISBN 022a ISSN or 035a System Control Number It is used in the majority of record loads The other profiles are only used to load special records Please contact Co op support for which profile to use if your records require a set of different match points to load Merge Overlay Profiles control how the incoming and existing MARC records are merged Two profiles have been created for all Sitka libraries to use Merge Using INCOMING Record and Merge Using EXISTING Record Merge Using INCOMING Record all tags in the INCOMING record will be brought into the final record Tags 092 590 690 852 and 856 in the ORIGINAL record will be preserved in the final record The rest will be removed Merge Using EXISTING Record all tags in the ORIGINAL record will be kept Tags 092 590 690 852 and 856 in the INCOMING record will be brought into the final record The rest will be removed upon merge These profiles ensure local data in these five fields in a merged MARC record is never overwritten and holding records in tag 852 can be loaded to either the existing MARC record or with the incomin
442. osing an action on the list Chapter 9 Holds 98 1 If you want to cancel the hold click Cancel Hold on the above screen You are prompted to select a reason and put in a note if required Once done click YES B Cancel Hold Cancel Hold Hold Shelf expiration Patron in person Patron via OPAC Patron via phone Untargeted expiration Are you sure you want to cancel the hold s A captured hold with a status of On Hold Shelf or Ready for Pickup can be cancelled by either staff or patrons But the status of the item will not be changed until staff check it in 2 If you want to suspend a hold or activate a suspended hold click the appropriate action on the list You will be prompted to confirm your action Suspended holds have a No value in the Active column Holds Place Hold Show Cancelled Holds Active Available On Capture Date Current Copy Last Notify Time Notices Pickup Library No Copy BKCT KAM 35180000221829 Suspended holds will not be filled but its hold position will be kept They will automatically become active on the activation day if there is an activation date in the record Without an activation date the holds will remain inactive until staff or a patron activate them manually Chapter 9 Holds 99 3 You may edit the Activation Date and Expiration Date by using the corresponding action entry on the Action for Selected Holds dropdown menu You will be prompted to enter the new date Use the cal
443. ossible to login to the staff client and access the output in Output folder Always use relative date for recurring reports Date is a filter on nearly every template When setting up a recurring report always choose Relative Date instead of Real Date for any date filter on the report creating screen When using relative date the actual date will be calculated when the report runs Unlike a real date the actual value of relative date is adjusted according to the run time For example if the report runs at 2012 10 10 23 00 a relative date transformed to Y Y Y Y MM of 1 month ago will be Sept 2012 while a relative date transformed to Y Y Y Y MM DD of 1 day ago will be 2012 10 09 When it runs at 2012 11 10 23 00 1 month ago it will be Oct 2012 while 1 day ago will be 2012 11 09 The date goes by calendar day or month How to stop an existing recurring report To stop a recurring report you may delete the pending output from Pending area in Output folder You may also delete the report from Report folder But deleting the report will delete all the output files generated by it too How to make changes to an existing recurring report Sometimes you may wish to make changes to a recurring report e g the recurrence interval generation date email address to receive completion email output format folder or even filter values such as the number of days overdue You may do it by editing the report See _Viewing Editing Rescheduling Re
444. ou may choose to be notified by phone text message or email The phone number set up in your account will automatically show up Once you select the Yes by phone or Yes by text checkbox you can supply a different Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 247 phone number for this hold only The notification method will be selected automatically if you have set it up in your account preferences However you may choose your method on this screen overriding any default set up in your account You can view and cancel a hold at anytime Before your hold is captured which means an item has been held waiting for you to pick it up you can edit suspend or activate it You need to log into your account to do this Pickup location Altona Library Notify when hold is ready for pickup Yes by Email L Yes by Phone Phone Number 123 123 1234 Yes by Text Messaging Mobile carrier Telus Mobility Canada amp USA vv Note carrier charges may apply Mobile number 12 31231234 Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashes Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 248 Placing Holds on Multiple Records of the Same Title If you ve selected Group by Formats and Edition when doing a search you may place a hold on multiple records of the title but of different formats or editions by clicking Place Hold to the right of the meta record 5 Harry Potter and the Half Blood Prince Rowling J K Book V E book E au
445. ouasdadedaneede Sbaheeedegantnnds 32 4 Examples of using Sitka s templates ease aee ioa rad E seen n tus onn a sa extant pn a ee untuk etant haie ta ee eeE das 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database seseeseseeeenne 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators eeseeseeeeeeeeeee UM SES EE A PE T NAE AE AN E E E E AA ETA ETA E E E AT yD ES EEEE EE R 35 1 Serials Videos uer den Ere tmc d Ec di E RB a ae o d sien rc d Dei boni Fu d xg o Rc c SIN NE Tel nn HC ade cece op EO Emm 326 36 Copy Template NETT mcr 330 36 1 Create a Copy Template eaters ete eecetencueecee m 330 36 2 Edit CODY E MeNTEE RTT 833 36 3 Delete a Copy Template oeste sudexmioisssa ede rccnseec eee se dearie lees oseecdeseewaseceeseedearsessewecseiede 333 37 Creating Serial RECOMS 20 iscieccccievesdeiccdategadasesduicsdasadedeuesdesaadodedudedesdncssdatedeiasasdeasdadadatedastnd abesee Nella CODO WIC AAA N A A e ee duua taU be Fri A AE EN AAE EA 37 2 Managing Serials Records ccccccccecceecsee eee eee eee eee cesses eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeenes 3386 372i Grede em eee ETT TENTE 336 37 2 2 Create a Distribution NS RIT Eee 340 37 2 3 Create Captions and Patterns 2 4c2c00 lt scsseveccesesetsadsctercccsectcadsas ecsssxewtnadsscesesesesvioas 341 37 2 4 Edit Captions and Patterns 2 0
446. our report you need to make sure the view contains the type of records that you want to report on For example Overdue Circulationis a view which contains circulation records without checkin date and the due date past today It does not work for a report on last month s circulation statistics but it makes an overdue report easier By default tables are often but not always joined by left join Other join types may be available Select the Enable nullability checkbox under the source list on Template Creation screen before linked tables are displayed to list all available join types You may see None Child Parent Default in Nullable column beside the table names None means a inner join Parent 1s a right outer join Child left outer join Default is unknown but likely left outer join Chapter 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database 319 Chapter 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators Data Types The central column of the Database Source Browser lists Field Name and Data Type for the selected database table Database Source Browser Source Specifier circulation Sources w eee ee ee ee Rs Field Transform Output Typ B Circulation Base Transactia Age Non Aggrec Default Base Transaction 4 Biling Totals maney q Count Aggregate Default Billing Totals Check In Date Time timestamp 7 Count Distinct Aggregate Default Check In Library Check In Library org u
447. ources I Use Resource Attribute Maps to bring together the resources and their attributes and values Select Admin gt Server Administration Booking Resource Attribute Maps 2 Click New Resource Attribute Map in the right top corner Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 406 3 A box will appear in which you will map your attributes and values to your resources Aeonics 198723000112255 Resource Attribute Computing Platform 7 Attribute Value P v Cancel Save e Resource Enter the barcode of your resource Resource Attribute Select an attribute that belongs to the Resource Type e Attribute Value Select a value that belongs to your chosen attribute and describes your resource If your attribute and value do not belong together you will be unable to save 4 Click Save once you have entered the required information A resource may have multiple attributes and values Repeat the above steps to map all 5 Theresource attribute map will appear in the list Once all attributes have been mapped your resource will be part of a hierarchy similar to the example below Resource 98723000112255 Resource Type Resource Attribute Value Chapter 46 Booking Module Administration 407 46 3 Editing Non Bibliographic Resources Staff with the required permissions can edit aspects of existing non bibliographic resources For example resource type can be edited in the event
448. ouse and Home Date Published 12 31 2013 Caption Pattern 26 Halding Type basic Halding Code Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 348 4 Complete the Issuance information e Label Enter a name for this issuance Date Published Enter the date for the issue before the first one in your subscription For example if your subscription starts in January 2014 enter a pub date for the December 2013 issue Click the Wizard button Enter Holding codes ii Click on Compile subscription 359 Creator 956450 Editor 956450 Label Canadian House and Home Date Published 12 31 2013 Caption Pattern 26 Holding Type basic year 2013 Holding Code month 12 Compile e When finished click Save 37 2 7 Generate Predictions 1 Open the Subscriptions tab 2 Click on the subscription row Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 349 3 Click Actions for Selected Row and select Make Predictions Actions for Selected Row Location Add Subscription 4S5ITEA Sitka Add Distribution AUNFEDERATED Unfederated EE eae AZSP Springfield Public Library MAC AZSP B New Springfield Branch deum i n ET Make Predictions Distributions b ssuances t Captions Patterns Delete Distribution Delete Subscription Delete Issuance Delete Caption Pattern 4 A pop up box will ask you how many items you want to predict Enter the number and click OK o How many items per active pattern wou
449. out Price 16 50 Owning Library BKCT KAM Renewal Type Due Date 4 14 11 11 59 PM ISBN 0689866232 Copy Location Easy Total Circs 18 Checkout Date 3 17 11 1 41 PM Date Created 6 17 08 12 00 AM Loan Duration Normal Total Circs Current Year 2 Checkout Workstation BKCT KAM tina Status Changed 3 17 11 1 41 PM Fine Level Normal Total Circs Prev Year 13 Duration Rule 28 2 Copy ID 4145391 Reference No Renewal Workstation Recurring Fine Rule tencents TCN BKCT 31395626 OPAC Visible Remaining Renewals Max Fine Rule threedollar Floating No Holdable Checkin Time Circulate Checkin Scan Time Circ Modifier Checkin Workstation List Actions 7 Print 7 Trim List 20 rows Strict Barcode Auto Print Hold and Transit Slips 4 Click List View to go back If the item s status is Available the displayed due date refers to the previous circulation s due date Upload From File allows you to load multiple items saved in a file on your local computer The file contains a list of the barcodes in text format To ensure smooth uploading and further processing on the items it is recommended that the list contain no more than 100 items Sitka has a pre defined list of copy statuses available Please consult Section 49 3 Copy Statuses for the definition as well as if the status makes the copy holdable or OPAC visible Additional statuses will be added only after broader consultation with the Sitka community Viewing past circulation
450. patron email notifications hold slips and transit slips Local System Adminstrators should ensure that the Mailing Holds and Physical addresses are set correctly 1 Open the Organizational Units interface as described in the previous section Chapter 49 Server Administration 475 2 Click the Addresses tab Main Settings Hours of Operation Organization Unit Name Grand Forks and District Public L Translate Organization Unit Policy Code BGF Main Email Address Main Phone Humber Organization Unit Type Library Parent Organization Unit BCE OPAC Visible Save Delete 3 There are four address tabs Mailing Holds Physical and ILL Sitka Support recommends setting the first three at a minimum The Holds Address appears on transit slips when items are sent to fulfill holds at another branch The Mailing address is used in notices Main Settings Hours of Operation Addresses Physical Address Holds Address Mailing Address ILL Address Type Valid Street 1 7 342 5th Street Street 2 City Grand Forks State BC Zip VOH 1HO Country Canada County Save Emi 4 Click Save to record changes for each tab The value in State Province field in Mailing address is used to generate the URLs to My Account link in email notices To ensure correct URLs please always use BC for BC libraries or MB for Manitoba libraries The Valid checkbox is an optional setting that does not affect current Evergreen functions but the S
451. pecifier Circulation Circulation Item Shelving Location Once a template is saved it can not be edited anymore To make changes you will need to clone it and edit the clone This will ensure that the work you have done will not be lost As mentioned before creating a template is complex The first try seldom gets the perfect result Your subsequent changes may not always improve the result You may need to refer back to your old version Make changes step by step Check the correctness of the result on each step This may help you to find out the exact cause of the issue After you have the desired template you may delete all the interim ones The above paragaphs described how to create a template from scratch with a very simple example You may choose instead to use one of the generic templates created by the Sitka team to meet common reporting needs see Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates However knowing how a template is created will help you understand the report structure and is recommended as an introduction to editing template fields and filters Chapter 27 Creating Templates 291 Chapter 28 Generating Reports from Templates Now you are ready to run a report from the template you have created 1 Find the template you just created in the Template folder In the My Folders section click the arrow next to Templates to expand this folder and select circulation Folders 2 Templates Circulation me I R
452. ple Jane Ereader 98723000223345 2011 06 17 14 15 2011 06 17 15 30 at BPR for Wimsey Peter 45 4 Capturing Items for Reservations Reservations must be captured before they are ready to be picked up by the patron Always capture reservations in Booking Module Check In function in Circulation does not function the same as Capture Resources In the staff client select Booking Capture Resources Create Reservations Pull List Capture Resources Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations 2 Scan the item barcode or type the barcode then click Capture 1 Booking Capture Go Back Go Forward Capture Reserved Resources Enter barcode 987230001 12233 Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 394 3 The message Capture succeeded will appear to the right Information about the item will appear below the message Click Print button to print a slip for the reservation 1 Booking Capture Go Back l Reload Go Forward Debug Print Page Capture Reserved Resources Enter barcode 98723000112233 Capture succeeded Capture Information Print This item need to be routed to RESERVATION SHELF Barcode 98723000112233 Title Laptop Reserved for patron Pringle Jennifer Barcode 998723000123456 Request time 2011 06 17 11 50 Reserved from 2011 06 17 17 30 2011 06 17 18 45 Slip date Fri Jun 17 13 54 25 2011 Printed by System Account Administrator at BPR Sitka Team strongly recommends printing the
453. ply the filter by clicking Clear Filter or Filter Go Back Reloac Go Forward Organization Unit Settings Context Location BW hold Indicates the setting is not inherited from the parent org unit at run time Edit History Group Setting Edi History Circulation Block hold request if hold recipient privileges have expired Edit History Circulation Checkout Fills Related Hald Edit History Circulation Checkout Fills Related Hold On Valid Copy Only Edit History Circulation Hold Shelf Status Delay Edit History Circulation Suppress Hold Transits Group Edit History Circulation Suppress Non Hold Transits Group Edit History Circulation Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is closed Edit History Circulation Target copies for a hold even if copy s circ lib is closed IF the circ lib is the Edit History GUI Horizontal layout for Volume Copy Creator Editor Edit History GUI Record In House Use of uses threshold for Are You Sure dialog Edit History Holds Behind Desk Pickup Supported Edit History Holds Block Renewal of Items Needed for Holds 3 To edit an entry click Edit in the line 4 Read the instruction in the pop up window Make the change Click Update Setting to save the change Click Delete Setting if you wish to delete it Edit Setting Hold Shelf Status Delay The purpose is to provide an interval of time aft
454. port if you encounter this scenario and are uncertain how best to proceed When an item is marked Claimed Returned the value in Claims returned Count field in patron record is automatically increased But it will not be adjusted when the item is found and checked in You may manually edit it according to your local policy When an item is marked Claimed Returned the item s status is automatically set to the Sitka wide default status of Claimed Returned From version 2 6 libraries have the option to set up whether where to display ClaimedReturned items on Items Out screen Claimed Never Checked Out 1 To mark an item Claimed Never Checked Out retrieve patron record and go to the tems Out screen 2 Select the item then Actions for Selected Items Mark Claimed Never Checked Out from the dropdown menu Once an item is marked Claimed Never Checked Out it disappears from the patron s account The circulation record is marked checked in as on the checkout date An item marked Claimed Never Checked Out has its status changed to Missing by a Sitka default 7 5 In house Use F6 You can record in house use for both catalogued and non catalogued items Chapter 7 Circulation 70 To record in house use select Circulation Record In House Use or press F6 Check Out Items Check In Items Renew Items Register Patron Pending Patrons Retrieve Last Patron Capture Holds Pull List for Hold Requests Browse Holds Shel
455. ports for details Report running interval should correspond to the date filter For example if the template filters on a date instead of month a recurring report running with a monthly interval may miss a day or capture an extra day s data So it works better if the filter can be transformed to month Schedule your monthly report to run early next month but not at the end of the current month Once you have been on Evergreen for a year you can set up your recurring monthly reports to show comparative data from one year ago To do this select relative dates of 1 month ago and 13 months ago Chapter 30 Running Recurring Reports 300 Chapter 31 Viewing Editing Rescheduling Reports With Evergreen version 2 8 you may view or edit an existing report to change the values for filters run time email reminder recipient recurring interval etc You may generate a new report by editing an existing non recurring report or keep the recurring report but update the values for filters or use a new schedule For example you may reschedule a recurring report to run at 2am instead of 10am or change the email reminder recipient Or you may update the date fields in last month s report to generate new reports for this month To view or edit a report find the report you wish to view edit in the Reports folder Click View or Edit in the Edit Column We choose Edit in the below example Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Templates Tina
456. pter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 223 19 5 Deleting MARC records bibliographic or title records Due to cascading record deletion on sole copies you may find you do not need to delete MARC records very often as Evergreen does this for you Remember that Sitka has Evergreen configured to always delete a MARC record when the only copy attached to it is deleted and you can only delete a MARC record if there are no holdings attached to it in the database This may happen if you have imported a new MARC record in error and have not attached any holdings to it or some other error or conversion circumstance that leaves a MARC record in the database with no holdings attached You can delete a MARC record directly from the catalogue view l Record 2 of 2 Next End Search Results Go Back Reload Go Forward Library Gibsons Public Libr Search Clear Form Retine My Original Search Recent searches Search Results Showing Item 2 of 2 4 Previous Nick Jr Dora the explorer kit phonics reading program Lee Quinlan B Author Nick Jr Firm Added Author Actions for this Record i G gt Book s Place Hd PHONLDS il j i 3 puoi Available copies Current holds acid to 1 copy at Sitka Show 0 current holds with 2 total copies 2 Confirm the deletion by checking box as indicated then click Delete Delete Record o Are you sure you want to delete title
457. quest Date for hold 440720 WARNING This effectively reorders the holds queue Date 287 03 2011 5 h 4 20 45PM Apply 5 March 2011 v SMTWTEFS 12 34 5 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 26 2 29 30 31 b 13 20 2 EIS E For most libraries holds are filled based on request time sequence Changing request time will change the holds fufillment sequence 10 The item s physical condition is recorded in the copy record as Good or Mediocre in the Quality field You may request that your holds be filled with copies of good quality only Click Set Desired Copy Quality on the Actions for Selected Holds list Make your choice in the pop up window Set Desired Copy Quali c I 3 Accept only qood condition copies Good Condition Any Condition Chapter 9 Holds 102 Cancelled holds can be displayed Click Show Cancelled Holds button on the Holds screen Holds Show Cancelled Holds j Actions for Selected Holds Available Cancel Ca Cancel N Cancel TL Capture D Current Last Notify Ti 3 26 11 2 2 3544400036 1 0 BHH 3J ZHLi5 Re amp T 3 14 11 2 2 3398700066 a BW 3 14 11 2 20 In T T You may un cancel it Holds Active Available On Capture Date Current Copy Last Notify Time Notices Pickup Library Request Date Status Show Item Details 35211000188815 BFS 2012 05 16 Cancelled E cr 2012 05 25
458. r 2015 May 20154ul 2015 Aug 2015 Sep 2015 Oct 2015 Nov 12 2015 Dec Chapter 41 Special Issues 12 31 14 4 00 PM 1 31 15 4 00 PM 2 28 15 4 00 PM 3 31 15 5 00 PM 4 30 15 5 00 PM 5 31 15 5 00 PM 6 30 15 5 00 PM 7 31 15 5 00 PM 8 31 15 5 00 PM 9 30 15 5 00 PM 10 31 15 5 00 PM 11 30 15 4 00 PM Click on the New Issuance button 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 1641 basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic basic ra Ie er T 4777 47r rant 47r 4777 rant LA rat 1 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 T S T T 1 0 TS T T 1 8 1 8 637 447 45 467 UA TU 48 9 7 1 2 m m mo m m m m um 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 p TA NE e MIS m X 171 117 3 2015 b Aw a oe 4 13 a 2015 b 2015 b 01 x A 361 6 Enter the Label and Date Published subscription Details Summary Distributions Captions and Patterns Issuances issuances Back Next Filter Subscription 1312 Creator 313165 Editor 313165 Label Spring Date Published 4 1 2015 Caption Pattern 1641 Holding Type basic Wizard Holding Code Chapter 41 Special Issues 362 7 Click on the Wizard button Subscription Details Summary Distributions Captions and Patterns Issuances issuances Back Next Filter subscription Creator Editor Label Spring Date Published 4 1
459. r See the Non Pacific Time Zone section below for details Multi Day Closing l Select Admin Local Administration Closed Dates Editor 2 Select Add Multi Date Closing if your closed dates are entire business days Closed Dates Editor Edit Closed Dates for New Springfield Branch Closed Duration Reason for Closin From 2014 04 18 at 00 00 00 through 2014 04 19 at 02 00 00 Good Friday Note All dates must have the form YYYY MM DD Times must have the form HH MM eS rrr MM Add Single Day Closing amp Add Multiple Date Closing J Add Detailed Closing L LD o Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 423 3 Enter applicable dates and a descriptive reason for the closing and click Save Check the Apply to all of my libraries box if your library is a multi branch system and the closing applies to all of your branches Note All dates must have the form Y Y YY MM DD Times must have the form HH MM All Day From 2015 12 24 Through 2014 12 28 Reason for closing Christmas Apply to all of my libraries C save D You can type dates into fields using Y YY Y MM DD format or use calendar widgets to choose dates Detailed Closing If your closed dates include a portion of a business day select Add Detailed Closing at Step 2 then enter detailed hours and dates and click Save Time format must be HH MM Note All dates must have the form YYYY MM DD Times must have the form HH MM Add
460. r Use specific regularity information Choose the appropriate information for combined omitted or published issues If you selected Use number of issues per year in the previous step you will need to specify when the issues are published using the specific regularity information Choose the appropriate frequency and issue Add additional rows as required Click Finish Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 346 Previous C Use specific regularity information published omitted and or combined issues 7 Captions and Patterns e To complete the wizard click Create Pattern Code Click Create Caption and Pattern Previous Are you ready to create a pattern code from your selections in this wizard Create Pattern Code 37 2 6 Create an Issuance Issuance is a simple uncompressed MFHD field 863 Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 347 1 The Issuances function enables you to manually create an issue Evergreen will use the initial issue that you manually create to predict future issues You need to create a dummy issuance that will be deleted after you have done your predictions This should be created for the issue BEFORE your first issue 2 Click on the Issuances tab 3 Click on New Issuance View Edit Distributions Captions and Patterns issuances Refresh Grid Issuance Delete Selected Back Next Filter subscription Creator 956450 Editor 956450 Label Canadian H
461. r libraries to inform the owning library if an item with special status e g checked out missing lost etc is sent in transit by mis scanning Some transits can not be cancelled aborted such as items with a previous status of Missing Such items have to be checked in at the owning library Chapter 10 Items in Transit 121 Chapter 11 Self Check f These instructions are specific to the native Evergreen Self Check For instructions on using third party self check outs libraries should refer to the instructions provided by the third party vendors For information on how your library can set up and use the native Evergreen Self Check see Chapter 50 Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set Up 11 1 Staff Functions in the Evergreen Self Check Turning on the Self Check 1 Open the Evergreen Self Check interface in an internet browser Maple Library Self Check Please Login Print Password 7 i Workstation Items Checked Out Login MS View Items Out 2 Enter your self check login credentials and click Login Please Login Username mplselfcheck Password Workstation Login Each library is given a self check specific Local System Administrator account during set up Turning off the Self Check 1 Close the browser Chapter 11 Self Check 122 2 Turn off the computer Sitka Support recommends turning off all computers running the Evergreen Self Check at closing every night
462. ransfer multiple copies to a previously marked volume on the tem Status F5 screen by scanning all copies into the screen selecting all to highlight then choosing Actions for Cataloguers Transfer Items to Previously Marked Volume Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 179 Transferring copies to a title without a call number volume yet Sometimes you may need to transfer copies only to a title branch that does not yet have a volume record or you wish to use a different call number label For example you want to transfer one of the two copies from one branch to another that does not have a copy In this scenario you will need to first create a zero copy volume record a volume record without any copy record under it on the destination library branch 1 Find the destination record in the catalogue and go to Holdings Maintenance Highlight the library branch and right click to select Add Volumes or select Actions for Selected Rows Add Volumes 2 Add your call number without a barcode then click either Create with Defaults or Create then Edit to create the volume record 3 Back on Holdings Maintenance screen highlight this volume record and Mark as Item Transfer Destination as described above 4 Find the copy record to be transferred either via Holdings Maintenance or Item Status screen as above described and select Transfer Item to Previously Marked Volume Depending on your workflow you can use the transfer functio
463. ransit list Import items out Previe renew Jer checkout pc c c v ver i ee pen ZiFollowing items have been examined lt hr gt lt ol gt offline chs checkin bill payment bills historical bills current Item bills main view Yokitlet br offline checkin ade Siebarcode s offline renew offline inhouse uze in house use holds er NOSE hr gt SHORTNAME S amp STODAY TRIMS amp lt br gt transit slip gt hold transit slip Chapter 5 Getting Started 26 3 This is what the default checkout template looks like The template preview is on the left hand side You can edit the Header Line Item or Footer on the right hand side Templates Actions Default Be sure to Save Locally before export Preview Welcome to Prince Rupert Library You checked out the following items l Peace comes to Castle Oak Barcode 3655500990265 Due 2006 08 25 2 The robber barons the great American capitalists 1861 1901 Barcode 3320 7002163014 Due 2006 09 06 5 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 4 Eimg s Castle Barcode 31039000791757 Due 2006 09 06 Katy no pocket Barcode 33034001434539 Due 2006 09 06 BPR 2009 12 02 10 54 You were helped by Jeremy Chapter 5 Getting Started Export Save Locally Import Header You checked out the Following items lt hr f lt ol gt Line Item Footer 2 4 In the upper right hand corner you can see the available
464. rary This can be used by other libraries by selecting their own library as the circulating library when they run the report Creating a template is complex It requires some understanding of the Evergreen database and how Evergreen handles various records when performing tasks on the staff client You may refer to the last section of this chapter for some background knowledge Bear in mind that a template includes a list of displayed fields the information you will see in the result and a list of filter fields which enables you to set up the conditions for your target records Generally you do not record your conditions in the template For example in an overdue template you do not record 2012 01 01 as the due date Instead you just make the Due Date field in the circulation record as a filter field When setting up the report with this template you will be given the chance to put in 2012 01 01 as the due date It can be useful to plan out your report on paper before getting started with the reporting tool The first thing to decide is the source table You can choose only one starting source table for each template If you need information from other tables follow the link in the source table to those tables Grouping together related fields and identifying the key fields will help you select the correct source We will take a report on circulation statistics as an example to show you how to create the template In circulation statistic reports
465. rce Specifier Nullable Source Mame E Field Mame Data Type Fi Field Transform Output Type i Circulation See Enable nullability selection Template Configuration Name Monthly Circulation by Shelving Location clone Source Specifier Fa Description Number of circulations including renewal occured at a library Shelving locations not an the list had n a am circulation Circulation gt Item Shelving Location Circulation Circulating Library Displayed Fields Base Filters i Display Marne Data Type Field Transform Circulating Library text Raw Data Check Gut Year and Month timestamp Year Month text Raw Data id Count Distinct Shelving Location Count of Cires Alter Display Header Change Transform Remove Selected Field 7 Click OK in the resulting confirmation window 32 3 Modify a template Once saved it is not possible to edit a template To make changes clone the template and change the clone Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA_templates 308 To modify a template repeat the above steps 1 6 You will see the template open on Template Creating screen Click Displayed Fields you will see all the displayed fields To remove one highlight it and click Remove Selected Field You may move a field up or down the list which will affect the sorting of the result records You may also change the column label or the transform of the field by using respective buttons See Field
466. rce Type and the items associated with the type will appear Go Back Go Forward Laptop 98723000112235 987230001 12234 98723000112233 98723000112244 98723000112236 Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selected Reserve Any Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer This user has no existing reservations at this time need this resource Between and With these attributes Operating System ANY Computing Platform ANY v 387 5 Select the date and time for the reservation in J need this resource area Click the date field A calendar widget will be displayed for you to choose a date Click the time field to choose time from the dropdown list need this resource Between ITI EE 00 15 5 With these attributes 15 30 1545 Operating System ANY 16 00 16 15 16 30 Computing Platform ANY If incorrect date and time 1s selected the date time boxes will appear in red For example if the time for which the reservation is set has already passed the boxes will appear in red There must be at least 15 minutes between the creation of the reservation and the start time of the reservation 6 For non catalogued resources patrons may specify special feature s if any of the resource With these attributes allows you to do so For example if a patron is booking a laptop he she can choose between PC and Mac and even choose a specific operating sy
467. rch or press Enter on your keyboard Search for Patron Include inactive patrons Limit results to patrons in Last Name F xx J First Mame Middle Name Alias Email Phone ID OPAC Login Barcode Address 1 Address 2 City Postal Code Filter by Permission Profile Clear Form 3 Search results will be listed on the right column of the screen You can select a record to view record summary on the left or top of the screen Double click on the selected patron or click the Retrieve Patron button on the right top corner to load the patron record Merge Patrons Search Form Retrieve Patron juvenile Alert Alert Barred Date of Birth Last Name First Name Middle Name Library Card Barcode E 1 f 1993 10 15 12 00 AM sitka circ sitkacirc at sitka circcat R sitkacirccat conf sitka circcopy sitkacirccopy an 4f sitka Isa sitkalsa BKI 5f 1900 1021212 00 AM SITKA test be sitkatest Internet Unfiltered Account created on 2010 05 04 Expires on 2014 11 15 Last Activity lt Unset gt Last updated on lt Unset gt 4 Holds 0 Available 0 Bills 0 00 Check Outs 0 Overdue 0 LongOverdue 0 Claimed Returned 0 0 0 n Lost Non Catalogued You can use only one search field or combine as many as all search fields You can truncate search terms for more results Selecting nclude
468. rd Reset Request email 6 Enter your new password in the password reset form in the browser You must enter the password twice to ensure that you do not make a mistake If the passwords match you will then be able to log in to your library account with the new password Sitka Password Reset Please use this form to reset your password Newpassword Re enter new password fs Submit Please contact your local library if you do not receive the Library Account Password Reset Request email or if you continue to be unable to login to your account 22 3 Account Information Account Summary Account Preferences Items checked out Items on Hold Fines and Payment Account Summary The default view when you login to your account is the Account Summary page This view gives you an overview of items checked out items on hold and any fines you may have You can access any of these screens by clicking on relevant tab Chapter 22 My Account 252 Account Preferences You can change the username and password that you use to log in to your library account as well as the email address the library uses to contact you in the Personal Information tab by clicking the Change link next to the item Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Search and History Preferences My Lists Preferences Account Information and Preferences Personal Information Notification Prefe
469. rd Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Bark i TCN VPL_100623631 Created By beth Author British Columbia Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Database ID 100623631 Last Edited By admin Bib Call 4 179 3 Record Owner Last Edited On 2012 06 10 9 18 AM Record 1 of 4 Start Previous Next End Search Results Actions for this Record Go Bac Reload Go Forward Debug primt Page Si Unfederated Springfield Public Library New Springfield Branch ISSUE LABEL CALL NUMBER COPY NOTES BARCODE SHELVING LOCATION CREATE DATE HOLDABLE STATUS V 16 No 1 2013 Jan January 2013 Text V 16 No 2 2013 Feb February 2013 Text V 16 No 3 2013 Mar V 16 N0 4 2013 Apr V 16 No 5 2013 May V 16 No 6 2013 Jun V 16 No 7 2013 Jul V 16 No 8 2013 Aug V 16 No 9 2013 Sep V 16 No 10 2013 Oct March 2013 Text 998866107 April 2013 Text 998866108 May 2013 Text 998866111 June 2013 Text 998866115 July 2013 Text 98866113 August 2013 Text 998866116 September 2013 Text 998866114 October 2013 Text 98866112 ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks ZSP Stacks 10 02 2013 10 02 2013 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Place on copy volume Place on copy volume Available Available Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volume Available 10 02 2013 Place on copy volum
470. rd in default MARC Edit view and at top of record in Flat Text Editor view Information about the leader and the 008 can be found on the Library of Congress s MARC Standards page at http www loc gov marc To edit the fixed fields it is easiest to use default MARC Editor view and click on the name of the field In Flat Text Editor view you must place the cursor at the correct position in the number to edit When you click on the field name e g Datel what you type will appear in the box When you click on the field box itself you have to backspace your cursor to the very beginning of the box in order to type because there are space takers in these positionally defined fields Right clicking in certain fields such as Type BLvl Form Audn and Lang will show a drop down menu of possible choices Co op support advises that Evergreen s fixed field editor requires 4 spaces be input into i s box that corresponds to position 18 21 in the 008 Use your space bar to enter spaces required to meet this convention or your edit to the illustrated box will not be saved in the 008 Once the four spaces are filled the value will automatically show up in the 008 and will be saved Contact Sitka support if you have any questions The format filter eg Books E Books Audiobooks Videos etc and format icons in the OPAC rely on accurate coding in the Leader 008 and 007 Please see the format filter and icon specifications in Section 19 3 Format Filte
471. rd or several records It is Non Aggregate if the result is strictly from a single record while it is Aggregate if it is from several records For example the value of Count transform of circulation id will increase by 1 whenever a record is found So the output is Aggregate The output of Max transform of checkout date is technically not aggregated but there may be several records invovled before the highest value is deterrmined When used as filters non aggregate and aggregate types correspond to Base and Aggregate filters respectively To see the difference between a base filter and an aggregate filter imagine that you are creating a report to find out the popular items that were circulated more than 3 times last month This would require a base filter to specify the month of interest and an aggregate filter on the count of circulation record on each item Operators Operators describe how two pieces of data can be compared to each other They are used when creating filters in a template to determine which records should be included in the result The record is included when the comparation returns TRUE The possible ways of comparing data are related to data type and data transforms Below are some commonly used operators Chapter 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators 322 Equals Compares two operands and returns TRUE if they are exactly the same In List Itis similar to Equals except it allows you specify mu
472. rda sitka serial sitka serial rda Sitka video sitka video rda 3 Select appropriate template and click Load 1 MARC Template sitka book Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 211 4 A blank MARC record will load In this example we have chosen a book template so MARC leader coding is for textual materials MARC Record Fixed Fields Record type BKS rwe fe ew se e aut en tana es Cee a ae URL 3NN CR NN sm me ur me Sl bie es SESE eS 3 m 7 1 ozo ta oso aSITKA tbeng c SITKA TI 124 p ppm mm T ng T ri in Oh ha hye oo oo a Om tin mB Oo Wo oo e OO Oo in Oo mr Ps H I HY Pe e TM Er Te e p M eun eG HiH pm 5 Complete the MARC record as per Sitka policy You can add and delete tags and subfields as required See Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 6 Click Create Record 7 The record is created and will open up in your tab in the current default view If you did not utilize Fast Item Add you may now attach holdings as described in Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 18 5 Cataloguing non physical resources Ordinary bibliographic records are only visible in the OPAC when holdings records are attached but it is also possible to catalogue non physical resources such as
473. rdings for the 24 hearing impaired Phys Desc Vi 185 p ETHER SELLE TELLE ERES EECEEEITEIEELEEEETILOD Shelving an UCN Norway House 823 914 3 eii EID MEER i LM ailable Information about the title such as author edition publication date call number shelving location status etc is displayed under each title The icons below the title link indicate formats such as books audio books video recordings and other formats Hover your mouse over the icon and a text explanation will show up in a small pop up box Clicking a title goes to the title details Clicking an author searches all works by the author If you want to place a hold on the title click Place Hold to the right of the title information Above the results list there is a Limit to Available checkbox Checking this box will filter out those titles with no available copies in the library or libraries at the moment Usually you will see your search results are re displayed with fewer titles Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 241 The Sort by dropdown list is beside the Limit to Available button Clicking an entry on the list will re sort your search results accordingly Formats and Editions If you have selected Group Formats and Editions with your search your search results are grouped by various formats and editions of the same title Multiple format icons may be lit up Basic Search Advanced Search Browse Search Resu
474. receipt or copying the reservation information It is not possible to re print the slip on the current Evergreen design Always use the dedicated Booking Module interfaces for tasks related to reservations Items that have been captured for a reservation cannot be checked out using the Check Out interface even if the patron is the reservation recipient Ready for pickup reservations can be listed from Other Booking Pick Up Reservations within a patron record or Booking Pick Up Reservations Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 395 Check Out Specific Due Date 17 06 Title Create or Cancel Reservations Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations Display Alert and Messages Notes Triggered Events Statistical Categories Booking Surveys Group Member Details Test Password User Permission Editor Toggle Summary Delete Patron Account Exit Create Reservations Pull List Capture Resources Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations 2 Scan the patron barcode if using Booking Pick Up Reservations 3 The reservation s available for pickup will display Select those you want to pick up and click Pick Up 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservation Pickup Go Back Go Forward Reservations Pickup Pringle Jennifer Patron has these reservations ready for pickup Title Patron currently has these reservations out Patron has no more reservations out at this time
475. record 82268 from the cataloque Check here to confirm this action Find the record in the catalogue and go to Record Details and click on Actions for this Record Delete Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit Holdings Maintenan Manage Conjoined It Manage Parts View Holds Views Place Orders Add to Bucket Mark for Overlay Delete Recd d Undelete Record 3 Click OK when prompted Record is now deleted and inactive and only retrievable by a TCN title control number search or bibliographic record id presented at deletion confirmation prompt Record Summary Deleted Inactive Title EATING THE BIG FISH HOW CHALLEMGER BRANDS CAN COM Author TCN System 30160940 Created By SITKA 101010101010101 Record 1 of 216 Start Previous Go Forward Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 224 You may also delete MARC records from a Record Bucket If you delete a MARC record in error you may immediately undelete it on screen by selecting Actions for this Record Undelete Record Actions for this Record OPAC View MARC View MARC Edit Holdings Maintenance Manage Conjoined Items Manage Parts View Holds View Place Orders Add to Bucket Mark for Overlay Delete Record Undelete Record 19 6 Exporting MARC Records There are times when you may want to export MARC records from Evergreen Evergreen allows you to do so via the Record Bucket and the Batch
476. records If you have the item in hand the quickest way to delete an item is to scan the item into Item Status screen accessible a couple of ways Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 180 l Select Search Search for copies by Barcode or select Cataloguing Display Item B as shown here Alternatively press F5 on your keyboard Search the Catalogue F3 Retrieve record by TCM Shift F3 Retrieve record by Record ID Manage Record Buckets Create New MARC Record Import Record from 739 50 MARC Batch Import Export Replace Barcode Retrieve Last Record Shift F8 Manage Authorities 2 Select the item s and choose Actions for Cataloguers Delete Items 3 Click OK The page at httpz flinflon sitka bclibraries ca says emm o Are you sure sure you want to delete these items 33294001289958 4 In this example the alert for last copy is configured Make appropriate choice based on workflow Exceptions TITLE LAST COPY The last copy attached to a title is being removed or deleted Force this action 5 Click OK Item volume and MARC record are all deleted in this example because there was only one copy and volume record attached to this MARC record The page at http flinflon sitka bclibraries ca says IS Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 181 You may also delete copy records from the Holdings Maintenance view 1 Find t
477. reen Selecting Set bottom interface as Default as in this example sets the current OPAC View as the default Next time when you click a title on the resut list the record will be displayed in this default view Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Crucible of gold Author Novik Naomi Bib Call Record 1 of 49 Start Previous Search Results Search the Catalogue Advanced Search SEARCH All Formats FoR Keyword IN Sitka OR SEARCH ISBN x FOR Identifier IN Sitka Recent searches 4 Search Results Showing Item 1 of 49 Preferred library Kamloops Library Crucible of gold Naomi Novik Novik Naomi Author O Preven Preview Available copies Current holds e 1copy at Sitka 0 current holds with 1 total copy Record details ISBN 9780345522863 Physical Description 323 p map 25 cm Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes Edition 1st ed Pub Date 2012 EI Search Created By admin Last Edited By admin Last Edited On 08 25 2012 8 39 PM Actions for this Record Holdings Maintenance Manage Conjoined Items Manage Parts View Holds View Place Orders Add to Bucket Mark for Overlay Delete Record Undelete Record Add Volumes Mark as Title Hold Transfer Destination Transfer All Title Holds Mark as Target for Conjoined Items Duplicate in New Tab Remove this Frame MFHD Holdings Serial Control View Alternate Serial Control Serial
478. reen Staff Client To use Evergreen you must first download and install the Evergreen 2 8 staff client The customized Sitka staff client is available for download from the BC Libraries Cooperative website here http bc libraries coop support staff client executables Due to Sitka specific customizations on our servers the Evergreen Community 2 8 staff client will not work with the Sitka servers For a video tutorial on downloading installing and registering the staff client see Installing the Staff Client 4 28 5 2 Registering a Workstation Each Evergreen staff client must have a workstation registered with every server it is used with The workstation identifies your physical computer location and may help Co op Support when troubleshooting Registration takes place when a staff client is installed for the very first time when it connects to a new server or if the hostname is changed 1 Open the Evergreen staff client 2 From the Locale drop down menu select en CA English Canada or fr CA French Canada This sets the language preferences for the staff client 3 Click Apply Locale 4 Inthe Server section enter the hostname in the Hostname field 5 Click Re Test Server Status and Version should both display as 200 OK 6 Inthe Authentication section enter a Local System Administrator Username and Password into the appropriate fields Only a Local System Administrator account has the required permission to re
479. rences Depending on your library s policy you may request a change to your address by submitting a new address in your account Your library staff will verify it and update your account If you need to make a change to other information such as your phone number please see the library staff The Notification Preferences tab is where you set your preferences for holds notification You can choose to be contacted by email phone or text message This is also where you can opt out of receiving courtesy and overdue email notices using the Receive Overdue and Courtesy Emails setting Un checking this box means your library will not send you any emails for items coming due or overdue You are still responsible for returning items on time and paying any applicable fines Chapter 22 My Account 253 Account Summary Messages Items Checked Out Holds Account Preferences My Lists Personal Information Notification Preferences Search and History Preferences My Lists Preferences Account Information and Preferences Notify by Email by default when a hold is ready for pickup Notify by Phone by default when a hold is ready for pickup Default Phone Number Notify by Text by default when a hold is ready for pickup Default Mobile Carrier Telus Mobility Canada amp USA Note carrier charges may apply Default Mobile Number Hint use the full 10 digits of your phone no spaces no dashes Notification Type Enabled Receive Overdue
480. result you need to run reports on survey questions For example you could find out how many people say they would use the library if it were open on a Sunday or you could get a list of patrons who say they would like to receive marketing material from the library There is a shared template for reporting on patron surveys under SITKA_templates Patrons Patron Surveys See Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates for more about shared templates and contact Sitka support if you need help tweaking this template l From the Admin menu select Local Administration Surveys 2 The Survey List will open In this example the table is empty because no surveys have been created Click Add New Survey survey List Add Mew Survey Delete Selected End Selected Surveys Display in survey ID Name Description pg Suneeta End Date Sale Poll Style ols Required User Library Date Surrey q 5 ummary 3 Fill out the New Survey form then click Save Changes New Survey Name Newsletter Description Opt in for receiving newsletter fror Owning Library E X start Date 2010 01 01 End Date 2010 12 31 0000 OPAC Survey Fall Style ls Required Li Display in User Summary s Save m A few tips when creating a new survey e Start Date must always be in the future It is not possible to add questions to a survey after the start date e Dates should be in Y Y Y Y MM DD format e OPAC Survey and Poll Style are not yet implemented lea
481. reverse chronological order Minor changes including spelling corrections formatting changes and cosmetic screenshot updates are excluded BC Libraries Cooperative acknowledges the Documentation Interest Group DIG Copyright 2008 2015 GPLS and others for their contribution to this manual Revion date Pato Chapter 2 Revisions to Version 2 8 and Attributions to Contributors 4 Chapter 3 Sitka and Evergreen Resources Sitka policy e The Sitka Evergreen Policy Manual contains policy and best practice documents supporting Sitka s consortial installation of the Evergreen ILS See http docs sitka bclibraries ca Policy current html for html and pdf versions Websites e The BC Libraries Cooperative website http bc libraries coop provides information about the implementation of Evergreen in BC and MB including Evergreen staff client downloads Sitka documentation and Sitka policy and governance documents e See the Evergreen site http evergreen ils org for information about Evergreen for all audiences not specific to Sitka Includes links to the Evergreen blog the software development roadmap and general documentation Listservs Join the Sitka Group on the BC Libraries Cooperative website where current member libraries discuss Sitka s implementation of Evergreen Any library specific questions including patron information should be directed to Co op Support http evergreen ils org communicate mail
482. rial Designations GMD 245 subfields a and b are title and sub title respectively 245c contains the statement of responsibility and 245h is for approved GMDs Note for RDA records the GMD 1s no longer used instead the tags of 336 337 and 338 are used see below Edition Statement 25X tags contain important descriptive information about the item being described This information includes edition statement imprint and other publication source information Publication Information 260 tag and subfields a place of publication b name of publisher and c year of publication contain critical publication information and should be as complete as possible When assessing record matching the 260 tag should always be considered Note for RDA records the 264 tag with a second indicator of 1 most often is used instead of the 260 Physical Description of Item 300 tag is used to physically describe an item as completely as possible Content Media and Carrier type RDA only 336 337 338 tags are used for RDA records only The fields of content media and carrier collectively replace the GMD 245 h For 336 subfield a is content term and 2 rdacontent For subfield 337 a is media term and 2 is rdamedia For 338 a is carrier term and 2 is rdacarrier See here for appropriate RDA terms Series Information 440 and 490 are used to describe relevant series 440 was officially made obsolete in 2008 but you will still find it used in rec
483. ries For libraries sharing resources with other libraries in the federation Sitka support strongly recommends you not edit pickup location instead cancel and replace the hold with the new pickup location This is due to the fact that the eligible copies that may be used to fill the hold may be different with different pickup location Editing the pickup location in the existing hold will not force Evergreen to re target the eligible copies The hold may be filled by a wrong copy Chapter 9 Holds 101 8 You may move a hold to the top of the queue by using the Set Top of Queue option in Actions for Selected Holds Click Top of Queue to move the selected hold to the top of the hold queue Click No Top of Queue to remove it from the top of the queue You will be prompted to confirm your action QU Set Top of Queue Force to Front for Holds a mx Move to the front of the holds queue above other holds that are not likewise flagged Top of Queue Mo Top of Queue Cancel If an item has been assigned to the hold on top of the queue before you move another one to the top you need to suspend the old top hold Find Another Target for the new top hold then activate the old top hold 9 Youcan also manipulate hold position by adjusting Hold Request Time Use Edit Request Time on Actions for Selected Holds Use the calendar widget to select a date Select Date or Timestamp a Request Date Please enter a new Re
484. rmats in which to save screenshots are png and jpg These files are easily accessed by Sitka Support and are unlikely to contain viruses Do not submit doc or docx unless absolutely necessary Files saved as doc or docx require additional software to open them and have a higher potential for carrying viruses 4 3 RT Self Service Each library has a single account with which to access RT Under this account staff are able to see all the tickets associated with their library Not sure what the username and password are for your library s account Contact Co op Support to find out Access RT Self Service Create New Tickets View and Add to Existing Tickets Review Closed Tickets Ticket Status Co op Support uses RT software to receive discuss and respond to questions from libraries in the BC Libraries Cooperative Requests are numbered and referred to as tickets and assigned to team members according to availability and expertise Accessing RT Self Service Through the RT website https support libraries coop rt The Self Service home page displays current tickets submitted by email or in RT Chapter 4 Sitka Evergreen Support 7 RT for Coop Logged in as FictionalLibrary Logout EE RT Self Service Open tickets Gototicke 35 Closed tickets New ticket My open tickets 13138 Need to reset RT password 12138 Cannot edit patron record Click the number or subject o
485. rofile choose one of the following based on which record should be the lead Mew Record Quality Quality of Best Match Import 206 Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database Merge Using INCOMING Record uses the incoming record as the lead Information in existing record in tags 092 590 690 852 holdings and 856 will be kept Merge Using EXISTING Record uses the existing record in the catalogue as the lead Information in the incoming record in tags 092 590 690 852 holdings and 856 will be kept Use this profile when you attach holdings in your MARC file to existing Evergreen MARC records If you have marked a merge target you do not need to select any further import options The marked target will be merged If you have not already imported non matching records you can now select Import Non Matching Records Merge On Exact Match 901c Merge On Single Match and Merge On Best Match are designed to allow Evergreen to programmatically select the best match Due to the nature of Sitka s shared database Sitka support strongly advises against allowing Evergreen to select a merge target and cautions you to adhere to instructions for selecting a match as outlined above Do not use Best Single Match Minimum Quality Ratio or Insufficient Quality Fall Through Profile at this time If you have On Order brief item records and wish to overlay them with full item records loaded via the MARC records you need
486. rs and Format Icons 1 Retrieve and display record in MARC Edit view as described in Section 19 1 Editing MARC Records Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 217 2 Click into any box displayed in the fixed field editor In this example we are editing the first position the Type or Format box to describe the format of the resource textual material by use of an a Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Horse Edition Author Clutton Brock Juliet Pub Date 2008 Bib Call 636 1 Options F Stack subfields F Flat Text Editor F Fast Item Add Call Mumber ltem Barcode MARC Record Fie ipea sre s me od ims es e et ca s e HR ENS mx ja j ONAM LDR o13 enam a2200362 a 45000 oot 9780756637750 S joos 2012062918064320 ooo joos 04080952008 nyua j 0010engd Mf rrr eee oso 4 ta SFS02 ooo oe2 oj ofta 636 3 0000 joez o 4 sa 3 636 1 C0 jo92 0 1 sa 3 636 1 C0 100 1 aClutton Brock Juliet S 245 1 0 ta Horse tc written by Juliet Clutton Brock special photography Jerry Young Karl Shone 3 Right clicking in the box will show a list of possible values eg BLvl Type Form Audn and Lang Choose from this list to populate the box MARC Record Fixed Fields Record type BES Type a FI wl T Gere id Didra Crel a Language materia
487. rsion matches the version on server you are attempting to connect to You can check the staff client version by clicking on Help and selecting About this client The version appears as Target Server ID 3 In the Authentication section enter a library staff account Username and Password into the appropriate fields 4 Click Login Offline Login During a network outage staff can login to the Offline Module also known as the Standalone Interface See Offline Transactions for instructions on using the Offline Module 1 Open the Evergreen staff client 2 Click Standalone Interface 3 The Evergreen Standalone Interface also referred to as the Offline Module will open If your connection to Evergreen is lost during open hours click Standalone Interface to continue with check out and patron registration functions until the connection is restored When there are offline transactions to be uploaded in a workstation Offline Transactions Pending will show up on top of Standalone Interface in red For regular uploading and processing offline transactions use Offline Transaction Management on the Admin menu Export Transactions and Import Transactions on the login screen are used to copy offline transaction files out of or into a workstation They are designed for extreme cases when a workstation will not be able to connect to the network anymore 5 5 Change Operator The login account of a workstation can be changed to another one without logg
488. rthday 300 2 22 11 3 4 00 1 00 grocery 6 66 2 17 11 1 circulation ASe eet ES Actions for Selected Transaction List Actions heck All Uncheck A rint Bil Receipt Options Items marked with red are still checked out It is possible for a patron to pay a bill while the item is still out and accruing fines You may choose to annotate the payment and fill in the resulting text box as required Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 82 P Please annotate this payment Partial payment received October 15 Using the Receipt Options button at the right bottom corner you may request Evergreen to print or not print receipts You can also specify the number of copies of receipts Void vs Forgive Void clears all history of the bill while forgive retains the history Use void when the bill should not be generated e g a bill for a lost book that has been found Forgive payments are displayed in the Cash Report 8 3 Patron Credit A credit can be kept in a patron account and later used to pay bills Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 83 To create or add a credit on the Bills screen select the payment method type in the amount select Convert Change to Patron Credit box at the bottom then click Apply Payment Bill History Total Owed 0 00 Refunds Available 0 00 Total Checked 0 00 Credit Available 0 00 Annotate Payment See Distribution Actions for Selected Transactions Bal
489. rtial amount only To void the whole amount select the bill line and click Actions for Selected Transactions Void All Billings and click Yes when asked to confirm Actions for Selected Transact Balance Owed Bill Finish Total Billed Total Paid Type itle Show in Catalog 10 00 12060567 2 22 11 4 10 00 0 00 grocery Show Item Details Void All Billings s Refund Add Billing Full Details To void a partial amount select the bill click Actions for Selected Transactions Full Details On bill details screen select the bill you want to void and click Void Selected Billings Confirm your action Billing Type Note When Overdue materials System Generated Overdue Fine No 3 10 11 5 01 PM Overdue materials System Generated Overdue Fine l 3 10 11 6 01 PM Overdue materials System Generated Overdue Fine 3 10 11 7 01 PM Overdue materials System Generated Overdue Fine 3 10 11 8 01 PM Overdue materials System Generated Overdue Fine 3 10 11 9 01 PM You cannot partially void one billing line on the bill details screen A billing line is the minimum bill unit Edit Note allows you to edit create a note For system generated bills we recommend you append your message 8 5 Adding New Grocery Bills A grocery bill can be added as a new bill or to an existing bill To add a grocery bill as a new bill 1 Retrieve the patron record and select Bills Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 85 2 Select Bill Patro
490. s l To view past circulations retrieve the item on the tem Status screen as described above Select Actions for Selected Items Show Last Few Circulations aloguers Actions for Selected Items Copy to Clipboard Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Cataloque Show Holds on Bib Shox T Chapter 7 Circulation 73 2 The item s recent circulation history is displayed Record Summary View MARC al Title Black B Edition TCN tlc00003729 Created By admin E Author Sewell Pub Date 1998 Database ID 31355987 Last Edited By admin ES Bib Call amp Fic Record Owner Last Edited On 06 10 2012 9 2209PM 7 Item Summary E Alert Message Barcode Call Number Circulation Library Location Owning Library Total Circs I 101445471 AB SEW BKCT OUT General Coll BKCT OUT 3 Last Few Circulations r3 sitka ba sitkalsa B Check Out Time 06 13 2013 9 08 AM Due Date 09 11 2013 11 59 PM Stop Fines Time 06 13 2013 11 59 PM 4 TT 4 Toretrieve the patron s of the last circulations click the Retrieve Last Patron or the Retrieve All These Patrons button at the bottom of the above screen Patron record s will be displayed in new tab s Administration Menu for more information Each libary can determine its own number of past circulations to be displayed See Chapter 48 Local You can retrieve the past circulations on the patron s Items Out screen too Marking items dam
491. s Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Make Item Bookable Book Itern Now Find Originating Acquisition f Edit Item Attributes Location Status Title R 184 4 The item will be loaded into Copy Editor Add an Alert Message click Apply and Modify Copies Status Circulate Alert Dan m Filter j Available 1 copy Children s Videos 1 copy Yes 1 copy Spine label needs replacing BPR Supplier Barcode Circulation Library Holdable o 33294001370618 lcopy BPR lcopy Yes 1 copy m BPR Testing ams Dice OT Creation Date Owning Lib Call Number Age based Hold Protection 2007 11 03 lcopy BPR BLAC lcopy lt Unset gt lcopy Deposit BPR test No 1 copy Ana Active Date Copy Number Floating 1 copy Unset gt 1 copy No 1 copy 1 copy Loan Duration 1 copy Normal 1 copy 20 00 1 copy Last Edit Date Fine Level 2012 06 07 1 copy Normal 1copy OPAC Visible Yes 1 copy Last Editor Circulate as Type 1 copy lt Unset gt 1 copy 1 copy Circulation Modifier videos features 1 copy 1 copy mi Copy alerts must be manually removed Follow the same process to remove a copy alert It is possible to add or remove copy alerts to multiple items by scanning them into the Item Status screen At Step 3 instead of selecting one item you can select all of the items you wish to change by highlighting the first item in the list holding down the Shift key and clicking on t
492. s aka shelving location or edit existing copy locations To create a new shelving location type in the name and select Yes or No for the various attributes OPAC Visible Holdable Circulate Hold Verify and Checkin Alert Click Create a new copy location Holdable means a patron is able to place a hold on an item in this location Hold Verify if set up will generate a prompt when an item is captured for a hold Checkin Alert will prompt staff to route the item to the location when checking in items with this location Label Prefix and Label Suffix if set up will be automatically included when printing spine labels Copy Locations Editor Create a new copy location Name Holdable Yes No OPAC Visible Yes No amp Circulate Yes No Hold Verify Yes No amp Owning Library BW Checkin Alert Yes No Label prefix Label suffix Create a new copy location In the bottom part of the Copy Locations Editor you can edit or delete existing copy locations You cannot delete a location that contains items In this example the copy location Adult Videos is being edited Hald OPAC Label Holdable Circulate SWIFT Adult Fiction Second Floor Translate ili pae Adult Non Fiction Translate BPR x Edit Adult videos BPR X T Yes 9 No Yes Yes Yes 9 NW O6 D No G oO 6 Lr e Submit Adult videos BPR Click Translate to enter optional translations of copy location titles for
493. s allow True False usernames allowed patrons to identify themselves with usernames in addition to barcode For this setting to work a barcode format must also be defined Patron password from If true the last 4 digits of the patron s True false LSA phone number is the password for new accounts password must still be changed at first OPAC login Persistent login How long a persistent login lasts e m duration e g 2 weeks Self serve password Length of time in seconds a self L IM reset request time to serve password reset request should live remain active Staff login inactivity Number of seconds of inactivity Number timeout in seconds before staff client prompts for login and password Sitka default is 6000 seconds 2 hours Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 460 Table 48 13 Self Check Allow Fine printing If true there will be a print option on True false LSA the fine list screen Allow Hold printing If true there will be a print option on True false LSA the hold list screen Allow Items out If true there will be a print option on True false LSA printing the items out list screen Audio Alerts Use audio alerts for selfcheck True false BA events Block copy checkout List of copy status IDs that will Number LSA Look up copy status ID status block checkout even if the generic from Server Admin COPY NOT AVAILABLE event is overridden Patron login timeout in
494. s Batch Receive es Set bottom EE as Default 153 Chapter 14 Adding Holdings to Existing Records in the Sitka Database 14 1 Adding holdings to title records Evergreen has a unified volume copy creator that allows you to create volumes and copies in a unified screen This function consolidates the process of creating volume and copy records You must configure this and whether you want a horizontal or vertical layout in Library Settings See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu The examples here demonstrate use of the unified volume copy creator with a vertical layout There is also the ability to pre configure call number prefixes and suffixes via the Admin menu 1 Search the catalogue for a record that matches the item in hand as described in Chapter 13 Searching the Database for Cataloguing Purposes If you do not find a match refer to the Sitka Cataloguing Policy at http sitka bclibraries ca governance sitka policy for recommendations on required procedures If you do find a match proceed to next step 2 When the record details are loaded select Actions for this Record Holdings Maintenance Record 5 of 207 End Actions for this Record OPAC View ch ISBN Identifier MARC View E EL Hal Kngs Maintenanc Search Type Keyword Format All Formats Menage Conjoined t Manage Parts View Place Orders Refine My Original Search Recent searches 4 S
495. s first available copy of multiple titles of the same different format Title T Patron wants first available copy of a title Volume V Patrons want the first available copy of a specific volume call number of a title Copy C Patron or staff want a specific copy of a title Chapter 9 Holds Click on place Patron or staff hold to the right of the record From holds confirmation screen click Advanced hold options and select other applicable formats Staff or patron Patron or staff click on place hold to the right of a record on search result list or record summary screen Staff or patron Patron or staff click Volume in HOLDABLE column on the holdings grid on record summary screen Staff click details to view barcode then place hold next to that barcode Holdings attached to multiple MARC title records sharing the same title and author of selected format s book video audiobook etc Holdings attached to a single MARC title record Call number specific volume record local call number resides in volume record Item barcode 91 Title Level Hold 1 To place a title level hold retrieve the title record on the catalogue and click the Place Hold button to the right of the record on the search result list or record summary screen Back ia Black Beaut 3 i McKinley Robin c1886 Call number JF Sew Publisher New York Random House c1986 ISBN 97803
496. s meeting various criteria having selected shelving location s and or circulation modifier s copy stat cat barcode prefix call number prefix or within a call number range or being catalogued new title item list marked missing lost or deleted within selected time period In this folder you will also find templates listing pre catalogued items and items with certain circulation history items with fewer circulation count for weeding report or more circulation count for popular title item report Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 303 Patron reports All patron reports are in Patrons folder You may find templates counting patrons by profile group and or patron stat cat registered or expired expring within a selected time period or with circulation history within a selected time period Another group of templates list selected information for patrons meeting some conditions such as email list for all or those patrons having certain stat cat names and barcode for patrons without circulation history within selected time frame patrons born before a selected date seniors list patrons exceeding maximum fine limit Besides there is a template that counts patron s OPAC logins and another that summarizes the answers to patron survey question s Reports on bibliographic information Itis not easy to generate reports based on bibliographic information due to the bibliographic record structure But a simple report that lists
497. sactions 137 2 Check In screen will open Ir au Standalone Check In Step 1 Check today s date above Step 2 Enter the item barcode Check barcode Step 3 Repeat Steps 2 until done Step 4 Finish Item Barcode Print receipt M 3 Make sure the date 1s correct Evergreen Offline 4 Scan the items barcode in Enter item barcode box The number will be displayed on the right side fo the screen Step 2 Enter the item barcode 79090000123456 5 Scan all items you want to check in Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 138 6 Click Save these transactions If you need to print a receipt make sure Print receipt checkbox is selected before you save the transactions Evergreen Offline 2009 12 27 19 29 30 Check Out Renew CheckIn Register Patron Last Receipt Exit Standalone Check In Step 1 Check today s date above Step 7 Enter the item barcode 39090000234567 1 j Enter 29090000123456 Check barcode E Step 3 Repeat Steps 2 until done Step 4 Finish Print receipt F Cancel Without access to Evergreen database items on holds or with special status will not be captured in offline mode Sitka Support Team recommends libraries not use check in function on Standalone Interface if possible 12 7 Uploading offline transactions Once you are able to connect to the server you need to upload the offline transactions It
498. search results and record views within the org unit To sort from newest to oldest by active date use desc To sort from oldest to newest by active date use asc To sort by call number use call Context ESP B EJ Value desc Delete Setting Update Setting 13 Click Update Setting Chapter 35 Serials 329 Chapter 36 Copy Template 36 1 Create a Copy Template You must create at least one template in order to receive serials A copy template enables you to specify item attributes that should be applied by default to all copies of serials You can create one copy template and apply it to multiple serials or you can create multiple templates For example you may want to create one copy template for Popular Magazines and one template for Juvenile Magazines Select Admin Local Administration Copy Template Editor Operator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Address Alerts Local Administration Age verdue Circs to Lost Server Administration Barcode Completion Workstation Administration Cash Reports Toggle Activity Meters Circulation Limit Sets User Permission Editor Circulation Policies Enedeveleue Cle Closed Dates Editor Copy Location Groups Copy Location Order Copy Locations Editor TemyPemphaskdn Do Not Attempt Auto Print Setting Field Documentation Group Penalty Thresholds
499. ser Permission Editor Toggle Summary Delete Patron Account Exit 3 The existing reservations will appear at the bottom of the screen 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer Go Back Go Forward Choose a Bookable Resource Type Ereader Laptop Projector Room Video Connector Or Enter the barcode of a cataloged bookable resource To reserve an item that is not yet registered as a bookable resource find it in the catalog or under Display Item and select Make Item Bookable or Book Item Now there Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer Type 98723000112233 2011 06 16 17 30 2011 06 16 18 45 98723000223356 2011 06 17 10 30 2011 06 17 12 00 4 Highlight the reservation that you want to cancel Click Cancel Selected Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer Type Resource Start time End time Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 16 17 30 2011 06 16 18 45 98723000223356 0 2011 06 17 12 00 Cancel selected Use Shift or Ctrl on keyboard and mouse click to select multiple reservations if needed 5 A pop up window will confirm the cancellation Click OK on the prompt Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 399 6 The screen will refresh and the cancelled reservation s will disappear 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservations Go Back l Reload Go Forward Debug Print Page Choose a Bookable Resource Type Ereader Laptop Projector Room Video Connector Enter the barcode of
500. sgiving Willson Sarah E WIL Maple Library Saved Lists Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List DVDs Share Delete List Download CSV Make Default List Dora books What does Share this list mean Lists can either be private and only viewable by you or public and viewable by anyone who knows where the list resides By default all lists are private and you must explicitly instruct the system to allow others to view the contents of a list You can choose to share a list by clicking Share beside the list name You can un share a list by clicking Hide You can give the address URL of your list to anyone you want to share it with In the My Lists section there is a HTML View link for every shared list Click on that button and bookmark the resulting web page page in your browser or copy and paste the address URL to share your list as required saved Lists Dora book Frog book 2 XM Frog books Delete List Download CS HTML View Chapter 22 My Account 258 How do add items to a list First you need to be logged in to the online catalogue by clicking the My Account button Search the catalogue normally for the item you would like to add to your list Click Add to My List and follow the steps as described above in How do I create a list How do l remove items from a list In your account select the My Lists tab Click on the name of the list you would like to remove the
501. sion levels To view a detailed list of permissions for a particular Evergreen account go to Admin User permission editor in the staff client Action General Staff Circulators Circ Local System Copy Edit Administrator Basic circulation functions CheckIn bad status overrides CheckIn Missing Lost ClaimedReturned overrides CheckOut overrides axRenewalReache override Basic patron record Unbar patrons Merge delete patrons Patron restriction overrides Bills and payments Copy volume records DWbews View report output Create upload offline transactions Process offline transactions Transit Abort remote transit Chapter 55 Staff Accounts 495 Permissions of creating running reports are granted to individual staff members on library s request Please contact Sitka Support 55 6 Granting Additional Permissions A Local System Administrator LSA may selectively grant LSA permissions to other staff accounts In the example below a Circ Full Cat account is granted permission to process offline transactions a function which otherwise requires an LSA login 1 Log in as a Local System Administrator Select Admin User Permission Editor and enter the staff account barcode when prompted Admin Operator Change New Offline Transaction Management Download Offline Patron List Local Administration b Server Administration For developers
502. site storage c Unavailable Not available for patrons to borrow but will Z become available at a later date Chapter 49 Server Administration 478 49 4 Hard Due Date One or more hard due date s can be set up for a library to force the circulation due on selected date s The hard due date is used in the circulation policy based on patron profile and or item circulation modifier It may be used to extend or shortern the regular loan duration For example it may be used to grant faculty members term loan by an Always Use TRUE hard due date or to force all students to return their items by the end of the term by an Always Use FALSE hard due date which takes effect when the regular due date falls after the hard due date Please contact Sitka Support if you wish to use hard due date 49 5 Floating Group Evergreen 2 6 supports floating collections Floating items stay at the checkin library instead of being sent back to the item s original circulating library Floating Groups are used to limit the range of libraries that an item can float within Please contact Sitka Support if you wish make all or partial of your items float within selected libraries branches Chapter 49 Server Administration 479 Chapter 50 Evegreen Self Check Administrative Set Up The information in this section is specific to the native Evergreen Self Check which is available to all libraries For information regardin
503. ssible to have stat cats for copies or patrons l Select Admin Local Administration Statistical Categories Editor Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 2 Tocreate a new stat cat enter the name of the stat cat and select Copy or Patron in the dropdown menu Check the respective On or Off radio buttons beside each option And then click Create new statistical category e OPAC Visiblity If On the stat cat and its value are displayed in Copy Details on OPAC Required If On the stat cat becomes mandatory Archive with Circs If On the stat cat and its value are kept in aged circulation records Statistical Category Editor Welcome tina Enter the name OPAC Visibility Required SIP Field Create a new statistical category Vendor Owning Library BW M On off Type Copy On off amp Archive with Circs On off amp Mo SIP Export SIP Format Create new statistical category Focus Location BW Patron Statistical Categories To edit or view information about an entry click on the entry in the drop down menu Some sip fields may only be valid on one stat cat Entries using them may not save Statistical Categ ae Whistler egacy TYPE public Library md Whistler sis Public Library Off SIP Off Adult Fiction hd Add Edit Off SIP Off Baker amp Taylor r Add Edit Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 465 3 Toadd stat cat values click Add in the line of the s
504. st Mame Middle Mame m i NEN cor c RUNE creer a in c MU Marie Active No 1953 01 21 Johnson Anna Mhyrt Alet Mo 1950 08 09 Johnson Betty M No 1956 08 30 Johnson Bubba 7 an No 2006 03 23 Johnson Catherine v Birth Date No 1959 03 23 Johnson Donna Joan Created On No 1980 05 28 johnson jane sue Credit Mo 1975 08 15 Johnson Jimmy Day Phone No 1946 07 19 Johnson Jock Email No 1900 09 09 Johnson johnny jackson i No 1920 07 02 Johnson Johnson E No 1996 01 01 Johnson Jojo J Expires On No 1945 06 16 Johnson jon craig V Family Name Mo 1996 05 31 lohnson Lydia Beatrice w First Name Mo 1932 05 31 Johnson Lyndon Bernard Group No 1978 12 08 Johnson Maggie Tula 3 Login Mame Mo 1990 08 02 Johnson Octavius Jerome i Mo 1970 08 02 Johnson Octavius Jerome ee No 1958 11 08 Johnson Patricia Lynn Net Access No 1991 03 08 Johnson Rachel Irene Other Phone No 1954 07 05 lohnson Fichard Prefix Mo 1973 11 25 Johnson Richard Howell Record ID Mo 1900 01 04 Johnson Roscoe French ue j Returns Claimed No 1977 12 14 Johnson Rosie Mae EO Le 2nn1 na 223 nhnran T Dianald suffix Save Columns Copy Restore Natural Order When data is displayed in columns you can click and drag them add new ones or remove them You can also sort data in a column by clicking on the column header After customizing the display you may save your changes for future sessions under that login by right clicking anywhere in the display area and choosing Save Columns from
505. stem if they need to Click the drop down arrow to select your option from the list With these attributes Operating System ANY Computing Platform ANY ze Mac 7 Select the pickup location from the dropdown list Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR a sid Reserve Selected Reserve Any Existing reservations for Pringle Jen BTE BNELF This user has no existing reservations at this t BFN Cancel selected BTR Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 388 8 If there are multiple copies of the resource and any item listed is acceptable click Reserve Any To choose a specific item select it and then click Reserve Selected Go Back Reload Go Forward Laptop 98723000112235 98723000112234 98723000112233 98723000112244 98723000112236 Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selected Re 9 A message will confirm that the action succeeded Click OK on the prompt 10 The screen will refresh and the reservation will appear below the patron s name at the bottom of the screen 1 Patron Pringle Jennifer 2 Reservations Go Back Go Forward Debug Laptop need this resource 98723000112235 Between 98723000112234 6 16 2011 98723000112244 and 98723000112236 6 16 2011 With these attributes Operating System ANY Computing Platform ANY v Choose the pickup library for this reservation BPR Reserve Selec
506. support team Select Admin Local Administration Hold Policies 2 Select your library from the drop down list after Context Org Unit Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 433 The first screen provides a summary view of each hold rule for your library and more detail can be seen by clicking on the individual entries Hold Policy Configuration New Context Org Unit BELK Back Next Filter Strict U R MARC pea ue U trict ser item equest n i e ax User v ou Home Request Chup Owning Cic Permisd orcu MARC MARC pip eC Active Hold Holdable poe lt Holds includes Gvining Referent mansit Permis matches Library EN xd psi Library Group ype Level Protectii Frozen Lib g g Group Rule u Public Public 1 1 False BELK BELK Library True True 20 False False False Library Library Users Users E 2 False BELK BELK PLNon True True 10 False False False Library Residen PL O 3 False BELK BELK Restricti True False 0 False False False Library Access PL BC 1 4 False BELK BELK True True 5 False False False Library OneCare The Hold Policy for each library or library system defines who can place how many holds on what types of materials It also defines whether the library s materials can be used to fill holds picked up at other libraries Hold policies are usually defined by a combination of the Requestor Permission Group eg Public Library Users Public Library Staff etc item attributes like circul
507. t The Hold is behind Circ Desk checkbox is used to identify those patrons who request to pick up holds at the circulation desk when your library s holds are kept in a public area It works together with the library setting Hold Behind Desk Pickup which can be set up by local system administrators See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu If a valid postal code is given the city province and country information will be automatically retrieved Based on your library s policy patron address may not be mandatory If you do not want to record the address you need to delete the field by clicking the red cross sign beside Address A Blank Address field will result in an error when attempting to save the record The consortium decides the shared list of profile groups patron profiles but individual libraries can choose to use only a subset of the available options There is no link between patron profile group and the Juvenile checkbox If your library uses the Juvenile checkbox you need to deselect it when moving a patron from the juvenile profile group to the adult profile group There is a default Account expiration date of 3 years for all profile groups except PL New User which has an expiration of 3 months It shows up once a profile group is selected You can always change it using the calendar widget or typing a date If your library does not control Internet access via patron accounts you need not change the default value in
508. t Reports O Output 2 Click on Create a new Template for this folder Manage Folder Contents Manage Folder Circulation created by jeremybuhler Create a new report tram selected template Limit outputto 10 Ho items to display Chapter 27 Creating Templates 277 3 You can now see the template creating interface The upper half of the screen is the Database Source Browser where you view the available tables in the database the fields in each table and the available transforms for the selected field You select fields for your template here The lower half is the Template Configuration which displays your selected Displayed Fields and Base Filters and or Aggregate Filters in the template We will select the displayed fields for our template first So make sure Displayed Fields is selected The top left hand pane contains the database Sources drop down list This is the list of tables available as a starting point for your template Commonly used sources are Circulation contains circulation records that may be used for circulation statistics and overdue reports LS User contains patron records that may be used for patron reports and tem contains copy records that may be used for reports on collection or items with special status 1 Reports E3 Database Source Browser Sources Source Specifier Nullable Source Name Field Mame Data Type A Field Transform Output Type Enable nullability select
509. t Acquisitions Local Administration Copy Editor Copy Location Name First Workstation Administration Hotkeys Receipt Template Editor Set Search Preferences Toolbars For developers Chapter 12 Offline Transactions 129 2 Select the Printer Context Set the Offline context on each Evergreen workstation Printer Context Different printer settings may be configured for different contexts within the staff client such as circulation label printing etc If settings have not been made for a given context the staff client will fall back on the default context Default Receipt Label Mal amp Offline 3 After choosing Printer Context click Set Default Printer and Print Test Page and follow the prompts If successful test output will print to your chosen printer Normal Settings Test Print 1234567890 12345678301234567890 Set Default Printer and Print Test Page Download Offline Patron List It is best practice to download the offline patron list every morning on any computers that would in the event that the library goes to offline checkout This list contains blocked barred and expired patrons as well as lost cards and enables the Offline Module to respond with an error message indicating the patron status at check out time Select Admin Download Offline Patron List perator Change New Download Offline Patron List Offline Transaction Management Acquisitions Local Administrat
510. t Block can be modified or archived by using Modify Penalty Message or Archive Penalty Message on the above dropdown menu 7 An archived penalty message can be retrieved in the Archived Penalties Messages panel below Specify the time frame then click Retrieve Archived Penalties Archived Penalties Messages Start Date 55 93 2010 EndDate 25 93 2011 Retrieve A yuna Penalties Applied On Label Library Note A 3 14 11 1 02 PM Note no blocks BLP LL fdsfagfs t 2011 03 14 BLP LL 3 25 11 7 06 PM Alerting block on Circ Hold and Re BHH This is a block See Notes note in patron summary is not displayed for a note created on the Messages screen Alerts and blocks created on the Messages screen are displayed on the Alert screen Blocks created on the Messages screen blocks some circulation activities Staff with appropriate permission may override it System generated standing penalties are displayed on the Messages screen Based on your library s setting staff initials may be required when creating a Note Alert Block See Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 6 5 4 Notifications Evergreen may send email and SMS messages to patrons via Action Triggers Currently Sitka sends pre due and overdue notices via email and hold ready for pickup notices via both email and SMS An event is created when circulation or hold records meet the condidtions set up in the event definition When the event is processed a notice m
511. t Status by Colour Code Patron accounts are displayed with a coloured frame around the patron s name The frame colour conveys information about the current status of the patron account Patrons who have no outstanding fines overdue items or alert messages appear with a green frame 1 Patron sitka address Here are the possible background colours l everything in order no overdues no fines not expired etc Orange fines or overdue items but not exceeding maximum limits i patron exceeds one or more of maximum fines check out or overdue limits defined in Group Penalty Thresholds 4 Yellow there is an alert message under Message button on the account there is an alert in body of patron record on the account Dark grey gt account is inactive Chapter 6 Patron Records 42 Light grey account is expired D In the above list the colours with higher numbers take precedence For example a patron with a single overdue item would be orange unless they also had an alert message which would make them yellow A barred patron with overdue items and an expired account would be red patron is barred 6 4 Updating Patron Records Updating Patron Information Renewing Library Cards Marking Library Cards Lost Resetting a Patron s Password Barring a Patron There are some tasks you need to do in your daily operation with the patron records e g updat
512. t Unit Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB Issuance Label Distribution V 2 No 7 2014 Jul Cdn Living V 2 No 4 2014 Apr Cdn Living V 2 No 5 2014 May Cdn Living V 2 No 6 2014 Jun Cdn Living Item ID 22854 22851 22852 22853 2 Click on Refresh Stream ID 901 901 901 901 Date Published 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 2014 04 30 2014 05 31 Date Expected 2014 06 30 2014 03 31 2014 04 30 2014 05 31 Date Received 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 Notes Item Dist Sub 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number Jan 14 Jun 14 Jan 14 Jun 14 Jan 14 Jun 14 Date Last Edited m 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 9407077 V 2 No 1 2 2014 06 02 Unit ID Contents 3 To receive items click the Receive radio button Items that have yet to be received are displayed in the top half of the screen the Recently received items are displayed in the bottom half of the screen Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Author Bib Call Canadian Living Record 1 of 907 Start Previous Serial Control Items Units Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library Search Results Edition Pub Date eceive TCN Database ID BIN 30382305 30382305 Record Owner O Adv Receive Bind Show All Refresh Created By admin Last Edited By admin Last Edited O
513. t and scroll down to Billing Line Item This table contains all the billing line items such as each day s overdue fines and the grocery bills created manually The records in this table are viewable on the Full Details screen on Bills in the staff client Billable Transaction with Billing Location this table contains the summary records of billings and payments Most information in these records is displayed on Bills or Bills History screen The records are updated when either Chapter 33 Commonly used tables and views in Evergreen database 318 the related billings or payments are updated Transaction ID is the bill ID It is also the circulation record ID for circulation bills Transaction Start Time is the grocery bill creation time or circulation checkout time Transaction Finish Time is when the bill is resolved Payments tables and views Payments ALL contains all payment records When a lump sum of payment is made on the staff client one or more payment records are created depending on the number of bills it resolved or partially resolved One bill may be resolved by multiple payments Payments Brick and mortar contains all payments made at the circulation desk Payments Desk Cash Check Credit Card payment Payments Non drawer Staff Forgive Work Goods Patron Credit payments A view is a virtual table which contains records meeting defined requirements The fields in a view can be from one or more tables Before you use a view for y
514. t it is usually best not to anticipate how a search term will be stemmed For example searching for gold compass does not return for golden compass because the search does not recognize gold as a stem of golden Truncation Use the wildcard asterisk at the end of the word to truncate search term Order of Results By default the results in the Sitka catalogue are listed in order of relevance similar to a search engine like Google The relevance is determined using a number of factors including how often and where the search terms appear in the item description and whether the search terms are part of the title subject author or series The results that best match your search are returned first rather than results appearing in alphabetical or chronological order In the Advanced Search screen you may select to order the search results by relevance title author or publication date before you start the search You can also re order your search results using the Sort by dropdown list on the search result screen Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 240 21 5 Search Results The search results are a list of relevant works from the catalogue If there are many results they are divided into several pages At the top of the list you can see the total number of results and go back and forth between the pages by clicking the double arrow on top or bottom of the list or click the page number to go to that page directly Here is an example
515. t microsoft com kb 154780 http technet microsoft com en us ie bb2 195 17 aspx Locking down Windows This is possible but it requires extensive editing of the registry If you want to lock something specific and you do not have a system technician available it s possible to search the Internet for advice and follow the instructions you find i e disable control panel There are also numerous commercial software packages that do this Linux Implementing Linux on your search stations is also an option There are various ways that you could do this If you use a LiveCD it still could be possible for the patron to eject the CD and reboot the computer A better solution is to install Linux to the hard drive This solution provides the maximum lock down but is the most difficult to implement Here are some of the easier ways to get at this solution http webconverger org Chapter 53 Managing Internet OPAC Stations 489 Chapter 54 Evergreen System Requirements Evergreen runs smoothly on most modern computers with a good internet connection To ensure your system is ready for migration here are a few tips and minimum requirements Internet Connectivity The Evergreen staff client requires persistent connectivity to the Evergreen servers to function Most internet traffic uses moments of brief connectivity rather than a persistent connection so it is not unusual when experiencing connectivity issues to notice it in the Evergree
516. t to all upper lower case They are only available for the text data type Substring This transform can be applied to filters not display fields It matches the given value with a continuous string of characters in the field For example if a given value is 123 and the match is with a call number field call numbers like 123 34 ANF 123 34 JNF 233 123 etc will be in the result list Substring is only available to text data type First Continuous Non spacestring The first word or string of numbers and or characters until the first spacing in a field is returned by this transform For example this transform will return E from text E DOR E 123 etc This transform is available to the text data type Count This transform counts the records found Though you can count by any field very often id field is used Count is available to text integer id money and timestamp Chapter 34 Template Terminology Data Types Transforms and Operators 321 Count Distinct This transform counts the number of records with unique value in the field If two records have the same value in the field they will be counted once only A typical example of using Count Distinct is counting the number of active patrons who borrowed items at a library Each patron can be counted once only but he she may borrow multiple items Transforming the patron id in circulation record with Count Distinct will result in the required number S
517. t you receive the copy two days prior to the publication date then enter 2 days into this field Owning Library MPL start Date 2013 12 31 End Date 2014 12 31 Bibliographic Record Entry Expected Date Offset Cancel Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 339 9 Click Save 37 2 2 Create a Distribution You must create a distribution to indicate Which branches should receive copies of a serial e The number of copies that should be sent to each branch To create a distribution 1 Click on the Distribution tab 2 Click on New Distribution Subscription Details Clone Subscription Batch Item Receive Cabtions and Patterns Issuances View Edit Notes Refresh Grid New Distribution Delete Selected Display Legacy Receive Unit Summary Unit Label Unit Label Hoking Ba Grouping Record Entry Template Method Prefix Suffix 3 Complete the Distribution information e Apply a new label to the distribution Example Magazine Title or Branch Code MPL Click Apply If you are creating multiple distributions multiple copies of each issue the name of the label becomes more important Multi branch libraries setting up a subscription at a system level will want to use the branch code as the label to easily determine which copy is sent to each branch The holding library is filled in by default and is the library to which you attached the subscription Display Grouping should be set to Enumeration Receive Unit
518. taloguing Display Item F5 Scan or type in the barcode Once the item is displayed highlight it Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 162 To edit the copy record click Actions for Cataloguers Edit Item Attributes The item will be loaded into Copy Editor Edit the fields that you want to and click Apply after each editing Click Modifiy Copy when all editing is done To edit the call number click Actions for Cataloguers Edit Volumes The call number is loaded in a popup window Edit then click Modify to save T Volumes ac Volume Editor v Auto Merge on Volume Collision lt No Change Jrrm8 fasgainn Suffix Classification Prefix Label e wecammkm n Owning lib Evergreen does not allow two identical call numbers for one title one library You will be prompted if an existing identical call number is detected You may select Auto Merge on Volume Collision checkbox to avoid the prompt The copies will be put under one call number Since copies and call numbers are separate records their owning circulating library may be different Item s circulating library should match where it is usually located 2 You may edit an item and or its call number after finding it on the catalogue Simply click Edit beside the barcode on the record details screen Record 1 of 604 Start Previous Search Results 3 Call Number T Age Hold Active Create Location C Not Barcode Shelving Locat
519. tat cat Type in the value then click Create new entry button Confirm on the prompt Repeat these steps if you need add more values Focus Location BW Copy Statistical Categories Patron Statistical Categories To edit or view information about an entry click on the entry in the drop down menu Some sip fields may only be valid on one stat cat Entries using them may not save Statistical Category Name Whistler No ep Public Library m add SIP i Enter the value of the new entry BW Legacy Type rupem Off on pees Off Adult Fiction Add Edit Whistler No Vendor Public Library Off Off SIP Off Baker amp Taylor Add Edit 4 Clicking Edit on the above screen allows you to change the stat cat name and or its properties 5 Copystatcats The image above shows some examples of copy stat cats You would see these when editing items in the Copy Editor also known as the Edit Item Attributes screen You might use copy stat cats to track books you have bought from a specific vendor or donations Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 466 This is what the copy stat cat looks like in the Copy Editor W Copies Copy Editor Identification Status Checked 1 copy put Barcode 1017461593 1 copy Creation Date 2008 06 17 1 copy 1 copy Last Edit Date 2011 03 17 1 copy Last Editor Tina 1 copy Easy 1 copy BECT KAM 1 copy Owning Lib Call Number BKCT KAM E 1 copy DOR Copy Num
520. tch Z39 50 searches Spine and pocket label Set the preferred font family for Text LSA font family spine and pocket labels You can specify a list of fonts separated by commas in order of preference the system will use the first font it finds with a matching name For example Arial Helvetica serif Spine and pocket label Set the default font size for spine Number LSA font size and pocket labels Spine and pocket label Set the preferred font weight for Text LSA font weight spine and pocket labels You can specify normal bold bolder or lighter Spine label left margin Set the left margin for spine labels in Number LSA number of characters Spine label line width Set the default line width for spine Number LSA labels in number of characters This specifies the boundary at which lines must be wrapped Spine label maximum Set the default maximum number of Number LSA lines lines for spine labels Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 441 Table 48 2 Circulation Auto extend grace periods Auto extending grace periods extend for all closed dates Auto extending grace periods include trailing closed dates Block hold request if hold recipient privileges have expired Cap max fine at item price Charge fines on overdue circulations when closed Checkout fills related hold When enabled grace periods will True False LSA auto extend By default this w
521. ted Reserve Any Existing reservations for Pringle Jennifer Type Resource Start time End time Laptop 98723000112233 2011 06 16 17 30 2011 06 16 18 45 Cancel selected To create a reservation from a booking resource You need to know the barcode of the patron when you create a reservation for him her from a booking resource 1 From the Booking menu select Create Reservations Create Reservations Pull List Capture Resources Pick Up Reservations Return Reservations Chapter 45 Using the Booking Module 389 Choose a Bookable Resource Type and click Next or enter the barcode of a catalogued resource and click Next 1 Reservations Go Back Go Forward Choose a Bookable Resource Type Ereader Laptop Projector Room Video Connector Qr Enter the barcode of a cataloged bookable resource To reserve an item that is not yet registered as a bookable resource find it in the catalog or under Display Item and select Make Item Bookable or Book Item Now there For non catalogued resources a screen showing the Bookable Resource Type and the items associated with the type will appear For catalogued resources the title and item will appear 1 Reservations Go Back Go Forward Laptop 98723000112233 Between 98723000112235 98723000112234 and eee 987230001 12244 With these attributes need this resource Operating System ANY Computing Platfom ANY v R
522. tem is checked in Evergreen will match it with the holdable copy list to identify pending holds Items with non holdable status are not on the list Items currently not on the holdable copy list will be not used to match with holds The holds targeter matches new holds requested within 24 hours with available copies on the holdable copy list every 15 minutes For old holds requested more than 24 hours ago the holds targeter matches them once every 24 hours at roughly the hold request time Newly created items or items of which the status was just changed from a non holdable to a holdable status such as from Missing to Reshelving are not on the holdable copy list until midnight after the next holdable copy list has been re generated Using the checkin modifiers Retarget Local Holds and Retarget All Statuses will check all the potential holds picked up at the checkin library that may be filled by the copy instead of just the holdable copy list These checkin modifiers are sticky and Sitka support recommends they be turned on unless your library belongs to a resource sharing group which means the item may be used to fill a hold picked up at aother library branch In such cases staff may re target the hold on top of the holds queue on the Catalogue gt View Holds screen 9 6 Holds Shelf List and Clearing Shelf Expired Holds 1 Items with Ready for pickup status are on the Holds Shelf List The Holds Shelf List can help you manage items on
523. tems Record Import Failures 0 Limit to Records with Import Errors Delete Queue Items in Queue 0 Copy To Bucket Items Imported 0 nS Export Queue As Records Per Page 10 v Page 1 Previous Next View MARC Matches P9 t Import ri of work Author of Language of s ICON ISSN Price Accession CN Value TCN Source Failure Time work work Number as es GIRL WITH THE DRAGON Larsson View MARC TATTOO Stieg 9781847242532 The girl with the dragon tattoo a 7 View marc Matches eee ee English 465 9780307269751 24 95 24 95 2008017771 bgsi 3051184 Cabgsi 1 from the Swedish by Reg 1954 2004 p Keeland Ld 2 Youcan view both incoming and existing match records if any to determine which record to use The links in View MARC column lead you to the incoming records while records in the Matches column link to existing records A blank in the Matches column means no match record has been found 3 Click the blue coloured View MARC link to view the incoming record You may edit it before importing by clicking Edit Once editing is complete click Save Changes Click Return to go back to the Record Queue screen MARC Record Return Edit LDRO4129cam a22002538a 4500 001 103549899 003 SITKA 005 20110418203835 0 008 10061452011 nyu b 001 0 eng 010 ta 2010023588 020 ta 0231153074 020 ta 9780231153072 040 ta DLC te DLC 05000 ta RJ240 tb 0385 2011 09000 ta 615 372 O32 2011 1001 ta Offit Paul A 2
524. ter an identifier for a bibliographic record 103230208 Find Record 5 Choose an Issuance 6 Click Next 7 Select Create Units for Receiving Items Title Canadian gardening Fulfilling Subscription 1916 ZSP A 1 1 15 12 31 15 Issuance 2015Jun Org Unit Barcode _ Auto generate None None None Receive Selected Items Create Units For Received Items Chapter 38 Receiving Serials 356 8 Enter Barcode Call Number and Price Title Canadian gardening Fulfilling Subscription 1916 ZSP A 1 1 15 12 31 15 Issuance 2015 Jun Org Unit Barcode C Auto generate ZSP A 32659814526212 None June 2015 ZSP A 32659814526213 None June 2015 ZSP A 32659814526214 None June 2015 Receive Selected Items Create Units For Received Items 9 Click on Receive Selected Items 10 Click on Start Over to receive the next subscription or close the tab Chapter 38 Receiving Serials 357 Chapter 39 OPAC 39 1 Searching for Serials in the OPAC Searching for serials is the same process as searching for other items in the catalogue Detailed search instructions can be found Chapter 27 Search the Catalogue 39 2 OPAC Serials Display Bibliographic records that contain serials information will have a new section in the OPAC called Issues Held The Issues Held tab contains an expandable holdings statement that details each issue in your collection Reco
525. that you first mark the destination record In some cases you may also need to first create a volume record Co op support recommends you read through the process first before starting as each scenario has different characteristics Transferring volumes When you want to transfer all items under one call number volume to another title or another branch under the same title you may use Transfer Volume Evergreen will transfer both call number and all copies under it to the new title or branch Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 177 1 Find the destination or target record and go to Holdings Maintenance Highlight your library or branch right click and select Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination Or you may click Actions for Selected Rows Mark Library as Volume Transfer Destination rd ia Add Volumes Mark Library as Volume Trasfer Destination Holdings Maintenance Add Items Whistler Public Library Edit Volumes how Voh Showltems Hide Empty Libs Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number ASTEKA Sitka Delete Iterns Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library ABBGVL Interlink Delete Volumes ii BW Whistler Public 0 lt gt Request Item Mark Item Damaged 2 Find the volume record you need to transfer on Holdings Maintenance Highlight it right click and select Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library Holdings Maintenance Whistler P
526. the branch depending on search scope selected 21 2 Advanced Search You can access the Advanced Search by clicking Advanced Search on the Sitka catalogue homepage or search results screen The available search options are the same as on the homepage but you may use one or more of them simultaneously If you want to combine more than three search options use Add Search Row button to add more search input rows Chapter 21 Search the catalogue 235 Advanced Search Numeric Search Expert Search Search Input Keyword w Contains And Title w Contains And y Author w Contains Add Search Row Search Library Sort Results Powell River Public Li y Sort by Relevance LJ Limit to Available LJ Group Formats and Editions Search Filters Format Language Audience All Audiobooks English Adolescent All Books French Adult Books e audio e General Books electronic Athapascan Juvenile Literary Form Publication Year Shelving Location Comic strips A lls Audi Ficti Dramas Essays Fiction not further specifi Sort Criteria By default the search results are in order of greatest to least relevance See OPAC Order of Results In the sort criteria box you may select to order the search results by relevance title author or publication date Group Formats and Editions This checkbox is at the bottom line of Sort Criteria When it is checked all formats and editions of the same title are group
527. the list you want click on Save Changes Manage Routing List X Reader acqadmintest Burns Christine MDB 2 X Reader sitkaserials Serials Sitka MDB 3 X Department Technicial Services Stan are a aS Ste rc EL E J Reader barcode O Department Add Save Changes 43 2 Serials Batch Receive QD In order to view and print the Routing Slip you must receive your serials by Serials Batch Receive l Click on Actions for this Record 2 Select Serials Batch Receive Chapter 43 Routing 373 3 Make sure Create Units for Received Items 1s checked Title Canadian Living Fulfilling Subscription 1284 MDB 1 1 14 1 1 16 Choose an Issuance V 2 No 9 2014 Sep v Create Units For Received Items 4 Choose an Issuance from the drop down menu 5 Click on Next Chapter 43 Routing 374 6 Fill in the required information Barcode Enter or Scan the item barcode Circ Modifier Select the appropriate Circ Modifier Call Number Enter a Call Number Note Enter a Note Optional Copy Location Select the Copy Location Price Enter a Price Optional Routing List Make sure this box is checked e Receive Make sure this box is checked Title Canadian Living Fulfilling Subscription 1284 MDB 1 1 14 1 1 16 Issuance V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Org Unit Barcode i i Routing List Receive Auto generate Apply magazine v MAG CL SEP 2014 Magazine sh
528. the values in a selected MARC tag and subfield for the whole collection is possible And the bibliographic records can be limited by a selected value of a MARC tag and subfield These templates are in Bibliographic Records folder Bills and payments You can find the templates listing the details of various kinds of payments made in a selected time period and a template listing bills with negative balance Hold reports Holds related reports are in this folder including reports for holds that have been long time outstanding requested some time ago but not filled yet cancelled or have no eligible copies to be filled There are other templates that count the total number of holds placed or fulfilled within a time span and the hold count per title for popular titles Inventory The two templates in nventory folder list items based on whether the item showed up being scanned on shelves or returned in the library while the inventory was taken The result of the Inventory un scanned items are the potential missing items Library setting and policy related reports Find them in Library Configuration folder Other folders If your library uses the Acquisitions Module or the Booking Module you may find related templates in the relevant folders Chapter 32 Shared Templates in SITKA templates 304 Custom Templates folder If you open this folder you will see a subfolder for your library federation with sub subfolders for your library and oth
529. ting the Item s Due Dal acci aenda dir Gata evi adds aka da onto acies acc a 65 7 4 Marking Items Lost Claimed Returned and Claimed Never Checked Out 67 TEE en SECAR a E E EP 70 720 MOU belt S tmm 72 Pur Ne COCO OGM SOM E E E 77 O rS UC Fl MUG r TTE 80 Bite TIU vs Groce UT m rU 80 CN I ly NO NOTTE a 80 SERES ea EEE Immer 83 Sitka Evergreen Training Manual iii 8 4 Voiding NI EET DET 85 ie Adding ING WOOO BIlS RTT TT EEO EEEO EN EEEE EEEE 85 8 6 Srl Mni BUM ETE TERES 88 MN aic NT IT S LOL STU UOLUIT 89 SI nie OTT 91 Odes He AGING miel o TTE TT Tm 91 92 Managing miele OI ETT Tm 98 BONIS UMSO EE UIT 106 SENE Capd ONS assin A E E ER E E EE 110 9 5 Find Another Target for HoldS aie ccecgeccecsmasercganuenrneeseeictee ce acctemassectueesee met tadeeccenasecenimadieeeeenousene 112 9 6 Holds Shelf List and Clearing Shelf Expired Holds ccccscccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeneeees 1138 DO MOIS M ETOILE aspere Ure E VV n am Peduc tua ERU MEO OMEN PME ER PNEL E NE IN MM MOE 115 10 1 When will an item go In Transit sstatcdnindecmuatantatuonenntdina cdasuda edasekduadusuiubcdazid ind dadwivie duse cabida 115 10 2 How to receive In transit TOTIS ooaccesncndateersa eese rt Educ oci di pa tao Ep uet e emn lee a
530. ting the sole copy on a MARC record are not affected by how you delete the last copy You may also delete copy records by utilizing buckets The advantage to this method is that you can keep a record of items deleted by not emptying or deleting the bucket Please see Section 17 2 Working with Copies in a bucket for more information It is Sitka best practice to review status and owning library of items to be deleted Co op support recommends you do this by configuring the column picker see Column picker to display status field and owning library field If an item is not in an ideal state for deleting for example checked out you should not delete the item until that status is resolved Mis scans can result in another library s item presented on your screen Confirming owning library is correct will prevent errors Careful review of your screen for duplicate scans is also recommended Transferring your last copy on a bibliographic record to another volume record on a different bibliographic record will also automatically delete your original volume record due to the Sitka wide configuration mentioned above If your volume and copy were the last holdings attached to the original bibliographic record the bibliographic record is also deleted upon item transferring Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings 182 Delete a volume record without copies attached Occasionally you may want to delete a volume record without copies attache
531. to avoid any conflicts with overnight processes 11 2 Basic Check Out 1 Patron scans their barcode Maple Library Self Check Please log in with your library barcode ZSP456724 2 Optional Patron enters their account password Library Self Check 3 Patron scans the barcodes for their items OR Chapter 11 Self Check 123 Patron places items one at a time on the RFID pad Maple Library Self Check Please enter an item barcode ZSP3002 4 Items will be listed below with a check out confirmation message ke Maple If a check out fails a message will advise patrons to see staff Library Self Check Please enter an item barcode zsP3001 Unable to check out item SP3001 Please see staff 5 Patron clicks Receipt to print a checkout receipt and logout OR Chapter 11 Self Check 124 Patron clicks Logout to logout with no receipt Check out Receipt Logout View Items Out View Holds View Details 11 3 View Items Out 1 Patrons are able to view the items they currently have checked out by clicking View Items Out Check out Receipt Logout View Items Out View Holds View Details Chapter 11 Self Check 125 2 The items currently checked out will display with their due dates Using the Print button patrons can print out a receipt listing all of the items they currently have checked out Barcode Z5P3023 ZSP3021 ZSP3001 ZSP3022 ZS
532. to select checkbox Auto overlay On order Cataloguing Copies Evergreen will overlay the items having matching circulating library and On order status If you load items for multiple branches or a branch other than your working location you need to select checkbox Use Org Unit Matching in Copy to Determine Best Match too QD The option Auto Overlay In process Acquisitions Copies should only be used if you are working with on order line items created in the Acquisitions module For more details please see Auto Overlay In Process Acquisitions Copies 9 Once the records are imported the display is back on Queue Summary screen You will see the mport Time column is filled in for the selected records The imported record id is displayed in Imported As column A record can be imported only once Sitka has profiled certain fields primarily 9xx fields to be automatically stripped when records are imported through Batch Import The default fields that are stripped are 906 923 925 936 948 955 959 963 Please contact Co op support if you would like to see additional fields automatically stripped 18 2 4 Managing Queues Click Cataloguing MARC Batch Import Export The default screen is Import Records Click Inspect Queue tab to manage and view existing queues used in MARC Batch Import Under nspect Queue you can click on an existing queue to view and import records that have already been queued for importing or simply view
533. trainer a jockey and a bunch of high scho 2 33294001515774 EE TEC 3 33294000868448 636 132 GAMM Juvenile Non Fiction Show Status Transfer to Specific Volume edciEdit i RE Attributes f Delete All from Catalogue Chapter 17 Copy Buckets 190 Location 1 Juvenile 1 copy Non Fiction DVDs Juvenile Easy Readers 1 copy 1 copy BPR 3 copies Holdable Circulate Yes 3 copies Yes 3 copies Unset 3 copies Owning Lib Call Number BPR J636 1 CALL 1 copy BPR DVD Drea 3431 BPR LEV 3 1 copy 1 copy 3 copies lt Unset gt Normal Fine Level Normal 3 copies Circulate as Type Unset 3 copies BOOK DIGITAI DISC 2 copies 1 rany 4 displayed Identification Status Available 2 copies Checked out 1 copy Barcode 33294000074062 1 copy 33204001594431 1 copy 33294001477801 1 copy 2007 11 03 2 copies 2008 02 05 lcopy Creator 2 copies sylvia 1 copy Last Edit Date 2008 11 22 lcopy 2009 11 16 1 copy mmm Xm Tm A gt 6 Chapter 17 Copy Buckets lt Unset gt 3 copies d The Copy Editor window opens Note all the barcodes different call numbers and shelving locations are Miscellaneous 3 Library BPR Supp lt Unset gt BPR test lt Unset gt No 3 copies Deposit Amount 0 00 3 copies Price 3 copies 7 00 OPAC Visible 0 00 1 copy 1 copy
534. trieve record on Item Status screen Chapter 7 Circulation 75 2 je Date 711 2013 11 59 PM Location General Coll Alternate View Actions for Cataloquers Actions for Selected Items Status Reshelving 3 The item record is displayed in the Copy Editor Eer i os os oe OO Copy Editor Identification Status Reshelving 33294001770940 Creation Date 2012 03 12 Active Date 2012 05 04 Creator leah Last Edit Date 2012 05 25 Last Editor Chapter 7 Circulation 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy nimiae Fiction 1 copy Circulation Library BPR 1 copy Owning Lib Call Number BPR J Coll 1 copy Copy Number lt Unset 1 copy Circulate Yes Holdable Yes Age based Hold Protection 6 month among multi branch Loan Duration Normal Fine Lewel Normal Circulate as Type lt Unset gt Circulation Modifier book Once item is displayed highlight it and select Actions for Selected Items Edit Item Attributes ES Copy to Clipboard Add to Item Bucket Add to Record Bucket Show in Catalogue Show Holds on Bib Show Item Details Show Last Few Circulations Show Triggered Events Make Itern Bookable Book Item Now Request Item Find Originating Acquisition aie Rem eerie Edit Ite 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy 1 copy Volumes Per Bib Reset lt Unset gt 1
535. trings to choose from Sitka support has created pattern codes for many popular periodicals magazines Whenever possible please use the pattern codes created by Sitka support If your periodical magazine is not in the list contact Sitka support or create a pattern using the Pattern Code Wizard 37 2 4 Edit Captions and Patterns If the publication pattern changes you will need to delete the current caption pattern information and enter a new caption pattern as well as anew dummy issuance 1 Click the arrow beside the subscription 2 Click the Captions Patterns row beneath the subscription 3 Click the row with the Caption Pattern 4 Click in the Pattern Code box and paste the new pattern code or click on the button for Pattern Code Wizard to create a new pattern string 5 Click on Modify Caption and Pattern 6 Add an Issuance as per Section 37 2 6 Create an Issuance 7 Make predictions as per Section 37 2 7 Generate Predictions Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 342 37 2 5 Pattern Code Wizard 1 Click on the Pattern Code Wizard button 2 Enumerations e To add an enumeration check the box adjacent to Use enumerations A field for the First level will appear Enter the enumeration for the first level A common first level moon enumeration 1s volume vol or v e Click Add Enumeration e A field for the second level will appear Enter the enumeration for the second level A com
536. ts Distributions Subscriptions Claims Subscriber MDB Bren Del Win Centennial Library Search Results TCN Database ID BIN 30382305 30382305 Record Owner O Adv Receive Bind Show All Refresh Created By admin Last Edited By admin Last Edited On 2008 11 16 1 45 PM Actions for this Record Actions for Selected Rows Holder MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MDB MADE Issuance Label Distribution V 2 No 8 2014 Aug Cdn Living V 2 No 9 2014 Sep Cdn Living V 2 No 10 2014 0c Cdn Living V 2 No 11 2014 N Cdn Living V 2 No 12 2014 De Cdn Living V 3 No 1 2015Jan Cdn Living V 3 No 2 2015 Feb Cdn Living V 3 No 3 2015 Mar Cdn Living Item ID 22855 22856 22857 22858 22859 22860 22861 22862 SON HU R WN y Showing Recently Received Current Working Unit Auto per Item Stream ID 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 901 Date Published 2014 07 31 2014 08 31 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 Date Expected 2014 07 31 2014 08 31 2014 09 30 2014 10 31 2014 11 30 2014 12 31 2015 01 31 2015 02 28 eL D Date Received Notes Item Dist Sub 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Call Number Date Last Edited R 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 2014 06 02 LAS Des Unit ID Contents A 0 Alerts Receive Move Selected 1 Set Curren
537. ts Click the arrow beside Circulation and choose Hold in the dropdown list Click Apply 4 To view all events with any status you may remove the Event State filter by clicking the red X beside it Triggered Event Log patron specific Dek Reset Selected Events Cancel Selected Events Print Selected Events Print All Events Show events at and below Powell River Public Libran i mt Name Um Run Event State m Circulation is x Time is Title Author Circulation SITKA 3Day sendEmail 2013 05 0 invalid 34418001 caught coben hark Add Row Woo Courtesy Notice IslandLink 3 Day n4 44420n24 pe E 2 Courtesy Notice SendEmail 2013 12 1 complete 34418002 the glass room cleeves ani slandLink 3 Day T 244 424 TC e E 3 Cimdosy Malice SendEmail 2014 01 1 complete 34418001 pray for silence castillo linc IslandLink 3 Day o donqa d 244421 Y tllo f F 4 Courtesy Notice SendEmail 2014 01 1 complete 34418001 gone missing castillo linc 4 n b 5 You may add more filters by clicking Add Row 6 You may reset events with complete status to generate a new notice by selecting the checkbox in front of the events then clicking Reset Selected Events 7 You may cancel events with pending status to stop the notice generation by selecting the events then clicking Cancel Selected Events Chapter 6 Patron Records 52 Action Triggers are used for but not limited to
538. ts with active holds cannot be deleted e Bills Accounts with unpaid bills are flagged but may still be deleted if deleted the bills are voided If deleting a duplicate record for an active patron please see Section 6 6 Merging Patron Records l To delete patron accounts start a new tab by File New Tab or CTRL T Click Delete Patron Account under Admin News Announcements Admin Help Evergreen 2 Sitka training hras dashboard manual Delete tr Policy and best Q LE 2 Practices 74 Submit view help Q Sitka Ideas mr Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 483 2 Login with a Local System Administrator username and password Please Login sitkatest ALII L Logis 3 Enter one or more accounts to delete one per line then click Submit Enter Patron Barcodes Please enter list of patron barcodes to be deleted one per line Sitkatest 23488000002 132 28590000343301 2000001325000 Delete cards only Sua 4 The confirmation screen appears if deleting multiple accounts this may take longer Accounts that cannot be deleted because of active holds or circulations are flagged and the check boxes greyed out Accounts with outstanding bills are un checked by default but can be selected to void the fines and proceed with deletion Click Delete Checked Patrons to continue Confirm Deletions To Be Deleted Use the checkboxes to indicate
539. u intended below 178532 The Da Vinci code a novel from Maple Library MPL AHL 78532 Frogs from Ace Hill Library BRL AHL BRB178532 The lion king from Bayndge Branch BRL BRB CBB1 8532 Harry Potter and the deathly hallows from Cadillac Book Bus BRL CBB Mone of the above f If the barcode is not a 14 digit codebar barcode you may wish to re barcode the item or issue the patron a new library card to prevent future pop ups caused by that barcode Patron Barcodes The barcode completion pop up will appear when a patron barcode is scanned in the following places the Barcode field in the Retrieve Patron Check Out interface Circulation Check Out Items the Barcode field in the Check Out section of the patron account The library setting Load patron from Checkout must be set to True e the Place hold for patron by barcode field in the staff client catalogue f The Barcode Completion pop up will not appear when a patron barcode is scanned into the Barcode field in the Patron Search interface Item Barcodes The barcode completion pop up will appear when an item barcode is scanned in the following places the Barcode field in the Check Out section of the patron account Chapter 7 Circulation 78 e the Enter Barcode field in the Check In interface e the Barcode field in the Item Status interface Chapter 7 Circulation 79 Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 8 1 Circulation vs Grocery Bills There
540. u may delete the MARC record See Deleting MARC records for more information Chapter 18 Adding Bibliographic Records to the Database 213 Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records The appropriate title information displayed on OPAC such as format icons for text moving pictures and sound relies on correct MARC coding in the leader and 007 and 008 fields as do OPAC search filters such as publication date item type or target audience Bibliographic records matching and de duplicating also rely on correct MARC coding and consistency in use and content in particular MARC tags so the ability to edit and manage MARC records is key to maintaining database integrity Evergreen allows you to edit MARC tags sub fields and indicators as well as an easy entry box to edit parts of the leader and 008 fields on a built in form called MARC Editor Besides it also provides a text based editor which allows you to easily add or remove tags and or edit the fields But you need to pay close attention to the position of the tags indicators and the spacing required to preserve the record structure 19 1 Editing MARC Records 1 To edit a MARC record retrieve it on the catalogue Once record is displayed on Record Details screen select Actions for this Record MARC Edit Record Summary Add Volumes View MARC Title Mick Jr Dora the explorer phonics reading program Edition TCN 103337909 Author Lee Quinlan B Pub Date
541. ublic Library Show Volumes Showltems Hide Empty Libs Refresh Location Barcode Volumes Copies Call Number Circulation Library ASITKA Sitka 4 BBGVL Interlink a BW Whistler Public LEBEN JDVD TV DOR 1 JDVD TV DOR 33987000455906 JDVD TV DOR BW un C uu M m 3 Confirm the transfer and click Transfer Transfer items from their original volumes to ZSP A s volume following record and change their circulation libs to match ayer D Record Summary View MARC Title Edition TCN tnrd31215 Author Pub Date 2011 Database ID 109013770 Bib Call Record Owner 4 Refresh the screen to see the change if not automatically done Chapter 15 Editing and Maintaining Holdings Add Items Edit Volumes Mark Volume as Item Transfer Destination Transfer Volumes to ae Marked Library Delete Items Delete Volumes Request Item Mark Item Damaged Mark Item Missing 178 To do the transfer step you may also find the item s on tem Status F5 screeen Click Actions for Catalogurs Transfer Volumes to Previously Marked Library Both call number and copies will be transferred to the previously marked destination You may transfer mulitple records at one time by highlighting all of them If the destination title branch has a volume with the same call number label the copies will be merged into that volume Holds under the title volume or copy will not be transferred with the holdings They need to b
542. uld not be marked as spam by either patrons or staff The overdue email notice templates can be customized at the federation or library level Please contact Sitka Support for customization Chapter 52 Courtesy Overdue and Hold Notices 486 Notices delivered by paper Evergreen generates a PDF file of overdue notices and emails the file to you to be printed and distributed to patrons These notices are created and sent daily An empty PDF file means that there is no notice for the day due to no item filling in the overdue category You will still receive the empty file If you are not receiving daily PDF files please contact Sitka support To set up paper overdues you need to provide Sitka support with the following information the receiving email address for the PDF file to be sent to Ensure you inform Sitka support if you need to change the receiving email the intervals at which you would like patrons to receive notices The standard intervals to choose from are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 or 10 weeks after the item becomes due The intervals define when a second third or fourth and so on letter is sent out The 1 and 2 weeks overdue notices are sent to patrons without email address only From the 3 weeks overdue notice onwards it is sent to all patrons A final notice which includes billing information can be set to coincide with the system automatically marking long overdue items to lost See Final Notices for information o
543. und Add Billing Full Detailsle Receipt Up Follow steps 3 5 in Section 8 5 Adding New Grocery Bills to select billing type fill in amount and note if required then submit the bill Chapter 8 Bills and Payments 87 8 6 Bill History 1 To view a patron s bill history retrieve the patron record and go to the Bills screen and then click History Bill History Total Owed 24 66 Refunds Available 0 00 9 7 ene Total Checked 24 66 Credit Available 0 00 payment Received 506 Annotate Payment See Distribution Apply ite est ESI Actions for Selected 2 On Bill History you can view all bills or bills incurred in a specified time frame You can use the calendar widgets to specify the Start Date and End Date and then click Retrieve Transactions Bill History Calendar Widget uu Payments i A Selected Billed 3 00 Selected Paid 3 00 Start Date 27 03 2010 5 EndDate 27 03 2011 y Retrieve Transactions Balance Owed Finish Start Total Billed Total Paid Type Title 2 22 11 3 18 2 4 11 3 55 3 00 3 00 grocery 2 22 11 4 26 2 17 11 2 0 10 00 10 00 circulation Frogs 3 17 11 11 0 2 17 11 1 4 0 00 0 00 circulation Awesome Amphibians 2 17 11 1 3 17 50 circulation FROGS AMD TOADS 2 22 11 3 3 4 00 1 00 grocery 3 2 11 1 52 5 00 0 00 circulation Dora s big birthday adventure 3 10 11 11 1 00 0 00 circulation Ski key 3 11 11 9 49 3 10 11 1 4 5 0
544. ve and display any bibliographic record then choose Actions for this Record Add to Bucket Record Sof16 gat ereus men end semrchRentte _ Gagak Reload Go Forward SEARCH All Formats FOR authorxhutton amp amp tiehors Keyword m Sika EZ Advanced Search Refine Your Original Search Recent searches a Search Results ShoewingBern 150 18 Prefered libran Bowen Istand Public Librany A Preis Mood Fr Horse written by Juliet Clutton Brock special photography Jerry Young Karl Shone Ciyiton Brock Juliet author Young Jer photo Added Author Shone Marl photo added Ahorn Available copies Current holds Delete Record a 7 copies at Sitka current holds with amp total copies Undelete Record Judd Volumes Park os Tithe Hold Transfer Destination Tranier All Tat dic Record details ISBN 0760756537750 nter Habs Physical Description 72 p col B maps 28 cm 1 CD ROM digital 4 344 in Mark as Target for Conjoined Items Publisher Hiv York DE Pub c2008 8 Select Add to New Bucket Record Buckets Copy this record into which bucket Dog Books ee Add to Selected Bucket Add to hz Bucket 9 Name the bucket and click OK The results are the same as creating a bucket using the steps above with the difference being the new bucket created on the fly now has a record in it The page at http training sitka bclibrary ca says D What would you lik
545. ve cards and patron accounts This is done outside patron s records and a small batch of barcodes records can be deleted at once The table below describes a few scenarios where this tool may be used Scenario Action An active patron lost a card and was issued a new one using Delete the lost card optional Replace Barcode A patron is no longer active and their account should be Delete patron account removed completely An active patron has more than one account Merge the accounts Choose the card number that you want to keep as the lead record See Section 6 6 Merging Patron Records 51 1 Deleting Inactive Cards When a patron s card is marked lost and a new barcode is assigned the old barcode remains in the Evergreen database as an inactive card Deleting lost or inactive cards is optional Patrons cannot check out items or log into the OPAC with an inactive card but the lost cards can be used to retrieve active patron data in the staff client Whether a library routinely deletes inactive cards is a matter of local policy l To delete inactive cards start a new tab by File New Tab or CTRL T Click Delete Patron Account under Admin News Announcements Admin Help Evergreen B Sitka training SE dashboard m manual account 5 S Practices Sitka ea 7 Submit view help Sitka Ideas iuuat Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 481 2 Login
546. ve mandatory fields and fields with a default value If your library policy specifies other required fields this button will not retain them You are recommended not to use this button when registering a patron Blank mandatory fields and fields with a value in the wrong format may result in a Form is invalid error when saving the record For libraries using phone number as patron s password once the Day Phone field is filled the last 4 digits of the phone number will be automatically copied over to password fields to replace the random number Enter the patron s middle name into the record if you can This will help distinguish among patrons as the database grows Juvenile flag Each library can determine an age threshold of juvenile patrons If the date of birth in a patron s record falls in the juvenile category the Juvenile checkbox is automatically selected If your library does not record patron s date of birth you may manually select Juvenile checkbox It 1s optional Email Address If required mulitple email addresses can be put in separated with comma or semicolon OPAC Staff Client Holds Alias is used to replace the patron s name on the hold slip The Receive Overdue and Courtesy Emails checkbox allows patrons to opt out of receiving courtesy and overdue email notifications If this box 1s un checked patrons will not be emailed courtesy and overdue notifications Patrons are able to set this themselves as well through My Accoun
547. ve unchecked Check s Required if the survey should be mandatory for all patron registration and update Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 469 Check Display in User Summary to make survey answers visible in patron records in Other Surveys e Surveys can not only start from a future date 4 A summary of your new survey will appear Type the first survey question in the Question field then click Save Question amp Add Answer Survey questions are multiple choice Survey ID 9 End Survey Mow survey ID J Name Newsletter Description Opt in for receiving newsletter fror Owning Library Bw z survey Stat DateTime 14 31 2009 survey End Date Time 12 30 2010 Display in User Summary Is Required v OPAC Survey Foll Style Cancel Save Questions amp Answers Questor pa ou want to receive newslettdl Save Cluestio ie Add Answer CERE 5 Enter possible multiple choice answers and click Add Answer Each question may have as many answers as you like Questions amp Answers 3uestion Do you want to receive newslette Delete Question amp Answers save Changes ANSWED yas Delete Answer Save Changes ANSWE ng Add Answer i ny l Cuestion save Question amp Add Answer 6 Repeat the steps above to add as many questions and answers as you wish When finished click Save then Go Back to return to the survey list Chapter 48 Local Administration Menu 470 7 Your new survey will appear in the Survey
548. ving lacation Ms xx Raw Data Alter Display Header Change Transform Remove Selected Field Change Field Hint 17 Return to the Sources pane to add more fields to your template Under Sources click Circulation then select Check Out Date Time from the middle Field Name pane Database Source Browser la ENT TET Sources Source Specifier circulation a BU l Mullable Source Name Circulation Default Base Transaction Default Billing Totals Default Check In Library Default Check In Staff Default Circ Duration Rule Default El Circulating Item Default Age Hold Protection Default Call Number Valume Default Circulating Library Default Circulation Modifier Enable nullability selection Chapter 27 Creating Templates Field Name Base Transaction Billing Totals Check In Date Time E Check In Library i Check In Staff ES Circ Duration Rule Circ ID Circulating Item Circulating Library Circulating SEaFF Data Type link money timestamp org uni link timestamp nrg unit link v Field TransForm Age Count Count Distinct Date Day Name Day of Month Day of Week Day of Year First value Hour Hour of das Output Type Mon Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate Man Aggregate Man Aggregate Man Aggregate Man
549. vity Meters Global Font and Sound Settings Default Minimal User Permission Editor Current For developers Disable Hotkeys None Clear Workstation Default Toolbars Set Workstation Default to Current e Default inlcuding all hotkeys e Minimal including those hotkeys using CTRL key None excluding all hotkeys Chapter 5 Getting Started 23 2 Go back to the above menu Click Set Workstation Default to Current To clear the existing default click Clear Workstation Default You can use the Toggle Hotkeys button included in some toolbars on top right corner to switch your selected Hotkeys for the current login session on or off It has the same effect as when you click Disable Hotkeys on the Hotkeys menu Configure Printers Use the Printer Settings Editor to configure printer output for each workstation If left unconfigured Evergreen will use the default printer set in the workstation s operating system Windows OS X Ubuntu etc Evergreen printing works best if you are using recent hardware specific printer drivers Select Admin Workstation Administration Printer Settings Editor 2 Select the Printer Context At a minimum set the Default and Offline context on each Evergreen workstation Repeat the procedure for other contexts if they differ from the default e g if spine labels should output to a different printer If the Offline context is not set receipts wil
550. want to display the terms such as year and month next to the chronology caption in the catalogue then check the box beneath Display in holding field To include additional levels of chronology click Add Chronology Caption Each level that you add must be smaller than the previous level After you have completed the chronology caption click Next Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 344 Previous Use chronology captions Each caption must be a smaller unit of time than the preceding caption Caption Include this actual word in the caption First level TER LJ Second level Month O Add Chronology Caption E 5 Compress and Expand Captions e Select the appropriate option for compressing or expanding your captions in the catalogue from the Compressibility and Expandability drop down menu Choose the appropriate caption evaluation from the drop down menu Choose the frequency of your publication from the drop down menu For irregular frequencies you may wish to select Use number of issues per year and enter the total number of issues that you receive each year e Click Next Chapter 37 Creating Serial Records 345 Previous Compressibility and Expandability Can compress or expand Caption Evaluation Captions verified all levels present 8 Select frequency Monthly v O Use number of issues per year 6 Regularity Information f needed check box fo
551. which patrons you want to delete Barcode 2488000002152 Patron has 1 active circulations and 0 active holds sitkatest Patron has 0 active circulations and 2 active holds 2000001323000 Ready to delete this patron E 28500000343301 Patron has 3 75 in unpaid fines Delete Checked Patrons Name Doe John sitka test Presley Elvis Doe Jane Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 484 5 The deletion report lists successfully deleted accounts Deletion Report Patrons Deleted 2000001323000 ago90000345301 Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 485 Chapter 52 Courtesy Overdue and Hold Notices Patrons with email addresses in Evergreen receive pre due email reminders three days before items are due Evergreen also generates email and optional print notices for overdues and holds Customized overdue letters are also available There are three email addresses on the notices besides the recipient s email From Reply To and Errors To The From address has to be the BC Libraries Cooperative s email address The Reply To and Errors To addresses are from the Sending email addresses for patron notices setting in the Library Settings Editor You must specify a address in this setting This ensures patron replies are directed to the email of your choice Bounced emails are also directed to this email
552. with a Local System Administrator username and password Please Login sitkatest ALII L Logis 3 Enter one or more inactive cards to delete one barcode per line Ensure the Delete cards only box is checked then click Submit Enter Patron Barcodes Please enter list of patron barcodes to be deleted one per line 12345676 202 90007498062 Delete cards only al ll 4 After a few seconds the confirmation screen appears for multiple cards it may take longer It is not possible to delete a patron s primary card Review patron data select the card s you wish delete then click Delete Checked Cards Confirm Deletions To Be Deleted Use the checkboxes to indicate which cards you want to delete Barcode Name 12345678 Buhler Jeremy Ready to delete this card 28490007402552 sitka test This is the patron s primary card Please give the patron a new card before deleting this one Delete eenean Chapter 51 Deleting Inactive Cards and Patron Accounts by Sitka s In house Patron Deletion Tool 482 5 The deletion report lists successfully deleted cards Deletion Report Cards Deleted l2s45676 51 2 Deleting Patron Accounts Deleted accounts remain in the Evergreen database for reporting purposes but are no longer accessible from the staff client The deletion tool checks the following before deleting any account e Open circulations Accounts with items checked out cannot be deleted Active holds Accoun
553. ws holds to be picked up at the item s circulating library only for x months while the latter at libraries sharing the same parent with the circulating library e g all branches of a library system or all single branch libraries within a federation In general use the former if you are a single branch library and want to restrict holds to your own library or if you are a branch of a multi branch library system and want to keep the holds at your own branch Use the latter if you are a multi branch library system and 160 allow items to fill holds picked up at all your branches but not to go out of your system Floating This functionality must be configured by Sitka If Sitka has not configured floating groups for you leave the field blank Loan Duration Indicates whether an item uses the Short Each circulation modifier Normal or Long loan duration attached to its shelving location may circulation modifier or shelving location set up have three loan durations in the circulation policy corresponding to these three values Use Normal if only one loan period is used Please contact Co op support if you need multiple loan durations for one circulation modifier shelving location Fine Level Indicates whether an item uses the Low Each circulation modifier Normal or High fine level attached to its shelving location may have circulation modifier or shelving location set up three fine levels correspondin
554. xample 1970 01 31 Primary Identification Type Email Address Daytime Phone Home Library Whistler Public Library Main Profile Permission Group Privilege Expiration Date Update Expire Date Internet Access Level Unfiltered User Settings Receive Overdue and Courtesy Emails Default Hold Pickup Location Default Phone Number Default SMS Text Number Privacy Waiver Add Person Default SMS Text Carrier Collections Exempt Hold is behind Circ Desk Hold Notification Format Phone v Email SMS 3 When complete click Save at the right top corner of the screen It is good practice to give patrons a piece of paper providing your OPAC s URL the patron s username which by default is their barcode number and the system generated password or the last four digit of his her phone number depending on your library s policy Patrons can login to their account on the OPAC with their user name and password They are encouraged to change their password The new password must be in a format with more security features at least 7 digit long combining numbers and letters Both username and password are case sensitive Patrons can also change their username to something easier to remember case sensitive in the My Account option in the OPAC Chapter 6 Patron Records 40 Tips for registering patrons All fields with a yellow backgroud and exclamation mark are mandatory Show Only Required Fields button limits the display to the abo
555. xt extension The barcodes should be in a single column without any extra space anywhere Chapter 47 Sitka s Inventory Procedure 413 2 Start a new empty file and continue scanning about 50 items and save the file Name your files in sequence e g inventoryl inventory2 Repeat this step until all items are scanned in the frozen area 3 On Item Status F5 screen of Evergreen use the Upload From Files function to check in all items in all text files See steps 4 6 in Method 2 47 2 Generating reports and search list There are two templates in SITKA templates gt Inventory folder on the Report Interface Inventory scanned items by shelving location counts items that have Last Edited Date after a specified date which could be the date when you started taking inventory The numbers are broken down by shelving locations This is the report that counts the items that have been checked in out or otherwise edited including marking missing or lost during the inventory period Inventory un scanned items lists items having Last Edit Date before a specified date in specified shelving locations and having specified status By using the date when you started taking inventory the shelving location s in which you took inventory and the on shelf status such as Reshelving Available On Hold Shelf etc for these specified values the output of this report is the search list Items on this list should be on shelf but they were not checked
556. y Hide Fields 4 The prompt for a patron alert or note shows up Click Alert if you wish to add an alert Type in the content and your initial Click Apply Note Block Item Z5P3009 Duck tn the truck returned without disc 2 Initials 5 Notepad will open for you to edit and print a letter note for the patron Windows Command Prompt window will open It will be closed once Notepad is closed Chapter 7 Circulation 64 The item s status is set to Damaged once it is marked as missing pieces When the missing piece is returned check in the item You will be prompted of the item s status and the copy alert message You need go to the patron and item record to remove the alert messages a Override Checkin Failure Exceptions COPY_ALERT_MESSAGE Missing disc 2 The requested copy has an alert message attached COPY BAD STATUS D amaged The given copy is not in a standard circulation status Override Force this action Pre catalogued items can not be marked as missing pieces Currently you need to send In Transit items back to the owning library to mark it as missing pieces 7 3 Renewal and Editing the Item s Due Date Checked out items can be renewed if your library s policy allows it The new due date is calculated from the renewal date Existing loans can also be extended to a specific date by editing the due date or renewing with a specific due date Renewal 1 Retrieve the patron record and
557. y Transit Date falis be Retrieve Transits Transits Actions for Selected Transits Transit Destination Transit Send Time Transit Source Request Date EF 2 21 11 2 45 PM The Boer War i 1 28 11 10 06 AM Pirate latitudes a n BP 1 25 11 10 31 AM The deader the bett BP 1 19 11 11 36 AM World without end BP 1 19 11 9 39 AM 33294001589670 World without end BP 1 19 11 9 38 AM It is good practice to pull Transit Lists when sending or receiving items to and from other branches Reconciling the list against the physical items helps ensure your shipments are complete Chapter 10 Items in Transit 119 10 5 Aborting Transits Under certain circumstances aborting transit may be required But aborting transit may affect data integrity or affect the accuracy of statistics Sitka Support strongly suggests libraries be cautious with this function The general guideline is that the sending libraries may abort a transit before sending out items while receiving libraries never abort a transit but check them in instead Aborting a transit from within the Transit List screen 1 From the Transit List screen select the transit s you wish to cancel 2 Select Actions for Selected Transits Abort Transits Actions for Selected Transits Barcode Title Transit Destination Transit Send Time Transit Copy to Clipboard testjamestzl test BPR 2 21 11 2 45 PM BTE Add to Item Bucket 33794001435759 City of the dead BPR 1 30 11 4
558. y in the catalogue with the movie icon and searches filtered by Item type video recordings would retrieve this record Black Beauty videorecording Warner Bros presents a Robert Shapiro production a Caroline Thompson film produced by Robert Shapiro Peter MacGregor Scott written for the screen and directed by Caroline Thompson Thompson Caroline Added Author Bean Sean Added Author Thewlis David 1953 Added Author Carter James L Added Author Sewell Anna Black Beaute 1870 1878 Added Author Available copies Current holds 1 copy at Sitka 0 current holds with 1 total copy 19 3 Format Filters and Format Icons Format Filter Groups and Format Icons are configured at the Sitka level Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 220 e item type Type is Leader position 06 e bib level BLvl is Leader position 07 item form Form is 008 position 23 vr format is 007 position 04 sr format is 007 position 03 The format filter is used by the OPAC to allow staff and patrons to limit their search by material format The following table shows the fixed fields associated with each format filter value Table 19 1 Format Filters Label Fixed Fields All Audiobooks item type 1 All Books item type a t AND bib level a c d m but NOT item form a b c f ic item type i AND item form o q s Audiobooks physical item type 1 AND sr formt l f Books electronic item type a t AND bib_level
559. you need to preserve the local Chapter 19 Editing and Maintaining MARC records 222 information in the record to be overlaid and want to import the record first and copy over the local information on the merging screen The full record may have been added to the database by another Sitka cataloguer or you may have created a MARC record in the database yourself Any volume and copy records or holds associated with the brief record will be transferred to the full record upon merging 1 Create a bucket for the records you wish to merge see Section 20 1 Creating Record Buckets for detailed instructions In the examples below the bucket is named Horse Books 2 Identify records to be merged and add them to the bucket see Section 20 2 Adding Records to Buckets Retrieve the bucket by selecting Edit Record Buckets or Cataloguing Manage Record Buckets 4 Click Merge All Records Sel VOR hme 5 Select one record as the Lead Record which would be the better quality full record and click Merge In this example record 100879689 is the Lead Record Note that if you wish to edit the lead record e g copying over local information from the non lead record you may select the Edit Bib radio button to do it before clicking Merge 1 Record Buckets 2 Record Merging Merge these records Select the lead record first Merge Cancel Record Summary View MARC Title Author

Sitka Evergreen Training Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents